ã€ŠTome of the Soulã€‹


 Chapter 1

    The long winding road through the country of Gorteau had finally reached its end. There was nowhere else to go of any notice, save for the fishing village located on the coast. Completely isolated from the rest of the country, the residents of Harlest village enjoyed a peaceful, quiet life, free from the complications and strife of other cities and villages. There were visitors, of course, but they were few and far between, not to mention strangers.

    This visitor, however, was well-known, and warmly expected. He was born here, after all, and the people of Harlest looked kindly upon locals. No matter how long he was away, or how far he went, they knew that, at his core, he was one of them. He may set out on journeys that would take him to incredible places and put him at the center of incredible events, but Samuel Bragg was still one of them.

    A strong gust of wind hit Samuel as soon as he crested the final hill, and he put one hand in front of his face to block out the sudden burst of sunlight that accompanied it. It really was a beautiful day, he thought. Perfect for a journey, and even better for the end of one. For it had been a long trip, even with someone of his stamina. His feet were sore, and he longed to get off of the, particularly with some delicious hot food to fill his stomach. Coffee to wash away the exhaustion too, he thought.

    With a watering mouth and a sigh of satisfaction, he continued down the hill. Now that he was this close to the end of his trip, he was suddenly filled with a desire to reach his destination as quickly as possible. Breaking into a light jog that whipped his dark blue robe behind him like a flag, he grinned widely. Not quick enough, he decided. With a spin, he flourished his hands in an intricate gesture and jumped into the air.

    The wind around him faltered, then turned, actually giving him some lift as he flew higher away from the round. The wind sent his long hair into a crazy dance, and he let out an exhilarated laugh as he soared over the plains. Lone trees and outlying farm buildings flashed past under him as he flew, and several farmers glanced up from their work, letting out shouts of shock at the sudden appearance of a flying man. Samuel grinned as he passed, giving a cheery wave to those who recognized him and called him out by name.

    He was spotted by those villagers that were out of their homes and began to let himself drift down as he approached the village center. He let the spell end just as he was about ten feet from the ground, and simply dropped the remaining distance, landing in a smooth crouch. The villagers gave a muttered series of gasps, then a few clapped as they realized he was uninjured. Then a few, the ones who had interacted most with him on previous visits, surged forward to shake his hand, or else clap him on the back.

    ¡°Welcome back, lad!¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ve been away a while, son!¡±

    ¡°Welcome back, Samuel!¡±

    ¡°Thanks, everyone,¡± Samuel said, his trademark grin widening. ¡°It¡¯s good to be away from the city for a while. I have a lot of catching up to do.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll say,¡± One of the elderly women in the village said. Samuel turned towards her with raised eyebrows. ¡°Sera¡¯s been going spare. You were supposed to be here a week ago, you know.¡±

    ¡°Yes, yes,¡± Samuel said patiently. ¡°Unfortunately, life in Milagre can be a bit chaotic. I had to deal with an issue before I could set off.¡±

    The issue, of course, had been with the College, the only place in Gorteau where young mages could get an education. It was the best place to go if you had the magical gift, but it was hard to reach for those who lived in outlying villages. Accordingly, and with the invention of a new spell some two years ago, Samuel had created an infrastructure that allowed faster travel between two faraway points. He¡¯d called them teleportation circles and though he tried to come up with a better name, it¡¯d stuck.

    As one of the Archmages, Samuel had felt the urge to do what he could to better the school. He¡¯d started small with his published works, Tome of the Body and Tome of the Mind, which were detailed dissertations on the mysteries of magic. The books had been received better than he¡¯d expected. He had no way of knowing that being the first Champion of the God of Knowledge had given him good credit, and others, from fresh apprentices to seasoned masters, were keen to hear his thoughts on the subject.

    Samuel¡¯s three years in Milagre, leading up to and well after the first major attack that the capital city had ever seen, had been marked with many changes. First had been the social sweeping of corrupt noble figures, an effort he¡¯d taken a leading part in. Certain rights for the common folk had been neglected for too long, leading to them launching a mass revolt against the capital. That could never happen again, the Crown had decided. So, with the other leaders¡¯ assistance, the King and his advisors began several campaigns to improve life throughout the nation.

    ¡°Speaking of Sera,¡± Samuel said, scratching the back of his head. ¡°I should go see how she¡¯s doing. If you¡¯ll excuse me.¡±

    The crowd parted willingly for him, letting him pass. Several people called their farewells, happy to see him alive and well. He¡¯d acquitted himself well outside the city, and they¡¯d all heard the rumors of what he¡¯d been up to. He was a near-legendary figure already, and traveling storytellers told of his strength in battle, his wisdom in leading the College, and above all, his efforts to help the innocents. It did them all proud to see a local with such an aura of popularity about them.

    It wasn¡¯t a short trip from the village center to The Nook Inn, the small tavern that his childhood friend Sera owned and operated. When it had begun, of course, a man named Thomas had run the establishment, and Sera had been his prized employee. She¡¯d always been loved by the village, a pretty and friendly face to bring them delicious food and excellent drinks. Now, over a hundred years later, her great-grandson, named after the original owner, did most of the work for the elderly woman.

    As he pushed the door open and was greeted by the usual smells of cooking food, Samuel noticed that the main taproom was emptier than usual. There was a young woman sweeping the floor, obviously a new employee, and a dancing fire in the hearth. A lone musician, enjoying a break from his travels, sat in one corner, idly strumming a lute. Compared to the bustle of his arrival and the chaos he was used to in Milagre, it was a nice kind of peace.

    ¡°Welcome to The Nook Inn,¡± The young woman had approached him. ¡°What can I help you with today?¡±

    Seeing as he didn¡¯t recognize the girl, he assumed that she thought he was an outsider. Well, in a way he was, he thought. ¡°Just some coffee and food, please. Is Sera or Thomas around?¡±

    ¡°Mistress Sera is resting at home,¡± the girl said at once, her eyes slightly narrowed. One of the villagers who viewed outsiders as suspicious, he realized. ¡°I don¡¯t know where Master Thomas is. How do you know them?¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s an old face around here,¡± a voice said. Both Samuel and the girl turned, and saw Thomas coming from the back holding a large crate. ¡°He¡¯s practically family, Margaret.¡±

    ¡°Oh,¡± Margaret said, clearly thrown. She turned back to Samuel with a hasty apologetic bow. ¡°I¡¯m so sorry, sir. I¡¯ll get you that coffee right away.¡±

    ¡°Sit down, Samuel,¡± Thomas offered, nodding his head at the bar. ¡°Welcome back. Sorry about Margaret, she¡¯s still learning.¡±

    ¡°Not a problem,¡± Samuel said cheerfully. ¡°It¡¯s a nice break from how I¡¯m usually treated.¡±

    ¡°You mean she didn¡¯t immediately start groveling?¡± Thomas guessed. When Samuel let out an exasperated sigh, he chuckled. ¡°Fair enough. Still, you don¡¯t treat family that way. Coffee¡¯s on me, as usual.¡±

    Samuel gave a brief wave to indicate his gratitude, and Thomas set about opening the crate and moving the dusty bottles to a shelf behind the bar. A new order of wine, probably from Jyrok, Samuel thought. There were several wineries in and around the cliffside village to the north. Now that the Dagorra Forest was a safe location for travelers, trade between Jyrok and Harlest was blooming.

    Margaret returned with a steaming cup of coffee, and placed it before him. ¡°There you are, sir. I hope it¡¯s okay. I¡¯m still new to brewing coffee.¡±This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.

    ¡°Call me Samuel,¡± he said, taking a sip. It was watery compared to the way Thomas made it, but he didn¡¯t say it. Instead, he smacked his lips in appreciation, and she smiled with pleasure. ¡°How is Harlest faring? I know it was a hard winter.¡±

    ¡°Oh, there are always hard winters,¡± the girl said, and Samuel nodded in agreement. ¡°We fared better than expected, though the lack of fish coming in was troubling.¡±

    ¡°I hope my food shipments made a difference,¡± Samuel muttered. ¡°I wish I could have done more.¡±

    Margaret¡¯s face brightened at once. ¡°You¡¯re the one who sent those? They helped a great deal! But I thought some Archmage sent them.¡±

    She didn¡¯t add that his shabby, travel-stained appearance was a far cry from the fine immaculate robes worn by the typical Archmage. He understood the missing sentence all too well, however, and had to hide a smile behind his coffee mug. No matter how long he lived, he¡¯d always enjoy the surprise when people found out that he wasn¡¯t like other nobles. He disliked the formality and crusty attitude that was expected at court.

    ¡°I¡¯ll take that as a compliment,¡± Samuel said. ¡°What¡¯s on the menu today?¡±

    ¡°Just a simple rabbit stew,¡± Margaret said at once, looking towards the kitchen. ¡°Thomas just finished a big pot. Would you like some?¡±

    ¡°Yes please,¡± Samuel agreed, quite enthusiastically. Thomas had a gift when it came to rabbit stew. He fished two silver coins out of the purse at his side. ¡°Here. Keep the coffee coming, and set me up a room, please.¡±

    She slid the coins off the counter with a graceful curtsy, then disappeared into the kitchen. Before she returned with the food, Samuel felt a familiar presence enter the range of his mana, and turned just in time to see the front door open. There, framed by the mid-day sun, was a crouched figure wrapped in a thick woolen shawl. She teetered into the taproom, looking at him with an irritable sort of happiness he knew all too well by now.

    ¡°So now you decide to show your pale face,¡± Sera said crankily. ¡°What took you so long, Sam?¡±

    ¡°Oh, cut me some slack,¡± Samuel said, setting his cup down and moving over to her. ¡°I have a lot of work to keep me busy in Milagre. You know that.¡±

    She scoffed loudly, the very image of stubborn anger, but still allowed Samuel to wrap his arms around her. She patted his back in turn, and when they separated, she ruffled his long hair. With a swift beckoning gesture, she led him over to the fire, where two comfortable armchairs were always set. He helped her into one, then plopped down across from her.

    ¡°I need your help,¡± Sera said at once. ¡°I don¡¯t know who else to turn to.¡±

    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Samuel asked at once, a nasty feeling in his stomach. Sera wasn¡¯t usually this grave.

    ¡°You know the rumors of war?¡± Sera asked. When Samuel nodded his understanding, she gave a long sigh. ¡°Well, an officer of the army came to the village two weeks ago, and told me that Thomas needs to go to Milagre to train as a soldier.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Samuel exclaimed in shock, actually leaning away from her. ¡°I haven¡¯t heard of any drafts happening. Are you sure he was an official?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not sure,¡± Sera admitted. ¡°But he had papers with him, Sam. I think it¡¯s real.¡±

    ¡°Let me check,¡± Samuel offered. He reached his right hand out, and out of thin air, a tightly furled scroll appeared. He quickly undid it, and spoke a quick message.

    ¡°Erik, I¡¯ve just heard about a draft in Milagre. Is this official, or should I be on the lookout for someone posing as a Crown officer?¡±

    ¡°Who is Erik?¡± Thomas had approached without them noticing. As a novice mage, he could shrink his mana and disguise himself from Samuel¡¯s senses. ¡°Also, I told you I¡¯d be fine grandmother. I don¡¯t want you making a fuss.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll do what I want, young man,¡± Sera snapped. ¡°You¡¯re not joining the army, not after what happened to your parents.¡±

    Thomas¡¯ parents, of course, had been drafted into a military when the boy was young. They¡¯d both lost their lives before they could return home. It was an understandable reaction to the news. Sera refused to see her great-grandson take on the same risk, but knew she couldn¡¯t do anything by herself. Samuel, on the other hand, was an Archmage and a noble, and had much more pull than she did.

    There was a brief flash of light in the air between them, and Samuel snatched the new scroll out. ¡°That was a fast response. He must be in his tower.¡±

    ¡°Greetings, Samuel. Unfortunately, the draft is official, and it can¡¯t be refused. Every able-bodied man and woman that is at least sixteen are required to participate in training. We suspect a war with the Mitene Union at any time, and need to be prepared.¡±

    ¡°See?¡± Thomas said, looking down at Sera. ¡°I can¡¯t refuse it. I have to do my part for my country. I¡¯ll be leaving at the end of the week, no matter what you say. You have Margaret to help you keep the inn going.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t want that bumbling idiot girl!¡± Sera growled. ¡°I want you, right where you belong. Sam, please tell me you can stop this.¡±

    ¡°I can¡¯t override the crown, Sera,¡± Samuel said sadly. As she turned her angry gaze towards him, he held up his hands. ¡°Please, just let me continue.¡±

    Her frown deepened, but she gave a short wave of her hand for him to continue. Taking a deep breath, he plunged on. ¡°Thomas has to participate in training. That much is already set in stone. But there is one thing I could do, which will keep him safe. Well, safer.¡±

    ¡°What might that be?¡± This time it was Thomas asking. He was doubtful. He knew that Samuel was a popular Archmage, but he¡¯d never seen any sign that the mage had any real authority.

    ¡°I¡¯ll train you,¡± Samuel said simply. ¡°I¡¯ll enroll you in the college, and name you my personal apprentice. You¡¯ll be safe for at least two years while you learn. Then, I¡¯ll equip you with better gear than the average warrior or mage.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s not a bad idea,¡± Sera said musingly. ¡°Chances are that any war could be over by the time he finishes training properly. But I can¡¯t afford to send him to mage school, Sam.¡±

    Samuel spread his arms wide. ¡°Do you really think I¡¯d try to charge your for his tuition? I mean, he¡¯s practically my great-nephew. No. I¡¯ll pay for everything he needs.¡±

    He leaned across the small gap between them, meeting his old friend¡¯s eyes, determined to show her his resolve. ¡°I promise, I will do everything in my limited power to keep him safe, Sera.¡±

    Sera scoffed again, but this sounded more genuinely amused than anything. ¡°You keep underestimating your potential, Sam. You have a lot more power than you like others to know.¡±

    ¡°So?¡± Thomas said, taking a few steps closer. His eyes were burning with enthusiasm at the new prospect before them. ¡°What do you say, grandmother?¡±

    Sera looked between the two of them, chewing her lip reflectively. She seemed to take an age to think it through. Finally, she let out a tired sigh, and sank further back into her chair. ¡°Fine. It¡¯s better than you becoming some unknown foot soldier. But I don¡¯t want to hear that you¡¯re getting yourself into too much trouble, or I¡¯ll march to Milagre and drag you back myself, Crown be damned.¡±

    Hours later, Samuel was standing in the small library that educated the young folk of Harlest, a notebook held in his hands.. It was the same notebook that the mages of Zaban had given him, and it was enchanted so that it had an infinite amount of pages. It was his most prized possession, of course, and he¡¯d already filled thousands of the pages in his scrawling writing. Flipping through pages of diagrams and obscure lines about magic he¡¯d encountered, Samuel finally found what he was looking for. The diagram for the teleportation circles that he¡¯d invented, while familiar, still took some time to create.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry that my visit is so short this time,¡± He said to Sera, who leaned against a wall nearby. ¡°I promise I¡¯ll be back soon, and we can spend more time together.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s fine,¡± she replied with a dismissive wave. ¡°As long as you bring my boy back.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll make sure to do that,¡± Samuel said with a smile, hugging her with one arm. ¡°Ready, Thomas?¡±

    Thomas nodded, a touch nervous. He had a large rucksack Samuel had provided slung over his shoulders, containing everything he¡¯d need to start at the College. He too reached out to embrace Sera, and the pair shared a quiet exchange of whispered words. When they broke away, both had tears in their eyes. Samuel turned away pointedly, and crouched down to start writing the runes for the circle. It took him about five minutes, with a few corrections.

    By the time he finished, Thomas was standing beside him, ready to depart. Samuel added the last rune, and narrowed his eyes against the bright flash of light that appeared as the circle charged. Ignoring the slight exhaustion that came with the mana he¡¯d used, Samuel rose to his feet. He pulled out a small crystal, and spoke into it.

    ¡°I¡¯m coming through the circle, Arthur.¡±

    Standing in the center of the circle of runes, he could feel the connection to its twin in Milagre, which was coming to life just then. The tricky part of the system was that a mage was required at both ends, and very few could manage the spell that activated them. In a few years, he was certain that he could streamline the process, but for now, it was enough.

    ¡°I love you both,¡± Sera said. ¡°Don¡¯t have too much fun in the capital and forget me, now.¡±

    ¡°No chance,¡± Thomas said. ¡°I love you, grandmother.¡±

    Samuel met Sera¡¯s eyes, and their shared history seemed to flow between them. Emotion welled up in Samuel¡¯s chest that seemed to close his throat, and he gave her a single nod. She understood what he wanted to say. They were old friends, after all. Then, with a brief gesture, Samuel activated the portal, and they vanished.

 Chapter 2

    The Market District of Milagre was as busy as could be expected. Dozens of people milled along the long street, completing their shopping for the day. They chatted amicably as they strolled, the sound of their voices mingling with the shouts of vendors nearby, tempting the shoppers to come and inspect their wares. Jewelers, blacksmiths, alchemists, and general goods merchants, they were all there to conduct business. Nothing out of the ordinary.

    Except, of course, for the small group of men tucked out of sight between two buildings on the southern end of the street. If anyone had spotted them, it would have been obvious that they were up to no good. Dressed from head to toe in thick black cloth to conceal their identities, and bearing several weapons, they were dangerous men. There were six of them in total, five grouped behind one who was obviously the leader.

    ¡°Chief,¡± one of them said, keeping his voice pitched low. ¡°Why are we attacking a brothel? Ain¡¯t there more gold in one of the stalls?¡±

    He was referring to the stalls that lined the main Market Street, where the most business was conducted during the day. It was rumored that Milagre¡¯s market drew in more than a thousand gold every day. The leader frowned, then threw his underling an angry look. He was a native of Milagre, and, with former experience with the King¡¯s Guard, he had a better understanding of the markets.

    ¡°No, you fool,¡± he hissed. ¡°Those bluejackets clear out the takings every hour, so there¡¯s never any real money on hand. Besides, we¡¯d never get away with anything we took. There¡¯s too many men for us there.¡±

    He turned his eyes back to their intended target, Divine¡¯s Blessing. It was a brothel, easily the most successful in the city. He¡¯d observed the stream of people that went in and out for nearly a month. Assuming they paid a gold per visit, then the thieves were looking at a potential take of about eight thousand royals. That was too much to carry, of course, but one of his men was a mage, and could conceal the money easily.

    Another of the thieves started to ask a question, but the leader held up one hand in a curt silencing gesture. His entire body was tensed, studying the movements of the crowd, and, more importantly, the armed guards that moved with it. Those men were on the lookout for trouble, mainly pickpockets and idiot robbers who would risk targeting one of the stalls. He had to make sure there was a big enough window for his men to slip through the crowd and enter the brothel.

    There! His raised hand swiped forward in an unmistakable command, and he walked forward briskly. He made no attempt to hide himself, knowing that such an action would only draw eyes and ruin the perfect camouflage that the crowd of people provided. He slipped between them without effort, unremarkable and mostly unnoticed. Behind him, his men copied his actions with less grace. Most of them were foreigners, or else raised in another part of the country and so didn¡¯t know Milagre as well as their leader.

    The door of Divine¡¯s Blessing opened with only the faintest of creaks. The inside smelled heavily of perfumes and scented oils, a cacophony of scents that threatened to overwhelm anyone. The leader ignored them, stepping clear past the doorman before his presence could be registered, and drawing the long curved sword at his waist. The very presence of the weapon seemed to hush all conversation around him. The women stopped flirting and cringed away. The customers stood rapidly, hands placed warily on their purses.

    ¡°Right,¡± the leader said. ¡°We¡¯ve got a simple request. We want all your gold, and silently now.¡±

    The doorman, who was armed himself, moved forward at once, hand reaching for the club at his waist. Before he¡¯d even made it two steps towards the leader, one of the other thieves stepped through the open doorway and struck him down with the hilt of his sword. The unfortunate bodyguard hit the worn planks without a sound, knocked cold. Then the last thief was across the threshold, letting the door close gently behind him. Nobody outside was any the wiser.

    The scene was still frozen, and the leader gave his sword a little spin. ¡°Surely you¡¯re not having so much fun you can¡¯t hear me. Gold! Now!¡±

    He directed the last two words at a nearby girl, raising his voice suddenly so that she flinched. But she¡¯d gotten the message, and immediately moved to obey him. She scooped up all the purses containing payments she could, and brought them over. The leader of the thieves snatched up the gold, laughing softly as the girl cringed away. The sound of jingling coins reached his ears, and the ears of his men.

    ¡°Good,¡± he purred, opening one to see the shine of silver and gold. ¡°It¡¯s a good start. Not enough, though. Keep it coming, now.¡±

    His men spread out around the room, ripping coin purses off of belts and threatening the men who protested. After the first refusal was rewarded with a heavy back-handed blow to the face with a steel gauntlet, the others were quicker to comply. All but one, the leader of the thieves noticed. One man, dressed in a dust-covered tunic and simple grey breeches, was glaring at the thief facing him, shaking his head stubbornly.

    ¡°This money¡¯s for my shop. I ain¡¯t given¡¯ a single copper to you bastards.¡±

    The thief in front of him raised a short, sharp dagger to his throat. ¡°You sure about that, baker boy?¡±

    The baker showed every sign of stern refusal. He didn¡¯t look the least bit afraid, the leader thought. As his underling rose the knife, ready to strike the man down, the baker refused to flinch away. Brave man. Pity he was a fool. The thief bared his teeth in a feral grin and brought the knife down.

    A cry of pain rang out in the stunned silence, making everyone, even the thieves jump. A man, unnoticed before now, was standing beside the pair. He had the thief¡¯s knife hand in a firm grip and was twisting his arm back with ease, a cruel smirk on his face. He was bare to the waist, wearing only a pair of black breeches. His muscles were thin and lean, but evidently very strong, as if he were a soldier of some kind.

    ¡°No, no, no,¡± the stranger said. His voice was eerily smooth and sibilant. It had a way of pulling the attention of everyone in the vicinity with its gentle hiss. ¡°I can¡¯t have you harm paying customers, now.¡±

    The thief wrenched desperately but was unable to break the man¡¯s grip. With a snarl, he yanked a second knife out of his belt and swiped at it. Nobody was quite sure what happened, but an instant later, the thief was stumbling away from the man, holding his obviously broken arm with the other, whimpering in pain.

    ¡°Count yourself lucky,¡± the strange man said, brushing back his long black hair with one hand. ¡°Usually that kind of pain costs you. You can keep that freebie, and leave now.¡±

    He looked to the leader of the thieves as he said the last few words, and the man took an involuntary half-step back as he caught the performer¡¯s eyes. They were the color of blood, and seemed to shine slightly in the dim lighting of the brothel¡¯s main room. Then he realized that he still had five fit men, and this fool was outnumbered.

    ¡°I think not,¡± he growled. ¡°You¡¯ll pay dearly for that, pretty boy.¡±

    The stranger seemed to take no notice of him at first, leaning towards another of the working girls. ¡°Rebecca, could you be so kind as to go get me my weapon? Don¡¯t worry, love. I¡¯ll get rid of these rude customers.¡±

    His even voice seemed to calm the girl a great deal. ¡°O-of course, Bora Bora. Thank you so much.¡±This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.

    Bora Bora? What a strange name, the thief leader thought. Then he felt a clammy hand clutch his heart. Surely not. It was a coincidence, he told himself. The Champion of Bahamut, the King of Dragons, was called Bora Bora. It couldn¡¯t be the same man facing him now. But even as the thought came to him, he registered another familiar feeling, that he¡¯d just made a horrible mistake. The job had gone wrong.

    The men behind him weren¡¯t so hesitant. Having no clue who the stranger was, they saw only a single, unarmed, unarmored man. They raised their weapons, and, before their leader could warn them against it, took a step forward.

    Bora Bora moved quickly to block their advance. He came in low, kicking one man in the knee and knocking him back. Then he kicked out higher, catching another in the chest and sending him flying back. He crashed through the front door in a shower of splinters, landing on the cobbled street outside with a grunt of pain. He didn¡¯t rise, and it was unlikely that he would for some time.

    ¡°I imagine you think you have the advantage here,¡± Bora Bora said casually, pacing forward like a lion. He moved until he was face to face with the leader, who made no attempt to attack. ¡°But you couldn¡¯t be more mistaken. I¡¯ll give you one more chance. Leave, while your legs still work.¡±

    The leader of the thieves immediately took another step back, cowed. This wasn¡¯t a man he wanted to fight. He stood no chance, and he knew it. ¡°Of course. I apologize, Lord Ciayol. I did not mean to cause you any inconvenience.¡±

    ¡°So you know my name,¡± Bora Bora said, his smirk broadening ever so slightly. ¡°I¡¯m flattered. Didn¡¯t expect to find me here, I¡¯d imagine.¡±

    The leader shook his head, and Bora Bora let out a quiet, chilling chuckle of a laugh. He saw the defeat and fear in the man¡¯s eyes. Good enough. He made a little beckoning gesture towards the ruined front door, and the leader of the thieves nodded understanding, dropping the coins as he hastened to obey. Bora Bora watched them depart in haste, shaking his head in faint amusement. He bent down to scoop up the coins.

    ¡°Terribly sorry for that interruption, fine gentlemen and ladies.¡± Again, his soft voice soothed everyone around him. ¡°I apologize for the sudden draft as well. Hector, if you please, alert the Kings Guard to what has happened. And find a craftsman to fix the door within the hour.¡±

    Another of the brothel men, a little sturdier and less comely, nodded in understanding and tugged a tunic on. He hurried out the door after the thieves, all of which were gone from sight now, made a sharp left, and went down the market street. Bora Bora let out a quiet sigh, then turned to the unnerved customers, his arms and smile wide.

    ¡°A round of drinks on me!¡± He said, and the patrons let out a cheer. ¡°Drink, be merry, and keep spending your coin on our fine lads and ladies!¡±

    The customers let out appreciative laughter and applause, and Bora Bora grinned in earnest now. He enjoyed working at Divine¡¯s Blessing. It was the ultimate temple to the flesh, and as a person who shared their desires, he got along with customers without effort. He even enjoyed a small group of his own regular fans, when he found the time to work here. Thankfully, his schedule as Champion of Bahamut wasn¡¯t too busy in this time of peace.

    ¡°Lord Ciayol.¡± The official method of address for him, given his rank within a large group of the Dragon King¡¯s followers. This voice, however, was more direct, and considerably less jovial. Even before he turned to view the speaker, Bora Bora recognized the voice, and had an inkling as to the reasoning for the visit.

    A tall man in sweeping red and gold robes stood in the open doorway to the establishment. He had a silver moustache, and long hair of the same color. The heraldry of Bahamut, the great dragon¡¯s head, was stamped on the stiff shoulders of his robe in silver, and on the man¡¯s amulet in gold, with diamonds set into the heavy metal. As usual, he was wearing his heavy array of gold and jewel-encrusted rings.

    ¡°High Priest Thunderborn,¡± He said smoothly, offering the man a brief bob of his head. As Champion, he outranked the man, and owed him no further show of deference. The High Priest, meanwhile, sank into a moderate bow. ¡°To what do I owe this, err, pleasure? Have you decided to explore your carnal cravings at last?¡±

    ¡°Hardly,¡± Thunderborn said, his lip almost curling in distaste. He was careful not to let too much emotion show, however. ¡°I come with news. The fire has lit. You must prepare for war.¡±

    The broad grin melted from Bora Bora¡¯s face, and his expression became much more serious. ¡°I see. I will be at the Temple by the end of the day.¡±

    Thunderborn gave him a brief bow again, then, his business settled, turned on his heel and walked back towards the Temple District. Bora Bora stood as if frozen, thinking to himself for a moment. The fire was lit at last. Well, they¡¯d been expecting it for some time, if he was being honest. Bahamut had been slowly building up his army of followers, telling Bora Bora and the High Priest that war was brewing in the future.

    He wondered who the war would be against, and his mind was still sorting through the thought even as Rebecca returned at last with his weapon. He whistled sharply and the weapon flew out of her hands straight to him. He felt the hum of magic in it as his hands closed around the staff, and the blade of the scythe seemed to shiver with anticipation. Calm down, he told it. You¡¯ll get your blood soon enough.

    He walked out of the building without another world, still bare-chested, and made his way to his personal home. There would be several hours of preparation in his future, he knew. But he¡¯d made a vow when he¡¯d entered the service of the King of Dragons, and it was one that he had every desire to keep. He had a special bond with his God, one that allowed him plenty of power and influence. Now it was time to pay for those luxuries, in the only way he knew how. Blood.

    It was odd though, he thought to himself, completely oblivious to the stares of the people he passed. They were either muttering at his bare flesh in the cold winter air, or the golden amulet of Bahamut on his chest, marking him as Champion. It made no difference. He was more interested in the timing of the whole thing. With rumors flying around that Gorteau was about to go to war, why now would Bahamut choose to act?

    He pushed the questions to the back of his mind. They weren¡¯t important. All that mattered was that, now that he¡¯d been summoned, it was his duty to act. First, his home. Then, to the temple for the prayers and rituals. He made a sharp right turn, entering the Temple District. A sizeable crowd had gathered there. It seemed that word of the fire lighting had spread, and the crowd moved easily to grant him passage. Just past the temple was his home.

    He spent a few hours with the various elite crafters and mages of his temple, who came to him one at a time to imbue his weapon, clothing, and body with magicks. He could feel the power of each enchantment as it was placed and kept himself calm and centered. The extra power was not to be trifled with and required a sound mind if it was not to explode, wounding him and the others.

    Hours later, just as the sun was beginning to drop out of sight behind the horizon, he turned up at the temple. He wore his official mantle over simple black robes, and his hair had been tamed, tied back in a simple straight ponytail. On his chest, proudly displayed, was the amulet of Bahamut. The dragon¡¯s head almost seemed alive with the magic that had been put into it. It was time for the ceremonies, his least favorite part.

    ¡°Our Champion has arrived!¡± The Temple Speaker, a man who wielded equal power to Bora Bora and Thunderborn when it came to speaking for the god, was standing before the altar. He had his arms thrown wide to welcome all in attendance, and Bora Bora had to resist the urge to roll his eyes. The man did enjoy his theatrics.

    ¡°My god has summoned me,¡± Bora Bora said, letting his voice carry as he made the official reply. ¡°I am called to fight for his will, and to vanquish his enemies.¡±

    ¡°By what right do you claim this?¡± The speaker asked. ¡°By what right do you lead his followers?¡±

    Bora Bora slammed the staff of his scythe into the carpeted floor. Despite the comfortable thick padding, it still made a respectable banging noise. ¡°I claim these by the right of my sacrifices, and by the power that my god has bestowed upon me!¡±

    A whisper broke out through the small crowd of priests and warriors gathered, who all had the heraldry of Bora Bora stitched onto their backs. Bora Bora. Our Champion. Bora Bora made no sign that he heard them. He kept his eyes locked onto those of the Speaker, maintaining the strict ritual proceeding. The man stared at him in silence for several long seconds, then slowly nodded.

    ¡°I acknowledge your rights,¡± he boomed. ¡°I recognize you as the Champion of our God Bahamut. Come forth, and receive the Dragon King¡¯s words with us.¡±

    Bora Bora strode forward and turned to face the crowd. The Speaker carried on with his own personal, audible prayer, calling upon the will of Bahamut. He called upon the god to speak through him, to inform his followers of the plan. To tell them why he had called them for war. A moment of silence, then the man¡¯s voice deepened and began to carry more weight. It was the weight of a Divine speaking with his mouth.

    ¡°Stir yourselves, my children. Gather about you your arms and march to my cause. My sister is growing weak. Now, we will strike. We march to kill Tiamat.¡±

 Chapter 3

    Tobi stood alone, eyes closed, his feet firmly placed on the padded floor of the dojo. There were three enemies around him, he knew. He could sense them, particularly their fierce determination and eagerness for the coming bout. Jakob, Aki, and Noda. Three relatively young warriors recently recognized for their talents and named Masters. As Captain of Issho-Ni, it was his duty to continue their training, and, through daily fights, make sure that they stayed sharp.

    He took a long deep breath to steady himself, then lifted his free hand. The other clutched the smooth wooden handle of his naginata firmly, holding it ready to act. He¡¯d mastered a few different weapons in his time, but the long spear was the most comfortable in his hands. It was part of his identity. He¡¯d probably prefer the weapon for as long as he lived.

    ¡°Begin,¡± he said, his voice soft, his eyes open and focused. As expected, Jakob was the first to act. Sliding one foot forward for purchase, he pushed off with the other, his long sword swinging up from the side. Tobi made no move to block it, as he knew Jakob was fond of feints. Sure enough, as he stepped away and turned, the sword whipped around to swing downward. With a half spin of the naginata, he knocked the weapon away.

    Aki was next, stepping in with her twin short staves. She pressed Tobi for space, forcing him to keep moving his weapon in defensive strokes. She desisted only when he struck out his free hand, and hopped away before he could make contact. Before he could pursue her any further, Noda struck from behind, his katana much longer and clearing the distance instantly.

    Tobi spun just in time to avoid the tip of the practice weapon, and, with his much lower stance, kicked out at Jakob who had come back in for another strike. Jakob was forced to raise his right elbow to block the kick, ruining his chance to attack, and Tobi¡¯s next strike, a flat stomp with the other leg while his free hand supported his weight, hit him squarely in the chest, and knocked him back. He hit the ground on his back, an explosive grunt forced from him as the air left his lungs.

    Aki advanced while his balance was uncertain, launching another flurry of attacks. The repeated clack of wood on wood rang out clearly in the dojo, and Tobi continued to dance back and to the side as he avoided her strikes. He kept his eyes on Noda, certain that he was looking for an opening. He was notoriously cautious in his fighting style. If he wouldn¡¯t advance, Tobi decided that he would come to him.

    Without warning, Tobi darted in the other direction. Aki, expecting him to go left again, staggered slightly with the lack of opposition. With two quick, lunging steps, he closed the distance and gave a mighty thrust. Noda, who was already in a defensive position, blocked the attack well, but was too slow in stopping Tobi from whacking him across the back of his knees with the staff of his spear.

    Aki ran in once again, too eager to strike while Tobi had his back turned. This haste was her first mistake as Tobi, spinning in place, swung the blunt end of his spear in a low sweep. He knocked her legs out from under her, sending her crashing to the padded floor. Before she could move to recover, he had the point of his spear leveled at her face, pinning her in place.

    A polite peal of applause rang out in the room, coming from the students who sat in a wide circle to spectate. To the apprentices, the display had been highly entertaining, and further cemented the image of mastery in their eyes. The more senior students had spotted the moments of hesitation or weakness in Tobi¡¯s opponents¡¯ stances. The sound of the applause broke through the concentration of the new Masters, and they recognized that the match was over. By the rules of single strike, Tobi had won.

    ¡°Damn,¡± Aki said with a sigh. She rolled to her feet as soon as Tobi lifted her weapon, and shook herself slightly. ¡°I thought I had you there.¡±

    Tobi held her gaze in silence for a moment, his face stern. ¡°You rushed your attack and didn¡¯t consider your balance. What would you have done if I¡¯d blocked?¡¯

    She considered that for a moment, then admitted to herself that she didn¡¯t know. Tobi hadn¡¯t waited for an answer anyway and had instead turned to Noda. ¡°Noda. You are too cautious. Your defense is excellent, but you need to use more of that raw power to attack. If you had supported Jakob, the two of you could have overwhelmed my defense, letting Aki strike  more successfully.¡±

    He turned to Jakob. ¡°Rainhall, your form is excellent, as usual. But you need to rely on your allies more often. Taking too much on yourself will only result in failure.¡±

    Jakob met his eyes, looking slightly confused. Tobi had changed quite a bit since the death of his father, he thought. He¡¯d lost a great deal of his joyful, mischievous air. In times past, he was always free to joke with, or else pass the time as a close friend and confidant. But all that had changed when he became Captain. Now he was the stern mentor. He existed to teach and to lead, and nothing else. Jakob offered his Captain a deep bow. ¡°Thank you for your words of wisdom, Tobito-san. I will reflect on this.¡±

    He turned and departed in a swish of white robes before Tobi could reply any further, his face set in a blank stare. Tobi knew what had gone through his mind, and had to suppress a flare of anger. Didn¡¯t his old friend see that he was simply doing his job? His father had named him successor, and so now he must do what was necessary to keep Issho-Ni running. He had to be the stern figure of authority that his father had always been.

    He flicked his hands at the other two to dismiss them. They accepted his quiet scowl as normal and after bowing, they too left. They weren¡¯t as close to Tobi as Jakob was, and so couldn¡¯t spot the same signs in their leader. They knew that Tobi had become more reserved since Shigeru¡¯s death, but they attributed this to the stress of managing a collection of headstrong warriors.

    ¡°The rest of you are dismissed as well,¡± Tobi told the students firmly. ¡°Break into your groups and patrol. You will be relieved in three hours.¡±

    The students moved to obey his orders, meeting with their mentors and preparing equipment. After the rebel invasion of only a year past, Issho-Ni had taken up responsibility for patrolling through the city of Milagre. The presence of the warriors not only soothed the frayed nerves of the citizens but also served as extra eyes to spot potential trouble.

    ¡°Are you patrolling alone again, Master Tobito?¡±

    Tobi nodded in reply to whoever had asked the question, not looking up. He crossed over to the weapons rack to stow away his practice weapon and collected the metal version. He patted the pouch at his belt, making sure he had the dozen thin metal spikes and made his way out of the building. He moved quickly, exiting before any of the other groups were ready to depart. On a whim, he decided to turn towards the Residential District. There had been rumors of strangers harassing the citizens there for food and spare money.

    This had been his daily cycle for just over a year since his father had died in the battle against the rebels. Shigeru Tokugawa had lived his entire life as a beacon of hope to the citizens of Gorteau, a strong leader dedicated to protecting the innocents and hunting criminals. It was only expected that Tobi, as his adopted son, would continue in this work.

    After a month and some days of grieving his father, Tobi had thrown himself into the task of repairing the city, as well as hunting those known rebels who had led the attack. But no matter how many criminals he brought in, rumors and whispers continued to follow him. The people spoke in low voices that he still managed to hear as he passed. They thought him an inadequate replacement for his father. He couldn¡¯t blame them for thinking this way.

    Compared to the strong will and silver-bearded wisdom of his late father, Tobi¡¯s fresh, unshaven face couldn¡¯t have inspired much comfort in the townsfolk. How could he live up to the legend that Shigeru had created? The fact that he¡¯d ascended after his life only further cemented his legendary skill and fame, leaving the sole son a nearly impossible burden to carry. Big shoes to fill, Tobi thought with a dull inward laugh. It was all he could do to keep training the members of Issho-Ni.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.

    His chosen path took him through the main area of the Residential District. He took his time, knowing that the other groups of warriors would comb through the more active areas of the city. He liked to randomize his path each day so that anyone observing the organization couldn¡¯t establish a pattern in his movements and find gaps to operate in.

    He mused over the rumors he¡¯d heard in the past two weeks. They were faint and unsubstantiated, but people didn¡¯t complain that many times about something that wasn¡¯t true. He was certain that there was a problem in Milagre, he just had to ferret it out. The townsfolk weren¡¯t likely to talk if they were terrified, so he had to employ other methods to get the information he needed. The easiest choice, for him, was to ask the kinds of people who were everywhere.

    He found who he was looking for at once. A dirty, disheveled figure was squatting on the ground in front of a fountain, appearing to doze in the mid-day sun. He was snoring in a very convincing manner, and the stained tunic he wore looked authentic enough. But Tobi¡¯s discerning eye was able to make out the print of a dagger concealed under his clothing. It was a fine-boned weapon, not the kind you¡¯d expect a beggar to carry honestly.

    A few strides carried him across the cobbled central area, and he stopped before the man, his frame blotting out the sun and casting a shadow over the man. At once, his eyes opened. His lip curled as he looked up at the white-robed figure looming over him, and he gave a small, feeble wave to the side.

    ¡°You¡¯re blocking the sun, Captain,¡± He hiccupped, laying extra scornful stress on Tobi¡¯s title. ¡°Leave a poor man to nap in peace, will ye?¡±

    Tobi made no attempt to move, staring as the man continued to feign sleep. With a sigh, he nudged the man with the toe of his boot. ¡°How long are you going to keep up this charade?¡±

    The beggar opened his eyes again and squinted up. ¡°There¡¯s no need for the kick, sir Tibito, err, Tokiguwu. No law ¡®gainst nappin, I wager.¡±

    ¡°Of course not,¡± Tobi replied, his voice unemotional. The beggar seemed amused that he didn¡¯t reply to the intended insult. ¡°But there is a law against hiding traitors to the nation, isn¡¯t there?¡±

    That gave the man pause, Tobi said. ¡°What you talkin¡¯ ¡®bout, Master Captain? There ain¡¯t no traitors here, you see? The only trouble is you, disturbing an honest man¡¯s rest.¡±

    Tobi let out a quiet sigh of exasperation. ¡°Alright, I tried the nice way. Don¡¯t blame me.¡±

    The man opened his mouth to ask a question, but before could form the words, Tobi stooped down and grabbed him by the collar. At a closer angle, he could see that the stains were actually painted on, not the natural issue of living on the streets. He couldn¡¯t even be bothered to camouflage himself properly, Tobi thought with a smirk. The fake beggar put up a feeble show of a struggle until Tobi hurled him into the fountain. He landed with a great splash, showering water everywhere, and came up spluttering.

    ¡°What the devil was that for?¡± He cried indignantly, drawing the attention of several nearby townsfolk. Yet, despite his apparent outrage, Tobi noticed that one hand carefully patted the dagger, as if checking to make sure it was still in place. ¡°You see this, people? The prodigal son is here, never fear! He¡¯s working hard, tossing innocent men into fountains, alright!¡±

    But Tobi decided that he¡¯d had enough of the act. With a quick movement, he swept the blunt end of his spear around and cracked the man painfully across the shoulder. ¡°That¡¯s enough. I know you¡¯re not a beggar, so give it up. I need information.¡±

    Just as the man opened his mouth to deny it, Tobi silenced him by holding up a gold coin. The man¡¯s eyes fixed on it in an instant, and he ran a tongue across his lips. Casting a glance to either side, he snatched the coin and tucked it out of sight quickly. Then he hauled himself out of the fountain, splattering more water. Tobi moved carefully away to avoid the cascade of water and raised an eyebrow in expectation.

    ¡°So,¡± the man said, his voice clear, dropping the drunk act at once. He had the typical accentless voice of one who¡¯d spent his entire life in the capital city, as Tobi had done. ¡°What would you be wanting to know, Captain? Must be important, if you be slinging gold.¡±

    ¡°Why are you posted here in the residential district?¡± Tobi asked. ¡°Surely your chief would make more money if you were in the markets. Does he know anything about what¡¯s been going on in this area?¡±

    ¡°She knows plenty, she does,¡± the man replied, laying extra stress on the first word. He pulled his soaked outer tunic off and wrung out the water. ¡°Rumor is we got foreign soldiers in Milagre.¡±

    ¡°Foreign?¡± Tobi asked, leaning forward with a glare. ¡°How do you know they¡¯re foreign?¡±

    The man shrugged. ¡°That¡¯s just what the boss says. She¡¯s got a way of knowing things, so I just do what she tells me.¡±

    Tobi considered that. His experience with the various street gangs had taught him that, every once in a while, one exceptionally talented gang leader would appear, and their crew would generally have the best read on the city. They took control quickly, and, as long as they kept relatively tame, they could be a prime source of information. He had a vague feeling that this was one such gang.

    ¡°Alright,¡± he said, his voice firm again. ¡°Take me to your chief, and I¡¯ll ask her my questions.¡±

    The man stood up straight, looking stubborn. ¡°There ain¡¯t no way in all the hells that I¡¯m bringing you to our hideout.¡±

    ¡°Have it your way,¡± Tobi said with a slight shrug. ¡°I¡¯ll take you to the dungeons then, where you can stay for a few weeks.¡±

    The man cocked his chin back and held out both hands, the image of stubborn loyalty. But as Tobi reached forward with rope to bind them, a voice called out from behind him. It had an unmistakable cadence of confidence to it, he thought. Without turning, he was already certain that this would be the leader. Still, he had to see. It never did to have a stranger behind his back.

    A tall and lean woman, dressed from head to toe in tight-fitting black cloth, was sauntering towards him. A few strands of bright red hair were showing out of her deep hood, framing a set of sharp, clever eyes and a stiff smirk. She looked like a woman who knew her way around any sort of business, Tobi thought. His earlier suspicions about her prospects were strengthened.

    ¡°You¡¯re this man¡¯s leader,¡± Tobi said. It wasn¡¯t a question. ¡°What do you know about what¡¯s been going on in this area? Tell me, or-¡±

    She waved one of her hands casually. ¡°There¡¯s no need for the tough act, Master Tokugawa.¡±

    Tobi blinked and took half a step back, more thrown by the genuine respect in her voice than by anything else. She didn¡¯t seem to find him lacking, like many of the townsfolk. ¡°Act? I assure you, it¡¯s no act.¡±

    ¡°Right,¡± she said, her lips twitching with barely contained mirth. ¡°So you¡¯re suggesting that the bright, funny boy that grew up on these streets was the act? Please. You may have been forced to grow up very quickly, but you¡¯re still the same man, deep down.¡±

    ¡°The same very skilled warrior,¡± Tobi reminded her. ¡°Who¡¯s not fond of beating around the bush.¡±

    ¡°As entertaining as a fight between us would be, I must politely decline,¡± the woman said. She didn¡¯t look the least bit doubtful of her chances in such a match. ¡°I fully intend to share all the information I have with you.¡±

    ¡°At what cost?¡± Tobi asked. ¡°I can¡¯t be known to openly trade with criminals.¡±

    ¡°And you won¡¯t have to,¡± she assured him. ¡°All I ask is that you use the information properly, and protect the people of this fine city. I care about Milagre, just as much as you.¡±

    Tobi narrowed his eyes as he stared at her in silence, mulling over her words for several long seconds. Then, finally, he relaxed his stance and gave her a simple nod. The smirk widened into a true smile on her face, and instantly she became a different person. Gone was the cool, mysterious gang leader. Now she seemed more of a businesswoman than a criminal.

    ¡°Well then,¡± she said brightly. ¡°Viktor, you go back to the hideout. I¡¯ll accompany Tokugawa on a short tour.¡±

    The man Tobi had accosted gave a brief salute. ¡°Right away, boss. Good luck on your business.¡±

    Without another word, he turned on his heel and quickly disappeared into a nearby alley. Tobi watched him go, chewing his lip thoughtfully, wondering if he shouldn¡¯t have just arrested the man to be sure. It went against the grain to let criminals roam freely for him. He put the matter away for the time being and turned to the woman.

    ¡°So. What exactly has been going on? I¡¯ve received reports that citizens are being harassed by outsiders here, but I haven¡¯t caught any sign of intruders.¡±

    ¡°Well,¡± she said slowly, turning to scan the area for eavesdroppers. ¡°You won¡¯t catch them alone. They¡¯re crafty, and they threaten citizens into letting them hide in their homes. The people are keeping quiet about it all, for fear of their lives.¡±

    ¡°Who¡¯s doing this?¡± Tobi asked, but he was sure he knew the answer already.

    ¡°Enemy soldiers. Not sure which nation they belong to just yet, but they¡¯re very clearly foreign. They¡¯re attempting to establish a foothold to invade Milagre.¡±

 Chapter 4

    The main street of the residential district was nearly deserted. Tobi would have liked to clear out all the civilians and call for a temporary curfew, just to make sure they were safe. Sadly, it wasn¡¯t a feasible action. If any of the foreign invaders caught wind of his actions, they could take hostages to escape. So he¡¯d decided to take action just this once without the strict policies that would normally be enforced.

    He would not be alone, however. The strange red-haired woman had insisted on accompanying him, and when he¡¯d refused to work with a criminal, she¡¯d threatened to withhold the vital information. He¡¯d known at once that threatening her with arrest would do no good, so in the end, he agreed. She was more talented at moving without being seen in any event, which could come in handy.

    In order to keep a low profile and avoid notice, Tobi had discarded the white robe that marked him as a Master and Captain of Issho-Ni. He wore a dark grey tunic and breeches, a color that would blend well with the lengthening shadows of the evening without standing out. Black would be too dark. Of course, he would rely most heavily on his natural grace and speed to stay out of sight. He¡¯d also left his principal weapon behind. If a fight broke out, he could rely only on his hands and feet.

    ¡°Are you ready?¡± The woman was beside him, and slightly behind. He glanced around at her. ¡°The sun will be truly down in about ten minutes. That gives us just under an hour until the farming folk return.¡±

    Tobi nodded. They had chosen to act in the brief window when they could expect the least amount of citizens to be around. There was no way of knowing who could be friend or foe, so they had to hide avoid being seen by anyone. He tugged a pair of thick leather bracers out of his belt, and quickly slid them on, tightening the strings. If he was going to be getting into hand-to-hand combat, he didn¡¯t want to risk breaking something.

    ¡°Alright,¡± The woman¡¯s voice came, quiet as ever. ¡°Let¡¯s do it.¡±

    Remaining in a crouch, Tobi approached the edge of the roof. They were on one of the few buildings that had a shingle top, which could support their weight. As gently and quietly as he could, he swung off, gripping the lip of the roof to slowly extend his body to the window below. With a deft flick of his foot, he pushed the simple window inward, then swung inside.

    He missed the small table that had been placed under the window by a hair¡¯s breadth, and hit the soft carpet, rolling to absorb the shock and noise. M had said that there was guaranteed to be one of the invader groups here. It was his job to identify them quickly and dispatch them before they could raise the alarm. He ran, light as a cat, across the room, and through a door to the stairs.

    One of the stairs creaked traitorously as he put his weight on it. He made no attempt to freeze or slow down, knowing that he couldn¡¯t spare the time. He could hear terse muttering coming from the living area. Though he couldn¡¯t make out the words, he knew that tone. It was commanding. Another voice, that of a woman, responded in obvious fear. So M had been right. There were intruders in this house.

    He hit the very bottom of the stairs right as the conversation halted, and had dove behind an armchair as someone entered from the kitchen. He wore no armor, but he was armed with a longsword and buckler, clearly a soldier type. His eyes scanned the room, and he paced to the stairs, peering up to the dark second floor. He let out a quiet scoff.

    ¡°It¡¯s nothing,¡± he called back to the kitchen. ¡°You¡¯re being paranoid, Zenik.¡±

    Zenik, Tobi thought. Definitely a Mitenean name. While it wasn¡¯t definitive proof of the Mitene Union invasion, it did unmistakably mark him as foreign. As he walked back into the pool of light coming from the kitchen, Tobi darted up behind him. He was revealed to the others in the small lit room for only half a second before he¡¯d gripped the man¡¯s head with one hand and slammed it into the doorway. He went limp without a sound.

    There were two others in the kitchen, and Tobi was onto his next target before the third could even stand up, slamming his fist into the man¡¯s jaw, knocking him out cold. He crashed back in his chair, and Tobi was vaulting over him, hands reaching out in a flash. He succeeded in silencing the man¡¯s cry of shock. He brought his knee up, slamming it into the man¡¯s head. In the space of about four seconds, the foreigners had all been knocked out.

    Tobi turned quickly to reassure the woman he¡¯d heard but saw M behind her, one gloved hand over her mouth, already cutting off her scream. He held up his hands. ¡°I apologize for scaring you, madam. We¡¯re here to get rid of these men and their comrades. Please, don¡¯t make any loud noises.¡±

    Though still wide-eyed with fear, the woman nodded her understanding, and M slowly withdrew her hand. She walked around the woman to begin hauling one of the unconscious men up. The woman, meanwhile, leaned against her wall, eyes closed and breathing deeply. Finally, she seemed to calm herself down and looked back at Tobi.

    ¡°You¡¯re the son of Lord Tokugawa, aren¡¯t you?¡± She asked. ¡°You¡¯re not wearing your robes.¡±

    ¡°They¡¯re a little conspicuous,¡± Tobi said. She nodded her understanding. ¡°Do you know which houses have been taken over, madam?¡±

    ¡°Aye,¡± she said shakily. ¡°The smith, the scholar, and the seamstress have all been playing host ¡®gainst their will. Are you going to free them, too?¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s the plan, madam,¡± Tobi said. He bent down and slung one of the men over his shoulder. ¡°First, we have to get these men bound and restrained. Can we keep them in your living area for an hour or two?¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± she replied briskly. ¡°My son will be back from the fields soon, and he can keep an eye on them.¡±

    ¡°Thank you,¡± Tobi said. ¡°But I¡¯d rather not involve any strangers. One of my men will stand guard until I return.¡±

    They left the house the same way they¡¯d entered, through the window of the room on the second story. Their landing on the alley below was less than silent, but nobody seemed to notice. Wasting no time, they moved towards the smith¡¯s house, which was closer.

    ¡°More sizable force than I expected,¡± Maria said. ¡°Sounds as though they have nearly two dozen men. They could do a lot of damage with that number.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Tobi hissed back. ¡°But not if we put them in the dungeons.¡±

    ¡°Curious how you didn¡¯t kill any of them,¡± Maria commented. ¡°Are you against killing?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯d prefer to avoid it, obviously,¡± he muttered. ¡°But I know it¡¯s necessary sometimes. I only knocked them out to avoid traumatizing the woman.¡±

    ¡°I see,¡± Maria said. Tobi glanced at her, surprised to see her looking vaguely thoughtful. ¡°I admit that thought didn¡¯t occur to me.¡±

    ¡°Well, what do you expect,¡± he retorted. ¡°You¡¯re the leader of a thief gang. As if the innocent people would be your first concern.¡±

    Maria only smirked slightly at that comment. They drew level with the smith¡¯s back door. There was no sound from inside, of course, but his sharpened instinct was telling him that he could expect a similar situation inside. He tested the door gingerly. It was unlocked. As slowly as he could, he lifted the latch, hoping that whoever was inside wouldn¡¯t notice the gradual movement. Once he was sure it was clear of the frame, he gave the door a hard shove and darted inside.This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.

    There were two men in the room beyond the door, and they jumped to their feet as Tobi appeared. Tobi was able to strike the first man down before he reached his weapon, but the other was much quicker. His blade rang free of its scabbard with a quiet hiss, and he swung a hasty blow at the stranger who¡¯d burst in. Tobi jumped to the side to avoid it, then grabbed the man by the wrist and throat and slammed him down.

    The carpeted floor muffled some of the impact, but he knew that it couldn¡¯t mute the sound entirely. Abandoning stealth entirely, he rushed for the stairs. Already he could hear someone shouting in confusion and growing alarm. He reached the second floor just in time to see another soldier, wearing a thick leather helmet and breastplate, appearing on the landing with a drawn dagger.

    He couldn¡¯t quite make out Tobi¡¯s appearance before he attacked, but his armor and reflexes saved him from Tobi¡¯s first strike. He was no idiot either. The instant he realized that he was facing an enemy, he started shouting for all he was worth, swinging his weapon to ward his opponent off. Tobi cursed at the loud noise and jumped back to avoid the sword. Then, Maria came up the stairs, crouched low, and kicked the man¡¯s legs out from under him. He¡¯d barely hit the ground when she slashed her knife across his throat, silencing him.

    ¡°Should I not have done that,¡± She asked, standing straight and wiping her blade clean on the man¡¯s tunic. ¡°I¡¯m not sure I have the strength to knock him out.¡±

    ¡°No point in whining about it now,¡± Tobi said quickly. ¡°Let¡¯s get outside. There are still two more houses.¡±

    They burst onto the street through the front door this time, not caring about making as little noise as possible. The entire street would have heard the man shouting. Sure enough, even as he appeared, armed men were streaming out of the other two houses the woman had told him about. What was worse, two of them had civilians held tight as hostages. He cursed their bad luck.

    ¡°Thought you could get the drop on us, eh?¡± One of the men shouted. He put a knife to the throat of the woman he was holding. ¡°You take one step towards us, she dies. Understand?¡±

    Tobi lifted his hands in a gesture of peace. ¡°I won¡¯t move an inch from where I am.¡±

    ¡°Better not, boy,¡± the man sneered. ¡°Now, we¡¯ll be leaving the city, and if anyone tries to stop us, this girl¡¯s husband will be back in the marriage market.¡±

    At once, he began to take a step back, still pulling the woman with him. Tobi cursed internally, his eyes flicking from side to side. What could he do in this situation? He had a way to attack without moving, but the men would see it coming at once, and then the civilians would be dead. In an attempt to buy time, he drew himself up, trying to project the same aura of authority that his father had so effortlessly conjured whenever it was needed.

    ¡°You should know,¡± he said, his voice cold. ¡°There is no place within this country that you can hide. My men and I will find you, no matter where you go. You¡¯ll spend every night unable to sleep, waiting for us. Then, when you least expect it, we¡¯ll kill you.¡±

    The ice-cold hatred in his voice stopped the man for a moment. He almost appeared to reconsider his current course, but then the sneer reappeared. ¡°You¡¯re nothing but a boy, playing at a man¡¯s job. I know perfectly well who you are. You¡¯re nothing like your father, and we all know it. Stop pretending. We¡¯re leaving now.¡±

    Besides him, Maria let out a faint whistling sound. It was so quiet that, for a moment, they wondered if perhaps they hadn¡¯t imagined it. Then Tobi spotted a flicker of movement on one of the nearby rooftops. Two men rose out of their hiding spots, already drawing back the strings of their crossbows. Before Tobi could call a warning, to tell them not to shoot for fear of hitting the civilians, they loosed their shots. He turned in slow motion towards the men holding the civilians.

    With cries of pain, they wrenched their arms away, releasing the civilians, who staggered forward in shock. Each of the archers had hit the weapon hand of their targets, disarming them and freeing the hostages with one well-placed shot. Their accuracy was something to fear, not to mention respect, Tobi thought. But now, thanks to their attack, a new danger had presented itself. The citizens had been freed, but they were surrounded by angry, desperate men who had the reflexes of trained soldiers.

    Tobi thrust his hand into the small satchel at his side, snapping the container open and yanking the contents out. They were thin metal spikes, inscribed with minuscule runes. They had been gifted to him by the wild mages of Zaban several months ago, at the end of his dangerous journey with his friend Samuel Bragg. He¡¯d spent months mastering them, developing his own unique magic to use them to deadly effect.

    He threw the spikes forward with all the strength he could muster. Mid-flight, his mana flared to life and filled them with energy. With small pops, they shot forward with renewed speed, each guided by his mind to a different target. He could only control four at a time, but that was more than enough. In the blink of an eye, they each pierced through one of the men without a check to their speed and force.

    ¡°Issho-Ni!¡± The shout came from somewhere nearby, startling everyone in the vicinity with its ferocity. As four figures barreled out of alleys and towards the armed foreigners, the words were echoed again. It was, of course, the time-honored call to action of Issho-Ni. It was the battlecry that mustered strength in their allies, and fear in their enemies.

    Before they could come to terms with the sudden appearance of the new combatants, two more of the foreigners had fallen to Jakob Rainhall and Noda Itori. Then Aki Monato appeared in a blur of white robes, her staves cracking into the ribs of one man. With a nasty crunch and a scream of pain, he fell to the cobbles, his intended rush for one of the civilians brought to nothing. In a matter of seconds, the rest of the foreigners had fallen to the members of Issho-Ni.

    Without warning, silence fell upon the street. Tobi glanced around quickly, mildly surprised to find no enemies in sight, to find, in fact, that the battle was over. Letting his tension out in a single short breath, he paced over to join his comrades. Aki was busy binding the hands of the man she¡¯d knocked down. When her work was finished, she kicked him over onto his stomach, none too gently.

    ¡°How did you three know I was here?¡± Tobi asked, his tone angry. ¡°Did you just think you could abandon your patrols without permission?¡±

    He expected Aki or Noda to flare up with indignation, and he was ready to match them in kind. But, to his surprise, it was Jakob that stepped forward, coming invasively close. He stared Tobi down with a stubborn glare, mere centimeters from his face. Tobi had faced bandits, hardened murderers, and even a few wild monsters in his time. But the determined stance of his former apprentice was enough to stop him in its tracks. He took a step back.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough,¡± Jakob said, his voice quiet so that it only reached Tobi¡¯s ears. Aki and Noda might have heard him, but they were tactful enough to pretend to be checking on the status of the fallen foreigners. ¡°You and your father trained me to fight criminals who harmed the innocents.¡±

    ¡°My father also trained you to follow orders,¡± Tobi snapped. ¡°So what makes you think-¡±

    Jakob cut him off with a curt hand gesture. ¡°Yes. You are my Captain, so I¡¯m oath-bound to follow your orders. But I also took an oath to support those who need it. Don¡¯t think for a second that you¡¯re more important than or highest calling.¡±

    Tobi blinked in surprise. Jakob had never spoken to him that way before, even during the brief period in his first year, when Tobi had still been a senior apprentice. He expected his anger to rise up at any second, maybe even drive him to duel Jakob on the grounds of insulted honor. Instead, he found himself feeling a little ashamed. He didn¡¯t know had come over his friend.

    Seeing that Tobi wasn¡¯t making a reply, Jakob pressed his advantage. ¡°You¡¯re the one who¡¯s supposed to lead Issho-Ni. Not fight every battle by yourself, but actually lead. That means trusting the Masters you appoint. Unless you think it was a mistake to appoint us?¡±

    ¡°No.¡± The answer was so quiet as to be nearly inaudible. ¡°But if I can¡¯t lead like my father did, then I¡¯ve failed.¡±

    ¡°You haven¡¯t failed anything,¡± Jakob corrected him, his voice gentle. ¡°You¡¯re not your father. You never will be. You¡¯re Tobito Tokugawa, mage-warrior and master of a dozen styles. You forge your own path, damn it all. Stop trying to copy someone you¡¯re not.¡±

    Hours later, after the surviving two criminals had been locked safely away in the dungeons under the palace, Tobi had retired to his quarters in the back of Issho-Ni. He still refused to take the Captain¡¯s room, despite his rank. He was more comfortable on a city bed, instead of the thick pad that his father had rested on. Jakob¡¯s advice bounced around his head, dominating his thoughts and preventing him from getting any rest.

    You are not your father. He knew that more than anyone. His father had been an undefeated, elite warrior. He was the absolute example of peace and protection, and a legend. Tobi was a fresh-faced son who couldn¡¯t be the prodigy the city needed. So if he couldn¡¯t be the prodigal son, he¡¯d just have to settle for the next best thing. His father had always kept Issho-Ni a pacifist group, not seeking out criminals before they could do more harm. He knew his purpose now.

 Chapter 5

    ¡°Begin!¡±

    Tobi¡¯s shouted instruction spurred the two fighters into action. Samuel was the first to move, which took both Tobi and his opponent, Jakob, by surprise. Over the past two years, Samuel had been through enough grueling training with his sword to know his strengths, and more importantly, his weaknesses. His experience in battle paled in comparison to Jakob¡¯s so he had to rely on his other, natural gifts to stand a chance.

    First and foremost was his longer arms. He¡¯d been a good deal taller than most everyone else he¡¯d known in his life, and this translated into his reach. He could, with proper timing and movement, attack his enemies from a longer range than normal, and hammed down their guard safely. Of course, this was a technical duel, so he wasn¡¯t allowed to use any of the magic he¡¯d mastered.

    He cut twice, forehand and backhand, two blows that Jakob parried patiently. He transferred the momentum smoothly into a long thrust, and Jakob jumped to the side with a deft movement. He was too light on his feet, Samuel thought with frustration. I have to find a way to pin him down. Before he could begin to think of a plan, however, Jakob recovered his own momentum and darted forward, his sword swinging low for the legs.

    Samuel intercepted Jakob¡¯s wooden sword with his own, stopping the weapon in its tracks. He reached out with his free hand to try and grapple the shorter warrior, but he was too nimble, dancing out of reach in an instant. Samuel pursued him, leading with his sword, cutting down in an execution stroke. Jakob knocked his blade aside again, but it had been a feint. With a powerful twist of his wrist, Samuel attacked from a new angle, whacking Jakob on the shoulder of his sword arm.

    ¡°Point!¡± Tobi called, and the two fighters separated. A ripple of polite applause spread throughout the dojo from the spectators. It wasn¡¯t the first time that Samuel had scored a point against Jakob, of course, but it was still worth celebrating. Tobi lifted his hand again, and the crowd fell silent. Then, after making sure that they were ready, brought it down once more.

    This time, it was Jakob that started events. He took two quick steps forward, channeling the speed of the dash, the strength of his right arm, and the power of his lunging body into a powerful thrust. It nearly caught Samuel by surprise, but the mage managed to sway out of the way just in time, slipping his own weapon under Jakob¡¯s and flicking it up. Before Jakob could recover, Samuel cut back-handed, whacking Jakob in the chest.

    ¡°Point!¡± The gathered spectators gave shouts of surprise that nearly drowned out Tobi¡¯s call. A few of them even jumped up and down, letting out whoops of laughter. Catcalls rained out among the cheers. Two points in a row was definitely a first for Samuel. Jakob rarely made mistakes in his duels, and even rarer was an opponent able to take advantage of them fast enough.

    Jakob walked back to his starting position, his eyes narrowed in thought. He hadn¡¯t expected Samuel to be able to dodge that last blow. There were precious few warriors who could manage such a feat, as his thrust was one of the fastest in Issho-Ni. But the undeniable evidence of the forming welt in his chest proved that he¡¯d been mistaken. Samuel had grown a great deal in the last two years, he thought. In fact, he was willing to bet that the two of them were as close to equal as it was possible to be.

    ¡°Next point wins it,¡± One of the spectators muttered. ¡°Looks like Samuel might just manage it.¡±

    Samuel ignored the chatter around him, of course, keeping his mind sharply focused on Jakob before him. He regained his ready position, sword lifted at a slight angle, Jakob¡¯s own head just visible over the tip. Then, inexplicably, he angled the sword down more. Now it was held at a level, the point aimed for Jakob¡¯s chest. His leg muscles tightened, and he crouched slightly.

    Tobi glanced at Samuel to see if he was ready, and he frowned slightly. That wasn¡¯t a stance he¡¯d taught Samuel before, nor any that he could have picked up from members of Issho-Ni. It was vaguely similar to the way that the tourney fighters of Welsik held their thin thrusting swords, he thought. He chose to avoid making a comment on it. He had an inkling that if he said anything, he¡¯d shatter the intense focus that Samuel had mustered.

    For Samuel, his mind, while focusing on the coming call to action, was also drifting back, to the time when his first and greatest teacher had been lecturing him. Mind, Body, and Soul. These three must work in harmony, or you are only part of yourself. It was an insignificant point that Master Astori had brought up in his early years. It had been thrown out during one of his study groups, where abstract ideas were brought up, in an attempt to discover something new.

    Little did Master Astori know that, over a hundred years later, Samuel would take that odd phrase and turn it into an actual idea. Not only that, he would channel the very idea into his own personal fighting style, and give birth to it for the first time in a sparring match against his friend. Of course, the ideas weren¡¯t firmly linked in Samuel¡¯s mind, but he did have a strong sense of certainty with the change in his posture. Something deep inside him said that this was the right move.

    He didn¡¯t even hear Tobi give the call to begin again. He did see Jakob jump forward two or three strides to the side, jumping back in with a powerful slash. Samuel turned to face him as he moved, and, stepping back to avoid the very tip of the practice weapon, he channeled his body, mind, and soul forward in a powerful counterattack. He moved faster than he could have believed possible, striking with the speed of a snake.

    Jakob saw the thrust coming and felt the powerful intent behind it. He knew at once that it would hit, and that, if he remained unprotected, it would do quite a bit of damage. His only hope of emerging from that unscathed was to employ an emergency defense spell, which he did now, bringing his Ki to life in the blink of an eye. Then the tip of the wooden sword hit him squarely in the chest. The combination of Samuel¡¯s powerful attack and the strength of his own barrier was too much for the wooden stick, which shattered.

    The force behind it still registered, however, and Jakob was sent flying back. He slammed into the wall of the dojo with enough force to crack it. If he¡¯d been unprotected, that would have been a critical injury. As it was, he slid down from the wall, too stunned to stand, and dropped to his knees. Then he hit the padded floor face-first, his vision black as his lungs tried to refill themselves.

    Samuel blinked, appearing to become aware of his action for the first time. He stared at the useless hilt he was holding in his hand, and then down at his friend, who was stirring feebly on the ground. He immediately dropped what was left of the weapon, and ran forward, dropping to his knees beside Jakob.

    ¡°Jakob!¡± He said, his voice louder than intended. ¡°Damn! I don¡¯t know what came over me. I¡¯m so sorry. Are you alright?¡±

    His friend seemed to be gasping for air, so he put one hand to his back, feeling throughout his body with mana. His lungs were slightly concave, he noticed. With a quick burst of mana, Samuel forced air back into his lungs. Jakob let out a retching cough, then drew in another lungful of air, this time under his own effort. Samuel grimaced as he felt some of the pain reflected back at him.

    ¡°Damn!¡± He said again. ¡°I don¡¯t know what just came over me. I didn¡¯t mean to use a spell, I swear.¡±

    ¡°Y- you,¡± Jakob was having trouble forming words, but Tobi, who had also hurried over, finished the thought for him. ¡°You didn¡¯t use a spell.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Samuel exclaimed, looking up at Tobi. ¡°What do you mean? How the hell could I do this with just a stick?¡±

    Tobi could only shrug. Apart from the familiar starting stance, he¡¯d never seen anything like what Samuel had just managed. But this was also the mage, he reminded himself, who had created over a hundred spells himself, and who was regarded as the man who had advanced the arcane arts a century or more just on his own. He had the body of an Ancient too, so it only made sense that he could create new effects with his body as well.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.

    ¡°I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll learn in time,¡± Jakob finally managed to speak, pushing himself into a sitting position and shooing Samuel away. ¡°But let¡¯s not get ahead of ourselves. Well done, Samuel.¡±

    Samuel frowned in slight confusion as he got back to his feet, helping Jakob rise. ¡°What are you talking about? I don¡¯t-¡± Then his mind caught up with him, and he glanced around to see the spectators, expert fighters of Issho-Ni, all gaping at him in silence.

    ¡°Oh,¡± he said slowly, dragging the sound out. ¡°Wait. Did I just win? For the first time?¡±

    As if they¡¯d been waiting for him to ask, the other warriors finally broke their silence. They started letting out more whoops of laughter and loud cheers, and the most senior moved forward to clap him on his back. The shouts of congratulations and incredulity nearly deafened him, making him protect his ears against the sudden explosion of noise with a bit of mana.

    ¡°You¡¯ve been hiding your real talent!¡±

    ¡°Poor Jakob didn¡¯t see that coming!¡±

    ¡°The way you shattered that sword! By the gods, you¡¯re a force to be reckoned with!¡±

    Samuel grinned shiftily at the praise, ducking his head in thanks and trying not to look too pleased with himself. Now that he was sure Jakob was fine, the immensity of today¡¯s achievement had finally settled in. In addition to a challenge spar between the two of them, this had also been considered as Samuel¡¯s final test. Just weeks prior, Tobi had told him this day was coming, the day where he¡¯d be tested fully to see if he was worthy of mastery.

    ¡°Nice work, Samuel,¡± Tobi said. ¡°You picked up that sword much faster than I would have expected.¡±

    ¡°Not that fast,¡± Samuel said modestly. ¡°It took me over two years, after all.¡±

    Tobi let out a loud laugh as he threw an arm around Samuel¡¯s ribs, embracing his friend. ¡°Trust me, that¡¯s faster than most. Definitely faster than I learned psionics, to be true.¡±

    ¡°Oh please. You¡¯re already recognized as a Master in the College. You learned how to use those properly ages ago.¡±

    They walked as a small group, just Samuel, Tobi, Jakob, and a few of the oldest Masters in the dojo, to the verandah outside. They talked and joked with each other amicably, discussing the fight and Samuel¡¯s new skill with enthusiasm. Samuel tried to explain the thought process that had gone into it, but couldn¡¯t quite put the words together. Truth be told he wasn¡¯t quite sure himself how it had happened. He vaguely remembered something about his old teacher Sean Astori.

    They took a quick meal together outside in the fresh air after cleaning themselves up, then dressed in their nicest, most official clothing. Today was Temple Day, the last day of the week when the residents of Milagre went to pay their respects to the gods and give tributes to receive favor. But today was a Temple Day unlike any other.

    ¡°They just finished the construction yesterday, didn¡¯t they?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Tobi said, quieter and reserved than usual. Samuel could hardly blame him. Today would be the first time he set foot in the new, and in fact, the first Temple ever constructed in his father¡¯s name. It was a momentous occasion, not to mention their first opportunity to commune with the late warrior since his death of two years prior.

    ¡°Don¡¯t be nervous,¡± Samuel said with a grin, punching Tobi lightly on the shoulder. ¡°He¡¯ll be pleased to speak to you.¡±

    ¡°But what if he disapproves of how I¡¯ve been managing Issho-Ni in his absence?¡± Tobi asked, turning to face Samuel, his face twisted in a nervous grimace. ¡°What if he doesn¡¯t condone what I¡¯ve made?¡±

    ¡°Tobi.¡± Samuel¡¯s voice was still gentle, but firm. ¡°You are his true successor. I didn¡¯t know him as well as you, but I¡¯m certain that he¡¯s been watching you all this time, and he¡¯s proud of you. Mark my words, you¡¯ll see that he has nothing but nice things to say.¡±

    Tobi¡¯s eyes shined a little brighter, and he glanced skyward. ¡°I hope you¡¯re right. All I want is to make him proud.¡±

    There was a faint pop, and the two of them looked around. A short wild-haired boy was there, walking alongside them. He had slightly darkened skin, and he was clad in tribalistic clothing. Tobi looked slightly unnerved at the sudden appearance, not to mention the aura of absolute power that cloaked the figure, but Samuel only grinned again.

    ¡°Glad you could join us, Grimr,¡± he said. ¡°Does he know you¡¯re coming to visit?¡±

    ¡°Of course he does,¡± The small ancient said. He flashed a mouth full of sharp teeth in his own grin. ¡°I assume you¡¯re going to help welcome him as well.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Samuel replied smoothly. ¡°He¡¯s my oldest friend. I wouldn¡¯t miss the chance for anything.¡±

    When they turned onto the wide street that passed through the majority of the Temple District, they paused. Just over two hundred yards away, a large white building had been constructed. Its location and size were in honor to the man for whom it had been built, the greatest protector that the city had ever known. Large pillars of dark wood were ranged across the front of the structure, with lighter wood forming beautiful walls. There was no gold or precious gems, but the simple beauty of the structure shined for it.

    A sizeable crowd had already gathered in front of the temple, though none had entered. It was traditional when greeting a new Divine, for the closest living follower of the deity to enter first and call their blessing upon the structure. As Shigeru had only one heir, the person selected for this task was obvious. Tobi took several deep breaths as he saw the size of the crowd, taking a moment to steady himself.

    Samuel grinned at his friend¡¯s hesitation, and gave him a none too gentle shove to propel him forward, much like Shigeru had done when he faced the terrifying moment of approaching Arcana. It was strange, he thought, how, in just a few years, he¡¯d transformed from a newling student to advisor and teacher. Tobi glanced back at him, and, after receiving a reassuring nod, started pacing forward, keeping his eyes locked forward.

    The crowd saw Tobi coming and hurried to part before him, forming a narrow path for him to walk uninterrupted. He kept his chin high as he passed through the crowd, not glancing behind him to make sure Samuel and Grimr were following. They kept a respectable distance as they watched the young man climb the steps to the Temple, coming free of the crowd to stand, alone, in the greatest monument to his father¡¯s life. Samuel saw his shoulders lift and fall as he took another steadying breath.

    Tobi knelt before the doors, placing his forehead to the cool smooth stone at the base of the door. The crowd, including Samuel and Grimr, all followed his suit. The Mother¡¯s Embrace, the oldest and most sacred method of honoring life. In the silence, Samuel¡¯s sharpened ears could pick up a faint mumble from Tobi as he made a silent prayer for his father. Then he stood, gripped the handles of the large double doors, and pulled them open. Then, after glancing back at the expectant crowd, he turned and stepped inside.

    As Samuel and Grimr rose gracefully back to their feet, a faint golden light began to emanate from the inside of the temple. It bathed them all in a soft sort of warmth, evoking feelings of peace and safety. He was here, Samuel realized. He strode up the steps, Grimr at his side, and together, they spoke in the Ancient tongue. They spoke of Shigeru¡¯s life, his accomplishments, and his death. They commended him as the greatest of his kind. And then they called him home.

    The golden light had continued to build in intensity as they spoke, growing until it was blinding. Then, just as the citizens were forced to look away, the light vanished completely. They looked back, nervously muttering amongst themselves, to see Tobi kneeling at the entrance, staring up at the specter of a man. He looked exactly the same as when he¡¯d ascended. Shigeru Tokuawa no Yama, God of War, had manifested in his temple.

    ¡°Welcome home, Father,¡± Tobi said, no longer trying to hide the tears streaming down his face. ¡°Please, speak to your people.¡±

    Shigeru seemed to take a moment to gather his bearings. He looked down at his body and hands, flexed his fingers, then turned to stare at Samuel and Grimr, who were grinning broadly at him. He then gazed out at the crowd, who all bowed once more in veneration, whispering their echoed welcome. He bowed in return, in the manner of his homeland, returning their honor.

    ¡°I must confess,¡± he said, his voice booming out with more volume than he¡¯d ever possessed in life. ¡°I find it as surprising as any of you to be standing before you, a new type of being. I am stronger with your love and devotion. I am stronger for my convictions, and the efforts of those who came after me.¡±

    ¡°I hereby command my followers, and those who remain faithful of me, to never use their power to harm the innocents of the world. In battle, they must be protected above all else. To those who would break this law, they will be hunted down and imprisoned for their crimes.¡±

    The crowd muttered in shock and surprise. It was the first commandment of its kind. Previously, members of the Divine race remained as distant figures, speaking only to the most devout of their followers. They had never issued a command to the world at large. In future years, this moment would be remembered forever, as the creation of the first Divine Law, a set of rules that everyone was bound to, even the Kings and Queens of the world. Shigeru would demonstrate himself, and with the help of his followers, what happened to those who decided to ignore the edicts of the Divine.

    ¡°I, Shigeru Tokugawa, name my son, Tobito Tokugawa, as my Champion and successor. May my divine will be bestowed upon him and his descendants in the years to come, and may he draw strength from my protection.¡±

 Chapter 6

    The guard shifted his feet, stamping them slightly to get some feeling back in them. Just two hours, he told himself. Two hours, and his watch would be over. Then he could go home and rest for a few hours. Pity he had to do it all over again the next day. He rolled his shoulders once or twice for good measure. It wouldn¡¯t do to get too stiff.

    ¡°Stop fidgeting so much,¡± his fellow guard, on the other side of the door, snapped at him. ¡°You trying to get us in trouble?¡±

    The guard sniffed disdainfully, then immediately wished he hadn¡¯t. The simple action, especially in the dusty antechamber of the Elder¡¯s meeting room, immediately made him want to sneeze. That would be a bad move. Disturbing the peace of the Elders while they were preparing for the invasion would earn him a one-way ticket to the dungeons. And that was if he was lucky. Rumor was the last man to displease the elders had been fed to beasts.

    While he was struggling with the overwhelming urge to sneeze, the door he was posted in front of burst open. The guard did his best not to jump, but to stand as if he¡¯d been expecting this change. A tall, powerfully built man burst out of the meeting room, pacing angrily away. Both guards recognized the thorny crown that was placed upon his head. They were already at stiff attention, but that pose became stiffer at once. Stephan Knarlick was not a man that appreciated sloppiness in his soldiers.

    ¡°Good evening, Your Grace,¡± the guards chorused, as they were expected to. The prince ignored them.

    Prince Knarlick took several deep breaths, an action which, as the guard had already noticed, immediately created the urge to sneeze. Which the prince promptly did. He let out an outraged yell, and turned back to the meeting room. He paused just inside the doorway, his head turned to the first guard, the one who had also felt the urge to sneeze.

    ¡°Something you want to say, guardsman?¡± He said, his angular face cruel and uncaring. ¡°Enjoying yourself at my moment of discomfort, are you?¡±

    ¡°N-no, Your Grace,¡± the man quickly replied. ¡°It is quite dusty in here. I sympathize with your struggles, Your Grace.¡±

    The prince stared at him in silence, his half-elven features twisted into a sneer. The guard wished he hadn¡¯t agreed to take on this shift. Well, he thought, he¡¯d done it. Twenty-four years of life, and he¡¯d finally done something stupid enough to get killed. It wasn¡¯t a good life. He cursed himself mentally. Why couldn¡¯t he have been born in a different country? He heard Knireth was a peaceful place, if you didn¡¯t mind the crazy war maidens. But no, he had to be borne into the Mitene Union. Worst of all, he had to be born in the Knarlick¡¯s land.

    ¡°You are aware I can hear your thoughts,¡± the prince said, his voice dry. ¡°You¡¯re a brave little man, I¡¯ll give you that.¡±

    There was less anger in his words then. He almost seemed amused. Frankly, this did nothing to curb the guard¡¯s fear. If anything, it amplified it. The prince was hardly ever amused. Maybe today was just a good day, he thought. Maybe the prince was in a rare good mood, and would forgive him the slip of the tongue. He was still thinking this comforting thought when he felt an odd tickling sensation in his stomach. That was odd. He tried to look down to see what it was, but before he could, his vision went black.

    Stephan Knarlick flicked his fingers, and the dagger returned to him from where it had stabbed into the guard¡¯s abdomen. He turned to the other guard, his face calm and collected once more. ¡°Get that fool out of here, and find someone to fill his post. Or you¡¯re next.¡±

    He ignored the salute that was given in his direction, and returned to the meeting room, closing the double doors behind him. He let out a sigh of impatience as he stared around the room. He¡¯d stormed out in frustration. What had happened to irk him so badly? Ah, yes. The Elders. The highest power in the Union, apart from his father. They advised the leader and used their considerable influence to enforce his orders. They were the ultimate ruling body, and they were all petulant old men. Well, four men and one woman, who happened to be his least favorite.

    ¡°Finished with your temper tantrum?¡± That was her now. Elder Zolda, the youngest and most cunning member of the group. ¡°If you¡¯re ready to be a big boy, we¡¯ll continue.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t be so harsh on him, Zolda,¡± Said Elder Morrick. ¡°He¡¯s a lot on his plate, ever since his father fell ill. He¡¯s busy ruling the barbarians from five different territories.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ve all been busy since Lord Ferrin fell ill,¡± Zolda said. ¡°You don¡¯t see us storming out when we¡¯re told no.¡±

    ¡°That is because there is nobody to tell us no,¡± Elder Nortra said. ¡°Without the King here, we are the highest authority. The boy is used to getting his way.¡±

    ¡°Guard your tongue!¡± Morrick hissed. ¡°With his father ill, he is the ruling regent. If he so wished, he could strike you down where you sit.¡±

    ¡°He could,¡± Zolda said, her shining green eyes peering imperiously down at Stephan. ¡°But then who would convince the people that it is his divine right to rule?¡±

    ¡°That is enough,¡± That was Elder Nezca. He was the newest addition to their group, appointed by Stephan personally after his predecessor¡¯s death. ¡°Your Grace. Please, join us once more. Let us discuss what must be done.¡±

    The prince held the man¡¯s gaze for several seconds. He reached out with his mind, passing along a silent message. Is everything ready? Nezca¡¯s face didn¡¯t twitch in the slightest as he replied with a silent nod. Zolda, unfortunately, noticed this exchange. She jumped to her feet, one hand pointing in condemnation at her fellow.

    ¡°Nezca! What is the meaning of this? Have you been conspiring with the prince behind our back?¡±

    ¡°My title,¡± The prince said, his voice deadly smooth, ¡°Is King. You will address me properly, or pay with your life.¡±

    ¡°You are not yet King,¡± Zolda said, turning her glare upon him now. ¡°You are but a mewling babe, who plays at power while the true King rests in his chambers. You have no authority to command us while His Holiness still lives.¡±

    ¡°Correct,¡± Stephan said. ¡°But my father no longer rests within his chambers. He rests in the void.¡±

    Before Zolda could even form a reaction to the news, she felt the iron grip of the prince¡¯s mind around her own. Her very senses were strangled, focused to a tiny pinpoint of light, a thin tunnel that cut her view of everything but the man¡¯s eyes. She struggled with all her might, but she could not throw him off. He took several steps closer, bearing down on her with his sheer presence. His black eyes bore into her mind, into her soul.

    You will address me correctly, Elder Zolda. Either accept my rule or perish. Kneel. Or die.

    The other elders watched in silent horror as the two stubborn figures stared silently at each other. They knew what was happening. There was no mage alive who could best Stephan Knarlick when it came to a contest of wills. His mind was a steel fortress and an unbreakable spear. He¡¯d gripped her mind tightly, and only sheer luck could save her now. They waited for the conclusion, eyes locked on Zolda¡¯s stricken face. Finally, her lips parted, and she whispered something. And then she collapsed.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.

    Knarlick turned to face the other elders, who all hurried to clamber off their seats and stoop into bows of fealty. ¡°Your Holiness.¡±

    ¡°Good,¡± Knarlick said, and his voice was a purr of contentment. ¡°Now. As Elder Nezca so rightly put it, let us discuss what must be done.¡±

    ¡°Our two greatest enemies are the cub of Tokugawa,¡± Nezca said. ¡°And the King, of course. He is a gifted commander, who could devise a way to crush us if we are too hasty.¡±

    ¡°There is one other you do not mention,¡± Knarlick said. ¡°The Mind has a Champion now. He is a great threat to our plans if his loyalty lies with the royal family.¡±

    ¡°There is also Ciayol,¡± Morrick suggested. ¡°He is a powerful foe, and could wipe out a regiment all on his own.¡±

    ¡°Ciayol is no threat to us,¡± Knarlick said. ¡°We have gifted his god with important knowledge that should keep him distracted for some time.¡±

    ¡°The Tyrant Queen,¡± Nezca muttered quietly, and they all nodded. ¡°But if Gorteau orders him to fight¡­¡±

    ¡°He will refuse,¡± Nezca said firmly. ¡°He will refuse any order that does not come from Bahamut¡¯s will. He is a driven man, and powerful to be certain, but he will not care for us.¡±

    ¡°How can you be certain?¡± Morrick asked. ¡°The man has lived in Gorteau his entire life. Surely, if we attack, he will defend his home.¡±

    ¡°He cares not for the city,¡± Nezca retorted. ¡°He cares only that he fulfills his god¡¯s orders. He can receive those orders from anywhere.¡±

    There was a long silence from the others while they considered his reply. Truth be told, they couldn¡¯t be sure that any of the people they mentioned were threats to their plans or not. They were just the most powerful and influential people they could identify after years of espionage and careful study of the nation. The purpose of their meeting today was to discuss any potential threats and ways that they could deal with them. The death of Stephan¡¯s father left him in charge, and he could finally realize his ambitions of invasion, instead of being stuck forever just discussing.

    ¡°I will not repeat the mistake of my father,¡± he said, voicing his thoughts aloud. ¡°He was in favor of gathering more information before acting. The problem is that there is only so much important information. We must prioritize quick action. Gorteau has seen no trouble from us for nearly three years. If we act now, they will not expect it.¡±

    ¡°I agree,¡± Nezca said at once, perhaps a bit sycophantically. ¡°But to tell the truth, we should at least see to Bragg and Tokugawa. One of our elite assassins will do for the King. What should be done about the other two?¡±

    ¡°Tokugawa will be tricky,¡± Morrick mused. ¡°He¡¯s rumored to be a master of more than a dozen weapons and styles. I doubt we have many who could match him, and even then, he¡¯ll have allies.¡±

    ¡°We could hide the assassin amongst the armies,¡± Nortra said, speaking for the first time in some minutes. ¡°He can wait until Tokugawa is vulnerable, then strike amongst the confusion.¡±

    There were muted mumbles of agreement from them all. Truth be told, they¡¯d already made up their minds before the idea had been floated. There was a perfect candidate for the job as well. Kariva, a chaotic and sadistic servant of the Tyrant Queen Tiamat, was a highly-skilled assassin. She was as duplicitous as they came, but never crossed an employer. She was also expensive enough that very few could afford her rates. Luckily for Knarlick, he was the newly crowned King of a nation.

    ¡°But for Bragg,¡± Knarlick said, letting his words drag out. ¡°I confess, killing an Ancient is not an easy thing. No mortal has ever managed it, as far as I know.¡±

    ¡°But do we know with certainty that he is Ancient?¡± Morrick asked, his face skeptical. ¡°We¡¯ve only come to learn of him recently, haven¡¯t we?¡±

    ¡°They say he was born over a hundred years ago,¡± Nezca supplied. ¡°He¡¯s only well-known now because he was gone for a hundred years.¡±

    ¡°Gone?¡± scoffed Morrick. ¡°Don¡¯t tell me you believe that rumor that he was in the Ethereal Plane. Nobody could survive a hundred years of that, even an Ancient.¡±

    The Ethereal Plane was one of the few untapped secrets of the world. Only a dozen or so mages in history had ever claimed to have entered and survived, and fewer of those claimed to have learned anything from their trip. Stephan Knarlick was one of the latter, having accidentally traveled to the plain some twelve years prior. It is said that was where he learned to dominate others with his mind.

    ¡°If he is Ancient,¡± Nortra said, causing the others to glance around at him. ¡°Then we do have one man who could do the job.¡±

    ¡°Who?¡± Nezca asked. Then, as he met Nortra¡¯s eyes and understood the meaning, grimaced. ¡°Surely not. Are we that desperate?¡±

    Knarlick¡¯s head snapped up, broken out of his thoughts. ¡°Who are you speaking of Nezca.¡±

    ¡°Err,¡± it was clear that the subject made Nezca uncomfortable. However, he was terrified of disappointing his leader, so, after clearing his throat a few times, he finally spoke. ¡°We¡¯ve had a prisoner for about two decades, Your Holiness. He¡¯s an unusual type.¡±

    ¡°What is he?¡±

    ¡°If he is to be believed, he is the original head of the famous Rajlen Clan. But he¡¯s corrupted, sir, and completely mad. We can indeed mark a target for him, but we cannot control his actions.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s also unique in one other way,¡± Nortra said softly. ¡°He can nullify magic.¡±

    Knarlick jumped to his feet, eyes wide in shock. Anti-magic, while being a fairly new idea, was well known. There were plenty of spells that could be used to counter the magicks of another mage. But nullifying magic completely was thought impossible. It had been agreed long ago that such a feat was in the realm of dreams, never to be fully achieved. But if Nortra was to be believed, he could be a great weapon. To think that he¡¯d had such a treasure within his reach all this time.

    ¡°Can we be certain that he will hunt down Brag quickly?¡± He asked. ¡°Or is there a chance he¡¯ll take forever to do it?¡±

    ¡°Oh, we know for sure that he¡¯ll waste no time in pursuing Bragg,¡± Nezca said. ¡°We just don¡¯t know what he¡¯ll do on the way to him. He¡¯s volatile.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t care what he does outside of killing Bragg,¡± Knarlick said at once. ¡°Send for him to be released, and have him target Bragg.¡±

    The steel in his voice told the others it would do them no good to hesitate or discuss the matter further. They all bowed their heads in agreement, declaring that they would make it so. He dismissed them then, exiting the meeting room and castle, strolling outside at a leisurely pace. His father had always insisted that he travel with a guard, but he scorned the idea constantly. A guard was for a weaker man. He was not a weaker man. He was an alpha hunter, an unchallenged warrior-mage. He¡¯d traveled the world and even beyond to acquire his skills, and he had yet to find one who could best him.

    And yet, there had been one goal that had eluded him for all his years. The ultimate goal of any mage. To acquire the powers of the Mind. To become his highest servant, his Champion. Knarlick had read all the ancient tomes he could get his hands on, looking for the tiniest clue as to the fallen being¡¯s location. He craved the knowledge and had honed his body, mind, and soul to the point that he could carry Arcana¡¯s essence.

    Then, of course, he¡¯d received word that almost six decades before he could, another had already claimed the title that he wanted so badly. Samuel Bragg. And unknown nobody. But Bragg had vanished from the world, rumored to be dead. He had hoped again. He¡¯d renewed his search but to no avail. Now Bragg had returned, and news of his skill had spread far to reach foreign ears. Knarlick suppressed a flare of rage. He was the proud descendant of a long line of prodigious mages, the perfect blending of elven and human blood. Service to Arcana should have been his legacy.

    He¡¯d even gone so far as to enter the Ethereal Plane. The experience had warped him, to be sure. Strange entities in the plane had scarred and ravaged his mind, and he¡¯d only just escaped with his sanity. But the suffering had given birth to his greatest strength, the ability to reach out and touch the minds of others. To conquer them and bend them to his will. He was the alpha, and all inferior men would bow before him. He let out a long, quiet sigh. It mattered not. He would do away with Bragg, without having to lift a finger. Then everyone would know that he was the greatest mage.

    Miles away, Samuel Bragg, mid-conversation with a group of farmers, sharing his plan to make irrigation for the crops more efficient, stopped suddenly as a chill ran down his spine. He didn¡¯t know what had caused it, nor the sudden tingle of fear that encompassed him. Raw, mortal fear, the kind that only a struggle for his life could cause. But it was a peaceful day, and there were no threats around him. He shook the thought off and continued his discussion.

    Thousands of miles away, on the northern-most coast of the Mitene Union, mages reluctantly undid their seals, releasing the lock on an old door that had been closed for decades. In no time at all, they were dead, devoured by the monster that came out. He staggered out into the deep snow dropping to his knees and scooping the white powder into his hands. It had been ages since he last felt cold. Since he¡¯d last felt anything. Decades of nothingness, where all emotion had been wiped from him, leaving only one thought. Hunger.

 Chapter 7

    ¡°The key for this is patience. You don¡¯t want to rush the spell, or you¡¯ll lose control of the mana. Timing is important.¡±

    He paced around the group of students, his keen eyes glancing at each one as they struggled with the challenge he¡¯d set them. Well, not all of them were struggling. It was a new class, but he could already see the few who had a natural gift for this. That was due, no doubt, to the fact that the College had put more effort into fostering mages who could cast silently or use no incantations. It was the way that Samuel had learned magic, and he was already recognized as a master of the craft.

    As such, the Prime Magus had asked him to teach a new class centered around his style of magic. Samuel had been hesitant at first, not sure that he could be said to have a set style. But after a little experimentation, a few talks with Grimr, and considerably more time doing his own experiments, Samuel had come to realize that it was possible. It wasn¡¯t the idea of interacting with other people that had given Samuel pause, but rather the weight of responsibility that a teacher experienced. It was a different calling than he was used to, and he had virtually no experience in the field.

    His lack of experience had been a big setback in the first term of the year, but he took time to iron out the flaws in his teaching style. He found that he had an easier time of it when he led the class through practical demonstration, rather than forcing them to memorize theories. As Grimr had told him long ago, each mage develops a unique feel for their mana, so his ideas might not work for them. He had to explain the magic itself and try to lead them through the process. It had taken a lot of practice in the first term, but he was confident that he had it down.

    Now it was the second term of the year, and he had a few talented prospects. Ava Thunderborn was the first, a wild-haired Journeyman from the nation of Knireth. She¡¯d traveled from her home, on the most western coast of the world, and had applied herself with an intensity that the others in his class lacked. He knew that her goal was to master magic and begin educating young mages in her own country. Samuel recognized that thirst for knowledge and had accepted her into his class without question.

    And then, of course, there was Johnathan Moran. He was burlier than the average mage, a sign of his life behind a plow. He¡¯d been raised on the farm, and already had some skill when it came to interacting with plants. He¡¯d learned organically, and when he¡¯d signed up for Samuel¡¯s class, he¡¯d already been proficient at controlling his mana. This made him and Ava the standouts in the class, who only knew the basic principles involved in silent casting. Even with this first exercise, having them practice pulling, pushing, and spinning their mana, Samuel could easily spot their strengths, and, by respect, the weaknesses of the others.

    ¡°Stop!¡± He called, his voice ringing out across the training field. The class reluctantly lowered their hands, looking a bit disappointed. ¡°I thought I told you not to rush it. Connecting with your mana takes time. It is a delicate process that takes practice and patience. Observe.¡±

    He came to a stop directly in front of the class and closed his eyes. He didn¡¯t need to put any real effort into controlling his mana by now, but he felt this simple action would impress upon them the need for focus. He seized control of his mana, which had been swirling slowly in his own body, and expanded it outwards. It spread for a considerable distance before he stopped, easily encompassing the twelve spread-out students. They gaped in amazement as they watched the screen pass over them. Each new student, regardless of their individual skill levels, never failed to react in this manner when he demonstrated the basic spell.

    ¡°Have a guess,¡± he said, opening his eyes. ¡°What is the main benefit of extending my mana this way?¡±

    Silence fell upon the students. Well, he¡¯d expected that in any event and wasn¡¯t troubled by it. He swiveled his head to the side to stare pointedly at Ava Thunderborn, who was chewing her lip thoughtfully as if an idea had just struck her. She glanced up as she felt him watching her, and he raised an expectant eyebrow. She opened her mouth at once to reply, then hesitated, and closed it. Then, with a deep breath, she opened it again and spoke.

    ¡°You can sense anything that comes into contact with your mana,¡± she said, sounding uncertain. ¡°So by expanding it, you¡¯re increasing the range that you can expand it by?¡±

    ¡°You are partly correct,¡± Samuel said, smiling at the girl. ¡°We can only sense things that have an energy of their own, or else a mind of their own with this technique. Still, you got the core idea correct. Well done.¡±

    She nodded silently, obviously trying not to look too pleased with herself. He resisted the urge to smirk at that and turned to face the rest of the class once more. Then another thought occurred to him, and he turned to face Moran. ¡°Moran. What is the main benefit to using magic without incantations?¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re faster than the average opponent,¡± Moran replied at once. ¡°While they take the time to say an incantation, you are unhindered, and can cast right away.¡±

    ¡°Correct,¡± Samuel said encouragingly. ¡°But what is the main downfall of this method?¡±

    That stumped Moran for several seconds. After all, the students had taken this class because they believed nonverbal magic to be unmatched. In their minds, it was the epitome of magic and had no obvious downsides. But his question had prompted the thought to form in Moran¡¯s mind, and, with an encouraging nod, he urged the boy to give it now.

    ¡°Well, I suppose if you¡¯re not concentrated, your chances of succeeding in a spell are significantly diminished.¡±

    ¡°Correct,¡± Samuel repeated. ¡°Now for all of you. Listen to me closely, and follow my example. Close your eyes.¡±

    They did as he suggested without hesitation, closing their eyes and assuming concentrated expressions. ¡°Good. Now, imagine that there is a shroud of mist inside and around your body. It is cool and light.¡±

    ¡°Now imagine that mist beginning to move. However, this happens is up to you. All that matters is that the mist begins to swirl. Watch it spin.¡±

    This was the telling moment, he decided. It was the crucial step that showed who could harness control of their mana, and who could not. To his mild surprise, he saw more than a few fields of mana twitch. It could have been a flicker of their moods affecting it, or¡­ There! Six mana fields began to spin, incredibly slowly. Thunderborn and Moran were seconds ahead of the others. Thunderborn¡¯s aura, in particular, spun with respectable speed after the first awkward moments and began condensing. Then three more began to spin their mana, followed by two, and then the rest.

    Excellent, Samuel thought to himself, but he didn¡¯t make the comment. Instead, he kept his voice level and calm. ¡°Now open your eyes.¡±

    There were more than a few mutters of surprise as the students saw what they had achieved. A few turned on the spot, taken by the sensation of their mana whirling around their bodies. As was only expected, more than a few fluttered back to stillness as they lost concentration, but they still looked elated at the accomplishment. Samuel beamed at them in approval, then pointed a finger at Ava Thunderborn, snapping out an instruction before she could grow too comfortable.

    ¡°Push, Ava!¡±

    Acting purely on instinct, and before her confusion and doubt could register themselves, she complied. With the usual smooth expanding action, her mana flooded out in a thin dome, extending nearly three or four feet around her. She looked up and to the sides in shock, a shock that was echoed in the gasps and mutters of her classmates. A fierce grin flashed on her face, the joy that only learning a new skill could provide. Of course, the moment she focused on her own pride, the screen retracted. Her smile faded, and she looked panicked as she tried to force it out once more.The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry,¡± Samuel said, his voice softer. ¡°You did well. Now, all of you, let¡¯s try again. Remember, mana that is in motion is easy to control. Without motion, there is no intent. Without intent, there is no magic.¡±

    They gathered themselves hurriedly, focusing on their mental images. Only two of them needed to close their eyes this time to achieve it, a fact that filled him with hope. In no time at all, their fields of mana were rotating nicely, and a few even tried to push as Ava had. Slowly but surely, little bubbles were beginning to grow on the training grounds, surrounding wide-eyed and grinning students. Thunderborn and Moran, not wanting to be outdone, easily reached further than the others, about a dozen or so feet each. They grinned fiercely at each other, sharing in the excitement.

    ¡°Right, that¡¯s enough,¡± Samuel said. ¡°Excellent work, all of you. Feeling the pressure and flow of your mana is the first step to casting without incantations. Practice this basic motion for an hour each day, until our class next week.¡±

    They all muttered in agreement, offering their polite farewells. The one Nihon-Jan student in attendance offered a bow that he returned smoothly, and they all departed back towards the main building, talking excitedly amongst themselves about the lesson. Samuel grinned as he watched them leave, feeling a swelling sense of pride in his chest. He was still very new as a teacher, but already familiar with the fierce pride in his student¡¯s accomplishments.

    ¡°If I didn¡¯t know any better, I¡¯d say you¡¯re a natural at this.¡±

    Samuel turned to see a tall robed figure approaching him. The high cheekbones, faint elven features, and piercing green eyes identified the person at once. He offered a slight bow. ¡°Prime Magus. Good afternoon.¡±

    ¡°Likewise, Archmage Bragg,¡± Aren Gorteau said. He adjusted his noble¡¯s robes slightly and peered after the class as they walked towards the main building. ¡°They seem to have some aptitude for the subject. You must be proud.¡±

    ¡°Well, they¡¯re certainly capable of the basics, at any rate,¡± Samuel said nonchalantly. ¡°We¡¯ll see how they fare with the rest of it. Only four students decided to continue with my teaching after the last term, you know.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m aware,¡± Aren said. ¡°They are dedicated students, and they have a promising future ahead of them. Not unlike yourself.¡±

    Samuel ignored this obvious attempt to compliment and decided to change the subject. Aren Gorteau, younger brother of the current King, never came down to the College unless he had a reason. ¡°How can I help you today, Prime Magus?¡±

    Aren gave a slight wave of his hand to reassure him. ¡°I¡¯m just here on some routine business. Don¡¯t worry, I don¡¯t plan to take any of your time today. I just saw your class and thought I¡¯d stop by to speak. You¡¯ve been busy these past few months, it¡¯s rare to see you sitting still for a moment or two.¡±

    ¡°Fair enough,¡± Samuel said, allowing a grin to breakthrough. ¡°Which reminds me. I do have some business to attend to still today. If you¡¯re on your way¡­¡±

    He let the rest of his sentence trail off, and Aren took the hint. He gave a graceful half-bow. ¡°Of course. Good luck with your business, Master Bragg. We shall speak again in the future.¡±

    Samuel gave him a small wave as he departed, then headed in the opposite direction, towards the Proficient¡¯s dorm. At this hour, many of them would be in classes, he knew. A few would be studying inside, taking advantage of a free period to catch up on work. Others, those who were all caught up, would be somewhere in town, presumably enjoying a few hours free of revision. But he was looking for one student in particular and knew that he could find him in the dorms at this time.

    The Dorm Captain, a portly youth with a wispy beard, was snoozing lightly behind his desk as Samuel pushed the door open. He gave a slight snort and opened his eyes. Then, catching Samuel¡¯s appearance, he jumped to his feet, a stricken look on his face, and gave a quick salute. He was startled, not expecting one of the Archmages to show up in their simple dorm without warning.

    ¡°Archmage Bragg!¡± He exclaimed, his voice cracking slightly with tension. ¡°Good morning sir! How can we help you today?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s mid-afternoon,¡± Samuel replied dryly. Just how long had he been dozing? The Proficient looked aghast and adjusted his red robe. ¡°Where is Proficient Tomas?¡±

    ¡°He is in the upstairs study,¡± The nervous youth said. ¡°I think he might be catching up on some homework, sir.¡±

    Unlikely, Samuel thought to himself but said nothing. With a brief nod, he swept past the youth¡¯s desk and took the nearest set of stairs up to the second floor. Tomas had grown exponentially since he¡¯d joined the College, and, with Samuel¡¯s guidance, he¡¯d excelled in his studies. He was incredibly smart, and, given the appropriate amount of time to study, his magical potential had fully taken shape. Samuel knew though Tomas didn¡¯t, that the boy was marked for graduation at the end of the year, provided that he passed his final assessment.

    The study was silent as usual, save for the sound of parchment rustling and a quill scratching. Without a hint of surprise, Samuel saw the back of his oldest friend¡¯s son, his head bowed over a thick tome, quickly scribbling notes onto a single sheet of parchment. He¡¯d already covered two feet of paper, and his writing was minuscule. Even Samuel couldn¡¯t write as neatly nor as fast as Tomas, a fact that he still regretted to this day.

    ¡°Did you know that the Mitene Union launched an expedition just thirty years ago?¡± He asked, not even turning to see who had entered. This was an ordinary, routine meeting they had. ¡°They wanted to pierce the barrier between the material and ethereal planes.¡±

    Samuel crossed to the desk and picked up the tome Tomas was reading, turning it over to read the Spine. Mysteries of the Ethereal by Archmage Silver. Silver had been one of Samuel¡¯s teachers, over a hundred years ago, when he¡¯d first started his journey into studying the arcane arts. He gave an approving nod and returned the book to its original place. Then he sat across from Thomas and helped himself to some of the coffee that the boy had brewed.

    ¡°I heard,¡± Samuel replied noncommittally, putting his feet up on the desk. ¡°But that book was written eighty-three years ago. It certainly couldn¡¯t have told you about that. Where did you hear about it?¡±

    ¡°Master Wembly mentioned it in class yesterday,¡± Tomas said, not looking up from his parchment. ¡°He hosted a lesson on the ethereal plane, and I asked if anyone had ever successfully traveled there or not.¡±

    ¡°Anyone who has been reported to either died or came back too mad to share,¡± Samuel said, taking a sip of the coffee, smacking his lips in appreciation. It was excellent, as always. ¡°That¡¯s all I know on the subject.¡±

    ¡°Yes, Master Wembly said much the same thing.¡±

    ¡°Yet you think otherwise?¡± Samuel asked. He recognized that look on Tomas¡¯ face. It always showed when he felt he was nearing an answer that others said didn¡¯t exist. ¡°What makes you think that someone made it through that unspoiled?¡±

    ¡°Well, you did,¡± He said bluntly.

    ¡°That¡¯s only a theory,¡± Samuel retorted at once. ¡°Grimr thinks that¡¯s what happened, but there¡¯s no evidence. And as I¡¯ve already said, I don¡¯t have any memories of my time away from the world.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re not the only one I think went and came back unscathed,¡± Tomas said, lifting a hand to stop him. ¡°Tell me. How much do you know about King Knarlick¡¯s son?¡±

    ¡°Stephan?¡± Samuel asked, frowning slightly. The court had been keeping a close eye on the hot-headed youth who was heir to the Mitene Unions. ¡°Not much. I hear he¡¯s a bit of a paper tiger. Nobody expects him to be able to take over from his father.¡±

    ¡°That may be so,¡± Tomas said. He spun the book around and tapped a section of text with his forefinger. ¡°But this here says that Knarlick¡¯s son was part of the expedition into the ethereal plane. Despite how little we know about the ruling family of the Mitene Union, I don¡¯t think I recall anyone saying that he was mad.¡±

    ¡°But he¡¯s not a mage,¡± Samuel pointed out. ¡°So he couldn¡¯t survive such an ordeal, anyway. According to what Grimr told me, the ethereal plane feeds on your mana. If he barely has any, he would be killed. Perhaps it was another son, one who has been forgotten over the years.¡±

    ¡°People aren¡¯t so easily forgotten,¡± Tomas said gravely. ¡°Especially if they¡¯re princes. I think it¡¯s the same man. Stephan Knarlick went into the ethereal plane, and came back with new magic.¡±

    ¡°Well, I look forward to hearing how you prove that,¡± Samuel said, knowing when to stop arguing on an impossible target. He drained his cup and stood. ¡°But for now, I need your help.¡±

    ¡°What could you possibly need my help with right now?¡± Tomas asked. ¡°I¡¯m up to my ears in research here.¡±

    All voluntary, Samuel thought but didn¡¯t say. ¡°I need your experience as a merchant. You agreed that in return for me teaching you from time to time, you¡¯d work as my apprentice and assistant.¡±

    Tomas nodded slowly, not sure where this was heading. ¡°I did. What do you need me to do?¡±

    ¡°Well, as you¡¯ve noticed, I¡¯ve left you alone for the most part,¡± Samuel said with a grin. ¡°But now I¡¯m opening a shop in the Market District. I¡¯m going to start selling maps, enchantments, and other general magical tools. I need you to run the store for me.¡±

 Chapter 8

    The King requires your presence for an important matter, at your earliest convenience. Bora Bora hated the very idea of that fat lazy monarch summoning him anywhere. That he had to obey the orders of a stranger boiled his very blood. He should be making preparations for the march against Tiamat, not pandering to the whim of the King and his sodding court. But, as the High Priest had said, it was important to keep the court happy, so that they could continue to operate the way they wanted.

    The guards stationed in front of the palace¡¯s huge double doors looked askance at his appearance, clad as he was in his armor, and gripping the staff of his heavy scythe. They were reluctant to allow someone, even the Champion of a deity, to enter the fortified building in such a warlike appearance. One of them, braver than the others, stepped quickly to the side to block his path. Bora Bora paused in his stride, less out of respect and more out of surprise that someone would dare stall him.

    ¡°You¡¯ll need to surrender that weapon before entering the palace, Master Ciayol,¡± the guard said. So the fool did know who he was, Bora Bora thought. Well, it wasn¡¯t as if the demand was unexpected. With a quiet inner sigh that the man didn¡¯t notice, he handed the weapon over without hesitation. The guard looked more surprised than ever, but nodded, trying to keep up a stern, unbending image. ¡°Very well. You may go inside.¡±

    Bora Bora only wasted just enough time to sneer at the guard before accepting the invitation, and shoving one of the doors open. It creaked as only old doors could, though the fact that they were closed at this time of the day did raise his eyebrow. In normal circumstances, the doors would remain open, albeit guarded, so that merchants and tradesmen could access the building. It was only to be closed in the event of an attack. As he hadn¡¯t seen evidence of enemies or fighting on his way up the hill, he could only surmise that the King was feeling jittery.

    Two more doors between him and the palace¡¯s heart, the throne room. Predictably, at the next door, there was a small squadron of guards ready to escort him. He submitted, reluctantly, to a search, to ensure that he wasn¡¯t hiding any other weapons. He made no secret of his impatience during the entire process. As if he¡¯d be so duplicitous as to conceal a weapon. If he¡¯d wanted to, he could have carved his way directly to the throne room, cutting down all of the weak men who stood before him. Finally, he passed through the second set of doors and walked the short distance to the third and final, the doors that blocked access to the throne room.

    At his appearance, a steward jumped to attention and hurriedly slipped through the doors to the room beyond. Bora Bora snorted in disgust. The stiff, formal behavior of court wore on his nerves. He decided that enough was enough. He¡¯d get through to the heart of this meeting, and get it over with. Ignoring the surprised shouts of his armed escort, he strode forward and shoved the door open, narrowly missing the steward with the oaken slabs. The little man had been partway through announcing his arrival. Pity, he thought with a smirk. Might as well introduce himself now.

    ¡°You wanted to see me?¡± He asked, making no effort to bow or offer polite honorifics. ¡°I am a busy man, King Gorteau.¡±

    As he expected, his brazen manner immediately caused disorder among the counselors gathered in the throne room, not to mention the King himself. The monarch shot to his feet at once, his face purpling with anger. He pointed one fat finger at Bora Bora, nearly stammering with indignation as he tried to find adequate words to express the severity of his sin.

    ¡°Yes, yes,¡± Bora Bora said with an air of exhaustion. ¡°How dare I break formal protocol! How dare I address my ruler and monarch in such a familiar manner! Save your breath. Why am I here?¡±

    The counselors looked on in abject horror. Men had been executed for less than that. But there was something about the deadset red eyes of the man before them that said violence would not be a good idea. It would probably only end horribly. Bora Bora recognizes that fear. It was identical to the fear that showed in the men and women he killed in battle. One of the men, easily recognizable as the King¡¯s younger brother, rose to his feet, his voice rising to quell the outburst.

    ¡°That¡¯s enough!¡± He snapped, and silence fell at once. ¡°Master Ciayol, you are the guest of the King, and I must request that you remember that. Put your dislike to the side, and afford him the basic respect that his position demands.¡±

    Bora Bora stared curiously at the Prime Magus, noting the steel in the man¡¯s eyes. At last, here was a man he could understand. He¡¯d worked his way to the power he held now, the power that he could smell rolling off his skin. He could always recognize a kindred spirit. He offered him a silent nod. Not a bow, nor concession, but a simple acknowledgment that he would honor his request. Aren Gorteau nodded in response and settled himself beside his brother once more.

    ¡°To what purpose was I summoned, Your Majesty?¡± He asked, bobbing his head in a short gesture that could almost be considered a bow. ¡°As you are doubtless aware, I am preparing for a war, one that I will be leading for my lord Bahamut.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Johnathan Gorteau said shortly, his temper still high. ¡°I know what you and your fellow savages have planned. There is no doubt that you have the strength necessary to lead such an effort. That¡¯s why I summoned you.¡±

    Bora Bora¡¯s eyebrow twitched slightly, but he showed no other expression. ¡°What would you ask of me?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m placing you in command of a battalion of my soldiers, Master Ciayol. We are nearing war with the Mitene Union, and a draft is already in place. It is time for you to do your part for your country.¡±

    That took Bora Bora by surprise. He¡¯d known of King Gorteau¡¯s greed and lust for power, but even this was going far for the man. Manners be damned, he thought. With a slight twitch of his fingers as if to summon his weapon from where it was stashed, he drew himself up to his full height. His presence seemed to expand as he did so, and the people nearest to him shifted uncomfortably in their seats, mice before a lion. The most contemptuous sneer he could muster formed on his face, and he took a deep breath.

    ¡°No.¡±

    The King¡¯s face, which had slowly been receding to its pale complexion, immediately shot back to purple, and then past it to red. He was positively incandescent with rage. He jumped to his feet, his many chins wobbling with the effort, and pointed down at Bora Bora once more.

    ¡°This is not a request, you lowborn cur!¡± He screeched. ¡°I am the lord of this realm, the eldest heir to a long line of rulers! My line was clad in royalty while your bloodline was rolling around in the filth! You will obey me!¡±

    What an impassioned delivery, Bora Bora thought. Pity, it meant nothing to him. He had no family to be offended for, nor any pride to injure. He lived only for the contest of battle, and the hunting of his deity¡¯s enemies. But he had to admit a slight sense of pleasure in watching the fat man jump up and down in impotent rage at his refusal. ¡°No.¡±

    Goaded beyond reason, the King shouted at the guards that surrounded Bora Bora. ¡°Seize him!¡±

    Before the nearest man had taken even one step towards him, Bora Bora let out a piercing whistle and flicked his fingers, pulling his weapon to him. He offered the King¡¯s brother a brief nod, and Aren stood uncertainly, sure he knew what was to come. With a loud bang, the throne room doors burst open, and the great scythe flew into the room, spinning slightly as it raced towards its master. Inches from Bora Bora¡¯s hand, however, it was struck down by some invisible force, and slammed into the marble floor by the blade, sinking nearly two feet. He grimaced with effort, realizing that he couldn¡¯t pull it free.Stolen novel; please report.

    On the dais, Aren Gorteau had both hands extended, exerting a downward force on the weapon. He was a highly gifted mage, one of a select few who could tame such a powerful weapon. Grinning with the pleasure that only battle could bring him, Bora Bora released his weapon, striking out left and right with his bare hands. Guards fell all around him, unable to draw their weapons to defend against his attacks. In seconds, the armed men were comatose on the marble, leaving Bora Bora alone, glaring up at the dais with obvious bloodlust.

    ¡°I¡¯ll let that insult slide,¡± he said, the hiss of his voice even more prominent. ¡°Do not make the mistake of repeating it.¡±

    Without another word, he turned on his heel and exited the room. Nobody made a move to follow or apprehend him, which was only expected. He¡¯d let the guards off lightly, only knocking them out instead of killing them. It wasn¡¯t their fault that they were led by an incompetent fool, after all. Once outside the palace, Bora Bora gathered his thick cloak around himself and gave a casual flick of his fingers. The scythe returned to him easily then, now that Aren had released it. Ignoring the shocked murmurs of the civilians he passed, he made his way back to the temple.

    Samuel leaned against the pillar, idly biting the nail of his thumb as he watched people pass him by. He tried to keep as low a profile as possible since he was technically in enemy territory. After his discussion with Tomas, he¡¯d continued to grow curious. What if the boy had been right? Could the eldest son of King Knarlick be a mage? More accurately, could he be the one person alive who had successfully traveled to the ethereal plane and back? Samuel had to know, which meant that he had to see the prince with his own eyes. Wrapped in illusion magic, Samuel had disguised his appearance and teleported to the Mitene Union, making his way into the palace as a common merchant.

    Everyone he could see in plain view consisted of the usual crowd, workers, soldiers, and the occasional laborer performing repairs to the buildings. The weather was frigid in this part of the world despite the lack of snow, and his breath hung in the air before him. It was an entirely different culture from the more temperate nation of Milagre, from the weather to the people. They all spoke in a tongue he didn¡¯t know. Conversing, laughing, yelling, and whispering. He didn¡¯t understand a fragment of it.

    And so he focused on those things he could recognize. Armed men on patrol, heading in and out of the central palace complex. Samuel could see the runes inscribed on the entrances of the complex. His illusion magic would fail as soon as he got within their range, and they would likely prevent him from teleporting past. He could use World Shift, the spell that Arcana had taught him, but even that was too risky, as it could reveal his presence. Experience had already taught him that Ancients were viewed as great threats when they used the magic of Ahya. He¡¯d have to rely only on his eyes and ears here and hope that he could glean some useful information.

    It took him nearly an hour, but eventually, he realized that there was a simple solution to the language barrier. A simple set of runes was inscribed behind his ears, and he could deduce the meaning of the words spoken around him, even if he didn¡¯t understand the meaning. Runes were useful for a great many things, he reflected, as the words of the civilians and soldiers around him suddenly came into sharper focus.

    ¡°War preparation is draining our resources¡­.¡±

    ¡°Jerrik says he¡¯s safe. He¡¯s been training with¡­.¡±

    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t let the boys out of the house, Njorka, else they¡¯ll get snatched up by the army. The King¡­.¡±

    There was so much conversation going on around him that he couldn¡¯t make out any single voice and focus on it. The owners of those voices were constantly on the move, and despite his sharpened senses, he knew that he couldn¡¯t listen in on dozens of people at once. So he focused on that last snippet he¡¯d picked up, frowning slightly. What was this about a war? Young men were being taken by the military?

    ¡°Don¡¯t be stupid, Mona. If the corporals find out that I¡¯m hiding able-bodied soldiers, we¡¯ll all be put to death. All we can do is pray.¡±

    ¡°Dangerous words on their own. The new King doesn¡¯t take too kindly to the old faith. Keep those thoughts to yourself, if you value your neck so much.¡±

    New King? Samuel was sure that Stephan¡¯s father was still alive. He hadn¡¯t heard anything to contradict that. But, as if on cue, the gates to the palace opened, and a large body of troops exited, escorting a man he had no trouble recognizing. Stephan Knarlick, half-elf and firstborn of King Knarlick, was sauntering out across the exterior courtyard. Of course, Samuel noticed the ornament on his head. It was the famous thorned crown of the Mitene Union, a symbolic peace that represented the strength of the tribes who had gathered into the coalition.

    So he was the king now, Samuel thought with a frown. He wondered how the previous ruler had died but decided that it was immaterial. The old King had been reluctant to declare war against Gorteau, recognizing its strength and attempting to salvage their frayed relationship. He had a nasty feeling that Gorteau¡¯s ambassadors wouldn¡¯t return home from their trip. But what was troubling most, at least to Samuel, was the dense aura of power that surrounded Stephan. Everything he¡¯d heard about the man had been false. His mana was like an iron fortress around him. Only a master mage could achieve that.

    His stomach tightened suddenly. Stephan¡¯s eyes had flicked across the faces of the peasants around him and lingered on Samuel¡¯s face just a fraction of a second longer than the others. Had he seen through the illusion? No, Samuel reassured himself. Only an Ancient would be able to identify him, and he was certain that Knarlick was an ordinary mortal. He was powerful, but he lacked the identifying markers of the Ancient race. He did his best to look unassuming and insignificant, resisting the urge to sigh in relief as the cold grey eyes continued past him. Well, he thought, he¡¯d learned what he¡¯d wanted to learn. Time to go back home and report his findings.

    He¡¯d taken no more than two or three steps when he felt a sudden pain in his head. It was as if someone was chiseling into the back of his skull, attempting to break into his mind. Then the pain broadened, becoming a pressure that enclosed his mind completely. Without knowing how he was certain that this was Knarlick¡¯s doing. He whirled around and saw the prince, stopped in the middle of the small street, staring directly at him.  The pressure increased, and he felt as if his very soul was being scanned, checked for secrets.

    Ah. The voice sounded in the deepest reaches of his mind, reverberating through his skull like a war drum. You¡¯re the one I¡¯ve heard so much about. Samuel, is it? So kind of you to come all this way for a visit. Samuel shook his head furiously, trying to think of some way to throw off this unknown style of magic, to take control of his mind once more. But he couldn¡¯t shake free. The prince had him locked in place, keeping him stuck with just the weight of his iron mind.

    I don¡¯t know what you hoped to accomplish by spying on me, but I can assure you that none of what you¡¯ve seen will ever reach your King. But I am not a cruel man. I will give you a choice. Swear fealty to me, here and now, or die. Here and now.

    Samuel could only think of breaking free. With a powerful, painful wrench, he pulled as much mana as he could into his head, creating a protective shield against Knarlick¡¯s hold. The pressure lightened slightly, and he could feel some of his control returning. He sent a mental message back. You¡¯ve been to the ethereal plane.

    That¡¯s what you care about? The voice was half incredulous, half amused. Yes, Champion of Arcana. I have traveled where no man has tread before, and become stronger for it. I possess magic you cannot know.

    Maybe, for now, Samuel threw back. He could feel the pressure reducing more. This might be his only chance for escape. Through a blur, he could see several of the soldiers branching out and approaching, clearly aiming to surround and bind him. Or kill him. Stephan for his part was pacing deliberately forward, the pressure of his mind growing in waves. As fast as he could, between waves, Samuel threw off his grasp, and felt his way into nothingness, letting his mana carry him far away. In the blink of an eye, Stephan Knarlick vanished from view.

    He¡¯d returned, shaky and unstable, to the library in the College, startling several students who were studying in the late evening. They gave shouts of surprise as he appeared suddenly, losing his balance and slamming into a desk. The pressure from Knarlick¡¯s mind was gone now, and he lowered himself to the ground, chest heaving. So Tomas had been right, he reflected. He knew unique magic, from the ethereal plane, and was the first entity in Ahya to bring that magic over. He wasn¡¯t only a mage, but the single-greatest that Samuel had ever seen. And worst yet, he was leading an army to invade Gorteau.

 Chapter 9

    Samuel and Tobi approached the massive double doors of the palace, noting with curious looks how tightened security was. The palace was almost always heavily attended by the armed members of the King¡¯s Guard, to be sure, but today there was an extra layer of tension that had never been present. There were men running back and forth, even sergeants calling out orders to the men. It was a great deal of noise and chaos that disrupted the otherwise peaceful early morning.

    ¡°Halt!¡± One of the guards, a sergeant by his insignia, moved to block Tobi and Samuel¡¯s path, one hand held out. ¡°Apologies, Lord Bragg, Master Tokugawa. The palace is under strict lockdown, and is off-limits to everyone.¡±

    ¡°What has happened?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°Everyone seems highly energetic this morning.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s not for me to discuss,¡± the sergeant said, ¡°Until the King decides to make a public statement, that remains classified. Please, return to your estates.¡±

    ¡°The King is expecting us,¡± Tobi said stiffly. He cocked his chin up a little higher, assuming a very stubborn air. ¡°He summoned us himself, and now you¡¯re telling us we can¡¯t enter?¡±

    The guard¡¯s face blanched slightly as he regarded Tobi. He was still highly suspicious, but looked a little upset at his haste words. ¡°I have no way of knowing that, Master Tokugawa. Please understand.¡±

    Samuel, growing slightly impatient, cast a quick spell to notify Aren Gorteau that they had both arrived, and were held up at the entrance. Then he turned to the guard. ¡°I¡¯ve contacted the Prime Magus, brother of the King. He knows we¡¯re here, and shall be out in a moment to confirm.¡±

    The guard opened his mouth to reply but was cut off as Aren appeared beside the man via teleportation. He looked exceptionally cross at the man, shaking his head. ¡°Why are you holding them up? We¡¯re on the brink of war, sergeant. Now is not the time to be harassing our best leaders!¡±

    ¡°Of course, Lord Gorteau,¡± the guard exclaimed, stooping into a hurried bow. ¡°I apologize for the insult, my lords.¡±

    ¡°No insult taken,¡± Samuel said lightly. ¡°You¡¯re just doing your job, and doing it well.¡±

    ¡°Be glad they¡¯re not more offended,¡± Aren said dryly. ¡°And get in touch with a messenger. You need to be kept up to date.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s no issue,¡± Samuel said, reinforcing the words with a dismissing wave. ¡°You mentioned war, Aren? Have you received new information?¡±

    He pitched the question to the Prime Magus with a pointed look, as if to remind the man that he had been in a hurry. Aren nodded curtly and gestured for them to follow. It was a relatively short trip from the palace entrance to the throne room, and they were uninterrupted as they tailed behind the Prime Magus. Several of the guards and soldiers on duty noticed the presence of Tobi and Samuel, commenting audibly to their comrades. Why had the King summoned an Archmage and the Captain of a mercenary group when the defense was of the utmost importance?

    They didn¡¯t have long to deliberate on the mystery of their summons before Aren shoved open the doors of the throne room. The large chair was located centrally on the dais of course, with Aren¡¯s much simpler chair on the right-hand side, but it was empty. The King was nowhere to be seen as well, but there were a few men gathered around a long flat table that had been placed just beside the dais. It had the appearance of a war table, with sand piled in set patterns to depict the majority of the countryside to the East. About three-quarters to the right side of the large sand map lay Jyrok, a military fortress on the north-western coast.

    The men stopped mid-discussion as Aren reappeared, bringing Samuel and Tobi inside. He wasted no time on the formal introductions that the court was used to. ¡°Samuel Bragg and Tobito Tokugawa, gentlemen. They¡¯re for their opinion and advice. They should be able to help us sort this problem out, and decide the next step.¡±

    One of the men, a corpulent, red-cheeked man with wispy black hair, rubbed his thin goatee reflectively. He was dressed in a rather expensive-looking suit of plate mail, and the crest over his heart identified him as a General. Out of all the others gathered, he was the only one who looked displeased by the new arrivals. Samuel recognized him at once as Lord Markus Rainhall, the current second head of the vast noble family. Samuel and the Rainhalls clashed constantly in court, due to his desire to improve life for all citizens, and their extreme reluctance to spend royal gold on the commoners.

    ¡°Is it necessary for outsiders to take part in this meeting, Lord Gorteau?¡± He asked, his high voice supercilious and condescending. ¡°Surely the mage and the monk have more, err, suitable tasks they could be performing.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll have none of that, thank you,¡± Aren said briskly, cutting the man¡¯s immediate response off with a curt hand gesture. ¡°Lord Bragg and Master Tokugawa are valued members of the city and fierce leaders. In war, I trust their opinion.¡±

    ¡°War?¡± Samuel asked at once, his throat feeling uncomfortably tight. ¡°Is it confirmed, then?¡±

    Rainhall scoffed at his ignorance, but both Samuel and Aren ignored the man. Aren nodded in confirmation. ¡°We still don¡¯t know much. Our messenger only returned an hour ago, and the man was too exhausted to explain everything clearly. All we know is that the Mitene Union has made the first move.¡±

    Samuel glanced back down at the sand map, the bits of information falling into place. Tobi asked the question that was in his mind. ¡°Has Jyrok fallen?¡±

    ¡°Not fallen,¡± Aren corrected him. ¡°A long campaign of subterfuge allowed spies to take the castle discreetly. Our man barely got out to inform us. We think his absence has not been noticed.¡±

    ¡°So they hold the fortress in strength?¡± Tobi asked, and the others nodded, Rainhall reluctantly. ¡°That is an important fortress. You should take it back as fast as you can.¡±

    ¡°We agree,¡± Aren replied. ¡°That¡¯s the main reason you¡¯ve been summoned here.¡±

    ¡°What can we do that an entire army can¡¯t?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°I¡¯m not exactly busy right now, but I¡¯m not a warrior.¡±

    Aren allowed a faint dry smile to form on his face and shook his head slightly. ¡°You¡¯re more capable than a hundred of our warriors, Samuel. As for what you can do that an army cannot, you can lead. You and Master Tokugawa.¡±

    ¡°No.¡± The single word, polite yet firm, came out of Tobi¡¯s mouth before Samuel could even fully grasp the meaning of what Aren had said. Everyone, Samuel included, turned to him in mild surprise. He didn¡¯t look the least bit regretful as he stared back at the generals and Prime Magus.

    ¡°No?¡± Aren asked, looking perplexed. ¡°I don¡¯t understand-¡±

    ¡°You intend to ask Samuel and me to lead your men into battle,¡± Tobi stated bluntly. ¡°My answer is no.¡±

    ¡°We weren¡¯t planning on asking, foreigner,¡± Rainhall sneered. Tobi spared him only half a glance before ignoring the man completely.

    ¡°Master Tokugawa,¡± Aren began, but Tobi cut him off again.Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.

    ¡°I mean no offense, Lord Gorteau. I am Captain of Issho-Ni, and my priority is the safety of innocents and the hunting of criminals. Our interests align now as always because there is a new batch of innocents to be saved, and a new group of criminals to monitor and capture. But I am not one of your generals or commanders. I act on my mission, nothing less or more.¡±

    The group was silent for several long seconds after this calm delivery, quietly weighing his words. He glanced at each member in turn, and offered a slight bow, then turned to leave. ¡°I will take my leave now, lords. Samuel, please be careful, and return to us whole.¡±Samuel wondered how he could have known that, even at that moment, he was willing to accept the position. He viewed himself as a lawful citizen of Milagre, and, as such, had a duty to follow the orders of those who outranked him. Aren was a member of the royal family, the second most powerful man in the nation, Samuel¡¯s superior as Prime Magus, and, more importantly, an old friend. He couldn¡¯t refuse this request like Tobi could. He offered his former apprentice a silent nod of understanding, and the youth departed.

    ¡°That is disheartening,¡± Aren said. ¡°I assume by the fact that you¡¯re still here, you are willing to lend us your aid, Samuel?¡±

    Samuel looked from Aren to Rainhall, then back. His voice was firm as he replied. ¡°Yes, of course, Lord Gorteau. It will be an honor to lead for my country. I do, however, have one condition, and I hope that you will honor it.¡±

    Aren waved a hand, clearly ready to do whatever it took to ensure his cooperation. ¡°Anything within my power, friend. What would you have me do?¡±

    Samuel lifted his right arm to point directly at General Rainhall. ¡°I will not work with Rainhall. His family has caused nothing but grief these past four years since I returned to Milagre. It is because of his family that the capital was attacked, and I cannot bear such constant insults if I¡¯m to work effectively.¡±

    Rainhall opened his mouth to protest, face red, but Aren beat him to the punch. ¡°That is easily done. I fully intend to put you in command of your battalion. Thank you, my friend. I feel much more comfortable knowing that I can count on you.¡±

    Samuel nodded, avoiding eye contact with the angry Rainhall. Doing his best to keep his voice level and calm, he gave a brief bow in Aren¡¯s direction. ¡°Very well. I should gather some more resources today, then. I will be in touch by the end of the day, ready to take this on.¡±

    It was a little exhausting, but the first step he decided upon was to visit his mind space. It had been several weeks since his last meditation session since he¡¯d been kept busy with planning his first few classes. It was his good fortune that he had a patient god, he thought. Still, he made a mental note to commune more often. Before secluding himself in the tower that he owned, he informed the school of his new responsibility, and that they would have to find a substitute instructor for the foreseeable future. They were understanding, if perhaps a bit disappointed.

    Once the heavy door closed and he was alone, he let out a long sigh. He¡¯d never imagined at the start of his life that he¡¯d be involved in such weighty affairs as leading men into battle. His dream had always been to travel and become a well-known author and cartographer. He¡¯d achieved that, of course, but it had come with extra strings that he never could have anticipated. From poor village mapmaker to famous Archmage and Champion of Arcana, he thought with a wry smirk. Grimr would be proud of his suffering.

    He sat down in the direct center of his tower, choosing not to take a seat in the comfortable chair behind his desk. Crossing his legs and closing his eyes, he began taking several deep breaths. One of the key requirements of meditation, as Shigeru and Tobi had explained to him, was to slow the mind down and enter a calm sort of trance. This was always the hardest part. His mind was constantly racing, toying with new thoughts or ideas, thinking over past actions, and weighing choices. Getting his mind to slow down was like blocking up a river with his bare hands. But eventually, he managed it.

    When he opened his eyes next, he was no longer in the tower. He was seated in the center of a new, more comfortable-looking room. All the furniture here, one couch and a few armchairs were worn, a sign that they were quite old. A simple and small fire burned in the grate, casting its light and warmth over the small room. He knew the surroundings well. It was his house of old, from the time before his mother had fallen ill. It was his most peaceful memory by far, and the one he liked to relive when he felt that the world was moving a bit too fast around him.

    He climbed to his feet slowly, peering around the dimly lit space. Something was off, he thought. He checked the kitchen, the small table where he¡¯d eat meals, and even the two bedrooms at the back of the building. There was nobody in sight, he realized. Odd. Could his younger self and his mother be out? No, he told himself. That was impossible. This was his mindspace. If he wanted the parts of himself to be here, they would be. He assured himself that there would be a significant reason for this, and cast it aside.

    ¡°Well,¡± he said into the thin air, ¡°This puts a damper on that plan.¡±

    He¡¯d hoped to convene with the parts of his mind that normally lived here. His younger self, while being a snarky, sarcastic, and annoying brat, was full of the kinds of thoughts that his mind often buried under trivial distractions. His mother, on the other hand, was a calm, soothing presence. Being around her washed away all the worries and strife of the day, leaving him relaxed and ready to take on a new problem. What was he going to do if they were nowhere to be found?

    His answer was to go to the source, the place where it had all begun. Exiting his mind-space, he moved to kneel before the altar of Arcana that sat behind his desk. He traced the symbol of the unlidded eye for a few seconds, wondering if perhaps this was a problem he should face on his own. But he couldn¡¯t afford to burn too much time on this, so he resolutely pulled the armchair around and sat in it. Staring intently at the altar, he once again slipped into a meditative trance. He blinked.

    ¡°I can see that your mind is troubled, young Samuel.¡±

    That was the voice he knew better than any else now. It was the voice of ancient wisdom, inspiration, and guidance. He turned slowly on the spot, his form drifting in mid-air, and turned to face his god. As usual, Isip was wearing a simple white robe over his thin frame, adorned only with a golden version of his heraldry. His plain brown hair was just long enough to nearly cover his eyes, which were the same glowing violet that every Ancient possessed. He was one of the first Ancients, alongside Grimr, and had been a guiding presence for the mortals of Ahya since before they could comprehend his presence.

    ¡°It¡¯s always troubled,¡± Samuel said. He wasn¡¯t scornful or angry, but it was a tiring fact that he was getting used to. ¡°But at least I don¡¯t have to explain what it is. Can you help me?¡±

    ¡°Hmm,¡± Isip said reflectively, shifting a few inches back as he surveyed Samuel. It was rare for him to move, the young mage thought. ¡°It is possible. You have grown considerably these past few years, and your mind is stronger than ever.¡±

    Samuel nodded. Nearly five years of growth since his return from one-hundred-year exile was bound to result in some improvement. It was small growth compared to the initial gift that Isip had given him, of course, but it had served the purpose of rounding out his skills a fair bit. He was a true master of manipulating his mana now, having increased both his efficiency and the number of spells in his repertoire. In that case, a gentle consistent incline was equal to a sudden upwards spike.

    ¡°Well, I think two new spells will do you some good,¡± Isip said. Then he tilted his head to the side, appearing to ponder something. ¡°Well, I say two, but to be more specific, it¡¯s two new ways to use a spell you already have.¡±

    That piqued Samuel¡¯s interest at once. ¡°Are you referring to my Counterspell?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Isip said simply. ¡°Its true name is Dominion, and counterspell is just the most simple form of it.¡±

    ¡°Dominion,¡± Samuel said slowly. A thought had just occurred to him. ¡°But isn¡¯t that the name of your unique trait? The ability to manipulate all mana around you?¡±

    ¡°Yes. But your Dominion is different. I was, or rather, am, Ahya¡¯s mind. My mastery is limited to the arcane. As you¡¯ve proven over the years, there are more types of energy than just mana.¡±

    Samuel glanced down at his hands and clenched them into fists. Body, Mind, and Soul, he reminded himself. His original, unrefined idea had been scorned by the majority of magic users. The idea that physical and spiritual magic could exist was laughable, as far as they were concerned. But with enough experimenting, practice, and visible evidence, Samuel had turned the perspective of many. Even now, young mages with exceptional physical attributes were being trained in new styles, in the hopes that they might make masters who could teach in turn.

    ¡°So I can control any energy,¡± Samuel guessed, sure that was what Isip had meant. ¡°I¡¯ve never attempted, but I¡¯m certain that my counterspell could work on ki and aura too.¡±

    ¡°That was my understanding of it as well,¡± Isip confirmed with a smile. ¡°But only time will tell. Now, open your mind to me. I¡¯ll share the knowledge you need.¡±

    Hours later, as the sun was beginning to drop below the horizon, Samuel was at the head of a large body of soldiers and mages, marching through the eastern city gate to a chorus of hopeful cheers and calls from the citizens. He turned to the south, seeing another, smaller force exiting the gate there. It was too far to make out any details, but he knew that it was a small army of Bahamut¡¯s followers, led by their Champion. Bora Bora had been exiled permanently for his actions at the palace and was forbidden to return. He was marching out into a brand-new life, where he could only count on his god for help. As was Samuel.

 Chapter 10

    The plains were bare, save for the occasional lone tree that broke the horizon. These were the few strong survivors, able to stand against the strong winds that came in from the southern coast. The salt normally carried by the ocean gales couldn¡¯t reach this far to kill the vegetation, of course, but it still seemed like a lifeless scene.

    This was an illusion, of course. The plains, and the tall grass that was the dominant feature, were home to a wide variety of wild animals, some prey, some predators. The latter was gone, however, scared away by the tramp of almost a hundred pairs of armored feet. The small army was marching purposefully across the plains, intent on bigger prey than any animal the plains might hold.

    At the head of the group, wearing the robes that marked him as Champion of Bahamut, Bora Bora kept up a brisk pace. He was unarmored, but he had his signature weapon, the great scythe clutched in his right hand. He moved with the driven sort of purpose that only a truly loyal man could know. He cared not that they¡¯d walked dozens of leagues to get here, nor that his men were beginning to slow down. It was only when one of his attendants, a broad-shouldered warrior in chain mail, cleared his throat to get Bora Bora¡¯s attention.

    ¡°My lord,¡± the man said apologetically, loathe to intrude upon his thoughts.

    ¡°It is noon. Time for the midday break.¡±

    Bora Bora looked around in mild surprise, as if he hadn¡¯t expected to find anyone else nearby. ¡°Yes, I suppose. Let¡¯s take a break.¡±

    The sighs of relief were muted, but present. Bora Bora chose to pretend he hadn¡¯t heard that, as he knew that keeping the men¡¯s morale high was of the utmost importance. Tiamat was rumored to have many fierce followers with her, and so the body of troops was needed for the brunt of the fighting. In addition, they were the main sources of labor, carrying the tools and food that they needed for a campaign.

    Firepits were dug quickly, and large swathes of long grass were cut to create a sitting area. Bora Bora lent his aid to this task, using the long blade of his weapon to clear great sections at once. The men thanked him profusely for the consideration, and he offered his most reassuring nod.

    ¡°Eat up while you can,¡± he said quietly, again and again. ¡°You¡¯ll need your strength before long.¡±

    Again came the gratitude, which he shrugged off. His consideration for their health did not come from a sense of concern, but logical reasoning. If they were exhausted and out of shape when they reached the final destination, they¡¯d be as useful as bags of rocks to him. Let them rest whenever it was possible, and they¡¯d be fresh, and make a great deal of difference when they were needed.

    ¡°How much longer now, my lord?¡± One of them asked, just as he was passing a small cooking fire. ¡°Will we reach the Tyrant¡¯s den soon?¡±

    ¡°At least three hours now,¡± One of his attendants said, freeing him from the inconvenience of replying. ¡°Mount Murgan is visible now.¡±

    At this, all eyes turned to face the mountain on the horizon, even Bora Bora. It was a daunting landmark to be sure, the only break to the clear blue skies. Mount Murgan wasn¡¯t the tallest in the nation, but, being so close to its base, it was hard to believe that anything could beat it. Even from miles away it loomed above them, a forlorn peak with a constant stream of smoke drifting out over the plains. It was a volcano, home to Bahamut¡¯s greatest enemy.

    Bora Bora clutched the staff of his scythe more firmly as he stared at the peak, knowing deep inside that his prey was inside. He¡¯d spend the last twenty years of his life training under Bahamut¡¯s guidance, gaining incredible power and prestige as a follower. His bloodlust, even at a young age, made him stand out among his peers, and his near-perfect track record marked him for high office from the start. He¡¯d been made Champion at the young age of seventeen after he succeeded in killing the previous Champion of Tiamat, who had attempted to destroy several temples in Milagre.

    He didn¡¯t know much about the previous Champion of Bahamut. It had been another of the Ancient dragons, who had retired after hundreds of years of faithful service to her lord, leaving the post open for Bora Bora. Nobody had seen her in nearly fifteen years, as she was rumored to have retreated to a cave in the countryside to rest and enjoy a few decades of peace. Bora Bora hadn¡¯t complained, as he¡¯d wanted the title of Champion more than anything.

    He¡¯d known from the very beginning what was expected of him. The wild nature that lived inside him had appealed greatly to Bahamut, who sent his best personal warriors to train the young boy. He was expected to be the best, the most elite warrior. He was trained to kill their order¡¯s greatest and most ancient enemy, the Elderdrake, Tiamat. He cared not for the religious fervor of his peers. He wanted only the blood and challenge of battle. Bahamut granted him both with ease, and in return, he continued to give his loyalty to the god.

    After making his rounds to confirm that the spirits of the force were good, he seated himself a fair distance away. At once, an attendant rushed over with a plate of food for him, and he tucked into the dried meat, bread, and cheese in silence. It was simple fare, but nourishing, and the meal allowed him time to think of the approaching battle. He wasn¡¯t sure what his life would be after this battle. Of course, he would continue to seek out new challenges, but perhaps Bahamut would have other plans for him.

    Either way, he thought, he¡¯d have to go elsewhere to pursue the next stage of his life. The soft King had banished him, after all, which meant that, if he returned to the capital, he¡¯d be arrested. He did not doubt that he could contest with any such attack, but a bloodbath in the capital might anger important people, which would cause problems for his fellow followers. That was a situation best avoided at any cost.

    He called the men to march once more after half an hour had passed. With long sighs and sounds of metal being collected, they set out once more. There was tack to be adjusted on the horses, water to be drunk from a skin, and tools to be collected. All told, the break took the best part of an hour. Bora Bora paced impatiently as the men gathered themselves, resisting, with some difficulty, the urge to race on ahead and get the fight started on his own. He forced himself to be patient. It was only a few hours away now. Then he could have his fight.

    The column of men made good progress in the last stage of the journey. Feeding off of Bora Bora¡¯s own eagerness, the men quickened their pace, their own excitement for the coming battle building. They were hard men, trained in a hard school by him personally. They even shared his thirst for fighting, though none could compare. Their fighting spirits were roused, and they were ready. In their excitement, the remaining three hours passed in a blur.

    The massive mountain was already teeming with activity as they arrived at the base. Hundreds of small to medium winged creatures were circling in the air, shrieking in hunger as they sighted enemies. For the most part, they stayed high above, though the occasional lone creature would swoop down to try and snag one of the men. Each was shot down with ease to come crashing onto the plain, screaming in agony before warriors converged on it and fell silent.

    Bora Bora paid no mind to the drakes as they attacked intermittently. His men were trained to fight the lesser dragons and suffered each engagement without injury. It was the initial moments of the fight, where he wasn¡¯t needed for much. His job would come soon when the greater threats appeared.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.

    There they were now, he noticed. They¡¯d appeared suddenly, a little higher up the slope, evidently exiting from some cave. They were armed to the teeth and dripping with bloodlust. So they had expected them after all. That was for the best, Bora Bora thought. He didn¡¯t like sneaking upon his enemies. He much preferred an all-out conflict, where his life and the life of his prey were pitched in. The true hunt.

    He tore his robe off with one hand and cast it aside, to make sure that his arms were free. Then he was off, sprinting away from the protection and hindrance of his men, charging up the slope with his weapon held high. Two drakes dove for him at once, and he cut them down with two massive sweeps of his weapon. They hit the slope with more screeches, rolling down to the base where they were swiftly dispatched.

    Another swarm of five swooped down, and for a moment, he was lost in a blur of leathery wings. The cousins of dragons couldn¡¯t use fire, but they had razor-sharp talons and teeth that more than made up for the weakness. That is if they were allowed to strike. A golden shell of light formed around Bora Bora in the last possible instant, repelling his would-be killers. Then he went to work, spinning his scythe back and forth.

    Just as he broke clear of the surge of drakes, he was confronted with yet a new monster. Much larger than the drakes, with bright red scales and foot-long talons. A red dragon. It lunged at him, massive jaws open to swallow him whole. He narrowly ducked under its maw, having to throw the scythe to the side as he rolled forward, under its scaly belly. Then he threw himself to the side as it slammed its feet down, and ducked the wing as it flashed around to try and clip him.

    The danger with Tiamat¡¯s dragons, as he had learned before, was their complete lack of fear. They attacked with their entire bodies, unperturbed by the chances of injury. This made them fierce enemies, wild animals who could move in a lethal ball of spikes and claws. Bora Bora was forced to run to the side as it continued its assault, ducking and jumping just in time to avoid each attack. He weathered the assault willingly, knowing that it was moving too fast, and would tire quickly.

    With a short whistle, he summoned the scythe back to his hand. It nearly cleaved two of the human followers it zipped past, and he caught it by the staff, spinning on the spot. The blade slammed into the dragon¡¯s head just as it opened its jaws. It didn¡¯t pierce the thick scales, of course, but there was just enough force to knock it to the side so that the large jet of flames missed him by inches. It also served to daze the beast, allowing him time to jump back.

    With a powerful twist of his upper body, arms, and wrists, he threw the scythe. It spun in a blur, slipping under the dragon¡¯s neck, and scoring a long, deep wound along its stomach. The roar of rage and hunger had a sudden note of terror in it now, and it took to the skies in an attempt to escape. Bora Bora let it go, knowing that it didn¡¯t have long, and rejoined the fight.

    The army of Tiamat¡¯s followers had descended the slope by now and entered into a melee with his men. It was a fierce stalemate despite the difference in the numbers. His force had formed a solid defensive square with the archers and mages in the center, keeping up a constant hail of death that punched great holes in their enemies¡¯ ranks. Yet their defense was not perfect, and more than a dozen had fallen already. Bora Bora rushed forward as fast as he could, throwing the scythe once more.

    The horizontal disk of razor-sharp metal carved out a decent space as it struck down half a dozen cultists, and before they could recover, he¡¯d called it back, only to throw again. He was unprotected as it sliced through their formation, but he ducked and rolled around their retaliatory attacks, unable to be pinned down. He was a whirl of black tattered clothing and flashing silver steel, cleaving down any who foolishly attempted to cut him down.

    His efforts lessened the burden on his men as the enemy turned to face him, and he knew it was time to withdraw. But not for long, and only to pull about half of the cultists away from the safety of their lines. He heard the shout of their leaders attempting to pull them back, but their battle rage was too loud in their ears as they pursued him, and they paid no mind. Then arrows and fire rained down from the back of his army, crashing upon them and sending them flying in an explosion.

    Bora Bora danced away, laughing at the screams of impotent rage at his trickery. In war, there was no etiquette. There was only the smart and the strong. He ran in a wide curving path, fighting off two more drakes to rejoin his comrades. The High Priest, located at the dead center, grinned fiercely at him as he appeared.

    ¡°Excellent work, my lord!¡± He shouted. He was only in a cordial mood amid battle. ¡°Much more of that, and we¡¯ll crush the heathens without fail!¡±

    ¡°Perhaps,¡± Bora Bora replied. ¡°But why hasn¡¯t she appeared yet? I¡¯m sure she wants to crush us as quickly as possible.¡±

    That thought hadn¡¯t seemed to occur to the High Priest. He frowned thoughtfully even as he cast another barrage of spells. ¡°Perhaps she is not here?¡±

    Bora Bora didn¡¯t reply for a few seconds, turning to face the massive volcano. ¡°She¡¯s here. I can sense her, even if it is faint.¡±

    ¡°Birds of a feather?¡± The High Priest asked.

    ¡°Hardly. She rules on rage and fear. She has no bloodlust because she¡¯s never had an adequate challenge.¡±

    ¡°Until you.¡±

    ¡°Until me.¡±

    He blinked. Was it just him, or had a section of the mountain just moved? He blinked again. Sure enough, a large section of the mountain, perhaps thirty meters in length and twelve in width, was shifting. It disturbed the earth around it, sending a huge wave of rubble crashing down the mountain. The creature was on its feet faster than he could blink, each massive step of its feet sending waves of shock throughout the land.

    ¡°Oh, dear,¡± The High Priest¡¯s face was white as snow as he glanced fearfully for the source. Once he spotted the creature, his mouth dropped open in horror. ¡°Mathadiel.¡±

    ¡°Tiamat¡¯s servant?¡± Bora Bora asked, clutching the staff of his scythe more firmly. ¡°How? I thought he would be asleep.¡±

    Both forces paused as the earth trembled around him, and the fighting came to a standstill as all eyes turned to face the monster. Even from a distance, it was massive. It lifted its head and shook its body to clear away the rest of the earth, then its wings flared out, casting huge shadows across the plains. Its roar ripped through the air, terrifying both armies. The followers of Tiamat immediately turned to run back up the slope.

    ¡°We need to withdraw!¡± The High Priest shouted. ¡°Fall back! We¡¯re getting the hell out of here!¡±

    ¡°No!¡± Bora Bora said, grabbing the man¡¯s arm to stop him. ¡°We can¡¯t outrun him. We have to kill him.¡±

    The High Priest was already shaking his head. ¡°It cannot be done. We can defend against him as we run, but no more.¡±

    ¡°This is what I have trained for!¡± Bora Bora snapped. ¡°To be able to kill-¡±

    The High Priest turned on him, his face steeled. He shouted over Bora Bora, a rare example of authority. ¡°You are trained to kill Tiamat! You cannot take Mathadiel! Now go!¡±

    Bora Bora¡¯s training asserted itself then, and he turned away from the mountain, tearing his eyes away from the ancient dragon that was now preparing to lift itself from the mountainside. The High Priest was correct, even if he didn¡¯t want to believe it. He was equipped with specific training and magic to kill Tiamat, but none of that would work on Mathadiel. It was an elite even amongst dragons, with the power to rival the Tyran Queen herself. His loyalty was ensured only because of her sorcery.

    ¡°It¡¯s the Tyrant!¡±

    Bora Bora spun around once more at the shout, just in time to see a flash of light from the top of the volcano. A huge cloud of rubble was sent flying into the air, and a burst of fire ruptured the air. Even from here, they recognized the multi-colored scales and rainbow fire. It was Tiamat herself. She wasn¡¯t as large as Mathadiel, but she still commanded a presence like any other.

    It was time for him to do his job, Bora Bora thought. Even as Mathadiel leaped into the air, aiming for the retreating group of men, Bora Bora was racing up the slope. Tiamat would take several minutes to gather enough strength to fly, he knew. Channeling as much power into his body as he could, he strengthened his legs, pelting up the slope.

    He made it just in time. It was just his luck that Tiamat would feel the need to scream at him as he raced forward, batting away her jet of flame with his spinning scythe. ¡°You foolish mortal! You dare attack my home? My brother will pay for this transgression with his life!¡±

    The threat was all he needed for more motivation. He reached the peak of the mountain, burning his energy recklessly, and leaped as high as he could. The blade of his scythe, reinforced with magic, slammed into her front right leg and stabbed deep, giving him an anchor as she leaped into the air. She howled in rage and pain and turned her great head towards him to unleash more fire.

    He was already up the back of her leg, and on her shoulder, dodging the fire. Calling the scythe to his hand, he began hacking away at her scales there. He opened large wounds after a few seconds of effort, ignoring the fact that she was carrying him far away from his men. But then she twisted in mid-air, and, having no balance, he was thrown off. He plummeted down to the ground, filled with impotent rage as his target flew away. It was all over.

 Chapter 11

    After only an hour of studying Jyrok, Samuel was forced to conclude that it would be a tough nut to crack. Its position next to the only large road and its proximity to the coastal cliffs was ideal. It had stood for over four hundred years, after all, and repelled many would-be invaders who had come by sea. Shame it hadn¡¯t worked this time, he thought. Now it was in the hands of the enemy. He could easily make out the scores of men camped on the hills around the fortress. At least eight hundred, he estimated.

    The design of the fortress was simple as far as defensive structures went. Built out of the dark grey stone of the area, the walls measured approximately six meters in height, spread between four tall towers. There was enough room for thirty men to stand comfortably atop the flat towers, to rain arrows down on anybody who sacked the fortress. A central tower, the keep, rose just a little higher than the others, almost lost to sight amidst the low-hanging grey clouds that seemed a permanent feature of the sky in this part of the country.

    ¡°Any idea what¡¯s become of the village?¡± He asked, of no one in particular. He knew that, on the other side, a small village had been constructed in the structure¡¯s shadow, housing some hundred villagers who worked the rough ground and hauled in fish for the settlement. It was about the same size as Harlest, on the southwestern coast. But up here in the north, the trades were a little different. It wasn¡¯t produced that was found here, but raw materials such as metal, coal, and gems.

    ¡°We received a report from Lord Tokugawa two hours ago,¡± one of his officers replied. ¡°He and a few of his companions managed to slip inside the village to learn more. For the most part, the villagers are left to their own devices. They are not being harmed by the invaders.¡±

    ¡°That will likely change when we begin our assault,¡± Samuel said pensively, rubbing his chin thoughtfully. ¡°Tobi slipped into the village, did he? That¡¯s not a bad idea.¡±

    ¡°We cannot hope to sneak men inside the castle, my lord,¡± his officer said, sounding apologetic. ¡°Their security is too tight, and they have killed anyone who has approached.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t plan on sneaking men in,¡± Samuel explained, and the man relaxed his shoulders slightly. Then he looked tense again as Samuel clarified. ¡°We¡¯ll be sending only one man in, to look around and lay a trap.¡±

    ¡°Who?¡±

    Samuel turned slowly to face the officer, a wry grin on his face. ¡°Let¡¯s pull the men back a bit. We don¡¯t want a stray scout to spot us tonight. And no cook fires.¡±

    The officer looked a little perturbed as Samuel dodged the question, but saluted nonetheless, and hurried off to extend his orders to the others. Samuel remained where he was, his eyes locked on the imposing fortress. He watched the movement of men on the walls and towers, observing their patrols and their patterns. It was as the officer had said. The security was very strict, and the men showed no signs of exhaustion or sleepiness. The guard must be changed regularly to prevent mishaps, he thought. That meant that sneaking in from the ground was nigh impossible.

    He spent another twenty minutes or so in his silent vigil, taking note of as many details as he could. He only broke his fierce concentration when one of his attendants, a man placed within the army to watch over him, approached with a plate of food. Samuel had protested vehemently to having an attendant at first, but he¡¯d been unsuccessful in dissuading Aren. The Prime Magus had insisted that this was traditional. The attendant took care of his basic needs, ensuring that he was in top form. So Samuel had finally agreed, on the condition that his attendant be a competent fighter at the very least. He didn¡¯t want to waste any time protecting someone when he needed all his power for the offense.

    ¡°Your meal is ready, Lord Bragg,¡± the attendant said quietly. Samuel gave a quiet sigh that the man didn¡¯t notice, and accepted the plate of food with a quiet word of thanks. It was stale bread and dry, tough meat. Far from the comfort food he¡¯d grown accustomed to during his life in Milagre, he thought. Still, it was better than the plain fare he¡¯d eaten before he¡¯d learned of his fate, while he was still a poor map maker in Harlest. He retreated a few dozen feet down the slope of the hill he¡¯d been laying on and sat down to eat.

    ¡°You go get some food for yourself, Edmund,¡± he told the attendant. Edmund looked resolute for a moment, but as Samuel stared at him pointedly, he accepted the order with good grace and a brief salute. ¡°Of course, Lord Bragg. Please enjoy your rations.¡±

    Samuel had to resist the urge to snort with laughter as Edmund retreated to the main force, and procured sustenance for himself. He was a former soldier with some aptitude in magic, Samuel had come to learn. Already an experienced warrior at thirty-four years old, he had enrolled in the College of Milagre to sharpen his arcane talents. He was unremarkable as a student but had nevertheless advanced to Journeyman rank already, so he had some skill. Samuel dismissed the thought of his attendant and wolfed down his unremarkable food in large bites, letting his mind wander freely.

    He wouldn¡¯t try to claim that he was exactly unqualified for the role he¡¯d been offered, per se. He was pragmatic enough to admit that he had a good mastery of arcane magic after nearly six years of constant study. He was even competent when it came to physical magics and fighting with his sword. His only unrefined skill was the ability to lead other men. But, of course, he had attendants and officers to aid him in this regard. Though fresh to the role, he did not doubt that he could fulfill it.

    The real struggle would be convincing the officers under him of his plan. He knew that they would view it as hare-brained, or even possibly suicidal. They might even try to stop him by force. But he also knew that, while unorthodox, it was a good plan. And as Grimr had once told him, success tends to make the unorthodox acceptable. He blinked, thinking through that last thought. He almost slapped himself on the head as he realized the path he needed to take.

    Setting the plate to the side and crossing his legs, he began to measure his breath. In. Out. In. Out. Within a minute, he¡¯d slipped into the by now familiar meditative trance, where he felt a vague connection to the various parts of himself; body, mind, and soul. He reached out with his mind and soul, casting in no particular direction, certain that he¡¯d find his way eventually. Sure enough, his focus snapped in the right direction, revealing a new scene to his eyes, or rather his mind.

    ¡°Grimr, I need a moment of your time.¡±

    Grimr was, as usual, lounging in the bowl of a massive, ancient tree. It was the first that he¡¯d brought to life after defeating Neratas, and it was the core of the forest. The ancient was in his human form, and appeared to be nothing more than a young boy with shaggy brown hair and dressed in hides. But then his face swiveled to look at Samuel, and the glowing violet eyes ruined the illusion. He grinned lazily, and clambered gracefully to his feet, pacing a few feet forward. He had the usual necklace of fangs around his neck, the memento he always carried, in honor of his fallen elder brother.

    ¡°Nice of you to pay a visit,¡± He said in his low growl of a voice. Yet another feature that hinted at his extraordinary nature. ¡°Well, you seem in a hurry. What is it?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m with the army, near Jyrok,¡± Samuel said simply. Grimr¡¯s face showed understanding, and he continued. ¡°The fortress is more solid than I expected, so I need to find a way inside without being detected.¡±

    Grimr appeared to ponder the matter for a few seconds, staring off into the distance just over Samuel¡¯s shoulder. Maybe he was peering in the direction of Jyrok, the mage thought. After a short pause, his mouth twisted in a grimace. ¡°That¡¯s a tall order. I remember the day that Jyrok was built. The architect in charge of it was no fool. He spared no expense.¡±Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    ¡°I could tell,¡± Samuel said dryly. ¡°But I thought you might have some idea for me, as an Ancient. Are there any secret passageways in and out of the fortress?¡±

    Grimr looked at him in mild bewilderment, before letting out a short bark of laughter. ¡°You¡¯ve been reading too many epic tales, young Samuel. That kind of fantasy does not occur in real life.¡±

    Samuel glared back at him, his mouth twisted into a disapproving frown. This only seemed to amuse Grimr more. ¡°Well, then, can you offer me any advice? You¡¯re as old as the land itself, after all.¡±

    ¡°That is true,¡± Grimr admitted, growing serious once more. ¡°But my experience as an Ancient won¡¯t help you. Whatever words I could offer, you already know. But I can provide some assistance in my second role.¡±

    Samuel was confused for a moment, then the realization sunk in. ¡°You mean as God of Nature.¡±

    ¡°Specifically as a Guardian. I am in tune with all the natural centers of the world, not to mention the hotspots of natural magic. There just so happens to be one very near to Jyrok, that you could take advantage of. I think you know the one.¡±

    ¡°The coastal winds,¡± Samuel guessed. ¡°I know they¡¯re powerful, but how can they help me?¡±

    Grimr did not answer that question directly. ¡°Do you know how the dragons used to train their hatchlings to fly?¡±

    Samuel shook his head, and Grimr continued. ¡°They would lay their eggs at the base of the cliffs, far from the reach of any predators. When the child hatched, it would use the winds to travel safely to the cliffs.¡±

    Samuel finally understood. ¡°I can use the winds to get high enough that I won¡¯t be noticed, then descend on the fortress.¡±

    ¡°Correct,¡± Grimr agreed. ¡°Though I should warn you, it is a dangerous task. The winds are more chaotic at the bottom, and it will take a great deal of strength and cunning to survive them and reach the upper drafts.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s enough for me,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I¡¯ll figure that out on my own. Thank you, Grimr.¡±

    The Ancient gave a lazy wave as Samuel pulled away, already stalking back to the tree to resume his dozing. Samuel blinked, and he was once again back in his body. To his surprise, Edmund had returned, with two of his officers, and the three of them were staring at him intently. They were obviously curious to learn what he¡¯d discovered, assuming he¡¯d been meditating. He stretched his legs back to their more comfortable straight position and leaned back on his hands.

    ¡°Edmund mentioned that you have a plan, Lord Bragg,¡± one of the officers said. ¡°Will you share it with us? We can mobilize enough men for it.¡±

    ¡°We won¡¯t need any men,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I¡¯m more than enough, and I have less of a risk of discovery if I go alone.¡±

    Their reaction was more or less what Samuel had expected. ¡°My lord! This plan is suicidal! You cannot hope of entering that stronghold and leaving alive!¡±

    ¡°How can you even enter?¡± Edmund asked. Out of all of the advisors, he¡¯d remained silent, offering the sensible question rather than give way to an outburst of emotion. ¡°Aren¡¯t there wards to protect against unwanted teleportation?¡±

    It was a logical assumption and an action that every force took when preparing for a fight. Samuel nodded in confirmation of his guess. He¡¯d scanned the fortress from afar before, and had identified the barriers that would stop a normal mage from entering without severe injury. Of course, he could avoid them by using World Shift. But that spell was unpredictable, and, even if he was successful, the risk of other mages discovering the spell was too high.  ¡°There are indeed such wards in place.¡±

    Edmund frowned deeply. ¡°Then you¡¯d have to approach in person. They¡¯d spot you at once. Even if you disguised yourself, they won¡¯t trust a stranger. Everyone is the enemy to them.¡±

    ¡°That is true,¡± Samuel said, heaving himself back to his feet with a sigh. If he didn¡¯t cut the conversation short now and leave, they¡¯d just delay him further with attempts to dissuade him. ¡°Keep the men back and out of sight. You¡¯re already far beyond my search radius, so I doubt anyone else could manage to sense you from Jyrok. Still, keep enchantments up to protect against God¡¯s Eye, just in case.¡±

    He directed this last statement to Edmund who, while still looking confused and obstinate, nodded his understanding and gave Samuel a salute. He was a good man, Samuel thought. He didn¡¯t waste time trying to convince Samuel not to go with his plan. He instinctively knew he¡¯d never succeed. Strangely, his acceptance seemed to take the edge off the indignant refusal of the others. ¡°May the God of War be with you, Lord Bragg.¡±

    Samuel gave a brief wave in reply, then took to the air. By now, his flight spell was almost instantaneous, and he had no problem clearing a hundred yards in just a few seconds. A smile touched his lips at the brief prayer. He was sure that Shigeru had been glancing down at him from the Divine Isles from time to time, and would doubtless be aware of what he had planned. If he were here in person, he¡¯d ridicule such a reckless plan, and then offer his aid so that its chances of success rose. Out of all the warriors, Samuel had ever known, Shigeru was one of the most impulsive. Even in old age, he thought, though he did his best to hide it from others.

    Samuel took a long, curving route to the cliffs, keeping his distance from the fortress. He knew he was in the right spot when his spell was no longer necessary to stay afloat. He canceled the magic, enjoying the sensation of unassisted flight for a moment before preparing to descend. He tried to part the surging winds with his mana at first, but they were too strong. That wasn¡¯t a total surprise to him, and he had a backup. He pointed his hands down to the base of the cliffs that he could barely make out and thrust one hand down like a sword.

    ¡°Hati.¡±

    The single word, spoken in the ancient language, was enough. The column of wind split in half, and he dropped like a boulder in their absence. The updraft was split all the way down to the base, and he caught himself with a summoned gust of wind just in time, directing himself to the side right before the column reformed. He alighted upon a nearby flat wet rock and immediately lost his balance as a lone gust of wind knocked him over. He slammed down onto his back and cursed, his voice lost over the howl of the many different air currents around him. Grimr had not been exaggerating, he thought. He could scarcely hear himself think over the tumult of sounds.

    ¡°Hati,¡± he said again, directing both hands forward. To his surprise, this had virtually no effect. Splitting one stream out of his way just made space for another to come through, which smacked him full in the face and knocked him over once more. Now it was the elbow of his sword arm that was sore from impact against the rock. He cursed again, despite not being able to hear it. Finally, he created a barrier around his body that consisted entirely of mana, with an extra effect to redirect any wind that hit it. Once it was complete, he shrank it to fit his body.

    That made a difference, he noticed. Random gusts still hit him, but they didn¡¯t upset his balance at all. Even better, the drain on his resources was negligible. That problem solved, he paced back and forth, staring up at the various gusts. He noticed that not all the air currents were permanent. Some were born, flew around until they hit something, and died. Their movements reminded him of the chaotic creature he¡¯d fought in Zaban with Tobi. Except that this was natural chaos, rather than the product of human failure.

    In the end, the answer was simple, if terrifying. He had to use his sharp senses and reflexes to jump into a stream right as it formed. He had to ride that stream until it crossed paths with the main updrafts and put as much force as he could into his upward flight. Taking a deep breath, he crouched low, his legs tensed, waiting. And waiting. And waiting. Then, he saw the opening and jumped. He put as much wind behind him as he could, giving him enough speed to punch through the outer edge of the stream. Immediately it accepted him and began directing him along its path.

    Now was the difficult part, he thought to himself. As it whirled around and around, nearly slamming him onto the surface of the cliff, he was tumbled about, spinning in every direction as he tried desperately to keep his attention focused on the main updraft. Now! He let out a massive burst of air, with just enough force to propel him out of his stream and into the main column. Then he righted himself in the more stable current and boosted his ascension with his own flying spell. In the blink of an eye, he was past the edge of the cliff. Then he was hundreds of feet above it, the combined forces of updraft and his magic having thrust him higher than should have been possible.

    The air was thin up here, he noticed. With a quick gesture, he condensed the air around him to make breathing easier. Then he set the wind around him to push him forward in a gentle glide, glancing down at the rocky terrain below him. He could just barely make out the cook fires of his force below, hidden from Jyrok¡¯s position by three hills. And there was Jyrok itself, about the size of his fist from this distance. He pushed himself a bit further to the side, then, with a deep breath to steady his nerves, canceled the spell. Much like Bora Bora did on the other side of the continent, he began to fall like a rock, aiming directly at the fortress below him.

 Chapter 12

    Samuel encountered trouble before he was even close to the ground. Several points of trouble, in fact. First, the eagle-eyes watchman who just happened to be glancing up at the night sky, and caught the barest flash of light from Samuel¡¯s spell as he began to slow down his ascent. Samuel dropped past him too fast for recognition, but he was still spotted. Second, there was the mage who spotted him when he landed just outside the central keep¡¯s door, and had the correct first instinct, which was to shout in alarm.

    Samuel darted forward before he could even regain his balance, and struck the mage down with one quick swipe of his sword. The mage only had enough time to speak the first few words of an incantation, and a single spark of electricity escaped his hands before he hit the cobbles of the courtyard. Then Samuel fired off two silent, nearly invisible burst of air that knocked the sentry down, silencing him just long enough for Samuel to leap up to the tower and cut him down as well. Then he snatched the man¡¯s body, as well as the mage, and darted into cover behind a pile of crates, his ears strained to catch any sound of further discovery.

    That was when he noticed the third bit of trouble. A man, crossing the courtyard with a very tired air about him, just happened to turn in time to see Samuel dart behind the crates. He blinked in mild surprise, then rubbed his eyes. He swore he¡¯d just seen something move in the shadows. He took a hesitant step forward, and then another. He peered into the shadows, trying to spot the movement again. A mere dozen feet away, under the protection of his very hasty invisibility spell, Samuel crouched, ready to pounce one more. But the man seemed to conclude that it had been his imagination after a long day and, with a shrug, turned and continued his patrol.

    Samuel let out a quiet sigh of relief. His infiltration was not off to a good start. Luckily he¡¯d managed to kill the two who had spotted them before they raised the alarm, but their absence would be noticed, sooner or later. Now there was an extra burden on his shoulders, the need to finish his mission quickly. He nudged the two fallen enemies further out of sight, and took off his dark blue outer robe. The garment was hemmed with golden thread, and would reflect any light he passed. Dressed as he now was, in plain dark grey tunic and pants, he was less conspicuous.

    He made his slow way around the exterior of the central keep pausing every once in a while to place runes in obscure, hard to notice places. This was the core of his plan. He knew that he didn¡¯t have a single spell with enough power to knock out the defenses. So his best option was to place as many of these explosive runes around as he could. Then, tomorrow, when the timing was right, he could trigger them from afar. Hopefully, they would have enough of an effect to let his force take the fortress over. Aren had informed him that any method of siege was acceptable, even destruction of the fortress itself. Anything to get the invaders out.

    Deep down, Samuel also had another motivation. This fortress, and the land around it, had a long history of cruel nobles. The people of the nearby village had often suffered due to the noble house¡¯s greed, often spending entire winters starving as the ruler of the castle gorged himself. Samuel sympathized with their plight and, while their conditions were much better now with the Rainhall family having lost a good bit of their authority, he still wanted to ensure that it could never happen again. This siege provided him the perfect opportunity to take his first palpable strike against the Rainhall family.

    Once the keep was finished, he broadened his path, darting back and forth across the walkways to place more runes. He moved like just another shadow in a courtyard full of dark patches, sometimes even passing directly behind patrolling soldiers without drawing attention. He wasn¡¯t the most stealthy, but he quickly found his groove, relying on darkness and the occasional magical distraction to pass unnoticed. After an hour, he wagered that he¡¯d covered about three-quarters of the fortress. All that was left was the main area, in front of the central keep. It would be harder to avoid detection there.

    ¡°You there!¡± The raised voice made the hairs on his neck shoot straight up, and he gave a guilty start. Not the right reaction, he thought with a silent curse. Still, he turned around, forcing a jovial smile onto his face. Half a dozen men were standing several yards away from him. The leader, the one who had challenged him, was dressed in full plate mail and holding a heavy broadsword. Around him were three warriors and two mages.

    ¡°Good evening, Commander!¡± Samuel said, bringing one hand up in a salute. Couldn¡¯t hurt to try and bluff his way out, he thought. He noticed that the two mages had their hands raised, dripping with mana, ready to strike. ¡°What can I do for you, sir?¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t try to fool me,¡± The man said, his voice as cold as ice. ¡°I know you¡¯re not one of my men. Did you think I wouldn¡¯t recognize you?¡±

    Samuel cursed inwardly. The one time that he would prefer to be anonymous, he had to be instantly recognized. He abandoned the smile and stood straighter. ¡°Worth a try. So, what¡¯s going to happen now? I¡¯d advise you let me leave in peace.¡± He tried to make his face as stern as possible, then, added, ¡°If you value your life, that is.¡±

    ¡°Not a chance,¡± the man said. ¡°Contain him!¡±

    At the order, the two mages launched their spells. They were fast, Samuel thought. Nearly as fast as he was. He conjured a barrier just in time to protect against the flood of mana they sent his way. Then, as the mana solidified into a barrier of its own, he realized his mistake. They hadn¡¯t been trying to attack him. They¡¯d trapped him in place for the warriors. The commander stepped forward at once, lowering the point of his broadsword and thrusting into the sphere of air. It even sliced through Samuel¡¯s barrier, opening a long wound on his ribs. He gritted his teeth and hit the weapon with a blast of air to get it away.

    It flew to the side with a ringing clatter, but almost immediately flew back to the man¡¯s hand. ¡°It won¡¯t be that easy, I¡¯m afraid. You can¡¯t teleport out of this trap, and you can¡¯t avoid me forever.¡±

    Samuel had to admit that he had a point. But he also had more tricks up his sleeve. Gathering his mana about him, he seized hold of the mana that the mages were maintaining around him. He saw their faces register blank shock as they lost control of their spells, and the mana surged inward, spiking towards Samuel like arrows. But before they could make contact, Samuel redirected them away from his body, pointing them back towards the mages.

    ¡°Hampasin!¡± Under his guidance, the bolts became stronger and faster, piercing the mages before they could conjure barriers. The Commander glanced back at their screams of pain, and in that instant where his focus was turned away, Samuel struck. His sword sheared through the man¡¯s armor like a hot knife through butter, and the commander was dead before his body hit the ground. Samuel withdrew his sword, reminding himself forcefully of the first time he¡¯d seen Shigeru fight.

    The other warriors stood, stunned by the speed with which Samuel had killed their comrades. He could tell by their eyes that they had no motive to attack. A cruel smile stretched across his face. ¡°Let that be a lesson for you to learn. Tell Knarlick that much worse will happen should he continue his invasion. Good luck.¡±

    Before they could muster any kind of reaction, Samuel reached out with his mana, finding the place where his force was camped. Several mages sensed his approach and rose, ready to fight, before they recognized his mana. Many barriers prevented teleportation, but exiting was no issue. In a blur, he disappeared. He opened his eyes to find himself surrounded by his men once more. They shouted in surprise at his sudden appearance.Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.

    ¡°Lord Bragg!¡± One of them shouted. ¡°Where in the devil did you spring from? Are you wounded?¡±

    Samuel glanced down at his side, where a sheet of blood was coursing out of the wound. He closed it with a quick word, then removed his torn tunic. ¡°I¡¯m fine. One of them got a lucky hit in.¡±

    ¡°Lord Bragg!¡± That was Edmund, running over with a stricken look on his face. ¡°You¡¯ve been away a while! Were you successful?¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll know tomorrow,¡± Samuel said evasively. He made a discrete gesture for Edmund not to question further, and the man nodded in understanding. ¡°I was spotted while inside the fortress and had to fight my way out. Their commander recognized me, unfortunately.¡±

    ¡°He recognized you?¡± Edmund repeated incredulously. ¡°But you¡¯ve never been to the Mitene Union, have you?¡±

    Samuel offered a slight shrug in reply. ¡°It stands to reason that the enemy did their research. If their spies spent any amount of time in the capital over the past few years, they¡¯d know who I am.¡±

    And that was the heart of the issue, he thought. His title, not to mention his accomplishments in the past half-decade, had given him quite a reputation. He even met foreigners from as far as Nihon-Ja who recognized him at once. He remembered a thought he¡¯d had years and years ago, before fighting Neratas. It must be tough to be a legend. He pushed that heavy thought away, refusing to consider just how far his influence had stretched. Perhaps ideas like that weren¡¯t a good idea in the future. He could hardly hope to remain unnoticed if he was so easily recognizable.

    Samuel shook his head ruefully, more to rid himself of the sudden melancholy than anything. He gave the others a brief hand gesture. ¡°We¡¯ll form up to attack in five hours. Spread the word, then get some rest while you can.¡±

    Throughout the rest of the night, Samuel dozed fitfully on the uncomfortable cot in his tent. Edmund and his officers had offered him a commander¡¯s tent, with much more comfortable furniture, but he¡¯d declined. He needed nothing more than the rest of his men. He only slightly regretted that decision as he tossed and turned, his mind strained to catch the first sign of heightened emotion that meant an attack was coming. There were sentries spread out in a wide net around the force, he knew, and they would spot any enemies approaching and raise the alarm.

    In the short periods of rest that he was able to achieve, his tired brain conjured images of battle and destruction. His failure, and the deaths of all his men, culminating with his own death. The Mitene Union storming the capital and taking control of it all. His students were taken as prisoners, forced to fight for their conquerors. He tried to calm himself, but his control was lacking while in sleep. Finally, just half an hour before they were to form the army up, he snapped awake and sat bolt upright in his tent.

    A small startled noise to his left let him know that Edmund was sitting cross-legged just inside his tent. The man was chanting something under his breath, and Samuel realized that his mana had flared out. He took several deep breaths to calm himself, drawing the field back in and swinging his legs out over the edge of his bed. He rose to his feet unsteadily, looking to Edmund. Had he deduced what was in Samuel¡¯s mind?

    ¡°Heavy is the mind that ponders war,¡± Edmund said. His voice was grave but conciliatory. ¡°You bear your burden well, Lord Bragg.¡±

    Samuel had no time for idle platitudes. ¡°Why aren¡¯t you resting in your tent?¡±

    ¡°I am rested enough,¡± Edmund replied simply. He too rose to his feet. ¡°I learn to grab sleep when and where I can, so I slept while you were away.¡±

    Wise man, Samuel thought to himself. ¡°Fine. Then go and prepare the officers. We¡¯ll be getting ready soon.¡±

    Edmund inclined his head slightly in acknowledgment of the order but offered a sincere apology. ¡°The officers are all ready, my lord. We are prepared to move on your command. Also, Archmage Kiinor has sent a message regarding the Champion of Bahamut, if you are interested.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Samuel said, distracted at once. ¡°What has become of his force?¡±

    ¡°Most of them live, my lord. However, there is no word on Lord Ciayol himself. He was last seen thrown from the Tyrant Queen¡¯s back as she flew away from the scene.¡±

    Samuel tapped his chin thoughtfully. He¡¯d seen Bora Bora¡¯s aura for himself on several occasions, whenever their two professions allowed their paths to cross. He was vaguely surprised that he could be defeated, even by an ancient being such as Tiamat, without causing significant damage. Perhaps he underestimated his opponent, Samuel thought. That was always a lethal mistake in battle, as most warriors discovered their fault. He spared a moment or two wondering at the actions of Tiamat, and where she could be now, before returning to the subject at hand.

    ¡°Let¡¯s prepare to move,¡± he said curtly. ¡°Give me five minutes, and I will be with you.¡±

    Edmund replied with a crisp salute and backed out of the tent. Samuel heard his raised voice calling out, mustering the officers and their men. The general chaos of four-hundred men gathering their equipment and forming into marching order was very loud. Samuel turned to the tiny collapsible table that had been included with his tent and summoned an alter to Arcana. Stripping off his tunic, he knelt bare-chested before it, head lowered as if in prayer. But in actuality, he was deep in meditation.

    The main benefit of his journeys over the past century, though he couldn¡¯t remember the majority of it, was the condensation of power. Beginning with a sharpened mind, courtesy of his god, he was then given the body of an Ancient. That body had been enhanced further by a set of runes that ran down his spine. He¡¯d extended these runes to run along his shoulder blades, as his knowledge of the strange runic magic grew. The main fault was that, after the first time he¡¯d used them, he had to charge them before each use.

    Edmund and the officers didn¡¯t bother him as he charged. Edmund had obviously sensed that he was gathering mana, and warned the others not to disturb him. Friendly or not, each mage¡¯s preparation methods were unique and protected vehemently. It was in this preparation that secrets could be revealed. Samuel was grateful for the man¡¯s tact and social sense. Without it, he wouldn¡¯t have nearly enough room to maneuver as he wished. From convincing the officers to let him carry out his plan to keeping his peace, he felt he owned the attendant a great deal.

    Nearly half an hour later, Samuel emerged from his tent, fully prepared. He did his best to ignore the open-mouthed stares of the men around him as he stood straight. He knew that thanks to the rune, he would be glowing slightly with the intensity of his mana, even with it drawn in as it was. He finished tying the outside of his robe and rested one hand on the hilt of his sword, the greatest of all his gifts. Though he wasn¡¯t to know it, the warriors under his command were greatly inspired by the lethal mix of magic and melee that he represented.

    ¡°Let¡¯s get a move on,¡± he said, after several seconds of uncomfortable silence. The officers seemed to snap out of their daze and shouted his orders to the men. As the column gathered itself to march, Samuel fell in at the head, leading the pace as they began the march to Jyrok. It was only then, though he couldn¡¯t comprehend how that he finally noticed the force of men approaching from down the hill. ¡°Oh, dear.¡±

    Mitene Union soldiers were breaking into a run as their enemy came into sight, hefting their weapons and letting out a loud warcry. The commotion drowned out even the shouted orders of Samuel¡¯s officers, and their sudden appearance caught the Gorteauan force by surprise. Caught out in the open, with no defensive position, they were in real danger. At least, if not for Samuel, who reacted with all the speed and power that his training could allow. Several dozen arrows had been loosed as the Miteneans began their charge, and most seemed to be focused on Samuel himself.

    Samuel thrust one hand out, flaring his mana and allowing it to expand nearly thirty feet in every direction, solidifying just in time to catch the arrows. The ease with which he stopped that attack gave some of the enemy pause, but they continued nonetheless, determined to crush the opposing army. Samuel drew his blade as the first enemy reached him, and cut the man down before he could launch his attack. Then he leaped forward to meet those behind him, his crystalline sword moving in a blur as he dispatched two more. Then, with a muttered word, he released a roiling ball of flame with his free hand. It slammed into the enemy force and exploded, sending men flying in every direction.

    Undaunted, the army continued to surge forward, but Samuel¡¯s first attack had bought his force time to come to terms with what was unfolding. The archmage found himself overtaken by several of his soldiers, the men holding their weapons high and answering the enemy warcry with shouts of their own. Their fighting blood had been roused, and they were ready to punish the insolent invaders who had threatened their homes. Samuel, bemused, allowed the tide to sweep around and past him, continuing to fire supporting spells as he moved.

 Chapter 13

    The surge of enemy combatants continued as the Goretauan force held its position, finally finding themselves in a good defensive position. Attackers rained down on their shield wall, stopped in their tracks only to be dispatched by the spear wielders who were positioned behind. The bodies began to pile up rapidly, though Samuel¡¯s men were not left unscathed. Here and there, holes were punched in the defense, and men fell with cries of agony. Their places were taken almost at once with fresh fighters, but their numbers were beginning to dwindle.

    Samuel hovered high above the fighting, using barriers to protect his men from the raining arrows and spells. The enemy mages kept launching spells on his position, both to take out the head of the force and also to eliminate their support. Samuel countered as many spells as he could, and those that he could not stop in time, he blocked or parried. Again and again he swayed from side to side, seizing enemy mana and throwing it back, with a little extra power. He punched great holes in the Mitene Union¡¯s force, taking out five or six warriors at a time. But still, the surge continued.

    Their position might have been a good one, but Samuel knew it wouldn¡¯t last long. His supply of mana was draining at an alarming pace. Any normal mage would have collapsed by now, but he was saved by his larger-than-normal reserves. He refueled with enemy mana where he could, but he knew he couldn¡¯t keep it up forever. Even as he was, he was beginning to lose altitude, with most of his mana focused on fighting, unable to keep himself up. He needed a break, he thought. As slowly as he could, he allowed himself to drop back down into the safety of his force, constantly countering and redirecting the spells that rained down on him.

    One enemy mage, a bit sharper than the rest, saw Samuel beginning to descend. It was the perfect time for a tricky shot. He conjured a sparking bolt of electricity, whirling it around and around his arm, letting it build in strength. When it was ready, he thrust his arm out and to the side, throwing the bolt out in a wide arcing path. Samuel didn¡¯t see it coming until it had already struck him in the right leg and sent its shock throughout his body. Momentarily stunned, he lost control of his flying spell completely and fell the remaining fifteen feet in a rigid position. The impact against the ground knocked all the air from his lungs, and his officers were concerned at the pained groan he released once he regained control of his body.

    ¡°Lord Bragg!¡± Edmund shouted, pushing men aside to rush over at once. ¡°Where are you injured?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m fine,¡± Samuel said, the words muffled through his gritted teeth. His breathing was painful. Probably a dislocated rib. He held himself still, allowing Edmund to place a hand on his torso and work his healing magic. With a painful snap, the rib popped back into place. He coughed pitifully as his lungs refilled themselves, and most of the pain was gone, leaving only a sharp ache behind.

    ¡°Thanks,¡± he said, pushing himself to his feet with a grimace. ¡°He got a good shot in.¡±

    Even as he said it, he drew his two hands apart as an archer would draw a bow. A line of crackling white energy formed between the fingertips of his two hands, growing until it was nearly an inch thick. When he released it, the spell traveled in a direct path towards the mage who had shot him. The man¡¯s shield only provided an extra target as the spell exploded, sending him and his comrades beside him flying several feet back, to land with a crash. Samuel doubted very much that they would stand up again.

    ¡°We¡¯re doing better than I expected,¡± Edmund reported. ¡°Our losses are high but sustainable.¡±

    Samuel nodded his agreement with the statement. The Mitene Union was pouring down from the nearby hill, giving them the advantage of momentum and force. Their momentum came to nothing once they entered melee combat, but those few seconds of crashing impact were taking a serious toll on the camped force. Samuel cursed so quietly that only Edmund could hear, and released two more spells. Though he couldn¡¯t see their destination, he could hear the explosions and sounds of stricken men.

    ¡°We need to find a way to break through,¡± Samuel said. ¡°We cannot hold this position forever when they outnumber us so badly.¡±

    They had begun the encounter suffering a nearly four to one offset, though their efforts had reduced that to about three to one. Had they been in a fortress, the situation would be more favorable, he knew but caught out in the open as they were, they were easy marks for the enemy¡¯s ranged attacks. Once Samuel was unable to maintain his defensive magics, their losses would begin to rise even more rapidly. Even as he had the thought, he shattered the mana of yet another fireball, dispersing the spell into a harmless mist before it could crash into his men. Just under a hundred left, he thought. They¡¯d started with nearly twice that.

    Samuel gripped Edmund¡¯s arm as a thought occurred to him. ¡°How many siege mages do we have?¡±

    He saw Edmund¡¯s face contort into a thoughtful frown as he considered the question. Siege mages were rare, as it was a relatively new style of magic. They excelled at long-range and widespread devastation but suffered greatly at defense. ¡°I¡¯d say we have six or seven, my lord.¡±

    Samuel bit his lip reflectively. Was that enough for what he had planned? Furthermore, could he manage his part in the plan that he¡¯d just come up with? He¡¯d just have to give it the best shot he could. They needed something that the Mitene Union hadn¡¯t seen yet, otherwise, it would just be an attack like any other. He countered a lightning strike, sending it back to its caster, and made his mind up on the spot. It was their best shot, even if it was ambitious.

    ¡°Gather them in the back,¡± Samuel said quickly. ¡°Tell them to cast their strongest lighting spell. Spare no resources. It¡¯s all or nothing. Wait for my signal.¡±

    Edmund, ever the practical man wasted no time with foolish questions, and rushed off at once to gather the mages they would need. Samuel turned his attention back to the brunt of the fighting, trying to siphon off as much mana as he could. He paid a slight cost in firepower, but he could feel his reserves refilling slightly. If he could hold that for just thirty seconds, he would be ready. He was dimly aware of Edmund¡¯s voice ringing out, summoning the siege mages to his position. The man¡¯s voice had been trained to be audible over the din of a battlefield, so he had no trouble making himself heard.

    Samuel blocked two spells, noting that they had been aimed at Edmund specifically. Some of the mages in the enemy force had noticed the man¡¯s peculiar movements and were trying to shoot him down before he could muster any new men for a plan. Samuel rose back into the air at once, blocking the barrage aimed at his attendant. His intended plan would fall to ruin if Edmund were to be killed, so his priority now was to protect. After about ten seconds, Edmund was lost in the mass of men, and the assault eased somewhat.

    A new presence made itself known on the battlefield about fifteen seconds later. Every mage in the area felt it, though only Samuel knew what it would be. Eight siege mages, led by Edmund¡¯s order, had begun condensing as much mana as they could. Samuel drew in a breath of relief as he noticed that each was using his mana rather than an incantation, relying purely on the power and mass of their reserves. A faint light was shining at their position as the mana rose in potency. Samuel knew they would be ready any second.

    ¡°Edmund!¡± He put as much force into his voice as he could, to ensure that the attendant heard him. ¡°Target me! Now!¡±A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.

    There was a slight hesitation in his attendant¡¯s eyes, but only for a second. Edmund turned to face the siege mages, his hand pointed unmistakably in Samuel¡¯s direction. The men showed no sign of hesitation, their faith in Samuel¡¯s power absolute. That was only natural, Samuel thought. He¡¯d taught the majority of the kingdom¡¯s siege mages himself in the previous year, showing them techniques to slightly increase their power without extra cost. That effort paid off now as, in unison, the siege mages moved to strike.

    Each siege mage had a thick ribbon of mana flowing around their bodies, mana which was slowly condensing and transmuting into raw electricity. The flashes of light nearly blinded the men near them, so great was the contained power. Then, as one, they whipped those ribbons around their bodies twice, then hurled them skyward at the Archmage. Samuel had a brief moment of misgiving as he saw the amount of energy rushing towards him, but turned to receive them nonetheless. With a supreme effort, he seized control of the mana in each ribbon, pulling them along at a greater velocity.

    The enemy mages, seeing Samuel targeted by his allies, paused in their assault for a split second, unable to comprehend what they were seeing. Why would his men attack him with guaranteed lethal force? That hesitation proved to be a great boon for Samuel who had pulled the arcing lines of mana into the path he wanted before any could react. His reflexes weren¡¯t the best as one such ribbon grazed his left forearm, singing the skin, but then the magic was past him, fully in his control. With as much force as he could muster, he braided the ribbons together and thrust them towards the Mitene Union.

    The ribbon speared through nearly three dozen men, vaporizing them in an instant as it twirled and spun throughout the enemy force, piercing through barriers without effort. Samuel controlled its movement from on high, coiling and stretching it to cause as much devastation as possible. Once its momentum began to fail and its power dwindle, he coiled it as tightly as he could, and let it explode outward. The resulting shockwave of force and thunder opened a thirty-foot crater in the enemy force, either incinerating or flinging men in its path. Fear ripped through the Mitene Union force, but Samuel wasn¡¯t yet finished.

    Swooping forward at once and pulling what mana he could back, Samuel slashed his hands outward through the air, forming a thin red line that traveled with him. Mere meters from the force, and ahead of his allies to avoid harming his men, the line broadened. A wide cone of fire was released, spreading more destruction in front of him. Everything in a half-circle for nearly fifty feet was caught in the fire. The screams of the burned were inaudible, drowned by the roar of the flames. Finally, Samuel landed on the ground before the crippled force of fifty to eighty men, his violet eyes gleaming brightly through the dust.

    The Mitene Union, with nearly three-quarters of their force depleted, had only one option. Abandoning their injured comrades, they turned on their heels and fled. They ran from the Gorteauan force as fast as they could, retreating to the safety of Jyrok Fortress. The few fighting men who remained quickly fell, and Samuel¡¯s men could finally move freely. They began to surge forward in pursuit, but Samuel held them back with one raised hand. His silent gesture was reinforced by the shouts of his orders, and the men came to a halt at once, confused.

    Samuel was breathing heavily, nearly eighty percent of his reserves having been depleted in that last attack. For a minute or two, he was too exhausted to even conjure words. He could only sink to his knees, overcome by the tidal wave of exhaustion that came with such a momentous effort. It was easily the worst case of drain he¡¯d ever experienced. Not even countering Neratas¡¯ final attack nor the suicidal explosion of that chaotic beast in Zaban could compare. He braced himself with his hands on the ground and was violently sick for several seconds.

    ¡°My lord,¡± Edmund had approached to stand behind him. His voice lacked most of the volume it had previously possessed. ¡°Are you alright?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m f-¡± Samuel began, but was cut off by another wave of retching. He wiped his mouth clean on his sleeve and tried again with a weak voice. ¡°I¡¯m fine. That took a lot out of me.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll say,¡± that was one of the siege mages. Samuel couldn¡¯t remember his name. The man stared at Samuel with wide eyes, his legs shaky with his exhaustion. ¡°I¡¯ve never seen so much mana worked at once. You have some godly power, Champion of Arcana.¡±

    Samuel waved tiredly in reply to the praise, too tired to refute it. One of his officers stepped forward, looking expectant. ¡°Should we pursue them, Lord Bragg?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Samuel said, struggling back to his feet. The wave of nausea had passed now, and he drew in a deep breath. ¡°There is no need.¡±

    The officer opened his mouth to ask another question, but Edmun hushed the man without looking at him. His eyes were locked onto Samuel¡¯s, a sense of understanding passing between them. ¡°Lord Bragg has the rest handled.¡±

    ¡°But you¡¯re nearly completely drained,¡± the siege mage protested. ¡°What more could you hope to accomplish? You can¡¯t touch the fortress with what you have now.¡±

    ¡°The preparations are already complete,¡± Samuel assured the man. ¡°Just wait. Let me recharge for a few minutes, and it will all be over.¡±

    Clearly confused, but content to see what he had in mind, the siege mage nodded his understanding. He and his allies had always respected Samuel of course, knowing him as nothing but the most gifted mage to ever come to the College. But now they had seen the raw power and destruction he was capable of, and their love and respect for him had grown tenfold. They offered him silent salutes of honor, gestures which he returned as best he could.

    The force settled itself on the crest of the hill, spreading across the ground in relaxed sitting positions. Food and drink were passed out, and the men ate and drank their fill. They were relieved to have survived the fight and giddy in their victory. The horror of the past hour seemed to fade slightly as toasts were made. To Gorteau. To the King. To the God of War. To Samuel and the god he served. Samuel did his best to ignore the adulation, moodily chewing on some dried meat and sipping cold coffee. He kept his eyes trained on the retreating Mitene Union soldiers, waiting for them to reach the fortress.

    Eventually, he saw the force cross over the drawbridge, raising it once more behind them. Even from a distance, it all seemed silent. They were safe from Samuel¡¯s force for the time being. But they weren¡¯t safe from him, Samuel thought. He stuffed the last of the meat into his mouth, chewing it as he walked forward. Conversation halted all around him as the men watched him pace to the front, silently expectant. He sat cross-legged on the ground and made a gesture for silence.

    ¡°Tobi,¡± he said, his voice laden with mana. It reached out across the hills to the fortress and city on the rocky coast. ¡°Are you ready?¡±

    Ready. His apprentice¡¯s voice came back clearly if a bit exhausted. Not a single citizen remains in the fortress. Good luck.

    In spite of himself, Samuel allowed a broad grin to cross his face. It was not a happy expression. It spoke of an ancient hunger, the longing to smite the enemies who had harmed his home. Even Edmund, the most taciturn of his men, shifted uncomfortably as he felt, for the first time, bloodlust roll over his commander. He took several steps to the side, yet was unable to tear his eyes away. He could sense as if seeing the guiding hand of Ahya herself, that something momentous was about to come.

    ¡°Let this serve as a lesson to our enemies,¡± Samuel said. His voice carried clearly over the silent, nervous force. ¡°No matter how strong, no matter how vast, they cannot stand against our might. We defend our home with honor, and strike our enemies with fierce resolve.¡±

    Muttered sounds of agreement and enthusiasm echoed his words. The men rose to their feet expectantly, watching their commander closely. Power radiated off of Samuel like a breeze, and they could feel it. Even the most obtuse among them could sense it now. They could sense the ancient power gathered in the man before them. They could sense the raw fury which had been contained, and would now be released. Samuel rose to his feet and met their eyes, his gleaming in the dim light of dawn. After what felt like an hour, he turned to face the fortress once more. He held his arms out and closed his eyes.

    ¡°Halika, mga linya ng kapangyarihan. Magsama-sama, at saktan ang aking mga kaaway.¡±

    Come, lines of power. Converge, and smite my enemies.

    The explosion that followed could not be heard, at first. It could only be seen. A vast sphere of light appeared, growing rapidly until it encompassed the entirety of the fortress. The men reeled away as the area was lit like the highest point of the day, covering their eyes against the sudden flash. Then came a faint ringing sound, almost beautiful in its eerie power. The shockwave that followed it was almost nothing at this distance, a gentle caress that followed such horrible destruction. When the light faded, they turned to peer, wide-eyed, at Jyrok. What they saw was a massive empty crater and a cloud of dust thrown high into the air. The fortress was no more.

 Chapter 14

    It was two hours after Samuel had demolished Jyrok Fortress with his spell. He¡¯d spent about half an hour of that time kneeling on the ground, having expended every last bit of his mana, but now he was strong enough to walk around. His mana recharged constantly, and he decided that now was the time to leave. Since the main part of the fighting was over, he knew he didn¡¯t want to spend another night on one of those uncomfortable cots. Still, there was some business to attend to.

    ¡°We¡¯ll have to send patrols along the coast,¡± He told his officers. ¡°Just because we saw a few hundred of them in the fortress doesn¡¯t mean that we got rid of them all. There could still be some hiding in the countryside to strike while we¡¯re weak.¡±

    They nodded in agreement, peering intently down at the sand map. Samuel had shifted it to show the massive creator where Jyrok had once stood, though on the map it was no bigger than an inch or two across. His officers were still a little anxious when speaking to him. Their view of him had been changed drastically by what he¡¯d done, which was partially intentional. Samuel wanted the Mitene Union to be wary of him, to discourage further attempted invasions. Still, it was an unfortunate side effect that even his men would be slightly afraid of him now. He¡¯d just have to work on reversing that opinion when he could.

    ¡°Lieutenant Moran, you are in charge after I leave,¡± he continued, his voice firm and untroubled. ¡°I want constant, varied patrols. Don¡¯t let any potential spies pick out a pattern.¡±

    The officer he spoke to clapped a fist to his chest in salute. Edmund frowned thoughtfully and glanced up from the sand map to look at Samuel. ¡°You¡¯re leaving? Are you returning to Milagre, then?¡±

    Samuel nodded in confirmation. ¡°I¡¯m spending the night in a comfortable bed. I was only here for the main fight. I¡¯m not exactly fit to be a long-term commander.¡±

    Edmund accepted his explanation without comment He bowed. ¡°Well then. It has been an honor, serving under you. May the mother give her blessing on your future endeavors.¡±

    Samuel returned the bow gracefully, then turned to leave the command tent. The sun was beginning to peek over the horizon now, its golden rays slowly warming the air. He stretched his arms as high as he could over his head, barely resisting the urge to yawn. Much of the exhaustion of burning mana had remained with him, and he could barely keep his feet moving. That was enough, he thought. Time to go home.

    With a quick message, he alerted Arthur to his arrival, then twisted in place. He was the only mage who did not need to be standing in a teleportation circle to use his system. He could arrive from anywhere, though he paid a little more for the expedience. He blinked, and he was standing inside the College Library. The shockwave of his appearance blew a few loose papers off the nearby desk, and an apprentice scurried over to pick them up. His High Priest, essentially his second-in-command, was standing beside the circle, back bowed in a polite greeting.

    ¡°Good morning, Lord Bragg,¡± Arthur Moran said. ¡°I trust that your mission from the King was successful.¡±

    ¡°In a manner of speaking. The invaders have been dealt with.¡±

    Truth be told, he wasn¡¯t sure how the King would view his destruction of such an old and important fortress. Had his hasty plan set him down a path of trouble and consequences? He shoved the thought away, to confront later. Instead, he surveyed Arthur. He was nearly identical to the first Arthur Moran Samuel had ever met, the man who had been the steward of his estate. He was nearly thirty years younger, of course, but much of the first Arthur lingered about in the shape of his eyes and jawline. A stubborn appearance, which had served the steward well.

    ¡°I see,¡± Arthur replied as if he was vaguely aware of what Samuel had done. ¡°Will you be returning to your home then, Master Bragg?¡±

    One key difference between Arthur and his grandfather was how he addressed Samuel. The old steward had insisted on honoring Samuel and addressing him by his title. His grandson, however, simply respected him for his position. They were extremely close to each other in rank under Arcana, and so they could afford a more casual method of address. The apprentice nearby was not as casual. He nearly bent himself double as Samuel and Arthur passed him, offering a sycophantic greeting. Samuel ignored him.

    ¡°I¡¯ll probably rest a while,¡± Samuel said. ¡°Are there any pressing issues that need my attention before I retire?¡±

    ¡°There are two, as a matter of fact,¡± Arthur said. He had a coy grin on his face that made Samuel stop and frown. ¡°First, you have a visitor. She refuses to leave, so I think it best you meet with her and find out what she wants.¡±

    ¡°Is it Sera again?¡± Samuel asked, giving vent to a tired sigh. ¡°She seems convinced that I can¡¯t look after Tomas on my own. Very well, I¡¯ll deal with her.¡±

    ¡°Actually, sir, it is not Mistress Moran,¡± Arthur said. ¡°It is-¡±

    His words were cut off as the double doors of the library were thrown open. Two apprentices were there, looking harried and leading the way for a noble-looking elven woman with fair hair. She was immediately recognizable, not just by appearance, but also by the way she carried herself, not even waiting for the apprentices to formally introduce her. She swept past both stammering youths with a very impatient air, crossing the remaining distance between her and Samuel in three long strides.

    ¡°Ry?¡± Samuel asked. The surprise appearance was enough to shock some energy back into him. ¡°What are you doing here, so far away?¡±

    Ryllae Inaro, Chancellor of Stormbreak Harbor in the country of Zaban, had a slight smirk on her face as she peered at Samuel. Their eyes were almost on a level as she was just an inch or two shorter than him. But there was always something about her that made Samuel feel small. It could have been the way she dominated nearly every challenge put before her, and yet it could also have been her complete lack of shame. She could strong-arm just about anyone to do just about anything.

    ¡°Why do you look so nervous, Samuel?¡± She asked, her green eyes glinting with a dangerous light. The smirk on her face did nothing to assuage Samuel¡¯s anxiety. Ryllae was at her most dangerous when she was smiling. ¡°Could it be because we were supposed to meet a month ago, and you¡¯ve been avoiding it?¡±

    ¡°A-A month ago?¡± Samuel stuttered. He was completely thrown off and didn¡¯t know what she meant. Then it struck him. ¡°Oh. I-¡±

    Samuel and Ryllae had enjoyed a cordial, professional relationship ever since he¡¯d rid her country of the chaotic mana beast. It had begun as a very formal exchanging of letters, wherein they would discuss topics of mutual interest. They¡¯d shared their countless ideas of the mysteries of magic, and created new techniques. Ryllae was half to credit for the teleportation rings Samuel had created, not to mention the enchantments placed in the rivers which cleansed the drinking water using natural magic.

    As the months turned into years, they began meeting in person, and their professional relationship began shifting into a more personal one. In addition to having much in common, they were also kindred spirits, and as time went on, they were drawn closer and closer. It was only a matter of distance that kept them from taking the next step. In many ways, Ryllae reminded him of his old friendship with Sera, and the many fears he had then were also present now. His fears had led to a general inability to take the next leap, which infuriated Ryllae.

    Just a month ago, they had planned to meet in Stormbreak Harbor. Samuel hadn¡¯t skipped this meeting on purpose, of course, for that had been directly after his encounter with Stephan Knarlick. He¡¯d had to recover from the mental attack he¡¯d been subjected to, and in the midst of it all, he¡¯d forgotten to notify the Chancellor. Of course, she knew about this but was furious with him for not sharing this detail. In her eyes, she saw a long future planned out for her, one that included Samuel. This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.

    When Samuel failed to explain himself, she let out a long sigh, closing her eyes as if to gain patience. ¡°Don¡¯t bother explaining yourself. I know why you didn¡¯t come. I just wish you¡¯d told me.¡±

    She smiled slightly at him, and he saw some of that terrifying anger fade away. He took a deep breath to steady himself. ¡°I¡¯m very sorry, Ry. You¡¯re right, I should have told you. I¡¯ve just been busy with this war.¡±

    That piqued her attention, he noticed. Her green eyes flashed with interest. ¡°War? You mean with the Mitene Union?¡±

    ¡°Lord Bragg has just returned from a mission to retake Jyrok Fortress,¡± Arthur threw in helpfully. Samuel nodded in confirmation. ¡°It took me almost a full day to get them out, but it¡¯s over now,¡± he added, trying to sound casual.

    Ryllae caught the hidden words he chose not to say, but apart from raising an eyebrow, she did not comment. ¡°I see. Well then. It seems you need some rest after all that. Come, let¡¯s go to your estate, and you can sleep it off.¡±

    She grabbed his left bicep with a surprisingly strong grip and started to steer him out of the library. He knew better than to resist her, particularly as she was emitting just enough mana to make it slightly painful. He grimaced, then called over his shoulder to Arthur. ¡°Tell the King I¡¯ll give my report in the morning!¡±

    Arthur bowed his expression grave. ¡°Well wishes, my lord.¡±

    Ryllae pulled Samuel through the main section of the library and out into the main hall before she released her grip, content to walk alongside him as he led the way. She had a sharp sense for formalities and decorum, being raised as a noble, and knew that Samuel had to maintain a certain amount of visual respect as an Archmage. Students of all ranks, even two Masters they passed, all paused what they were doing to offer him a polite greeting. He had a lot more respect than he¡¯d let slip, she noticed.

    ¡°I can¡¯t imagine that you¡¯ve traveled all this way just to lecture me on punctuality,¡± Samuel said, stepping back to hold a door open for her. ¡°Why are you here, Ry?¡±

    ¡°Isn¡¯t it obvious?¡± She asked, looking sidelong at him from under her light brows. ¡°I was concerned about you.¡±

    Samuel scowled at that. ¡°I¡¯m perfectly capable of looking after myself, you know.¡±

    ¡°I know you are,¡± She agreed. ¡°But you have no idea when to stop working and enjoy peace.¡±

    ¡°I have peace.¡±

    They exited the College¡¯s property and crossed over into the city proper.  There were more buildings since her last visit to the capital of Gorteau. The city was prospering despite the fear of war that was coming. It was also larger, which she could see via the raised hill that they climbed to reach Samuel¡¯s estate. Any other noble would have taken a carriage to cross the city. Even a lot of mages preferred to teleport instead of walking, as long as it wasn¡¯t too far at once. But Samuel chose to continue mingling with the common folk. She¡¯d asked him the reason for this once, and he claimed that he was still a common man at heart, and needed the exercise.

    What had previously been honor and respect shown by members of the College now became love and adoration from the people that they passed. Every few hundred feet, a man or woman would drop what they were doing and rush forward to greet Samuel, or to offer some small gift of appreciation. Ryllae noticed how he refused any expensive gift of money or valuable, but was more than happy to take offers of food and drink. It could have just been his natural hunger, but she sensed that he was also keen to show his sort of appreciation to the townsfolk.

    ¡°It¡¯s a different environment in Milagre,¡± Samuel said, peering at her owlishly. When she raised her eyebrows in a silent question, he continued, ¡°In Harlest, I¡¯m treated like a local. It¡¯s a comfortable feeling. But I¡¯ve done too much in this city to be viewed as one of them. As much as I tried to fight it, they insist on putting me on a pedestal. So I do what I can to return those feelings.¡±

    ¡°By accepting food and drink from them.¡±

    Samuel let out a laugh, easily one of her favorite sounds from him. It was a joyous sound, no matter what caused it, that made him seem light as a feather despite his extraordinary burdens. ¡°It¡¯s more than that. I accept their thanks in person, and I lend my hand when I can to help them. It¡¯s a delicate ecosystem.¡±

    ¡°A distinct difference in the normal way that nobility interact with the common folk,¡± Ryllae commented. ¡°What if one of your enemies tries to poison you with food?¡±

    ¡°It wouldn¡¯t work,¡± Samuel said. There was no sign of humor or overconfidence to his face now. ¡°Only ancient magic can harm an Ancient in that way. Of course, I can still be killed by a mortal, but my body will just destroy any poison created by this world.¡±

    She nodded her acceptance of this explanation. ¡°Well then. Maybe one of your enemies will disguise themselves, then strike while your guard is down.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t have any enemies,¡± Samuel said. Ryllae looked skeptical, but he held up his hands. ¡°It¡¯s true. The only people who could have hated me love me for my efforts to improve their lives. I enjoy a situation that no other noble could hope for. Well, apart from Tobi-san, that is.¡±

    ¡°The illustrious Captain of Issho-Ni,¡± She commented with a smirk. ¡°How is he adapting to his new authority?¡±

    ¡°As well as can be expected,¡± Samuel replied. ¡°He¡¯s exceeding all expectations.¡±

    He gave her a brief hand signal to wait, and she stopped mid-stride, confused. He made several elaborate waving motions with his hands, and she saw sheets of mana receding into the air before them. Her eyes widened slightly as she realized that he was undoing huge areas of enchantment. From nearly four hundred feet away, a few layers of protective mana had been laid over his entire estate, preventing unwanted visitors from entering. She assumed, correctly, that he¡¯d been checking to see if anyone had come in while he was away.

    ¡°Nothing new,¡± he said, with a sigh of satisfaction. ¡°I wouldn¡¯t put it past the Rainhalls to try and sabotage my home while I was busy defending theirs.¡±

    Ryllae¡¯s eyes narrowed at the mention of his social enemies. If she¡¯d had her way, she would have brought her political sway to his aid to crush the Rainhalls, but he¡¯d refused. The game of verbal and social sparring seemed boring to him, but he was a natural. Any comment he made had weight to it now, especially those that were contradictory to the assertions of the Rainhall family. Meanwhile, they could do nothing to him in retaliation because he had no ulterior motive. If he were socially disgraced and lost his nobility, he would continue to live the same way as before. He was a dangerous foe to them, for he had nothing to lose.

    ¡°So there have been no strangers within your estate?¡± She asked, her eyes alive with interest. ¡°Do you need such a large screen to achieve that?¡±

    She was aware of his unique spell Mana Screen, of course, and was a master at it herself. She knew that it could catch and register anything that entered the protected space. Only one was needed. But he shook his head slightly as if to deny her opinions. ¡°Recently I discovered a way to slip past the screen undetected. If you don¡¯t exist at the point that the screen searches for you, you become invisible.¡±

    She nodded in understanding. Mana Screen worked as a sort of pulse, flashing out and back in, letting the mage become aware of anything that it came in contact with. So then if someone were to teleport before the pulse hit them, they could be undetected.

    ¡°They¡¯d have to be awfully fast to achieve that,¡± She commented. ¡°Few mages are capable of moving that quickly.¡±

    ¡°A few is more than acceptable,¡± he said quietly. ¡°So I created multiple pulses. No matter where you are in the field, there is guaranteed to be a pulse that hits you within half a second.¡±

    ¡°I assume that¡¯s too fast for you to avoid it?¡±

    Samuel nodded. ¡°Tobi as well. Even Grimr couldn¡¯t beat it.¡±

    Ryllae pursed her lips reflectively. A method of detection that even the God of Nature, the power that she reported directly to, couldn¡¯t defeat? That was impressive. She knew that Samuel enjoyed a somewhat close friendship with the god that she served. She¡¯d met Grimr Lance a handful of times, but it was nothing compared to the mage who had a constant, uninterrupted connection with his fellow Ancient.

    Her thoughts were interrupted as she walked into Samuel, who had stopped suddenly. They were a few dozen feet inside his estate, and he¡¯d come to a complete halt and taken her by surprise. Her immediate urge to chastise him was lost, however, as she realized that his first instinctual action had been to summon his blade. Glancing around in concern and moving to stand at his back, she tried to identify the source of the threat.

    ¡°How,¡± he muttered. Mana coursed off his body and flashed throughout the building, searching for a threat. It must have found nothing, for he relaxed slightly, as if unsure. Reluctantly, she peeked out around his shoulder. ¡°What is it?¡±

    He pointed with the hand holding his blade¡¯s sheath. There,  on a simple table used to serve tea to guests, was a letter. It was unmarked and unsealed, just a simple piece of parchment folded in half and resting on the table. Then Ryllae understood his trepidation. He hadn¡¯t detected any new arrivals with his mana screen, so that meant that there was no accounting for this letter¡¯s presence. Someone was fast enough to enter his estate without notice, the very situation that he¡¯d just espoused to be impossible.

 Chapter 15

    Greetings,

    You will not know me, but I know you very well. I have studied your growth from afar, watching as you grow into the legend that you were always destined to be. I feel confident that you are ready for your next great test. Please find me at my home, and I will give you your next great lesson.

    Yours in fellowship,

    The Teacher.

    Samuel glanced down at the parchment in a daze, letting the words drift over him. They seeped into his mind and washed around, then flowed back out, leaving one simple thought behind. He knew the person who had left this letter for him. Rather, he knew of them. There were several facts to consider in the situation, and they all pointed to the same answer. First, the letter was here, and he hadn¡¯t detected the person who had put it in. He knew that nobody he knew had placed it, for there was only one person¡¯s energy traces on it. He didn¡¯t recognize them, so they were new.

    Second, the way the person had written their message was peculiar. It was so rare that Samuel had only heard that cadence and manner of speaking in two other people; Shigeru and Grimr. Third and final, the letter was signed with not a name, but a title. The Teacher. Shigeru and Grimr both claimed to have been taught by the same mortal man at some point in their lives. The Teacher. It had to be this mysterious master he¡¯d heard about. Raveonic.

    ¡°Who is it from?¡± Ryllae¡¯s voice broke into his thoughts, and her light hand on his arm forced him to look up from the letter and acknowledge her presence. ¡°The Teacher. Is that?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Samuel confirmed, positive that they agreed. ¡°It seems that I¡¯ve finally piqued Raveonic¡¯s interest.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s wonderful!¡± Ryllae exclaimed. She was one of the few who knew who Raveonic was, and of course, treated this as a vaulted achievement. For his own, Samuel was less excited. He wasn¡¯t opposed to learning something new, of course, as new knowledge was one of his biggest motivations. No, it was the manner in which Raveonic taught his pupils. Shigeru had been kept busy for nearly two decades as his student Samuel simply didn¡¯t have that much free time to commit. Still, it was worth his time to meet Raveonic in person, at the very least. Then, if he could learn something with only a month or two of effort, he¡¯d accept. Otherwise, he had to go back to Milagre and resume his life.

    ¡°I¡¯ll have to go visit him as soon as I¡¯m able to,¡± Samuel said. His exhaustion had returned in force, and he staggered slightly on his feet, only saved from toppling over by Ryllae¡¯s firm grip. ¡°But right now I need a good night¡¯s sleep.¡±

    Ryllae steered him to his quarters and pushed him down onto his comfortable bed with a stern look. He was too tired even to change out of his battle-stained robe and fell asleep at once. It was a heavy sleep, where the first half is spent in black nothingness. His enhanced body worked to heal away the damage it had taken. Only in the wee hours of the night, after the sun had disappeared, was he rested enough. His mind came to life, and he was able to dream.

    He could tell before he opened his eyes that he was in  Arcana¡¯s mindspace. This was acceptable to him, as there were a few questions he needed answered. It had been nearly four months since their last true communion if he didn¡¯t count the plea for a new spell right before battle. He lifted his head to find himself staring directly into Isip¡¯s plain brown eyes, and pulled himself back slightly, a little alarmed at how close the other Ancient was.

    ¡°I am glad to see that you were successful,¡± The god said at once. ¡°It would have been very troubling if you were to perish in that fight.¡±

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m harder to kill than most,¡± Samuel replied, adjusting his dark blue robe slightly to free his arms more. ¡°All according to your plan, of course.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Isip echoed, a pleased smile breaking out across his face. ¡°You are exactly what I¡¯d planned you would be, and so much more. You have exceeded every expectation I could possibly set for you.¡±

    Samuel shifted a little awkwardly, uncomfortable at the fulsome praise. ¡°I still have a lot to learn. I¡¯m nowhere near done.¡±

    ¡°Yes, this is true,¡± Isip agreed. ¡°Which is the purpose of this meeting, I suppose.¡±

    ¡°You suppose?¡± Samuel blurted out, his head snapping to look his deity fully in the face. He¡¯d never heard Isip sounding so uncertain about anything in his life. He was the God of Knowledge, and so had a far greater understanding of the world and everything in it than most. ¡°What is that supposed to mean?¡±

    ¡°As you know, you were lost to the world one hundred and four years ago.¡±

    Samuel nodded in agreement and understanding. Isip continued. ¡°Well, not even I know for certain where you were during this long period. For just under a century, you were lost to my sight.¡±

    ¡°You couldn¡¯t see me wherever I was?¡± Samuel asked incredulously. ¡°But I thought you could see every nook and cranny of the world!¡±

    ¡°I can,¡± Isip inclined his head modestly. ¡°This means that you were out of the world. At least, out of the part of it that I know.¡±

    ¡°The Ethereal Plane,¡± Samuel said. He let out a frustrated sigh. ¡°Why does this topic keep coming up recently? I swear this is the twelfth time that it¡¯s been mentioned.¡±

    Isip smiled patiently at him. ¡°I mention it because it is prevalent to what I have to share with you today. As you know, I have a good glimpse of your life, both past, and future.¡±

    ¡°Let me guess,¡± Samuel interrupted. ¡°Very soon, you lose sight of me again.¡±

    Isip made no comment, but his expression dimmed slightly, and Samuel knew he¡¯d guessed correctly. If he weren¡¯t floating freely in the air, this was the point at which he¡¯d start pacing. ¡°So sometime soon, though I¡¯m sure you can¡¯t see exactly when I will disappear from your vision. Previous experience suggests that this means I will enter the Ethereal Plane again.¡±

    ¡°That is how I see it,¡± Isip said. ¡°But I cannot speak with any certainty on that place, as I have never seen it. There is one who has entered and returned unscathed, however.¡±

    ¡°Knarlick,¡± Samuel guessed, sure that was who Arcana meant. ¡°Do you know how he was able to accomplish that?¡±

    Isip shook his head sadly. ¡°I do not know the circumstances that led to him entering, for I was inactive most during that time. But when I returned, I saw that he had been touched by a new type of being.¡±

    ¡°A new type of being,¡± Samuel said pensively. ¡°So there is a person, or perhaps a group of people in there that he interacted with.¡±

    Isip was nodding in agreement, and Samuel pursued the thought further. There was next to nothing known about the Ethereal Plane. The few mages who had entered and returned with their minds intact often lost all memory of the experience. Some, Samuel included, had been able to recover shreds of recollection, mere glimpses of what seemed like chaotic wind rushing around them, throwing their senses off and leaving them to wander aimlessly through the storm until they returned.Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.

    ¡°Where could he have found someone to contend with?¡± Samuel asked, speaking more to hear the thought aloud than for any other reason. ¡°Not to mention, how could he have learned enough from the Ethereal Plane to create his unique magic? He couldn¡¯t have had time, surely. Do you think he remembers his time away from the world?¡±

    ¡°I cannot see into his mind like I can yours or others,¡± Isip admitted sadly, ¡°So I cannot be certain. But, given his newfound ability, I think it is very likely. That degree of creativity and the sheer speed at which he mastered the new magic suggests that he remembers it all.¡±

    ¡°I wonder if there is a way for me to crack into the Ethereal Plane on purpose,¡± Samuel muttered, almost inaudibly. ¡°If I could control my entrance and exit, then I could feasibly maintain an anchor of sorts to the material plane.¡±

    Isip could only shrug. ¡°As I know it, there stands no magic that could do what you want. I¡¯m sure you can figure it out, given enough time. I just wanted to deliver the warning.¡±

    Samuel let out a short laugh. ¡°Always short and to the point, you are. Well, thank you for the warning. If you learn any more about my impending disappearance, please let me know. In the meantime, I¡¯ll return to my life. I have to find Raveonic.¡±

    ¡°You will find him a very interesting person,¡± Isip said, perking up at the mention of the old master. ¡°He is quite possibly my favorite among the mortal folk. A very keen mind, and a stalwart soul.¡±

    ¡°Not to mention a legend,¡± Samuel added, with a sigh. ¡°I knew I¡¯d have to meet him eventually, and I want to, of course, but the timing could be a little more convenient.¡±

    He blinked and found himself staring up at the dark wood panels that made up the ceiling of his quarters. At once, his wards alerted him to the presence of a stranger. They were just outside his front door, and his steward, Michael, was speaking with them. He registered the calm demeanor of both, though the stranger was showing some signs of mild exhaustion. That more than likely indicated a messenger, he thought. They were always at least a little tired after their long days of work.

    Samuel searched his estate for some sign of Ryllae, but of course, she was gone. She¡¯d likely be staying within the palace proper, as an official ambassador of a foreign nation. Either that or one of the many guest estates that were located in the Royal District. With a sigh, he rolled out of bed and onto his feet. He reeked of smoke and dried blood, and his muscles were practically screaming as he forced them to stretch. He¡¯d be sore for a week or so, he estimated. He shrugged. It came with the course.

    Before walking to his washroom to clean up, he decided to venture down to the parlor to see what the stranger had been by about. Michael had already dismissed them and was polishing a painting when Samuel came down the stairs. He smiled widely as he noticed his lord approaching, and dipped into a shallow bow. Unlike the first steward who had serviced Samuel¡¯s estate, Michael had been more than accepting of Samuel¡¯s dislike of formality and kept his manner less stiff. He still produced the full act in public, but when in the house, he was much more casual, which Samuel was grateful for.

    ¡°Good morning, Samuel,¡± Michael said cheerily. ¡°I hope the messenger¡¯s arrival didn¡¯t wake you too early.¡±

    ¡°I was going to wake up anyway,¡± Samuel said with a dismissive wave. ¡°Who is the message from?¡±

    ¡°The King,¡± Michael said predictably. ¡°They request your presence as soon as possible. I have already informed the messenger that you are resting after your mission, and will join them after you have washed and eaten.¡±

    Samuel nodded his gratitude, glad, not for the first time, that he¡¯d chosen Michael as his steward out of all the other possible staff when he¡¯d re-established his estate. ¡°Good. Speaking of washing up, I¡¯ll do that now.¡±

    Michael dipped his head once more. ¡°I will have some of Mandra¡¯s coffee waiting for you, sir.¡±

    Half an hour later, Samuel was feeling slightly parboiled from the hot water but was also revitalized. Some of the ache in his muscles and joints had faded, and he could move much more easily. He threw away the robe he¡¯d been wearing, knowing that it would likely be destroyed, and pulled on a fresh set of clothing. Then he ventured down to the dining room, where Michael was waiting with the promised cup of coffee, in addition to a plate of roast chicken and potatoes. Samuel devoured the food quickly, chugged three cups of scalding coffee, and rose from his chair.

    ¡°I¡¯ll go and meet with the King now,¡± he proclaimed. ¡°Did Ryllae say where she was going?¡±

    ¡°Chancellor Inaro is within the palace proper, sir,¡± Michael said crisply. ¡°She seemed to foresee your appointment, and will likely meet you there.¡±

    ¡°Excellent,¡± Samuel said, a slight smile on his face. Hopefully, if his meeting with the King was short, he could enjoy a peaceful few hours in her company. It was his day off, after all. ¡°Turn away any messages unless they come from the Crown.¡±

    ¡°Of course, sir. Enjoy your evening out.¡±

    Evening¡­ Samuel glanced up at the sky as he exited his house, noting the low angle that the sun currently held in the sky. About the twenty-second hour, he estimated. At best, that meant he had slept through the night and most of the next day. At worst, he¡¯d been down for two to three days. But in passing a crier¡¯s stand, he learned that it was only the next day, which meant he hadn¡¯t lost much time in his rest. Not much time left in the day though, he remarked regrettably.

    It was a short trek from his estate to the palace, as he¡¯d been given one of the larger houses two years ago. The Rainhalls, of course, had protested vehemently at the gift, as they had his reinstatement as a noble. Their grudge against him ran deep, though they could do nothing against him publically. He knew the day would come when they had to meet head-to-head eventually, but that was still a ways off. He planned to rout them completely, even if it was at their own game.

    The Royal Guard, denoted by their light blue and gold tabards over chain, were present at the doors to the palace as usual. They saluted stiffly as Samuel passed them, giving their standard greeting to a visiting noble. An attendant was with him the moment he entered the huge building, walking silently by his side, ready for any orders or requests he might have. He had none, as usual, but the woman continued to shadow him closely, up until he reached the inner area, where the King¡¯s offices were located. A short trip up a grand spiral staircase, and he came to stop before a handsome oak door. He knocked firmly.

    ¡°Enter,¡± That voice belonged to Aren Gorteau, the King¡¯s younger brother. Samuel pushed the heavy door open with a single hand and stepped over the threshold. In the room were the King, Aren, General Rainhall, and Rainhall¡¯s second son, who held some important role in the military of Gorteau. Samuel ignored the latter two and addressed the Gorteaus directly.

    ¡°You wished to speak with me, your Majesty.¡± He phrased it as a statement, rather than a question. The King looked fairly annoyed about something, and Samuel immediately assumed that he was about to be reprimanded for destroying Gorteau. ¡°I apologize for my tardiness. I was resting from the battle when your messenger reached my estate.¡±

    King Gorteau waved one hand irritably, and Samuel¡¯s sense of unease grew. How bad was the consequence going to be? But then he registered the amused smile on Aren¡¯s face, which reassured him a bit. Aren was an honest man, and wouldn¡¯t derive any sort of pleasure from punishing his friend and colleague. So Samuel relaxed his stance, though he remained at attention, waiting for the King to speak.

    ¡°Master Bragg,¡± Johnathan Gorteau said, his nasally voice unusually tired. ¡°Excellent work in the battle to retake Jyrok. You have far exceeded my expectations. The Mitene Union will learn from this, and be much more cautious in challenging us.¡±

    Samuel blinked slowly. ¡°You do know, I am sure, that I destroyed Jyrok, your Majesty?¡±

    Now came his answer. Judging by the King¡¯s reaction, he hadn¡¯t been made aware of that fact at all. Even Aren looked stunned. Samuel frowned at their expressions. ¡°Was¡­ Was that not communicated by whoever gave you the report?¡±

    The King was still too stunned to speak, but Aren stepped forward, his demeanor calm at once. ¡°No. That was not shared with us. We were only told by Edmund Thunderborn that you were an exemplary commander and that your leadership played a pivotal role in the routing of our enemy.¡±

    ¡°Y-¡± The King tried to speak but failed to get the words out. Instead, General Rainhall spoke up, fury dripping from his every word. ¡°You destroyed the fortress? Do you have any idea how long that fort has stood! How dare you destroy something that my family has owned for centuries! I demand that you pay for repairs!¡±

    Samuel, more than a little annoyed already, let his filter slip for a moment as he turned to regard the old man. ¡°You cannot repair the fortress. It is gone.¡±

    Shocked silence followed his statement for nearly a minute before Aren haltingly asked. ¡°Gone? You mean there is no fortress?¡±

    ¡°Not at all,¡± Samuel said firmly. ¡°I destroyed it, along with the ground that it rested on. The town is safe, and no innocents were harmed by my attack. But Jyrok does not exist. It is a pile of rubble in a crater.¡±

    Seemingly against his will, Aren let out a short bark of laughter. It was more nervous than truly amused, and he weakly lowered himself into the chair. The King¡¯s face showed nothing but shocked disbelief, and Samuel felt it wise to wait for some reply. If he pushed the matter too far, it could have heavy consequences for him. He folded his hands in front of him, glancing between the two Royal brothers. Whatever punishment came, he would accept it willingly. But he would not apologize.

 Chapter 16

    ¡°You-¡± the King spoke again, but the shock of the moment seemed to rob him temporarily of words. ¡°You destroyed Jyrok?¡±

    Samuel resisted the urge to frown with some difficulty. Such an expression would be nothing but disrespectful in front of a ruler. ¡°Yes, Your Majesty.¡±

    ¡°By yourself?¡±

    Now Samuel really did frown. He couldn¡¯t help it. That should have been obvious by the context of his report. Maybe the man was just in shock, he reasoned. ¡°Yes, your Majesty. I wanted to ensure a quick victory for our forces.¡±

    ¡°Samuel,¡± Aren spoke haltingly. He was a little more composed than his elder brother, but even he looked a little weak. ¡°That is-.¡±

    ¡°This is unacceptable!¡± Rainhall said as if he couldn¡¯t stand being ignored by them all. ¡°That fortress has been owned by my family for generations! You had no right!¡±

    Samuel opened his mouth to retort, but the King, to his great surprise, interrupted before he could speak. ¡°Be quiet, General Rainhall!¡±

    The General looked angry, but he didn¡¯t dare argue with the King. He clamped his jaw shut, but still glared across the table at Samuel. If looks could kill, he would have been vaporized on the spot. Samuel looked away from his brilliantly red face to stare expectantly at the King, who was still slightly open-mouthed at the report Samuel had given.

    ¡°You are able to do this because of your connection to Arcana?¡± The King asked him. Samuel was thrown off by the lack of anger in his tone. His confusion was obviously noticed, so the King elaborated. ¡°Is this an ability that Arcana gave you, or is it your magic?¡±

    ¡°Well,¡± Samuel said thoughtfully, ¡°It is undoubtedly due to Arcana¡¯s grace that I learned of this magic, Your Majesty. But the runes I used to accomplish it were normal magic. So I suppose it was under my own power, even if that was granted to me by Arcana.¡±

    ¡°So another mage couldn¡¯t achieve this effect on their own?¡± Aren cut in. ¡°It is not possible for one to be schooled in this magic?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s not impossible,¡± Samuel admitted, not sure where this was headed. ¡°But there would be a large power gap. At most, they could achieve the same power as a trebuchet.¡±

    That explanation seemed to interest the brothers greatly. Samuel could see the light in their eyes, and finally, he understood. Sure enough, the next question fired at him confirmed his belief. ¡°Could you train a unit of mages in this magic? Could you teach others to achieve this level of power?¡±

    ¡°I could,¡± Samuel said. A little of his previous reserves of courage had remained, and he used it to keep his voice firm and stern. ¡°But I will not.¡±

    ¡°You will not?¡± Aren asked. He didn¡¯t seem too surprised but still tried nonetheless. ¡°You would be compensated handsomely for it. We can give you anything you desire.¡±

    ¡°With respect, Prime Magus, I have fulfilled my duty as a resident of Gorteau,¡± he said, making no mistake that he had no intention of taking the relationship further. ¡°But I am not prepared to give such destructive magic to strangers, for fear of the imbalance of power it would cause.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t want your country to thrive?¡± The King asked. His tone was petulant and stubborn. ¡°You would have us live comfortable with the notion that we are weaker than our enemies?¡±

    ¡°The Mitene Union will not consider us weak,¡± Samuel replied. ¡°Even if they recognize that it was my effort, my men still showed a great deal of fight. They¡¯ll know that we¡¯re not an easy mark.¡±

    ¡°Perhaps this discussion can take place at a later time,¡± Aren cut in again. He seemed keen to move the subject along without allowing more tempers to rise. ¡°In any event, thank you for your service, Lord Bragg. Your efforts have granted us a great victory. You may take your leave.¡±

    Samuel turned to give him a grateful look, then bowed deeply in the King¡¯s direction. ¡°It is my honor, Your Majesty. I thank you for your time. Good day.¡±

    So saying, he turned on his heel. Rainhall grumbled something not quite audible, which he ignored. He was out of the room in four long strides, pulling open the heavy oak door and slipping through it. He had reached the entrance to the central castle itself before the sound of it closing could reach his ears. He could feel the anger of Rainhall flare up the instant he¡¯d left, and assumed that he was protesting vehemently to the king.

    ¡°Just keep dripping your poison, Rainhall,¡± he said under his breath. ¡°It won¡¯t help you much longer.

    Ryllae was waiting for him outside of the central castle, absorbed in quiet conversation with three grizzled members of the Royal Scribes. She glanced up as Samuel exited the building at a rapid pace, and a thoughtful frown formed on her face. She seemed to glean by his expression that the meeting hadn¡¯t been entirely cordial, and gave a quiet word of farewell to her new friends. They moved off to other duties, and Ryllae stepped over to intercept his path.

    ¡°Come with me,¡± Samuel said as he reached her. The hurried, firm tone of his voice caused her some concern, but she didn¡¯t question him. He held out his right hand, and she grasped it. ¡°Steady, now.¡±

    With a quick spinning movement, Samuel¡¯s mana encompassed the pair of them, and they vanished. They hurtled through space and time for what felt like half a second and rematerialized inside the Archmage tower that held his office. Samuel, more than accustomed to fast teleportation by now, immediately strode over to his desk while Ryllae swayed on the spot, gathering her wits about her.

    ¡°What was that about?¡± She asked, once her stomach had settled enough to allow speech. ¡°You seem livid.¡±

    ¡°I am,¡± Samuel agreed. ¡°Rainhall continues to throw his weight around, and his anger is getting worse. I can only assume that he¡¯ll make a move against me in the near future.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t fear him, surely.¡±

    Samuel allowed a cold, angry smile to spread across his face. It had virtually no humor to it. ¡°Not in the slightest. But if I¡¯m not here, then they can¡¯t destroy my estate as collateral and make it seem like an accident.¡±

    ¡°So are you striking first?¡± She asked, one eyebrow raised. Despite how fast he was to act when needed, she knew that he was not an impulsive man. He was very deliberate and measured in his choices lately. ¡°That might not be wise, given your very public hatred of each other.¡±

    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m not striking at anything,¡± Samuel said briskly. He picked up a quill and jotted a long series of notes down onto three pieces of blank parchment. ¡°I¡¯m leaving the country to meet Raveonic.¡±

    That took the Chancellor by surprise. She also felt a flare of disappointment in her stomach, which she quickly stifled. Samuel seemed to notice it, however and glanced up with an apologetic look. ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Ry. I know you wanted us to spend more time together. I promise I¡¯ll make it up to you.¡±

    She nodded acceptance of his words, but one doubt remained. ¡°Are you sure you have the time for such a long journey? What if the Mitene Union attacks again? The King and his men need you, and you know it.¡±

    Samuel shrugged lightly. ¡°They can manage without me for a while. Besides, if it gets very bad very quickly, I can come back with World Shift in an instant.¡±

    Ryllae nodded her understanding. She wasn¡¯t an Ancient herself, but she¡¯d met enough of them in her lifetime to understand the strange magic that they possessed. With the spoken power of their ancient tongue, they could warp the world around them to suit their needs, and achieve incredible power. It was the language that shaped the earth, after all, and for those who could work it, it was an invaluable tool.Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    ¡°Why don¡¯t you World Shift to Nihon-Ja?¡± She asked. ¡°That will cut down on your travel a considerable amount.¡±

    ¡°Two reasons,¡± Samuel said. ¡°First, I¡¯d have to remain in the country for at least a month, just to be safe. Second, even if I were successful, I may miss entirely, and wind up in the wild countryside, with no idea of where I am.¡±

    ¡°Ah,¡± she replied simply. ¡°Very well. Is it safe for me to stay within the city for a while?¡±

    Samuel glanced up, confused. He hadn¡¯t expected her to accompany him, of course, but he¡¯d assumed that she would return to Zaban until he could visit again. ¡°I can¡¯t imagine that Rainhall would dare attack you for our connection. But why would you want to stay in Gorteau? Don¡¯t you have to return to Zaban soon? You are the Chancellor, after all.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m taking a much-needed break,¡± Ryllae replied with a smile. ¡°I told Maera that I will be away until spring. She is more than capable to manage Stormbreak in my absence.¡±

    Samuel nodded distractedly, remembering the young elven woman who was Ryllae¡¯s apprentice. Just two years previously, she¡¯d been named successor in the event that Ryllae retired or was killed. She was a capable and formidable force, especially when it came to managing the different families of the country.

    ¡°Well then,¡± he said, thinking quickly. ¡°I¡¯m sure you will be offered comfortable accommodations within the Royal District. I¡¯ll return in a month or two, and we can spend more time together then.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll take you at your word,¡± she said. ¡°I assume you are smart enough to avoid breaking a promise to me twice.¡±

    Despite his harried and annoyed mood, Samuel couldn¡¯t help but grin. Ryllae was a formidable woman herself, especially when it came to her valuable free time. She¡¯d made it quite clear at the start that she thought Samuel worthy of her attention and mind, but woe betide him if he were to take it too lightly.

    ¡°You¡¯re the best friend I could have ever asked for, Ry,¡± he said, stepping forward with his arms extended. ¡°I promise to make this trip as quick as I can.¡±

    She allowed the embrace, putting her arms around him in turn. Then, she did something that took Samuel completely by surprise. As he pulled away, she put her hands on either side of his face and pulled him in close, and kissed him. Her lips were indescribably soft against his own, and he could still remember the fragrance of her mana hours later as he sailed away on one of the Mage Ships owned by the College.

    ¡°Good to have you onboard again, Archmage.¡±

    Samuel glanced up from his notebook, a little confused. A burly man was standing in front of him, a wide grin stretched across his weathered and tanned face. A great load of busy black hair obscured most of his features, but Samuel felt certain that they¡¯d met before. He cast his memory around, and after a few seconds, suddenly remembered.

    ¡°You were the captain of the cargo ship,¡± Samuel said, closing his notebook with a snap. ¡°The one that took my apprentice and me to Zaban.¡±

    The man¡¯s smile widened in pleasure. He was flattered that Samuel recognized him after nearly half a decade. They¡¯d been strangers at best, and it was expected for a stiff noble to forget the faces and names of common folk that they interacted with. Samuel, of course, was no stiff noble, but the simple kind act of remembrance meant a lot.

    ¡°Aye, my lord,¡± the Captain said with a hearty laugh. ¡°You saved me and my crew a good deal of trouble on that voyage. I¡¯m glad I can return the favor now.¡±

    Samuel tilted his head slightly in confusion. ¡°How do you mean? Are you not chartered with the markets anymore?¡±

    ¡°No, sir,¡± the Captain replied, thrusting out his chest. ¡°I cashed in on my years of service in the navy and got meself appointed to the College¡¯s fleet. Now I¡¯m under your direct command, Archmage.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Samuel asked, his face blank. He knew that some Archmages had entire fleets at their disposal, chartering them out to earn coin while they were not needed. But it was something that the Archmage had to pursue himself. ¡°I didn¡¯t request a ship for myself.¡±

    The Captain frowned thoughtfully. ¡°That¡¯s unexpected news to me. Your steward was quite happy to accept my ship and my men as employees of your noble house. He even gave us a stipend and funds to build a new ship.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s frown deepened. He¡¯d only had Arthur as his steward for three years, and the man hadn¡¯t shared any of this information with him. But it was in line with his attitude, making decisions to improve Samuel¡¯s estate without alerting him. He was acutely aware of Samuel¡¯s disregard for titles, wealth, and recognition.

    ¡°I see.¡± It was all Samuel could think to say. Then he realized that he couldn¡¯t remember the man¡¯s name if he¡¯d ever heard it. ¡°Well, I¡¯m glad to have you with me, Captain¡­¡±

    ¡°Johns, Archmage,¡± he replied, gripping Samuel¡¯s hand and shaking it firmly. ¡°Breman Johns.¡±

    ¡°Breman,¡± Samuel muttered reflectively. ¡°Then you¡¯re originally from the Union, I take it?¡±

    ¡°Aye, sir. Me mam left when I was but a babe and my father was killed in a clan dispute. I was raised in Jyrok until I joined the crew of a ship, and began making an honest livin¡¯.¡±

    Jyrok. Samuel was amazed at the double connection. ¡°Does she still live in the village, then?¡±

    Johns nodded confirmation. ¡°She¡¯s got a comfortable home along the cliff. I send her half of me stipend each month with the Royal Courier. She¡¯s ancient now, a¡¯course.¡±

    He let out a deep guffaw at the joke, and Samuel grinned along. So she was one of the people saved from the Rainhall¡¯s tyranny, then. Samuel felt a welling of contentment form in his chest and took a deep breath of the salty sea air. Returning his notebook to his pocket space, he turned to face the bow.

    They were a mere week away from Sheran¡¯s port, with the last stretch of Gorteau¡¯s coastline on the horizon. Samuel could see the cliffs of Jyrok even now, and though he was too far to make them out, he thought he could spot exactly where the chaotic updrafts ran along the sheer face and up into the air. The landscape looked even more rugged from this angle, though its rough stone had a strong, unshakable beauty to it.

    ¡°Have you ever been to Nin-Ja, Lord Bragg?¡± Johns asked. He¡¯d remained by Samuel, also staring at the last sign of his country sliding away.

    ¡°No,¡± Samuel admitted. ¡°You?¡±

    ¡°A few times. Plenty of nobles in the capital love the silks they make there, and they pay a pretty coin to have them hauled over.¡±

    ¡°That makes sense,¡± Samuel muttered. ¡°I know they¡¯re quite skilled with cloths.¡±

    ¡°Not just cloths,¡± Breman put in. ¡°They got some fancy herbs and potions too. Frankly, I think they just stink up a clean ship, but they make for good trade.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll bet,¡± Samuel commented, not really paying attention anymore. He was thinking of Ryllae back in Milagre. Then, strangely, of Sera, in the tiny village on the south-eastern coast. ¡°How long until we touch the coast of Nihon-Ja?¡±

    ¡°Hmm.¡± Breman turned to glance at the mast of his ship, its sail fluttering idly in the mild sea breeze. Then he paced a few feet away to the compass by his steering wheel, and back up at the mast once more. Then he spat over the side. Apparently, this was all enough for him to have an adequate answer, for he came back confident. ¡°I¡¯d wager about three weeks, my lord.¡±

    ¡°Very well.¡±

    Samuel turned away from the sight of the cliffs, which at this point were almost completely obscured by sea fog, and walked below decks. Now that the Captain had introduced himself, Samuel realized that he also recognized quite a few of the crew. They were all grinning wickedly at him, and a few who weren¡¯t occupied with duties clasped hands with him, offering their thanks and greetings.

    It was a valuable lesson in leadership for Samuel. He¡¯d spent nigh on five years in the capital after the battle in which Shigeru had died. He hadn¡¯t taken on any great journeys, content that he would have no shortage of time. He was effectively immortal, after all. Instead, he had used his magical gift to make immediate changes in his life. After purchasing a lot of land inside the Noble District, he¡¯d built a new house, laying enchantments on every material, so that it would be capable of yet unheard magic.

    He¡¯d spent time among the common people of the city and nearby villages, doing what he could to tackle the problems he found there. It was a novel experience for the residents of the city to see a noble among them, talking freely and carrying burdens alongside them. He tended to the fields, using magic to cause the plants to flourish. He worked with druids to clean the water that ran throughout the city, ending the pollution that made so many of them sick.

    The greatest change, in their eyes, was how accessible the arcane arts had become. It was known that nearly all people had some level of magical aptitude, but higher learning had long been limited to the royals and nobles of the country. With Samuel as an Archmage, schools were constructed throughout the city, giving a warm place of refuge and education to the children who could not afford it.

    Bragg¡¯s work, in conjunction with Issho-Ni¡¯s captain, had turned a chaotic and dangerous city into a beacon of growth and safety. Nefarious criminals were rounded up, virtually overnight, and a wave of prosperity surged through the lower and middle classes of the city. Its growth drew attention from outside, bringing in new people, craftsmen, and merchants. The cities of Milagre and Sheran, and Gorteau along with them, improved drastically.

    Samuel¡¯s work had earned him the love and adoration of many, but it had also birthed many enemies. Just two years after his return from Zaban, a mage assassin attacked the Archmage while he was working in the lower city. Some could still remember the fight vividly. Samuel had beaten the assassin at once, along with the comrades who attacked after. It was the first true testament to his power, and it tempered the violence further. Very few could challenge him after that, and they were wise enough to keep their heads down.

 Chapter 17

    Compared to the last time Samuel took a long journey by ship, this voyage was practically boring. Samuel spent the majority of it in his cabin below decks, though he lent his hand to the various tasks around the ship, from moving supplies to tending to the rigging. He had a lot more strength in his body since the first time he¡¯d worked on the ship, and he could do a lot more to help out. Most of the ship¡¯s movement was guided by the wind, but it was also a mage ship, and so was equipped with enchantments to increase its pace. And so minutes turned into hours and hours into days. Before Samuel knew it, he¡¯d slipped into a long sort of daze as the ship cut through the vast ocean.

    They encountered some bad weather, but nothing that the ship couldn¡¯t handle, and certainly nothing like the typhoon that they¡¯d faced together five years. The surface of the water remained calm, and the ship cut through it like a knife through butter. The entire journey was smooth, with no choppy waves to set Samuel¡¯s stomach rumbling. The only complaint he had was the food. Sea fare was dry and almost completely flavorless, and he mourned for Mandra¡¯s delicious cooking. He made a mental note to bring his own food the next time he went on a trip. At least he had half-decent coffee to wash down the dry meals.

    Before he knew it, the lookout in the mast was shouting down that he¡¯d spotted land. Samuel hurried above deck with the rest of the off-duty crew and rushed to the bow to watch. It was another ten minutes or so before he could make out the dark line on the horizon that was the Isles of Nihon-Ja, though any other detail escaped his notice. He watched with bated breath as the ship drew closer, and more of the landscape materialized out of the low sea mist. The most prominent feature was the town they approached. Even from a kilometer away, the town appeared to glow with a faint light due to the number of lanterns illuminating the night sky.

    It looked fairly normal to Samuel, who for some reason had expected an exotic sort of scenery. The language, culture, and residents of this nation always stood out when Samuel had met them, but their homeland was more simple than expected. It was only when they came into proper view of the docks and a bell-like gong sounded, that Samuel identified the differences in architecture, clothing, and even the behavior. He made a quick order to the crew, and they scrambled to the mast, rigging and hoisting a large flag into the air. It bore his heraldry, a silver hawk depicted in mid-flight on a dark blue background. Its shape, long and with two tails, denoted that he was of noble rank.

    A small, fast ship was dispatched from the docks, moving quickly to intercept them. It was a sleek craft, but Samuel recognized the armed men on board and realized that it was presumably a security measure. With the threat of war between two countries that shared ocean borders with them, they were taking no chances, and would not let a strange ship enter their port without screening. Wisely, Captain Breman called for his men to stop rowing, and the ship slowly began to decelerate, until it was sitting still as could be, just over five hundred yards from the first of the docks. The Nihon-Jan ship sailed directly for them, a crew of strong rowers closing the distance quickly. Once they were within easy shouting distance, one figure stood on the prow and called out across the water.

    ¡°State your business in entering Minato!¡±

    Samuel glanced back at Breman to see what he wanted to do, and the man gave a little wave of his hand that Samuel took to mean ¡°after you¡±. So, taking a deep breath, he called back to the stranger. ¡°I am Archmage Samuel Bragg, Noble of Milagre in Gorteau, and Champion of Arcana. I come in peace, so that I may study amongst your people!¡±

    There was a brief pause as the stranger seemed to absorb his words. He was carrying a large tower shield with his left arm, obviously intended to protect him from any arrows or magic that might be launched from the foreign ship. He turned back to his own craft, and some exchange seemed to take place. Samuel could see the excitable motions of one man, clearly not dressed for combat. He was located behind the first so that he would be safe from any attacks. After what felt like a minute, and when their ship had drawn a little closer, he replied.

    ¡°Understood. Please prepare for my men to board your ship, so that we may speak more freely.¡±

    Samuel waved his arm to show that he understood, and moved away from the bow. He paced casually to the middle of the craft as the Nihon-Jan ship drew level, and its rowers pulled back on the oars, stopping it nearly in its own length. Samuel detected the use of magic in the ship¡¯s movements and assumed that was what allowed for such a quick braking maneuver. The man who had addressed him was standing in almost the same position, a bit higher than Samuel, one hand resting lightly on a katana that was stuck in his belt.

    Samuel inspected the man closely, noting the fine balance he had, even on such an unstable surface. He rode the motions of his ships so easily that he might have been one with it, and he bore the unmistakable signs of experience in battle. Yet there weren¡¯t so many scars as to suggest that he was continuously on the receiving end. That bode well, Samuel thought. It spoke to a seasoned, quick-witted warrior with which he could reason. With one light movement, he sprang across the gap and landed lightly on Breman¡¯s ship, his knees bent ever-so-slightly to absorb the shock.

    Showing no surprise at the rapid movement, Samuel took a step back to give the man space and bowed deeply. The stranger looked a bit taken aback at Samuel¡¯s grasp on Nihon-Jan greetings and quickly moved to reply in kind. He kept his eyes up, however, flicking from side to side to take in any potential threats. The eyes lingered for a second or two on the crystalline blade that Samuel wore, before they returned to his face. He gave a friendly but terse smile of welcome.

    ¡°Welcome to the port of Minato,¡± the man said. ¡°I am Kina Shimonseki. I believe you would refer to me as Commander of the Guard.¡±

    Kina¡¯s grasp of the common tongue was excellent, with virtually no trace of an accent, Samuel noticed. He bobbed his head. ¡°I am Samuel Bragg. It is an honor to meet you, Shimonseki-san. Have you been to Gorteau or any other nation?¡±

    Shimonseki smiled slightly as he saw that Samuel had caught on to his skill with the common tongue and correctly assumed how it had come about. ¡°Yes. I spent some time training under master Tokugawa many years ago when I was but a boy.¡±

    ¡°Master Tokugawa?¡± Samuel queried. There could only be one person he was referring to. ¡°You mean Shigeru?¡±

    ¡°Yes. I recognize your name, Samuel-san. Master Shigeru spoke of you often. You were a dear friend.¡±

    ¡°I tried,¡± Samuel said with a slight grin. ¡°He taught me a bit, but my main study has been under his son.¡±

    ¡°Ah, yes,¡± Shimonseki agreed with a nod. ¡°Master Tobito. He is a gifted warrior, I hear.¡±

    ¡°Far and above one of the best,¡± Samuel concurred. ¡°I work with him often.¡±

    ¡°I regret to inform you that, though you are a friend of our lord Tokugawa, you must still consent to a search of your vessel,¡± Kina informed him. He was already scanning the crates that were visible on the top deck, and studying the people he could see, taking in weapons and supplies. ¡°I assume you do not object?¡±

    ¡°Of course not,¡± Samuel said graciously. ¡°Feel free to inspect our rations.¡±

    ¡°Please remain here while my men conduct the search,¡± Kina instructed him. ¡°Master Tokugawa will speak with you in the meantime.¡±This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.

    With another bow, he moved away, and half a dozen of his men made their own, less graceful way onto the ship. They offered no bow of greeting, as they were underlings, but at once fanned out to inspect crates and piles of tack. The second figure that Samuel had noticed hiding behind Kina, however, leaped aboard after the men had crossed, and landed lightly beside Samuel, who was frowning slightly. Tokugawa? He was sure that the only living member of that family was Tobi. Had Shigeru managed to descend somehow without him knowing? He turned to view the last person to board.

    He was about twenty years older than Samuel, judging by the little bits of grey beginning to show in the black of his beard. His hair was long and straight, growing to the middle of his back, and partially obscuring the wolf¡¯s head heraldry on the back of his white robe. It was identical to Shigeru¡¯s robe, Samuel thought. Except that it bore another¡¯s name in Nihon-Jan script, and the man in front of him was definitely not Shigeru. But he looked oddly familiar, and Samuel felt certain that he¡¯d seen him somewhere.

    ¡°Welcome to Nihon-Ja, Master Bragg,¡± the man said. His voice was even more familiar. Its cadence and the calm, reassuring tone rang a faint bell. ¡°I am honored to welcome you to my home. I have been expecting you.¡±

    Then the realization struck Samuel, and a jolt of shock seemed to freeze him in place, locking his joints. He looked and sounded so familiar to Samuel for a reason because he¡¯d met one of his family. But more than that, if the hair were shorter and tied back, he would be nearly identical. He was the spitting image of his younger brother, Shigeru.

    ¡°Reito,¡± he said weakly, taking half a step back in shock. ¡°But Grimr told me he killed you.¡±

    ¡°And so he did,¡± Reito said with a wide smile. ¡°Or rather, it was my body he destroyed. My soul remained quite intact, and free to wander.¡±

    Samuel took a moment to find his voice, staring wide-eyed at the specter in front of him. He remembered all too clearly the story that Shigeru and Grimr had shared, over a century ago. Ensnared by an enemy¡¯s enchantment, Reito had turned upon his allies and nearly succeeded in killing his younger brother. Shigeru had been unable to kill him, and so it had fallen to the ancient Grimr, an act that had undoubtedly saved Shigeru¡¯s life, and so created the debt that Shigeru paid by assisting in killing Neratas.

    ¡°How are you alive after all this time?¡± Samuel finally asked. ¡°And how do you appear so young?¡±

    Reito let out a soft laugh. ¡°I don¡¯t feel so young these days, Master Samuel. But when Grimr stopped me, he sealed my soul away into his knife and gave me over to my master. He kept me safe and guarded for many years, and, perhaps twenty years ago, used ancient magic to recreate my body. I have served him faithfully since. My brother does not know, however.¡±

    Samuel nodded his understanding. He knew, without being told, that Reito would notify Shigeru of his existence when the time was right. The two men locked eyes, and an agreement seemed to pass between them. Samuel would keep his secret. The silent message didn¡¯t necessitate a fair trade, but Reito was as honorable as his brother.

    ¡°I appreciate your silence,¡± Reito said gravely. ¡°To return the favor, I will be your guide.¡±

    ¡°My guide?¡± Samuel asked, arching an eyebrow. ¡°Where exactly will you be guiding me to?¡±

    Reito regarded him silently for several seconds before replying, at which point Kina returned, having completed his search of the ship. ¡°I will guide you to the Sanctuary, and the home of my Master.¡±

    The port city of Minato was as bustling as could be expected when Breman¡¯s ship was finally allowed to come in to dock. Many townsfolk had come out to see the arrival now that the foreign ship was deemed to be no threat. They stopped in their tracks, perhaps four dozen of them, scattered throughout the piers but stuck in place, turned to face the strangers, watching the dock workers tying the ship fast and clearing the way for the gangplank.

    The moment the plank crashed down, Samuel stepped on it, traversing the steady length of wood until he touched down on the docks. Not quite on Nihon-Jan soil, he thought, as the massive wooden piers were floating on the surface of the water. They felt no different from the deck of the ship with their gentle bobbing. Each movement sent a tremor along their length, increasing the instability for anyone walking along them. This was mainly the small body of troops that had accompanied Kina out to search their vessel.

    Kina himself was waiting at the end of the long pier now, his expression changed to one of warm welcome. He smiled widely as the Breman¡¯s crew came along behind Samuel, all carrying heavy crates and barrels of product for trade. Reito and Breman Johns were beside Samuel and slightly behind, as was the custom in an official arrival to foreign soil. He was the leader of this party and as such, he walked ahead. He lengthened his stride in the last few meters, eager to have solid ground beneath his feet. Then he made contact with the hard stone of the wharf, and let out a sigh. He was properly in a foreign country now.

    There were countless signs around him that it was a different country. Dozens of buildings were built in an entirely foreign style, hundreds of signs written in foreign words, and a whole stream of people chattering amongst themselves in a foreign tongue. There was little in familiarity with Gorteau. Even the local ships, docked a ways away and sporting a full guard, were exotic in design. Nihon-Jan ships were much sleeker than Gorteauan craft, with finer lines that doubtless allowed greater spurts of speed. The sound of people shouting was almost drowned out by the scream of gulls overhead, the one familiar sound of any dock.

    The smell of fish and drying netting was prevalent in the air, the first real scent Samuel had registered since his time at sea. He¡¯d been acutely aware of only the sharp smell of seawater as they¡¯d sailed, blown to him from all directions. He wrinkled his nose, not entirely sure that he enjoyed the overwhelming cacophony of sights and smells that were present. Minato was just more¡­ vibrant than any port city he¡¯d seen. The Nihon-Jan seemed fond of bright colors in their buildings, with the most prominent color being red. In addition, their walls painted a light creme color, were all wood, instead of the sturdy stone Samuel was accustomed to.

    ¡°I imagine it is quite different from your home,¡± Reito said, leaning forward to speak quietly into his ear. ¡°We are a very different people.¡±

    ¡°You are, indeed,¡± Samuel agreed, his mouth slightly agape. ¡°It¡¯s beautiful.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m glad you think so,¡± Reito replied with a quiet chuckle. ¡°We pride ourselves on simple beauty.¡±

    ¡°How long will I be required to stay within the city before setting out for the Sanctuary?¡± Samuel asked, turning away from the spectacle before him to study the older man. ¡°I assume that I¡¯ll be free to move about in the morning.¡±

    He phrased it as a statement rather than a question. He¡¯d heard rumors that Nihon-Jans were particularly distrusting of outsiders, and objected to them moving freely throughout the country. But Reito smiled widely. ¡°Of course. We shall find you a comfortable room at a ryokan, and after a good meal and a bath, you can catch up on some much-needed sleep.¡±

    Samuel had to admit that it all sounded highly tempting. Ryokan, he knew, was the Nihon-Jan word for inn. They were much quieter than the average inn in Gorteau, as the cultural norm here was to be more reserved and avoid causing trouble for others. Samuel had learned Nihon-Jan over the past few years, sharpening his skills with Tobi as an added part of his studies. Tobi had assured him that his fluency was excellent and that he shouldn¡¯t have an issue with communicating here. But even so, the locals spoke so rapidly that it took Samuel a bit to get used to it. But, eventually, his ear settled, and he was able to discern much of what was being spoken around him.

    One group of people, young women in long elaborate robes, were passing the edge of the pier. They had long pieces of fabric covering their nose against the smell of fish, and they were speaking excitably amongst each other. Samuel turned to survey them, and they burst into more excited mutterings. ¡°He¡¯s so pale. Are all Go-jins pale like him? And so tall! He¡¯s quite handsome, for a foreigner.¡±

    Ignoring the rush of embarrassment at realizing that they assumed that he couldn¡¯t understand them and their frank speech, he turned to Reito. ¡°What does Go-jin mean?¡±

    Reito looked confused for a moment, then he turned to frown sternly at the group of women. As he did, they seemed to realize that they¡¯d been heard, and looked contrite. They lowered their heads at once and increased their pace, scurrying out of sight around a building. Reito shook his head sadly. ¡°It is a derivative of gaijin, but used to describe your countrymen from Gorteau.¡±

    ¡°Ah,¡± Samuel replied simply. He knew that gaijin was the Nihon-Jan word for outsider. It meant strictly that, though Tobi had told him that it carried a certain condescending note to it. It was an insult, plain and simple. ¡°I see. Oh well. Do you have much trouble with outsiders in Nihon-Ja?¡±

    ¡°Unfortunately, yes,¡± Reito said. ¡°Foreigners are seen as loud and obnoxious. A word of advice, if you will. Keep your inner thoughts to yourself, and wear a mask of respect. You will encounter much judgment anyway, but this will make it easier.¡±

 Chapter 18

    Samuel let out a sigh of contentment as he slid into the near-scalding water of the bath. It was his second time that night. In his first trip, the water had been highly uncomfortable as he¡¯d submerged himself, his skin protesting at the spring-fed water. It was exceptionally hot after his time on the cold ocean, and he¡¯d felt like he was boiling alive. Then he¡¯d grown accustomed, and the water leeched away his exhaustion, soothing his stiff muscles and sending him into pure bliss. He¡¯d forgotten just how tired his muscles could be after a simple task like standing on a moving deck.

    The bathhouse was technically a public one, but there was only one other person in the water. Samuel had been awkward at the thought of sharing bathing water with someone else at first, but after a moment or two, it was easy to forget that the other person was there. They both sat silently, the only sound the occasional sigh of contentment. Samuel smiled lazily as he allowed his entire body to relax. Being a bit taller than the average Gorteauan, he practically towered over Nihon-Jans, and he had to slump quite a bit to fully submerge himself into the water.

    Minato was just outside the wall there, he thought, opening his eyes and staring at the light wood and paper obstruction. The thick paper was oiled to the point that it was almost translucent, and he could see the outline of a street lantern through it. That wouldn¡¯t offer much in the way of protection if someone were criminally inclined, he thought. Perhaps the crime rate was just lower here. It was a good thing the weather was always warm, though, or else the population would freeze. It was a marked contrast to his home in Harlest, where he could expect a harsh winter every year.

    The food was excellent as well when he left the bath and entered the dining area downstairs. The owner of the ryokan, a wizened old woman more friendly than most locals, had offered to bring his meal up to his rooms on the second floor, but he¡¯d politely refused. She¡¯d seemed surprised by the decision but gratified that he was willing to agree to the social norms. And so he wrapped a soft comfortable robe around himself after dressing and slid his feet into a pair of the house slippers that had been left for him. They had been altered a great deal so that they fit snugly around his larger feet. The landlady was accustomed to dealing with foreigners, he thought.

    A simple meal of rice and fish was served to him. Samuel had tasted the fish out of politeness but hadn¡¯t expected to enjoy it. He¡¯d grown up in a fishing village, after all, and you could only eat so much of the sea life before it became quite dull. But he received a wonderful shock as he tested it, and had soon devoured the two filets served with his meal. The meat was so flaky and light, but bursting with a sharp lemony flavor. It far exceeded the cooking of his chef Seamus a hundred years ago, and nearly rivaled Mandra.

    The Nihon-Jan in general did not drink coffee. Instead, he was given a mug of steaming, dark brown tea. It was delicious, and sent waves of energy coursing through his tired body, rejuvenating him almost as effectively as the bath had done. The rice was a sticky ball, with light seasoning to complement it, and quite filling. It lacked many of the heavy oils and spices of food he was used to, but no less savory for the fact. He accepted eagerly when the owner offered him more and shared his heartfelt compliments on her cooking.

    ¡°It does good to see a hungry young man,¡± she said, her thick accent making the words sound a little odd. ¡°You have a large stomach, don¡¯t you?¡±

    He could only smile shyly and shrug. He replied in Nihon-Jan, surprising the woman further. ¡°Your food is remarkable, mother. Thank you for the meal.¡±

    A wide smile split her weathered face, and she bowed deeply before shuffling away to get him more food. The same man who had been in the bath came to sit a few feet away, his eyebrows raised as he studied Samuel. He¡¯d heard this last exchange, and his face showed shocked surprise just as the owner had. He gave a shallow bow in Samuel¡¯s direction and shifted a seat closer.

    ¡°You speak well for a foreigner,¡± he said. He had a very deep, gravelly voice. ¡°You are very kind to my mother.¡±

    Samuel returned the bow. ¡°Thank you. She deserves the compliment. That is the best food I¡¯ve had in weeks.¡±

    The stranger laughed. ¡°Ship food is not very good for your country, I take it?¡±

    Samuel shook his head ruefully. ¡°No. It is very dry.¡±

    He took a piece of tough dried meat out of his satchel and offered it to the man. He took it with a curious look and bit into it. He grimaced slightly as he registered how tough it was, and the muscles of his jaws worked furiously to shred it to a size that he could swallow. Even then, he winced slightly as the sharp edge caught in his throat for a moment. Eyes streaming, he drank half of his scalding cup of tea before speaking.

    ¡° I agree, that is very dry,¡± he said with a weak laugh. Samuel chuckled in agreement. ¡°So, what are you?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t understand your question,¡± Samuel said, frowning in confusion. ¡°What am I?¡±

    ¡°You carry a sword,¡± the stranger said bluntly. ¡°But you have the signs of magic about you. Strong magic.¡±

    ¡°Is it strange to be both warrior and mage?¡± Samuel asked.

    ¡°Not strange for Nihon-Jans, but very strange for Go-, I mean for your people.¡±

    Samuel smiled slightly as he caught the near slip. The man was making an effort to be friendly, which he appreciated. ¡°I am not like most of my country. I am an Archmage.¡±

    ¡°You are in the college?¡± The man asked. ¡°My cousin¡¯s son went to the college in Milagre. He is studying hard to learn magic.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I am Archmage of Knowledge. But I don¡¯t care for titles. You may call me Samuel.¡±

    At this, the man¡¯s eyes widened further. ¡°You are Samuel-san? The Champion of the Mind?¡±

    Samuel was taken aback. Very few people called Arcana the mind. It was a very old name for his god. ¡°Yes. I did not expect many to know of me.¡±

    To his surprise, the man looked wary now. ¡°Many of us know of you, Samuel-san. Those of us who study the arcane arts, at least. We know that you are different. You practice more than the arcane.¡±

    Samuel nodded in confirmation. ¡°Yes. I have always felt there is more to magic than that.¡±

    ¡°I am Tatomi Hijiro. My family was one of those who helped the Wanderer and Lord Tokugawa.¡±

    ¡°Against Takashi?¡± Samuel asked. He remembered the story as if he¡¯d heard it yesterday. The rebel warlord had nearly wiped out Shigeru¡¯s entire family. In a way, he had. ¡°So we have friends in common.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Hijiro agreed. He moved over once again so that he was now directly across from Samuel. ¡°I have a question. I hope it is not too rude.¡±

    ¡°What is it?¡± Samuel asked uneasily. He was acutely aware of the light of interest in Hijiro¡¯s eyes.

    ¡°Are you kodai?¡±

    That word took a moment to register with Samuel. It wasn¡¯t part of his lessons with Tobi. Rather, the last time he¡¯d heard it had been when he¡¯d met Shigeru in the village of Harlest. It was the word he used to describe Grimr. That must be the Nihon-Jan word for ancient, he thought. He glanced around to make sure nobody else was present, then nodded slightly in confirmation. Hijiro stared at him almost in wonder, then suddenly, reached across the table with his palms upward. The intent was clear. He wanted Samuel to clasp his hands. Hesitantly, Samuel obliged.Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!

    He felt a flash of energy cross over from Hijiro¡¯s hand and into his own body. His mana caught it at once, holding it in place. It was not a spell, but something new. He frowned. ¡°What is it?¡±

    ¡°It is a gift,¡± Hijiro said, pulling his hands away. ¡°A gift of our people. You have come to meet the Teacher.¡±

    He did not phrase it as a question, and Samuel saw no need to deny it. ¡°Yes. Is the Teacher well-known here?¡±

    Hijiro nodded solemnly as his mother returned from the kitchen. ¡°We are all students of the Teacher. His students teach their ways, and their students teach their ways. In a way, we are all his students.¡±

    ¡°Have you been to the Sanctuary, then?¡±

    ¡°No. I am not strong enough for that test. I am a simple man.¡±

    Samuel felt as if someone had grabbed hold of his stomach with a cold fist. ¡°There is a test?¡±

    ¡°Of course. You will be tested, to be sure that you are worthy of his teachings.¡±

    Samuel wrinkled his nose slightly, but not at an unpleasant smell. This testimony seemed to only reaffirm that this would be a lengthy affair. He felt no misgivings at the idea of being tested, not after all the tests that Arcana, Grimr, Shigeru, and even Tobi had given him. His old teacher Astori had been particularly tough with his tests, requiring Samuel to invent entirely new ideas to excel. But he had the danger of war at any time now. The Mitene Union could return. Or else Rainhall might decide to strike while he was away. He simply didn¡¯t have the time to study under a master for months, or possibly years.

    He put the thought aside for a moment to study the ¡®gift¡¯ that Hijiro had given him. It felt like energy, but it was much lighter than his mana. It wasn¡¯t ki either, the life force that fueled physical magicks. It was soothing to behold, a kind of warmth against his skin, rejuvenating him like sleep. Then, as it was absorbed into his body and he felt something deep in his chest flare, he realized what it was. The nation of Nihon-Ja was rumored to be filled with spiritual masters. They used the power of their soul to perform magic, sharpened and strengthened through meditation and connection with a higher being they served.

    ¡°Tamashi,¡± he breathed, his voice nearly inaudible. ¡°This is spiritual magic.¡±

    And suddenly, in the forefront of his mind, an image of his mother surfaced. Her hair tousled after a long night working at the tavern, tiredness etched in the corner of her eyes, and a kind, warming smile on her face. The image he used when he needed comfort the most. His most calm state was when he remembered his mother, remembered her gentle touch and her soothing voice. Unbidden, his eyes filled with tears, and he allowed them to fall silently.

    ¡°You are already in touch with your soul,¡± Hijiro said gently. ¡°You stand at the edge of new magic, Samuel-san. You are gifted by the Mind, and by Lord Tokugawa. Now you are gifted by our people.¡±

    Samuel could still feel the speck of energy deep inside his chest, right at the very core of his being. He¡¯d heard mention of the soul before, of course. It was most highly stressed in spiritual and divine teachings. He¡¯d even sensed something like it inside himself, but never before had it been so clearly felt. There was a small core of energy inside of him, and he was aware of it now. It was almost indistinguishable from his ki, so it had escaped his notice. Then came the comfortable realization that this alone was his own. His body and mind, both incredibly strong, had been gifts of Arcana, designed to make him the perfect champion. But this, his most inner part, was his own.

    Now that he was aware of the sensation of his aura, he could see it in Hijiro. Hijiro¡¯s soul was bright and golden, like a strong-burning flame. He¡¯d spent many years refining it, and its strength was almost overwhelming to behold. Samuel felt small before him, despite the staggering differences in physical and magical might. Pure calm radiated from the man across the table, a gentle lapping wave of energy that surged in circular movements around his core.

    ¡°This is amazing,¡± Samuel said faintly. ¡°How could I not know this power?¡±

    ¡°You have lost your roots,¡± Hijiro said, his voice quiet but firm. ¡°You have been too focused on your attachments to the world. You forget that your greatest strength comes from within. It is not what others give you, but what you give yourself, that matters.¡±

    Those simple words, offered by a stranger he would never meet again, stayed with Samuel like a religious mantra. They became the foundation for an entirely new way of life, one centered around himself, rather than the hundreds, thousands of people to which he was beholden. It was the most simple of his parts, but all the stronger for it. It was the ultimate gift, passed down to him from his mother. It was also the only thing he¡¯d had to learn himself, from the first step to mastery.

    The next morning, Samuel rose early when Reito came to call on him. The old master was dressed in the same robe as the previous day, though his hair was tied back, and he had a staff strapped to his back. It was like the war staffs of Gorteau, but lighter, and its surface was inscribed with many delicate runes. Reito himself, to Samuel¡¯s newly opened eyes, shined like a miniature sun. He was a master of spiritual magicks, Samuel thought. He raised the subject at once as they left the ryokan and began their trek for the edge of the Minato township.

    ¡°Your soul is very strong, Reito-san,¡± he said quietly. ¡°Is that what you have learned from Raveonic?¡±

    Reito allowed a faint smile to cross his face. ¡°Yes. My master has taught me much. While Shigeru was the expert of all things physical, capable of defeating any foe, I was born feeble. I am competent with a weapon, but my greatest strength has always lied in healing and aid.¡±

    ¡°But I can see your power clearly,¡± Samuel protested. ¡°I knew Raveonic was a great teacher, but I never expected him to be so strong.¡±

    ¡°He is unlike anyone I have ever seen,¡± Reito said with a nod of agreement. ¡°He knows many things, and shares his knowledge freely with those who are worthy of his teachings.¡±

    ¡°Is that why he summoned me?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°Does he think I¡¯m finally worthy to learn from him?¡±

    ¡°I cannot pretend to know his purpose in calling you to the Sanctuary,¡± Reito said, after a few minutes of silence. ¡°My master is mysterious in his ways. Perhaps he has something to teach you. Perhaps he merely invited you to tea.¡±

    Samuel laughed at that but stopped at once when he saw the serious look on Reito¡¯s face. ¡°He sounds a bit mad.¡±

    ¡°Well,¡± Reito said delicately, ¡°He has been alive since the time of the Ancients. Perhaps the passing of time has made him a bit mad. But he is still a genius, and as far as I know, unmatched.¡±

    ¡°Well, I¡¯m sure Grimr could top him.¡±

    Reito stopped suddenly, turning to face Samuel, who almost walked into him with the abrupt halt. ¡°Has the Wanderer never told you of his fight with my master?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Samuel frowned. ¡°I didn¡¯t know that they had fought. When was this?¡±

    ¡°Many, many years ago,¡± Reito said. He began walking once more, and Samuel followed expectantly. ¡°It was at the end of the first war when they first crossed paths. Grimr had just won a great victory for the world. Only my master and the Ancients know what the war was for.¡±

    This was the first time Samuel had heard of it. ¡°What happened?¡±

    ¡°My master was a strong warrior even then. He desired to test his strength, so he asked the Wanderer for a duel. Grimr accepted, and very nearly won.¡±

    ¡°He lost?¡± Samuel spluttered. He¡¯d seen Grimr¡¯s strength first-hand in the fight against Neratas. He had the ability to draw strength from the world around him, to fuel him to legendary levels. The thought that he could lose against a mortal, even a strong one, was unbelievable. Samuel couldn¡¯t picture just how strong someone would have to be to defeat the Ancient. And he¡¯d had hundreds, possibly thousands of years of growth after that?

    ¡°Yes,¡± Reito said, smiling at the awed look on Samuel¡¯s face. ¡°It was the last serious fight anyone had ever seen him take on. He says that he will have one more serious fight before his time comes, but we do not know when. He trains daily for that fight.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s mind was spinning, something that had not happened for many years. He became so consumed by his thoughts that he lost track of the time. Reito was more than willing to let him pursue this new information for himself, merely leading the way. Now Samuel was slightly nervous at the thought of presenting himself before such a person. What if he did or said something that provoked Raveonic into anger? He was certain that he stood no chance now. What if this was to be his last journey?

    ¡°Here we are.¡±

    Samuel glanced up, shocked out of his thoughts, and glanced around. The town of Minato was far behind them now. He craned his neck back. The tall mountain he¡¯d noticed from Minato was directly in front of him, stretching far above into the heavens. They were at the base of the monumental landmark, standing before a simple wooden archway. Words were inscribed on the arch. Test yourself, and you may rise to higher levels. Test yourself, and attain power in the favor of the mother.

    When he glanced down, Reito was gone. He was alone. A voice rang out in the eerie silence, echoing through the air and his mind. Test yourself.

 Chapter 19

    Bora Bora opened his eyes to see a canopy of leaves far above him. It was hot wherever he was, but not unbearably so. The cooling tinkle of running water sounded from somewhere nearby. A creek or small river, perhaps. The surface on which he rested was soft and springy, which made him think of the moss that grew on forest floors. So he was in a forest somewhere, he decided. But exactly where, he couldn¡¯t be sure. He flexed his hands and feet experimentally, mildly surprised to see that they still worked.

    ¡°You¡¯re finally awake.¡±

    Before he knew what had happened, Bora Bora was up on his feet in a flash, his hand reaching out to call his scythe to his hand. But it did not come. Confused and slightly angry, he tried again. It was only then he spotted the weapon. It was in the firm grip of a woman, who was sitting mere inches from where he¡¯d lain. The weapon was struggling to come to his hand, so she had a powerful grip on her. He resisted the effort to attack her right away, sensing that in his weakened state, this would be foolish to the point of suicide.

    ¡°Who are you?¡± He asked. As he spoke, he noticed how raspy his voice had become due to dehydration. So he¡¯d been unconscious for at least two or three days, then. ¡°How can you keep my weapon from me?¡±

    ¡°I can keep this from you,¡± The woman said, a coy smile on her face, ¡°Because I can control Bahamut¡¯s power. More effectively than you, it seems. But worry not, Bora Bora. I will not strike you down. You may rest here. You are in no danger.¡±

    Bora Bora¡¯s body quickly relaxed at her words. Then, angry with himself, he tensed up again, glaring suspiciously at the woman facing him. She could control Bahamut¡¯s power? But that was impossible. Not that she could channel the dragon¡¯s divine power, but that she could overpower his pull on his weapon. He was the mightiest of the platinum dragon¡¯s followers, his Champion, and greatest warrior. She was powerful, sure, but he¡¯d been told his entire life that he would be at the apex. She shouldn¡¯t be capable of such power.

    ¡°You haven¡¯t answered my first question,¡± he said after a few minutes of silence had passed between them. ¡°You know my name, but I do not know yours.¡±

    ¡°True,¡± She said casually, and a wide smile broke across her face. Her teeth were unnaturally sharp for a human¡¯s, he thought. They looked more like those of a dragon. All at once, he relaxed again. He¡¯d just noticed how breathtakingly beautiful this woman was. Long black hair fell in waves to her mocha-colored shoulders, which were exposed by her simple but elegant white dress. A silk sash was draped over her shoulder, bearing a golden emblem he didn¡¯t recognize.  It was three jagged slashes, golden on a field of dark green. She was slim from head to toe, with surprisingly wide hips that were accentuated by the dress. Her feet were bare on the forest floor but smoother than the softest silk, and completely clean of dirt.

    ¡°Who are you?¡± He asked again.

    ¡°You may call me Khanmara,¡± she said, her sharp smile widening. Her eyes, deep golden color with flecks of crimson, were draconian in appearance, just like her teeth. ¡°Surely you¡¯ve heard of me.¡±

    Bora Bora dropped to his knees. He¡¯d heard of the woman, alright. Khamnara Lance. The most ancient and mighty of the mortal dragons, a powerful sorceress. She was the conqueror of so many towns and villages, her history of battle so bloody that it made Bora Bora pure and clean by comparison. She was the first Champion of Bahamut, the divine enforcer of her will. Along with her god, she¡¯d won many great victories for her kind, single-handedly eliminating an entire race sworn to destroy her kin.

    ¡°That¡¯s better,¡± Khanmara said, her smile fading to a slight pout. ¡°It is proper form to kneel before your superior.¡±

    He was regretting his hostile stance now. This woman before him had the power to eradicate him on the spot if she so chose. On a whim, she could tear him asunder, with his weapon, and he would have little to no chance of escape. She was the last to defeat Tiamat, forcing the Tyrant Queen into hiding to escape her death. He dropped into a deep bow at once, placing his head against the soft forest floor, abandoning any anger that was inside him.

    ¡°Please accept my deepest apologies,¡± he said, in a meek voice quite unlike his own. ¡°I should not have tested you, great Khanmara.¡±

    As he knelt, waiting for the blow that would destroy him, he heard an unexpected sound. Laughter. It started as a quiet little chuckle but quickly grew into a deep-throated cackle of mirth. Glancing up nervously, he saw her nearly doubled over with shouts of mirth, stomping on the ground in an informal fashion. He blinked in confusion, and as his confusion grew, his fear of death began to recede. Perhaps he would live to see another day.

    ¡°Oh, by the Platinum Conquerer,¡± she wheezed, barely able to stand with the force of her laughter. She was clutching the staff of his scythe for support. ¡°You¡¯re just as quick-witted as I¡¯ve always seen. You¡¯ve got a good head on your shoulders, little dragon-kin.¡±

    Bora Bora rose until he was only kneeling, and stared incredulously at Khanmara. Now that he was properly aware of her true identity, he wondered how he hadn¡¯t noticed the signs before. An overpowering amount of control over his weapon, a complete lack of awe or nerves in front of quite possibly one of the most dangerous assassins in the Kingdom, and an aura of such domineering power that he was instantly on his guard? She practically dripped with bloodlust and power now, though she¡¯d seemed harmless at first.

    ¡°Relax,¡± she said, finally recovering from her laughing fit. At once, her bloodlust seemed to dissipate, leaving just the image of a beautiful woman with strange eyes and an amused grin on her face. ¡°As I said, you¡¯re in no danger here.¡±

    And finally, he did allow himself to relax. He rose to his feet once more in a graceful movement and regarded her with something close to awe. He wasn¡¯t exactly rude to everyone, but he did consider himself to be above many people in the world. There were some that he regarded as equals; the captain of Issho-Ni and the Champion of Arcana, for instance, but there were precious few who he regarded as above him. There had only been one, and that was Bahamut. But there was no mistaking the position this woman held. She was hopelessly out of his reach.

    ¡°You healed me?¡± He asked, sure of the answer before he even spoke. ¡°How long have I been unconscious?¡±

    ¡°Yes, I am the one who healed you,¡± Khanmara replied. ¡°I watched your fight by Mount Murgan and came to you when you were thrown from Tiamat¡¯s back. You have been out for four days.¡±

    ¡°Four days?¡± Bora Bora spluttered, one hand rising to scrape nervously through his hair. ¡°That¡¯s too long. Do you know where Tiamat is?¡±

    ¡°I do not,¡± she replied, which surprised him. ¡°But you cannot go rushing off just yet. Your bones have healed, but they are still very fragile. You will need one more night of rest before I allow you to leave here.¡±

    Bora Bora opened his mouth to argue, seemed to think better of it, and closed it again. Khanmara raised an eyebrow at his visible struggle and smirked. Unable to think of anything to say just yet, he paced back and forth. Now that she mentioned it, he did feel a dull ache radiating through his entire body. He felt as if he¡¯d been shattered beyond repair, but she¡¯d managed to put him back together anyway. Such things were not only possible but easy for beings with her level of power. He stopped mid-stride as a question occurred to him.You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.

    ¡°How do you know who I am?¡± He asked. ¡°Did Bahamut tell you?¡±

    ¡°At first, yes. I was curious to see who had replaced me. But for the past few years, I¡¯ve been watching you from afar. You interest me greatly, you know. I can see your great potential, and the future that you will have.¡±

    Bora Bora tried not to look too pleased with her words. He could feel his cheeks flushing, the first time since he¡¯d been a child that he was so embarrassed. ¡°Why are you watching me so closely? And what have you seen of my potential?¡±

    At this, her face darkened slightly. It wasn¡¯t a dangerous look, yet it sent a shiver down his spine. ¡°I watch you because of your great power. It has been a long while since I last saw one as young as you with such strength. And you cultivated it on your own, which is even rarer.¡±

    ¡°And what of my legacy?¡±

    ¡°I see a future filled with blood,¡± Khanmara said simply. ¡°You stand atop your enemies, the greatest of them all.¡±

    An eager grin spread across his face at that exciting prospect. The greatest of them all. He liked the sound of that. But then her next words wiped the expression from his face. ¡°But it does not last long. You grow too powerful, and the ancient forces of the world combine to put you down.¡±

    ¡°Who?¡± He asked at once, thinking of striking first. ¡°Who is it that kills me?¡±

    ¡°One who you cannot hope to defeat, no matter how fast you train,¡± she said, her voice firm. ¡°He is known to the ancient ones as The Wanderer. You may know him as Grimr Lonfang, God of Nature.¡±

    Bora Bora took a step back in shock. ¡°You¡¯ve seen him kill me? Why?¡±

    ¡°It is simple. The Wanderer is dedicated to keeping the balance. You grow too powerful, and your power corrupts you. In order to keep the balance, he must kill you, and does. You stand no chance, for he is stronger even than I was, in my prime.¡±

    ¡°Oh,¡± Bora Bora said, feeling suddenly weak. ¡°Well, that¡¯s unfortunate. Is there no way to avoid that?¡±

    ¡°There is,¡± she said, her smile coming back. ¡°It is a path I think you will find quite agreeable. I have watched you long enough, and I know that you are worthy.¡±

    ¡°What must I do?¡±

    ¡°You must leave behind a legacy.¡±

    ¡°A legacy?¡± He blinked at her as if she¡¯d taken leave of her senses. ¡°As in father a child? No. That idea is disgusting in its own right.¡±

    ¡°You think many beneath you,¡± she said wisely, nodding her understanding. ¡°You cannot conceive of a worthy mate to carry on your bloodline.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± he said tersely, resuming his pacing. ¡°I am a chosen one, with power beyond the hopes and dreams of nearly all mortal beings. What creature in the world could match me?¡±

    ¡°Me.¡±

    Bora Bora stopped again, so violently that he nearly fell over. He gaped at her with his mouth agape, quite certain he¡¯d misheard her. ¡°You want-¡±

    ¡°I want to create your legacy,¡± she said simply. ¡°You will continue to attain the greatness you seek. But your power will be grounded in your legacy. You will never rise to the point that the Wanderer is forced to hunt you.¡±

    ¡°You want to bear a child for me?¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Khanmara said, with the calm certainty of someone reaching an unassailable conclusion. ¡°I have lived many years now, and I need something besides my battles to be remembered by.¡±

    ¡°But why me?¡± Bora Bora asked, certain that he was testing his luck, but unable to keep the question to himself. ¡°I¡¯m sure there are other, more powerful options for you.¡±

    Khanmara frowned at him. ¡°Are you telling me that you¡¯re not worthy after I have already said so? Are you telling me that I¡¯m mistaken?¡±

    The tiniest bit of her coy amused mask slipped, and he flinched at the anger that was boiling underneath. He put his hands up in a gesture of surrender. To tell the truth, if he had to pick, he¡¯d choose to leave a legacy behind. He wasn¡¯t so brazen as to think that he stood a chance against the God of Nature. ¡°No, you are not mistaken. I am honored to accept.¡±

    ¡°Good,¡± she said calmly. ¡°Now that I have your word, you may have this back. It is too weak a weapon for me in any event.¡±

    She released the grip on his scythe, and it instantly flew back to him, almost as if it were glad to be free of her clutches. It vibrated warmly in his hand once again, and he felt a little more confident. He glanced around as if expecting some other development, but of course, he was faced with only one option. Suddenly, he had a flash of doubt. He¡¯d never struggled to pursue his desires when it came to the brothel he owned in Milagre. What if, now, for the first time in his life, he was unable to properly act the part? But then he glanced back to Khanmara, who was lying on a conjured bed, gazing invitingly across from him. She was a dangerous beast, to be sure, but at that moment her pull was irresistible

    He tossed in his sleep. Something was wrong, but he couldn¡¯t quite put his finger on it. A general unease clouded his mind, filling him with an overwhelming surge of power. It was intoxicating, but he knew in his core that it was dangerous. He was surrounded by darkness on all sides. Not darkness, he corrected himself. It was a thick dust, through which he could sense other beings. Weaker beings. Then the dust parted, and the scene was revealed to him.

    He saw himself as if through another¡¯s eyes. He was rippling with power. It rolled off of him in waves, a palpable chill that filled him with dread. It had the same effect on those gathered around him as well. Hundreds were before him, and only a few were left standing. Behind him, what looked like the ruins of a great city were visible, countless columns of smoke rising from countless fires. It was clear that he¡¯d just lain it to waste, along with the hundreds of corpses that scattered the battlefields around him.

    One figure stood, facing him. It was that foreigner Tokugawa, he noticed. He was holding a long stout wooden spear, its tip glistening with fresh blood. But the man holding it was weak, his body host to many grievous wounds. It was just as clear that Bora Bora himself had inflicted those wounds. Tokugawa was the last challenger before him, and as he watched, his legs gave out, and he fell to the ground without another sound. His dream self lifted his head to the heavens and let out a fierce roar of victory. The greatest of them all.

    Then, he came. He arrived with no sound or light, appearing virtually out of thin air, a mere three feet away. The roar was cut off suddenly, and he glanced down. The Wanderer gazed up at him with something akin to pity, no sign of malice or hostility in his stature. He looked ridiculously small by comparison, but, knowing what he did, Bora Bora finally understood what it was he saw.

    ¡°You have grown quite powerful, former Champion of  Bahamut,¡± The Wanderer said, his voice deep and gravelly. He could have been there to pay tribute if it weren¡¯t for the obvious weapon clutched in his hand. He lifted the dagger and pointed it at Bora Bora. ¡°But for the sake of the balance, and to pay for your crimes, I must take your life.¡±

    ¡°You think you can kill me?¡± His dream self said. He was shocked to hear the voice. It was high and clear, with no sign of the usual sibilance. ¡°I am the mightiest! I have killed far greater foes than you, Ancient! I am the killer of the Platinum Dragon!¡±

    A wave of shock, so powerful that it could have stumbled him, ripped through Bora Bora¡¯s mind. This was the future that Khanmara had foreseen? A future in which he kills Bahamut? That would explain the waves of power, he thought. If he were to kill his god, he would, as Champion, inherit his divine powers. This was known. But he¡¯d achieved it the wrong way, he now realized. This was why the Wanderer had to kill him.

    And so he did. The Wanderer wasted no words and moved in a blur. Before he could blink, either in physical or dream form, the small Ancient had closed the distance and struck with his knife, plunging it deep into his chest. It sank to the hilt, drawing no blood, but emitting something. Bright green light coursed out of it, enveloping Bora Bora¡¯s body in an instant. Then he was no more.

    He expected to jolt upright when he woke, but his dream faded away like smooth silk through his fingers, leaving nothing but darkness in its wake. It was crushing upon him, exerting so much pressure that he was certain death was near. Then, just when it became too much, his eyes opened once more, revealing the forest clearing around him. His breathing was even and his pulse was quite calm. Glancing over, he saw Khanmara regarding him with her calm, golden eyes. Everything seemed sharper now as if he¡¯d previously worn a blurred mask that had limited his vision.

    ¡°What has happened to me?¡± He asked. He knew that something was different. ¡°Am I still me?¡±

    ¡°Your nature is a tiny bit different now,¡± she said gently. ¡°It was unavoidable in our joining. But I imagine you will not be disappointed with the effects.¡±

 Chapter 20

    Bora Bora stood with his feet spread wide apart, staring down at his hands. There was strange energy coursing through his body, and now that he was aware of it, he wondered how he hadn¡¯t noticed it before. It was like a fiery heat, burning so warmly in his chest that it was almost uncomfortable like there was fire pulsing through his veins. His eyes, ears, and nose seemed to be working in overdrive as well, bringing sharper sounds, scents, and sights to his attention. He could hear the faint thumping of Khanmara¡¯s heart, depsite the fact that she was nearly fifteen feet away.

    ¡°My senses have been strengthened,¡± he said, glancing up at her. ¡°How is this?¡±

    ¡°Your senses are stronger because of your draconic essense,¡± She explained patiently. She took a full step towards him, then another. ¡°I think this is adequate.¡±

    ¡°What¡¯s adequate?¡± He asked, then let out a yell of pain. Something, or rather two somethings, had stabbed him in the shoulder blades. It was excruciating, and he fell to one knee. He seemed to fall a little slower than normal, and he felt strangely off balance. There was a weight on his back that hadn¡¯t been there before, and he could see the tattered black wings of whatever creature it was in the corner of his eyes. He whirled around, calling the scythe to his hand, but there was nothing there.

    He thrust a hand over his shoulder to snatch the creature but encountered only his own back. Was it immaterial? But then he encountered a soft, warm, leathery substance. Its wings! He seized hold of one and wrenched. A shaft of pain tore through his body, and he stumbled to his knees again. Khanmara let out a laugh at his action, and he turned to face her again, noting that the simple movement was slower. She was grinning widely at him, her mouth full of those wickedly sharp teeth, and her eyes were alight with excitement.

    ¡°Pull them in,¡± she managed to say between roars of laughter. ¡°You look like a cub, spinning in place.¡±

    ¡°Pull them in?¡± He repeated, dumbfounded. ¡°What are you-.¡±

    Then the realization hit him, with a shock strong enough to stun. The wings didn¡¯t belong to some small creature that was attacking him. They were attached directly to his body! At the thought, he tried to flare one out. It stretched to its full length, the tendons stretched and the extra limb easily reaching eight feet to the side. He flared out the other and immediately staggered as they caught the light breeze through the treetops. Woah now, he thought to himself. That¡¯s inconvenient.

    ¡°I said to pull them in, idiot,¡± Khanmara said with another snort of laughter. ¡°This is better than I could have hoped for.¡±

    At her words and a mere thought, the wings retracted completely. Instead of lying tucked flat against his back, however, they disappeared completely. His balance was back to normal. ¡°What in the-.¡±

    ¡°It is an ancient school of magic,¡± Khanmara said, stepping closer. ¡°Very few were capable, but I knew you would be capable of handling it.¡±

    ¡°Magic?¡± He asked, turning on the spot as if he could see where the wings had gone. ¡°What kind of magic? I¡¯ve never seen anything of the like.¡±

    ¡°Well,¡± Khanmara said, gripping his shoulders firmly to hold him in place, ¡°That would be because the last human to be given an Aspect died nearly three hundred years ago. Weak mortals cannot gain an aspect without considerable training. Even less could receive the Aspect of an ancient dragon such as myself.¡±

    Still holding him tightly, Khanmara rolled her shoulders slightly, and a great pair of wings erupted from her back. They were beautiful to behold, he thought, and he relaxed completely. They were a bright golden, with little veins of rainbow light that reached to the tips. They were also feathered, not scaled or leathery, as was the case with nearly all dragons. Before his very eyes, they stretched out to their fullest length, about three yards on either side. Then, with a powerful downward thrust, Khanmara lifted the both of them upward into the air. In less time than he could blink, they were a hundred feet in the air, and he felt his body tense up again.

    ¡°An Aspect is the cultivation of our draconic bloodline fused with a mortal¡¯s appearance,¡± Khanmara said patiently. ¡°It contains the great power of our breath and wings, and the resilience of our scales, but allows us to assume the form of humans, elves, and dwarves without arousing suspicion.¡±

    ¡°How can I bear it without being destroyed?¡± He asked. ¡°Has anyone survived receiving your Aspect?¡±

    ¡°I have never given my Aspect,¡± Khanmara said. ¡°As I never could find a mate, whether mortal or dragon, that was worthy of me.¡±

    That revelation was enough to stop him squirming, and he glanced up at her, to see her eyes burning more brightly than ever. Then, without warning, she spun in the air and threw him away from her. He flew several meters through the air, then gravity took control of him, and he began to fall. Just as with the fall from Tiamat¡¯s back, he was certain that the fall would be lethal. He would smash his body against the soft earth, which from this height would be like the hardest steel. Then, a mere three or four feet above the treetops, instinct took over, and he turned to face the ground, feeling his wings reappear in time to catch him. The tip of one tree smacked him in the face, blinding him, but then he felt himself rising once more.

    He shot up through the air with ease, slicing through the air like an arrow as he closed his eyes, enjoying the feel of the wind whipping across his face. After a few seconds, he opened them and came to a halt. The ground was very far away from him now. He could see the entirety of the forest under him and even make out a faint sign of the mountain where he¡¯d tried and failed to kill Tiamat. It seemed so small from his point of view now. Was this how dragons felt, ruling the skies unchallenged and viewing every other form of life as an insect? It all felt so beneath him now that he was so high up.

    ¡°It is an addicting feeling, I know.¡± He spun around to see Khanmara behind him. He hadn¡¯t noticed her following him. ¡°You can¡¯t help but feel mighty when you see the world from this point of view.¡±

    He couldn¡¯t think of anything to say to that, though he¡¯d never agreed with any sentiment more. He turned in a slow circle as he surveyed the landscape. Milagre was in that direction, he thought. Not that he¡¯d ever return. If he tried to enter the city again, the King would send men after him, men that Bora Bora would kill. That could very well lead him down the path that resulted in the scene he¡¯d dreamt of. Even now, he could feel a sharp pain in his chest, as if the Wanderer¡¯s knife had just pierced him. He¡¯d be content in the wilds after he took care of Tiamat.

    Khanmara was still watching him as if she were aware of exactly what was going through his mind. ¡°You must return.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± He asked, turning to face her. ¡°But I¡¯ve been banished. If I get into a fight with the King¡¯s men-.¡±

    She cut him off. ¡°It is of the utmost importance that you return to the capital. Do not go through the gate. Fly directly to the temple, and do not leave until it is time.¡±

    ¡°Time for what?¡± He asked, completely confused. ¡°What is going on, Khanmara?¡±

    ¡°You will know when it comes,¡± she said, her face grave. ¡°Go, my lord. Now!¡±

    The strange method of address, combined with the shouted last word, spurred him into action. Before he knew what he was doing, he had rocketed off in the direction of Milagre, his new wings beating powerfully as the country flashed by underneath him. Stay in the temple, he thought to himself. Khanmara could see something coming. Something so drastic that she couldn¡¯t speak of it. What had she seen? There was something about her last expression that sent a thrill of foreboding throughout his body. A tad nervously, he increased his pace. He had to reach Milagre as soon as possible.Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.

    Many thousands of miles to the far southeast, Samuel felt a strange chill go through the air and shivered slightly. That put a frown on his face. The climate was quite warm, and he didn¡¯t know what could have caused that strange shiver down his spine. He shook himself aggressively. Very strange. He put it to the back of his mind for future consideration and returned his attention to the situation he found himself in.

    The tall arch stood before him, unmoving, and he fixed his eyes on the words inscribed on the top again. Test yourself. So this was how he¡¯d be judged. It wasn¡¯t as if he were new or even averse to tests. His life had been full of challenges, after all, and he¡¯d cleared each one with proverbial ease. He was confident that he could handle himself in a crisis, no matter what came his way. No, the thing that was giving him so much hesitation was how little he¡¯d prepared. In every other great challenge, he¡¯d done his research, and come up with a plan. He had no idea what would face him as he made his way up this mountain.

    Well, there was no point in dragging out the inevitable, he told himself. With a deep breath, he strode forward toward the arch. The mountain was eerily quiet as if all life on it was holding their collective breath, waiting to see what would become of him. The moment he crossed under the arch, he felt a surge of energy come over his body. He had a distinct impression that he was being scanned. He could exit and climb the mountain another way, of course, but this trek had the sense of destiny about it. Better not to disrespect the challenge by slipping past it entirely.

    For the first thirty minutes, his trek up the face of the mountain was uneventful. The sounds of nature among the slanted trees were unending, bringing constant creaks, chirps, and squeaks to his attention. It reminded him of his travel across Zaban, albeit with a much more challenging upward climb. This mountain was nearly the same height as the one in which Arcana had been enclosed. What was it about powerful, ancient wise people that made mountains so appealing for a hiding place? He laughed quietly to himself at the thought. Then something in his environment changed, and he immediately cast his mana screen out a little wider.

    It encountered a human figure almost at once. They were waiting for him just around the corner of the track, where there was more level ground. They had the unmistakable air of someone prepared for a fight. There was no way to avoid them without leaving the path so, with a quiet sigh, Samuel continued along until the figure came into view. He was wearing white robes nearly identical to the set that Reito had worn, and he was holding a longsword. Exactly like mine, Samuel thought. He had an inkling of what this would entail now.

    ¡°Welcome to Mount Kodan,¡± the stranger said, once Samuel was within easy speaking distance. ¡°My master sends his greetings, and wishes the Mother¡¯s favor upon you.¡±

    ¡°Please return my thanks,¡± Samuel said, his tone perfectly friendly. ¡°To what do I owe the pleasure of meeting you?¡±

    ¡°I am your first test,¡± the warrior said, confirming Samuel¡¯s earlier prediction. ¡°My master has arranged three trials for you. To gain entry to his home, you must pass all three. Should you attempt to ignore me, my brothers and sisters have been instructed to treat you as an unwanted guest.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s eyebrows shot up at that. The tone was perfectly friendly, but even the densest idiot couldn¡¯t ignore the chilling effect of the words. A settlement full of expert warriors was not a threat to be considered idly. But Samuel knew he had nothing to fear, as he had not only expected the answer but was perfectly willing to go along with it. He¡¯d rather be on good terms with the legendary wise man than be his enemy. He nodded his understanding and dropped into a deep bow. The stranger seemed strangely relieved that he had accepted, and returned the bow.

    ¡°This shall be the first deadly challenge,¡± he said. ¡°This is the trial of the Body. To pass, you must defeat me in single combat.¡±

    Samuel thrust his closed left fist into the air beside him, and a sheathed blade appeared there. ¡°But of course. I accept your challenge.¡± The crystalline blade, a light-blue in color, glinted as it caught the light of the waning evening sun, adding yet another sparkle to the flare of light that came from the long line of inscribed runes along the spine. His mana coated the blade entirely, soaking through and lapping around it like liquid. He gave the blade an experimental few swings. ¡°Ready when you are.¡±

    The warrior nodded and drew his own weapon. It too bore runes along the spine, though Samuel noticed the lack of complexity to the symbols, and they had no magical effect to them. Rather, the magic that he next sensed came from the man himself as he spread his feet wide, holding the blade at an odd downward angle. It was nearly identical to the form that Tobito assumed whenever he used a single long blade. Now he knew where he, or rather his father, had learned it. Remembering Shigeru and Tobi¡¯s physical might now, he was certain that this would be the most challenging fight he¡¯d taken on in many years.

    In the blink of an eye, the man lunged forward, swinging his blade in an upward slash. He made no move to lighten his strike or pull the force. It was a lethal blow from start to finish and could have cleaved Samuel from hip to shoulder had he not parried it aside with his weapon. Sparks flew as the two blades rang with an ear-splitting shriiing, and Samuel held his ground. He immediately brought his blade back around in a forehand cut, forcing his opponent to step back hurriedly, then shifted his weight forward and went on the attack.

    The one advantage he had in this fight was that his style of fighting was his own, and likely unknown to this master. He danced forward, backward, and sideways as he attacked, his own blade a flicker of light as he thrust and cut. His opponent gave ground an inch or two at a time, deflecting and dodging each of Samuel¡¯s attacks with patience. Samuel had driven him back to his starting position before he made a slight mistake in his footing and had to quickly parry the retaliatory attack mere centimeters from his face.

    In his two steps back, the warrior managed to cut three times, each missing him by a hair¡¯s breadth as he retreated. Then he blocked the fourth with a loud clang. So far, neither of them had used their individual magicks, but Samuel sensed his opponent¡¯s ki flaring to life as he tilted his body sideways and lashed out with a high kick for his face. He coated his free hand in mana to block it, then sent a shock through the man¡¯s body in the instant before they separated. The warrior jerked away with a grunt of pain but returned to the offensive at once.

    White energy coated the steel blade like fire, and the warrior thrust it forward. Samuel parried it with ease, but it had been a feint, and the energy exploded off the blade in a powerful shockwave. The majority of it was absorbed by Samuel¡¯s quick use of a Barrier spell, and he seized hold of the remnants of the mana, sending it through his arm and into his blade as he struck downward. His opponent jumped back out of reach, but a tiny arc of electricity had traveled along the edge of his blade, growing in strength and leaping off the point towards his foe. It missed, as the warrior rolled to the side.

    Without regaining his feet, the warrior swung both legs in a wide circle, releasing yet another shockwave of white energy. This Samuel countered with a quick muttered word, and the warrior was blown backward about five or six feet before rolling back into a fighting position. Samuel was already within reach, giving him no time to recover his poise, the crystalline blade flashing once more as he unleashed a flurry of strikes. The fight was over in less than a minute.

    The warrior flicked one knee up in an attempt to disrupt Samuel¡¯s momentum, but the mage was too fast. He knocked the attack away with his free hand, and then lifted it, palm outward, and released a shockwave of his own. It was just enough to stagger his opponent, and in that tiny window, his blade slid between hilt and wrist, and with a powerful flick, he disarmed the man. Before he could make another move, Samuel put the point of his sword at the man¡¯s throat, stopping it just centimeters away from contact.

    ¡°Do you surrender?¡± He asked, his voice quiet and firm. He could see his own eyes reflected in those of the warrior, glowing faintly with their violet light. ¡°I can continue if you wish.¡±

    ¡°No,¡± The warrior said quickly. ¡°That¡¯s more than enough. You are quite a formidable fighter. I surrender.¡±

    Samuel withdrew the blade and sheathed it, then released his grip on it. It faded away from sight once again, and he stooped into a respectful bow. ¡°Thank you for the match. Is there anything else to this trial?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± the warrior said again. He looked a little shaken as if events hadn¡¯t proceeded quite as he¡¯d expected. Samuel gave this no thought. If they¡¯d underestimated him, that was their problem. ¡°You have passed the Trial of the Body.¡±

    ¡°Trial of the Mind is next, then?¡±

    ¡°Yes.¡±

    Samuel nodded his understanding, and stepped past his defeated opponent without another word, continuing on his way up the mountain. He had a good idea as to what the Trial of the Mind would be. He was pragmatic enough to recognize that he was an exceptionally skilled master of the arcane arts, so this challenge did not give him much pause. No, it was the third trial that he was thinking of. Based on this pattern, it would likely be a Trial of the Soul. He knew no spiritual magicks and wasn¡¯t certain how he¡¯d be expected to succeed.

 Chapter 21

    Much like the first stretch of his journey up the mountain, his progress after completing the Trial of the Body was rather uneventful. The only incidents to break his thoughts came in the form of a magical missile, launched with incredible accuracy from somewhere outside of his sense¡¯s range. The first shot had been alarming, to say the least, but he had grown accustomed to them before long. By extending his mana screen to its outer limit of just under a hundred yards, he could sense the approach of any attacks, and deal with them accordingly. He blocked and parried most, though he occasionally used his unique trait to counter.

    When he countered the spells, he found himself wondering where the attacks were returning to. He couldn¡¯t see the location from which they originated because of the thick mask of trees, of course. But the attacks did not affect whoever was attacking him, as the rain of spells continued without cease, each appearing a minute or two after the previous one. It was a minor nuisance, as it made him keep his attention strained and focused, but he bore it willingly, even easily. He suspected that it was a precursor to the next trial he would face and pitied the unknown mage who was wasting his mana in such a frivolous pursuit.

    It was just over four hours into this that the pattern of attacks began to change. First, they appeared more frequently. Then, once he was receiving an attack every thirty seconds or so, they began to become stronger as well. It was almost as if the hidden mage were panicking, he thought with a grim smile. Losing your composure in a magical duel was equivalent to admitting defeat. He knew that, if he kept pressing, and kept his wits about him, he would find his enemy before long and defeat him too. No matter which master was sent to fight him, he was confident that he could take them.

    He even wondered idly if perhaps it was Oto who would be his challenger. The wise old monk had confessed to being a member of the Sanctuary, after all, and was a highly accomplished mage in his own right. But Samuel had spent a long while studying and understanding his magic and knew several effective ways to counter it. He need only deprive Oto of his ability to send out scouting vibrations, and he would be unable to defend himself. He had blinded himself to strengthen his sound magic, and so relied on sound to survive.

    Another spell rained down on him from above, aiming, as the others had, for his head. He deflected it without a second¡¯s thought or hesitation, and the bolt of mana flew off at a different angle down the mountainside. Then, without warning, it curved sharply and came at him again. Bemused, Samuel stopped it solidly with a barrier spell. It was only then that he noticed the odd quality that it possessed. When it came into contact with his barrier spell, it latched on and began feeding off his mana. He cursed loudly, and teleported a short distance down the path, just in time to see the barrier shatter and be completely absorbed.

    Chaotic mana! He was in serious trouble now, he thought. There were only two known methods of dealing with chaotic mana. The first, which he did now as the projectile launched itself at him once more, was to use a blast of ki. The rigidly controlled physical energy shattered the chaotic mana, eliminating the bolt forever. The second method of dealing with the chaotic mana was much more efficient, but it required him to find and see the source with his own eyes. Just as he had that thought, another lump of chaotic mana came surging into range from far above him, and he blasted it away as well.

    Cursing again, he funneled Ki into his legs to bolster them, then reinforced his arms with mana. The simple runes on his robes flared with light, providing a tempting target for the chaotic mana as it launched another attack. He dove under the most recent attack, nearly tripling his previous climbing pace, and rocketed along the path at top speed. He had to reach the core of the chaotic energy if he stood any chance of purging it. His breathing was calm and steady as he continued to avoid and destroy clumps of chaotic mana, and he was filled with confidence. He¡¯d defeated a beast of chaotic mana once before and knew it could be done again.

    Within two minutes, he sensed its presence with his mana screen. It latched on to the faint dregs of mana he was using to search for it, and Samuel immediately dropped the screen, giving it no chance to feed directly to him and make contact. It had still reached a considerable distance for him in one swift probing movement, covering perhaps half the distance between them. It launched another attack from that position, and he countered it at once, forcing it to retreat with a flash of pain as its spell slammed back into it. But Samuel knew the damage would be minimal.

    He rushed forward as it gathered itself, pushing off the ground with a quick burst of air from his hands. As he soared over the path in a low arc, he gathered his ki to envelop his entire body, coating himself in bright white energy and spinning slightly like a small boulder. He slammed into the mass of chaotic energy with considerable force and burst his ki out in all directions. It was like dropping into water from a great height, sending bits of the chaotic beast¡¯s mana flying away. Its core landed some three or four feet away, but before he could reach for it, it had pulled some of its body back to itself and swatted at him. He danced away, narrowly avoiding contact before firing two more blasts of raw ki at it to push it back.

    Experienced as he was in using his mana and ki to fight, this was still only the second time that he¡¯d faced chaotic mana. It moved in the same way but obviously had different tactics. Instead of lunging directly for him, it stretched as wide as it could, forming a dome in the air around him very quickly. He escaped only by quickly teleporting a few feet backward. Getting quite annoyed by now, he struck twice at it as it reformed into its shapeless mass, carving great chunks away from its body. He made sure to keep his ki on the outside of his body instead of mana, and as it brushed against him, it couldn¡¯t siphon from him.

    It let out a high-pitched ringing sound, the equivalent of a screech of rage, and fired more attacks at point-blank range. Samuel deflected them with a few swipes but was forced to back up, giving it more room to maneuver. It took advantage of the respite at once and finally assumed a form. Much like the chaotic mana he¡¯d faced in Zaban, it copied his form perfectly, having gotten a taste of his mana from earlier. In an instant, Samuel found himself face to face with a clone, though the eyes were shining white instead of violet.

    Samuel had expected this to happen and was ready with a counter. He summoned the crystalline blade and unsheathed it with one powerful flick. The runes along the blade flared to life with mana, the promise of a treat that the beast couldn¡¯t refuse. As Samuel swiped with the crystalline blade, it slipped through the clone without causing damage, but much of its form instinctively reached out to siphon more of his mana. It was a being driven by only hunger, and as such couldn¡¯t recognize the risk of that action. Samuel used another blast of Ki, and the clone was dispersed back into countless little dregs of chaos.

    The ringing sound came again, louder and more intense than ever as it built itself into a killing rage. All the mass it possessed was collapsing in on itself, glowing with a dangerous white light and twitching slightly. Samuel stood patiently, knowing what was coming, and making no move to avoid it. It would continue to gather itself, building up power for one desperate, final attack to devour its prey. He watched it closely, waiting for it to reach the critical point. Now!

    ¡°Laban!¡± He shouted fiercely, one hand held out, emitting a quiet, almost invisible shockwave.

    Just as it had begun to release its body in an explosion of light, Samuel¡¯s counter hit it, and the force of its attack was reflected back at itself, with just as much intensity. In a roar of sound that drowned out even its explosion, its body was torn to shreds, and the various parts evaporated, leaving just its core behind. Now the ringing noise had a sense of panic and fear to it, he noticed. Before it could vanish from sight, he lunged forward and snatched it up, his hand coated in a protective layer of ki. He brought it up close to his face, registering that, instead of a human, its core comprised of a dull blue gem. Obviously artificially created.Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.

    With a quick burst of key, the gem was fractured into powder, and the beast was no more. He relaxed his grip then, tossing the fine powder to the side and dusting his hand off on his robe. He summoned the sheath of his sword back to him with a quick flick of his finger, then banished the weapon. Well then, he thought to himself. That had been unexpected. He assumed, certain that he was correct, that this fight had been part of the second trial. Raveonic must know a great deal about him to summon that exact type of challenge. Did Grimr tell him everything? Or maybe Shigeru, through communion. He discarded the thought with a quick shrug. He¡¯d learn the answer in good time.

    He set out along the path once more, reinforcing his legs with ki once more to increase his speed. He was keen to be over with this trial as soon as possible.

    He faced no more attacks, no more challenges, not even a moment of uncertainty caused by odd sightings as he scaled the mountain. Still, he kept his guard up and the screen extended as he ran, taking careful note of every living creature that came in contact with it. They were all the usual wild animals, little beings who had a minuscule amount of ki to their name. His presence, strong as it was, scared each animal away, even the larger predators, who weren¡¯t willing to interact with a dangerous stranger. He was the strongest creature in the area, and they all knew it.

    That remained true until he was nearly at the peak when he registered the presence of someone familiar. It took him a moment to recognize the person as they¡¯d spent so little time together, but it was unmistakable Reito. Samuel quickly came to the end of the path, reaching a large, flat area. Reito was standing a mere ten feet in front of him, placed distinctly between Samuel and an archway. There was something behind the arch, he could sense, but his eyes could only make out an overgrown forest that covered the entirety of the rather flat peak. Still, he couldn¡¯t shake the feeling that Reito was guarding the entrance to the Sanctuary, which lie through the archway.

    ¡°Welcome to the Sanctuary,¡± Reito said. ¡°It is our honor to receive you as an esteemed guest, Samuel Bragg.¡±

    ¡°Good evening,¡± Samuel said warily, studying the lines of Reito¡¯s body. His stance was not a hostile or aggressive one, but he fairly radiated power. ¡°Are you the one who I will be fighting in the Trial of the Mind?¡±

    ¡°Mind?¡± Reito asked, looking moderately perplexed. Then his face cleared. ¡°Oh, no. You have already passed that trial, my friend. You now stand before the Trial of the Soul.¡±

    Samuel glanced back along the path, frowning deeply. ¡°The chaotic beast was my trial? But surely you knew that I would be able to account for it. It didn¡¯t take me long to defeat it.¡±

    ¡°But of course,¡± Reito said with a small smile. ¡°My master knew you would handle the Enari easily. It was not nearly enough to defeat you.¡±

    ¡°Enari,¡± Samuel said slowly. ¡°I¡¯ve not heard this word. ¡°What are they?¡±

    ¡°Spirits of chaotic mana,¡± Reito explained. ¡°My master discovered them during his brief time in the Ethereal Plane. One of them followed him outside, and he was forced to kill it.¡±

    ¡°But the only way to kill it is with my unique trait,¡± Samuel said. ¡°How could he have managed that without my counter?¡±

    ¡°He trapped its soul inside a gem,¡± Reito said. ¡°The very gem which you destroyed not long ago, I gather.¡±

    ¡°Okay then,¡± Samuel said. ¡°The last ¡®Enari¡¯ I encountered was a young boy. He was definitely from Ahya, and not the Ethereal Plane.¡±

    ¡°My master knows of this Enari,¡± Reito explained. ¡°He says that the boy was close to fully growing into his true form when you killed him.¡±

    Samuel flinched violently at the words, a stab of grief running through his body. ¡°He left me no choice. I had to save him from his suffering.¡±

    ¡°Indeed. My master recognizes this, and so had sent the other Enari to you. We are grateful that you have put it to rest.¡±

    The pain was gone as quickly as it had come, replaced by anger. Samuel took several steps forward. ¡°You do not have the right to toy with people¡¯s lives.¡±

    Reito stared evenly at him, making no comment. After what felt like ten minutes, Samuel was forced to speak again. ¡°What is the Trial of the Soul? I¡¯ll discuss this with Raveonic when I meet him.¡±

    Reito blinked slowly, apparently considering his reply. ¡°Very well. Your trial is simple. To enter the Sanctuary, you must enter the arch behind me.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s it?¡± Samuel asked, shocked. ¡°I just have to walk through?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Reito said. ¡°There is a purpose to these trials, as I have stated. It is important to know your strengths. And your weaknesses.¡±

    ¡°Alright,¡± Samuel said abruptly, in no mood for riddles or games. ¡°See you later, then.¡±

    He walked briskly up to Reito, watching the man closely. He was certain to intervene in some way. But the closer Samuel got, the greater his chances of reacting in time to stop any magical attack. He was reasonably certain he could even manage a physical duel, as long as his only objective was to get through the arch. When he and Reitowere nearly chest to chest, he darted to the side and propelled himself forward with a burst of air. As if in slow motion, he turned his head to watch Reito, who hadn¡¯t moved a single muscle to stop him. That was odd, he thought.

    Something caught him in the stomach and stopped him in his tracks, knocking the wind out of him. Then another invisible force struck him around the face and sent him sliding back. He was charging forward again before he¡¯d even come to a full stop, his eyes narrowed tightly to catch any sign of activating mana. There was nothing. Perhaps he was reacting too quickly for any trap spells to activate again. But then something hit his legs, knocking them clean out from under him, while another hidden object shoved him away. He flew for nearly a dozen feet before landing face-first on the ground and rolling a few more inches.

    He let out a groan of pain. The four impacts he¡¯d sustained felt like iron-clad punches. If they¡¯d been physical, he was certain that he would have nasty bruises to contend with. He got back to his feet hurriedly, arms raised to ward off possibly physical blows, but none came. Yet again he glanced at Reito, frowning as he realized the monk was still in his original position. He hadn¡¯t moved once since Samuel had begun his attempt, but was merely watching him with a calm expression.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡± Samuel asked him angrily. ¡°How are you doing it? I can¡¯t sense any movement from you.¡±

    Reito made no reply, not even a raised eyebrow. Surprising himself, Samuel felt another flare of anger. He lunged at Reito, his fists coated in Ki, and attempted to strike him. Yet another invisible attack struck the side of his head, knocking him flat to the ground. He was back on his feet in an instant, swinging his fists for the older man before him. Yet again, something met him before he could, and rebuffed him. He slid to a stop, nearly in the same position, glaring incredulously at Reito.

    ¡°You¡¯re strong,¡± Samuel said begrudgingly. ¡°Stronger than me. Well, that¡¯s not a surprise, given who your family is.¡±

    ¡°I am not,¡± Reito said, speaking for the first time in a few minutes. ¡°You possess considerably more power than I, Samuel. But you cannot fight that which you cannot see.¡±

    ¡°I cannot touch you, nor can I pass you,¡± Samuel retorted. ¡°How does this not make you stronger than me?¡±

    ¡°You cannot fight that which you cannot see,¡± Reito said again. ¡°There is an element here at play that you cannot identify. Until you do, you cannot succeed, even with the greatest of luck.¡±

    ¡°What happens if I can¡¯t get past you?¡±

    Reito finally showed a little expression, his mouth twisting into a thoughtful frown. ¡°I suppose that, if you fail, you will have to leave. But I have nothing to do, so you may continue as long as you like. My master has only instructed me to assign this trial, and to remain by the entrance. If you cannot pass me, you cannot enter the Sanctuary.¡±

 Chapter 22

    Samuel was a mass of stinging cuts and aching bruises by the time he realized the trick of his challenge. He leapt forward again and again, trying to keep his changes in direction unpredictable. He put as much strength as he could into his legs, using he ground, nearby trees, and even bursts of air to try and accomplish his goal. But no matter what he did, he was always rebuffed by an invisible force when he was mere inches from his goal.

    Once he realized that speed wasn¡¯t going to get him anywhere, Samuel resorted to fighting. He didn¡¯t attack Reito, of course, because he¡¯d already learned that lesson. He did, however, attack the air around him immediately after each impact that struck him, but try as he might, he couldn¡¯t connect with anything. His frustration growing, he threw bolts of mana in random directions, to no avail. Finally, he was forced to admit defeat. For the time being.

    He backed off from Reito, moving about thirty feet away and sitting down forcefully with his legs crossed. For the first time since he¡¯d begun the trial, Reito moved as well, sitting down himself. The older man looked a little stiff and weary, he noticed. Did that mean that, if given enough time, he could break through with brute force? He highly doubted it. It was only physical strength that was failing Reito. He was still likely to have reserves of mana that could continue to fuel whatever trick he was pulling.

    It was only then that the realization struck Samuel. He peered intently at Reito, scanning his body and mind for any sign of active or dormant mana. There was some there, of course, as every living being in the world possessed some quantity of mana, large or small. But what intrigued Samuel was the state of the mana he was seeing there. It was unrefined mana. It was the tell-tale sign of a person who had never seriously trained in the arcane arts. It simply clung to his body, loosely drifting with his stable mood.

    Of course! Samuel could have kicked himself in his moment of stupidity. It was the Trial of the Soul, after all. He was in a country full of people who practiced, along with sharpening their bodies, the spiritual magicks. This was a very spiritual nation, and its residents honored their connection to the gods and spirits of the world. They knew of the ancient laws, and respected them. Samuel rose to his feet once more, surprising Reito, who also jumped up.

    ¡°I can¡¯t believe it took me this long,¡± Samuel said, a rueful grin on his face. ¡°So much for being Arcana¡¯s Champion, Master of Magic.¡±

    Reito smiled in return. ¡°Is that another of your titles? I imagine that gets quite exhausting.¡±

    ¡°Quite,¡± Samuel agreed. ¡°Well, let¡¯s see about this.¡±

    He took a deep breath and closed his eyes, confident that Reito wouldn¡¯t make a move against him. He allowed his muscles to relax, for his physical senses to become a little duller. It took a little more effort than usual, but eventually his other senses began to take charge. His mana flowed out and away from his body, creeping through the air and brushing against other living creatures, Reito included. None of them flinched at the sensation, due to his calm nature, though Reito did seem a little more on guard, raising a rudimentary defensive shroud.

    This was the way he knew best, Samuel thought. His easiest way to explore his surroundings. A simple spell, bu through his own mastery, an irreplaceable tool. It warned him of an enemy¡¯s position, mood, intent, and even their state. It was invaluable information in a battle, but it couldn¡¯t sense what he didn¡¯t know was there. He would have to call upon something else for that. He searched for it, that warm, gentle core deep inside him, the one that reminded him so strongly of his mother. And, as soon as he found it, it was suddenly effortless to bring it forth, mixing it easily with his own mana, setting it to course through and around his body like the strongest lifeblood.

    When he opened his eyes again, it was to see Reito smiling expectantly at him. He was glowing with the same kind of energy that Samuel had just tapped into, but the difference between their two souls was staggering. His was a gentle, comforting light. Reito was ablaze with light, prominent as the sun, nearly blinding Samuel with the intensity of his aura. It radiated sheer, overwhelming strength. And beside and behind him, there were¡­.

    He blinked, not sure he could believe what he was seeing. A wolf, nearly fourteen feet at the shoulder and over twenty wide, was standing at Reito¡¯s shoulder. It¡¯s massive head, as white as fresh snow, was looming over the two of them, its wise eyes peering intently at Samuel. It was Longfang! But he contradicted himself almost at once. It was very similar to Longfang, but not quite the same creature.For one, this wolf had green lines of electricity arcing at random intervals along its flank, and its eyes were a milky-white in color, whereas Longfang¡¯s had been a bright violet.

    ¡°His name is Tamashi,¡± Reito said, noting Samuel¡¯s scrutiny of the beast. ¡°I¡¯m sure you recognize him, or another like him. You are correct in thinking that he is similar to Longfang, of course.¡±

    ¡°Is he a brother?¡± Samuel asked, taking a half-step back in awe of the size of Tamashi. ¡°Soul. What a fitting name.¡±

    ¡°Indeed,¡± Reito said with a chuckle. ¡°He is not a brother, but a fragment. All students of our school, with the right training, can call a fragment of the ancient wolf to be our partner and protector. But as of now, this is the only living fragment.¡±

    ¡°Tobi will learn this, eventually,¡± Samuel said, not quite audibly. Reito cocked his head to the side, wondering what had been said. Samuel waved a dismissive hand. ¡°Well, I can¡¯t say I have experience fighting against ancient wolves. But I remember Longfang¡¯s strength clealry.¡±

    ¡°Indeed. While Tamashi is not quite as strong, I imagine you¡¯ll find this an adequate challenge.¡±

    Samuel darted forward again, at at once, his control over his aura slipped. Tamashi vanished from his vision, and he came to a stop, frowning. He brought his aura back up, and the wolf reappeared. It was crouched low, ready to spring and stop him from slipping past. He¡¯d focused so intently on his goal again that he¡¯d forgotten to maintain his senses. Keeping a mana screen up was second-nature to him now, and he could even manage it while sleeping. He imagined that the same years of practice would be required for this. Taking a deep breath, he paced forward. The closer he got, the lower Longfang crouched.

    He dove to the left, where there had been a slight gap between Longfang and the top of the arch. Immediately, the wolf was hidden, but he continued, changing direction at the last instant with a powerful burst of air, hoping to slide under the beast as it rose to stop him. But alas, he felt something slam into his chest, sending him flying back once more. He cushioned his landing with another gust, and slid to a stop, grimacing. It really didn¡¯t matter how fast he was, he thought, if he couldn¡¯t accurately track the wolf¡¯s location and movements. But he couldn¡¯t keep his screen of aura up if he were fighting.

    He reached out to the left, pulling something from his extra-dimensional storage and sliding it over his head. It was a thick leather band with two holes cut into it, and hard glass circles glued on. They were called goggles, and he¡¯d been gifted a pair when working in the sewers of Milagre, to protect his eyes. There was a mask to match, but he didn¡¯t need that just now. Delicately, he gathered aura into his finger, and traced a rune onto each of the lenses. His vision blurred, then refocused, revealing the wolf once more.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°That is an interesting accessory,¡± Reito commented. ¡°But if the tool helps you, then by all means.¡±

    Samuel didn¡¯t enjoy wearing the goggles as they were a little too snug, and eliminated most of his peripheral vision. But it was better than not being able to see at all, he thought. Taking a deep breath, he charged forward again. He could track the wolf¡¯s movements more easily now, and was able to account for its movements. He kept himself low to the ground, watching as Tamashi crouched, ready to intercept. At the last possible second, he jumped up, propelling himself directly at the beast, intending to rebound off its side.

    He slipped right through it, as if it weren¡¯t there. Stunned, Samuel experienced a brief moment of exhilaration. In order to protect itself against what it thought was an attack, it had inadvertently allowed him to slip past it, and the arch was mere centimeters away! But then he saw the white fur in front of him again as the wolf appeared just inside the arch, and its great head slammed into him, knocking him back once more. He was too caught off-guard to right himself this time, and landed hard on his back some ten feet away, rolling several times before he came to a halt.

    ¡°Damn!¡± He exclaimed. ¡°Nearly had it that time.¡±

    He leapt back to his feet, ignoring his sore muscles. The analytical part of his mind was telling him that there was a perfectly good reason why he hadn¡¯t been able to make contact with Tamashi¡¯s body when he wanted, but the wolf could choose when to make contact. Much like how his mana screen couldn¡¯t sense physical objects that didn¡¯t have mana to them, he couldn¡¯t interact with beings made of aura without using the same energy himself. Thus, it was time to test his limits.

    If he had to assign a ratio to it, he¡¯d wager that the size of his mana was larger than the size of his aura by a factor of ten-thousand to one. By contrast, this newly discovered source of energy was pitifully weak, putting him at about the same power level as the average Mage College apprentice. But not for nothing was he the first mage in a long, long time to master nearly impossible types of magic just because of the challenge they posed. He had excelled far beyond his peers as a student because he¡¯d learned to use his mana efficiently. So all he had to do was apply the same method here.

    ¡°Isip,¡± he muttered, his voice just loud enough to reach Reito¡¯s ear. The monk froze, clearly recognizing the name. ¡°I might need your help with this one.¡±

    The connection to his deity was, for lack of a better term, effortless. Never before had he made a bond so quickly, nor had he obtained the knowledge he sought with greater efficiency. In the space of a few seconds, he¡¯d arrived at the answer he desired. It was simple, really. Much simpler than the challenge of slipping past the wolf, at least. But now that he had this answer, the answer to the true challenge was less complicated. No time like the present, he told himself, and let his mana and ki vanish.

    Reito started in surprise as he saw Samuel¡¯s mana fade away to almost nothing. He looked naked by comparison without his protective field. But he was not without light, the monk noticed. His eyes, normally a gentle, glowing violet color, had blazed with new life, and new energy was beginning to seep into existence, coating Samuel¡¯s body like a fiery robe. Bright blue flames erupted into powerful being all along his body, even coating his face as he tore the goggles off. He could see Tamashi perfectly fine on his own, now.

    Tamashi lowered itself into a crouch, his hackles rising, and a low, threatening growl came from its maw. It could taste the dregs of Samuel¡¯s mana in the air, and its own instinct for the hunt had awoken. It was much like when two exceptionally skilled warriors face each other on a battlefield, and all other beings in their vicinity cease to exist. Like recognized like, and a silent challenge was offered. Samuel met the wolf¡¯s eyes, baring his own teeth in a grin. He knew he still had nowhere near the power required to defeat it, but he could get past it.

    Reito couldn¡¯t have prepared to block Samuel¡¯s next move, but the wolf was. Lunging away from the gate for the first time, the beast jumped forward and to the right, just in time to meet Samuel¡¯s head-long rush from that direction. Reito blinked. He¡¯d been so capitvated by Samuel¡¯s aura that he hadn¡¯t even seen the young Ancient move. Then he appeared on the left, diving for the arch, and Tamashi was in his way once more. But before the wolf could swat him away, he¡¯d ducked under the blow, his momentum preserved, and he was charging for his goal once more. A stream of energy was blasted behind him with the speed of his lunge.

    While Reito¡¯s body was not fast enough to keep up with the mage, his soul was another matter entirely. In the half second before Samuel could slip through the arch, the wolf scrambling behind him, he saw some of the rigidity in Reito¡¯s body fade, as if it were going limp. But then Reito was in front of him, one hand moving out, palm extended. It was an exceedingly gentle gesture, but the force behind it was nearly enough to blast him off the mountain. He caught himself just in time by summoning his sword and stabbing it into the earth, but it was a close thing.

    Samuel swung himself back onto stable ground, and glanced up at Reito. The monk was crumpled on the ground, seemingly lifeless. Yet he was also standing a few inches in front of the arch, crouched low with one palm gracefully extended. What on earth was going on? Did he have the ability to split himself in two? But he quickly saw that it was something else entirely. Reito seemed the same, but he had no ki or mana in his body. He was a projection of pure spiritual power, moving independently from his body. He knew then that he must accept defeat.

    ¡°I cannot defeat you,¡± he said, his voice hoarse with awe, and he dropped to his knees. ¡°I forfeit.¡±

    He was surprised to see Reito smiling at him. His body rose to its feet slowly, and he drifted backwards into it, his eyes opening to peer at him with a very amused air. It wasn¡¯t a cruel or gloating gesture. He seemed exceptionally pleased with Samuel¡¯s reply. Even the wolf lost it¡¯s threatening air as it returned to him. It lowered its great head as Reito reached up to stroke it, then the beast vanished completely.

    ¡°You have good judgment, as ever,¡± Reito said quietly. ¡°You have passed this Trial.¡±

    ¡°But I can¡¯t get past you,¡± Samuel protested. ¡°I won¡¯t accept this. If I can¡¯t beat you, I won¡¯t take charity.¡±

    ¡°Who said anything about charity?¡± Reito asked, one eyebrow arched. ¡°Your trial is to enter the arch. It is not to defeat me. I was merely the instrument to awaken your senses. Master will be pleased.¡±

    Samuel blinked at him in some shock, then slowly rose to his feet and paced forward. Reito had stepped aside and folded his hands in his wide sleeves, the very image of docility. Yet Samuel continued to stare at him suspiciously, waiting for him to attack. But he did nothing as their eyes met, and Samuel pulled level with him. Then, with just one more step, he passed under the arch. He was in the Sanctuary.

    The instant he crossed through the arch, the scenery changed. Gone was the great clump of trees. In it¡¯s place was a large courtyard, with a collection of small, simple buildings spread around the outside. A fountain chuckled gently in the center of the square, its noise adding to the laughing conversation of what looked like dozens of men and women who were gathered around it. They were all wearing identical dull grey robes. And there, at the end, was a larger building, perhaps fourty feet across. It had a wolf¡¯s head crest on the mantle.

    ¡°Master Reito,¡± the conversations of the students had halted as Samuel and Reito crossed through, and they all offered a respectful bow to the old monk. ¡°Welcome home. The Master is expecting our guest.¡±

    ¡°I imagine he is,¡± Reito replied, coming up level with Samuel and putting one hand on his shoulder. ¡°Please welcome our guest. He is known as Samuel Bragg.¡±

    Samuel had but a second to register the fact that Reito had abstained from giving him any of his titles, a fact that he appreciated, before the students offered him a respectful bow as well. Their voice came scattered, but with the same message. ¡°Welcome to the Sanctuary, Samuel Bragg.¡±

    Samuel returned their bows as gracefully as he could manage, then they parted to form a path. Keeping one hand on his shoulder, Reito began to lead him across the courtyard towards the main building. Samuel couldn¡¯t sense anything coming from it, but he knew with absolute certainty that the legendary Teacher he¡¯d heard so much about was inside. The building had the pull of destiny to it, a pull that grew stronger the closer he approached, until he was pacing forward quickly, no longer needing Reito to urge him on. He practically ran up the stairs leading to the building¡¯s elevated entrance, and yanked the door open, hurrying inside.

    The interior of the building was a single large room, with one corner curtained off for privacy, indicating a sleeping area. But the curtains were dusty, suggesting that the bed they hid hadn¡¯t been used in some time. Inside, in the exact center of the room, there was a circular stone tablet. There were three rings intersecting with the radius of the tablet, each with a different symbol carved into them. And in the center of the tablet, inside a fourth circle, sat an old man.

 Chapter 23

    ¡°Samuel. Welcome to my home. Please, join me.¡±

    The old man was smiling in warm welcome, the very picture of peace and serenity. Samuel was immediately taken aback by the man, though he couldn¡¯t muster any sort of aggression or defense. He couldn¡¯t sense any mana, ki, or even aura enveloping him, but the lack of energy did not indicate weakness. There was a very calm yet frightening aura of mystery and power around the man, hinting at thousands of years of gathered strength.

    He was also vaguely familiar, Samuel thought. This was their first time meeting, but he was certain that he¡¯d seen the man somewhere. His pale skin, long silver hair, and his heavy robe, with three loops of thick, heavy beads stretching from shoulder to hip on either side and around his waist, it was all very familiar. Where had he seen this man before? He was certain that he would have remembered such a unique individual. Then the memory clicked into place, and his jaw dropped.

    ¡°I¡¯ve seen you before,¡± he said, his voice faint. ¡°You were with Grimr at-.¡±

    ¡°At the funeral of my youngest son,¡± Reito supplied. When Samuel made no further comment, he smiled. ¡°Yes. I remember you as well. I particularly remember the potential I sensed in you then. I¡¯m glad to see you have begun living up to it.¡±

    Samuel could remember wondering, at the time, who the old man beside Grimr had been. The Ancient had been grinning in his usual sarcastic way, a mood he only expressed among friends. He should have known Raveonic then, after all that he¡¯d heard from Shigeru and Grimr. He realized that Raveonic¡¯s hand was still extended, gesturing to one of the circles that lay along the edge of the disk. Hesitantly, he took a step forward. The symbol in the center of the smaller ring was familiar. Mind. It was written in the Ancient tongue. How fitting, he thought, suppressing the urge to snort.

    ¡°Fine,¡± Samuel said, a little of his informal mood returning to him. ¡°I¡¯ve answered your summons, and passed your trials. What is it you wish to teach me?¡±

    He expected Raveonic, or at least Reito, to be offended by his brisk tone. But they both smiled wryly at the quip, and Reito settled himself in the circle with the symbol for Soul. By craning his neck slightly, Samuel could read the symbol in the circle behind Raveonic. Body. How fitting, he thought again. Suddenly, with a pang of irritation, he realized that he was far from the first person in the world to split magic into the three categories.

    ¡°You are not here to learn from me,¡± Raveonic said, once the two had been settled. Samuel raised an eyebrow in expectant disbelief. ¡°Well, I will teach you one thing. But it is just a tool for you to learn more. Unfortunately, I cannot teach you what you need to know for the next step of your life.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll wager this has something to do with the Enari,¡± Samuel ventured. Raveonic¡¯s face gave nothing away, but he was certain in his guess. Lately, all the important parts of his life seemed to point to the Ethereal Plane. He even had an inkling of an idea as to what Raveonic expected him to learn. ¡°Unfortunately, I cannot afford to enter the Ethereal Plane, if that is what you intend for me. I lost a hundred years before, and I¡¯m not keen to do it again. As you know, there is a war in my country. I have to be ready to return at a moment¡¯s notice.¡±

    ¡°You will be gone but a moment,¡± Reito countered at once. ¡°I received a gift from the Mind many years ago, before he was forced into hiding.¡±

    Samuel perked up at that, sitting forward slightly, his hands gripping his knees. ¡°A gift? A spell?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Reito said. ¡°But alas, I cannot perform it. I do not have, err, your special connection to Ahya. I am but a mere mortal, and no amount of training will allow me to be the one that breaches the barrier between our two planes.¡±

    ¡°But I can,¡± Samuel guessed. ¡°But mortals have entered the Ethereal Plane before, and some have even returned.¡±

    ¡°This is true,¡± Raveonic agreed, a small smile reforming on his face. ¡°But they entered by accident, as you did, and their minds were quite damaged from the journey. I know that only two souls have crossed over and returned without severe mental damage.¡±

    ¡°Knarlick,¡± Samuel said quietly. ¡°And me.¡±

    ¡°Correct. But with this spell, your entry will not be an accident. I am confident that you alone will be able to enter and exit by will. Once you manage it, the process will be easier for others.¡±

    ¡°So I¡¯m to blaze a trail,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I will be your foot soldier, to take on the risk, so that others may be spared the danger of crossing later.¡±

    Samuel didn¡¯t know when he¡¯d risen to his feet, but he was suddenly towering over the older man, cold anger flaring in his chest. He¡¯d been fooled, expecting to learn some secret art like that of Shigeru and Grimr, some powerful magic or technique that would allow him to triumph over future foes. He¡¯d expected knowledge, not a suicide mission.  He restrained his mana from flaring up with immense difficulty, and turned on his heel. He had more important and effective things to occupy his time. He couldn¡¯t waste it here, humoring the request of an old sage who refused to teach him anything.

    Before he¡¯d even taken a single step, the entrance to the building slammed shut, and a veil of thick energy washed over it. He was quite clearly locked in. Even Grimr could not defeat him. He summoned his sword with a casual gesture, and the blue hilt appeared in his left hand. He drew the crystalline blade, but did not point it at Raveonic. Such an action was overtly provocative, and would make a fight unavoidable. Reito half-rose, but froze at a simple gesture from Raveonic. The old master was gazing curiously at Samuel, as if mildly curious what his next action would be.

    ¡°It will be dangerous,¡± Reito said. ¡°I cannot pretend to you that it will be easy. But you seek knowledge, do you not?¡±

    ¡°I do,¡± Samuel said, his words muffled through clenched teeth. ¡°But I do not seek an early death. I have many years left to live.¡±

    ¡°I could command you to enter,¡± Raveonic said. ¡°It is your calling in this world. The Ethereal Plane is an untapped resource, full of knowledge to receive. You can learn even that which the Mind does not know. Does this not interest you?¡±

    The latter part of his response was lost on Samuel, who felt another rush of anger run through his body. Command him? He only answered to one higher power, and nothing Raveonic said would change that simple fact. He thinks he has me trapped, Samuel thought. But he had tools that defied any amount of anti-magic effects. At once, he felt the energy inside him begin to creep up his body, coating him entirely in preparation for the spell. But before he could use World Shift, Raveonic said a single word.

    ¡°Stop.¡±

    Samuel was fully prepared to ignore him. But, to his astonishment, the energy he¡¯d pulled from his Ancient side dropped at once, and he didn¡¯t move an inch. His entire body had locked up, refusing to move in accordance with his instructions. He was truly frozen, he thought wildly.

    ¡°Drop your weapon.¡±

    At once, the sword dropped from suddenly limp fingers, clattering onto the stone floor. Samuel looked down at it incredulously with his eyes, as his head couldn¡¯t move. Only his jaw was free. ¡°How did you do that?¡±

    Raveonic rose gracefully to his feet, as did Reito to his side. Now the aura of strength and wisdom was denser, more palpable. It was almost suffocating as he stepped closer to Samuel, the sheer pressure of it terrifying. He would have tried to run for his life if he hadn¡¯t been paralyzed.The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.

    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to tell you that I know more of the Mother¡¯s secrets than you,¡± he said. His friendly tone slipped just a fraction, and Samuel could glimpse an endless ocean of rage and bloodthirst beneath. It was gone as quickly as it had appeared, but it had been vast, like the fire of a volcano, barely suppressed beneath a thin crust of willpower and calm. ¡°I may be mortal, but I can command  Ancients, rendering them incapable of fighting.¡±

    Samuel couldn¡¯t comprehend such a power. Only Ancients could affect other Ancient¡¯s abilities. That rule had been explained quite thoroughly to him by Grimr, after he¡¯d been reborn. Mortals couldn¡¯t touch them, or even truly kill them. He stared deeply into Raveonic¡¯s eyes. ¡°How?¡±

    ¡°The most ancient of us have our roles,¡± Raveonic said firmly. ¡°Mine is to protect Ahya. In order to do so, I cannot be overpowered by any of her children. When I speak, they must obey.¡±

    Almost as if to test the theory, Samuel tried to muster mana to his hands. He didn¡¯t have the intent to attack, merely to pull it to the ready. But apart from a faint quiver, it refused to move. Reito noticed the attempt, and did not smile. ¡°I will not force you to enter the Plane. Nor will I harm you in any way for your rudeness today. Please, pick up your weapon, and listen to me.¡±

    It wasn¡¯t a command, yet he complied, bending over to snatch up the blade and sheath it before he quite understood what he was doing. His body was his own again. He heaved an unseen sigh of relief. It was the first time he¡¯d truly lost control of himself since the time that he¡¯d been reborn. He hadn¡¯t enjoyed it much then, either. Banishing the weapon with a casual gesture, he finally lifted his eyes to meet Raveonic¡¯s.

    ¡°What spell do you have that prevents me from being harmed, either in body or mind?¡± He asked. His tone was abrupt, but it was the best he could manage, given his current mood. ¡°I¡¯ve experienced chaotic mana several times now. It feeds upon stable mana until it is gone, eating up even the source.¡±

    ¡°That is true,¡± Reito said. ¡°But with your body¡¯s energy, you can protect against it, yes?¡±

    Samuel had never given that much thought. He knew that chaotic beasts, or Enari, he corrected himself, couldn¡¯t feed upon ki. That was what made it such a potent weapon whenever he¡¯d had to face one. When he¡¯d coated his body with ki not even two hours ago, he¡¯d provided a layer of protection against the Enari¡¯s body, which had forced the beast to split apart as he crashed down. His mind grasped the idea quickly, and his ki moved automatically flared up to coat him, proving the idea a reality.

    ¡°Excellent,¡± Reito said. ¡°You are a natural at this. I am confident you will easily handle your first foray.¡±

    ¡°There is still the isse of time,¡± Samuel said. ¡°In my last trip to the Ethereal Plane, if I even went there, I was gone for nearly a century. I obviously cannot afford to do so again.¡±

    ¡°Ah,¡± Raveonic said, holding up one finger. ¡°But that will not be an issue with my spell.¡±

    ¡°Your spell?¡± Samuel raised an eyebrow. ¡°How could you create a spell to use in the Ethereal Plane if you¡¯ve never set foot in it?¡±

    ¡°I did not create it for the Ethereal Plane,¡± Raveonic said at once. ¡°I created it for traveling to another plane, where there is no time.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s eyes narrowed at the tidbit of information. This was obviously the first time he¡¯d heard of such a place existing. But at once, he knew the truth. ¡°That is why you do not age, even as a mortal.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Raveonic said, a smile coming back to his face. ¡°After ninety-six years, I managed to reach that plain. I met a most interesting person there, and he taught me how to become timeless.¡±

    ¡°You cannot die,¡± Samuel said. It was not a question. ¡°You are immortal, even more than the Ancients and Gods.¡±

    ¡°I will die,¡± Raveonic corrected him. ¡°My lifeforce is tied to another¡¯s. While he lives, my body remains frozen in this, my most powerful form. But when I kill him, I will perish as well.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re planning to murder someone?¡±

    ¡°I am planning to murder the greatest threat to Ahya that has ever existed. Then I will pay the ultimate price, and give my life to the Mother, before the end for us all comes.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s mind reeled at the revelation, but he willed it away, deciding not to pry just now. He had the sense that Raveonic would refuse to answer anyway, and it was clear that no living soul, even his closest students, knew when that day would come or what it would bring. Reito looked curiously at his master, clearly sad at the prospect of him dying. But he seemed resigned, or perhaps accepting of the inevitability of it. Samuel decided it was best to pursue the original topic.

    ¡°So,¡± he said, bringing the two monk¡¯s attention back to him. ¡°How does this spell work?¡±

    Raveonic¡¯s smile widened as he recognized the wisdom of Samuel¡¯s silent decision, and obliged. ¡°You make a sort of anchor here, on the material plane. It will stay in the same place and time, so no matter how far or how long you move, you will always return to the exact moment you left.¡±

    ¡°And you¡¯re certain I can perform this spell?¡± Samuel asked, though he was already excited at the prospect. ¡°Without practicing it beforehand?¡±

    ¡°I am certain. It is Ancient magic, after all.¡±

    ¡°You can perform Ancient magic?¡± Samuel asked, bewildered. Despite his power to command Samuel, the ancient tongue was something that could not be taught. You were either born with the knowledge of it, or reborn, as Samuel had done. ¡°How is this possible?¡±

    Raveonic lifted one hand in a graceful gesture, his palm directed at Samuel. ¡°Laban.¡±

    Before Samuel¡¯s very eyes, the air around Raveonic¡¯s hand pulsed with unmistakable Ahyan energy, reverberating violently. It was not only Samuel¡¯s unique trait, but a fully developed, perfected version. For an instant, Samuel could see the flashes of energy that swirled through the air. Mana, ki, and aura all moving in harmony, directed and bolstered by the energy that only came from the Mother. It was, in Samuel¡¯s opinion, an even more convincing display of his power than freezing him and forcing him to drop his sword.

    ¡°Teach me,¡± Samuel said at once, his mind made up. ¡°Please.¡±

    ¡°You already know this,¡± Raveonic replied. ¡°The knowledge is there. You just need to use the right words.¡±

    Samuel frowned at him, his mind already casting inwards, as it did when he was faced with a new challenge. The right words. That meant that it was derived from the ancient tongue, which he knew entirely. The right words. He put his hands into the air before him, focusing not only his attention but his energy in the air before him. Hundreds, even thousands of words occurred to him. He selected them as they came, and uttered the finished sentence.

    ¡°Bukas, lagusan sa pagitan ng mga mundo.¡± Open, tunnel between worlds.

    Nothing whatsoever happened. Samuel glanced at Raveonic as if for guidance, and the monk shook his head. ¡°You need to be more specific.¡±

    Samuel returned his attention to his hands, and thought of a new set of words.

    ¡°Bahagi, tabing sa pagitan ng mga salita.¡± Part, veil between worlds.

    Again, nothing. Without looking at Raveonic, Samuel lowered his arms, chewing his lip reflectively. The answer, he was sure, was close. It was just a matter of finding the right words. Admittedly, he hadn¡¯t put much thought into the ancient magic. He¡¯d assumed that the right words would always come when he needed them, as had happened in the past. There was no way to sharpen the magic that already existed, or so he had thought. He thought back to Grimr¡¯s explanation of how ancient magic worked, so many years ago, before he¡¯d known his purpose in life.

    We reach out to the magic of the world, and command it with words.

    Then the realization hit him. He wasn¡¯t trying to reach out to another world. It was all part of the same world, the world in which he lived! He was seeking that which already lay around him. It was there, forever present, but out of reach. Before he could put more thought into it, he¡¯d raised his arms again. As if it could read his intent, a faint ripple formed in the air between his hands. He glanced at the two monks, who were looking delightedly expectant. He knew the words now.

    ¡°Lumapit sa akin, kaguluhan¡± Come to me, chaos.

    For a moment, the air before him merely quivered, as if an invisible hand was stirring a calm pool of water. Then, with a faint tearing sound, a thin line of energy appeared and widened, pulling the very air  apart to the side, revealing a shining blue light that nearly blinded him. He could feel the chaos surging incessantly beyond the new portal he¡¯d created, and recoiled a half step. It was faintly familiar to him, though of course he had no memory of visiting before. But he could also feel a faint tugging sensation in the small of his back, as if no matter what, he could be pulled back at a moment¡¯s notice.

    ¡°Well,¡± he said, his voice hoarse with nervous energy. ¡°That worked better than expected.¡±

    Raveonic was obviously uncomfortable with the lingering source of chaotic energy so close to him, but he nodded encouragingly. ¡°I knew you would be able to. Well, take your first step, young Samuel. Be the first to master this plane.¡±

    Strangely, Samuel felt a rush of certainty and confidence that hadn¡¯t been present before. He knew that, in some way, he was uniquely qualified to blaze the trail in this matter. He could see it now, his victorious return with knowledge of new magicks. He stepped through the tear, which sealed behind him at once.

 Chapter 24

    The city of Milagre was just ahead now. It lay beside the Durmeau river, cast in shadow by the sun, which was rising from above the horizon. Bora Bora was in a sort of twilight zone in the sky, with the giant ball of light in front, and the silver disks of the two moons behind him. He squinted his eyes as he surveyed the capital city, already certain of what kind of reception he could expect. He was going to take Khanmara¡¯s advice and skip the gate entirely. Hopefully nobody thought to fire arrows or magic at him as he sailed over the outer wall.

    Blinded as he was, he didn¡¯t notice what was wrong until he was directly over the city, beginning to descend sharply for his goal. There were nearly a dozen pillars of smoke rising from the heart of the Temple District he saw. Something had burned. Had there been a riot? Revenge against his temple for the way he¡¯d spoken to the king, perhaps? Dozens of people, small as ants, were swarming around the remaining fires, forming lines to pass buckets of water along. They seemed to have the blazes under control by now.

    A shaft of pain and loss tore through Bora Bora as he glanced to where he knew his temple was located. But the tall building with soaring towers and royal flags was no more. In its place was a ruin, with the worst of the fires blurring the property from view. The pain gave way to anger, and then to rage. He pulled his wings in as tight as he could, and dropped to the ground like a boulder. In the last few feet, he flared them out, catching the air and slowing his descent just enough for him to land, hard, on the cobbles outside of what used to be his deity¡¯s temple.

    There were many shouts of surprise and fear as the townsfolk nearby saw him. Nearly all of them could sense his rage billowing into terrible being, and wisely turned heel, fleeing the scene. He lunged forward and grabbed the closest person who had chosen to stay. It was a young woman, a baker by her flour-stained apron. In his anger, he shook her violently.

    ¡°What has happened here?¡± He snarled, his  eyes flashing. ¡°Who did this to Bahamut¡¯s temple?¡±

    ¡°My lord Bora Bora!¡± She squeaked, terror making her body lock up. ¡°I don¡¯t-¡±

    Her voice faltered, and he shook her once more. ¡°Tell me!¡±

    ¡°Please, my lord,¡± she stammered, trying to pull herself free. His grip was like iron, and she was wincing in pain. ¡°I don¡¯t know! I¡¯m just trying to help!¡±

    ¡°Who attacked our home?¡± Bora Bora repeated, not listening to her. Something flashed past his eyes, and he was knocked back. His grip on the woman¡¯s shoulders was broken, and someone had stepped between them, forcing him back with a quick shove. Instinctually, Bora Bora summoned his scythe, raising it to strike. Then his eyes found the person who had pushed him away, and he froze.

    ¡°Drop your weapon, Champion.¡±

    It was a small boy, perhaps eleven or twelve years in appearance. He was wearing silvery hides, and had dark brown skin. Bora Bora released his weapon at once, doubt overcoming his anger at once. It was the Wanderer himself. He was holding his bone knife in a loose grip, but his eyes carried a silent message of danger. He knew all-too clearly what would happen in that fight. Grimr nodded in satisfaction as he saw Bora Bora stand down, and relaxed his own posture.

    ¡°You are too late to help your people, Champion,¡± Grimr said. ¡°The temple is destroyed, and cannot be restored.¡±

    ¡°Who destroyed the temple?¡± Bora Bora asked. In the back of his mind, he knew the answer. Yet it was as if he craved the answer, even as he feared it.

    ¡°The Tyrant Queen,¡± Grimr said. ¡°She descended upon the city, and destroyed Bahamut¡¯s home.¡±

    ¡°Why didn¡¯t you stop her?¡± Bora Bora demanded, his anger surging back to the forefront. ¡°You could have destroyed her in an instant!¡±

    Grimr peered at him  with a peculiar expression. It was almost pitying, he thought. ¡°It is not my place to interfere between brother and sister. I kept the damage as limited as I could, and the warriors of Issho-Ni chased her away.¡±

    Something about the Wanderer¡¯s tone told Bora Bora it would do no good to keep pressing the issue, so he changed tack. ¡°Where did she go?¡±

    Grimr didn¡¯t reply for several moments, clearly hesitant to divulge the answer. Then, slowly, he raised his arms and pointed to the south-east. ¡°She has gone off to confront Bahamut, I believe.¡±

    ¡°But Bahamut resides in the Divine Isles!¡± Bora Bora said. ¡°Tiamat cannot access the heavens, so what does she hope to accomplish?¡±

    ¡°She does not need to enter the Isles,¡± Grimr said. While Bora Bora was growing louder and more furious, his voice was becoming more quiet. ¡°She intends to challenge him, which, I believe, was his plan.¡±

    Bora Bora took two steps back, his mind racing. Why had Bahamut sent him after Tiamat, then? He had trained, had he not, to kill the Tyrant Queen for twenty years? Why now, after all that effort, was his god taking matters into his own hands? He was certain that his deity could see to her, and kill her without difficulty. He was a god, after all, and she was a common wyrm.

    ¡°What should I do?¡± He asked, looking for guidance from the Wanderer. He wasn¡¯t sure what prompted him to ask. ¡°If he will put an end to his sister, what am I to do with this rage?¡±

    ¡°Bahamut will not win,¡± Grimr said. The words, delivered in a matter-of-fact tone, tore through Bora Bora like his knife did in the vision. ¡°You have met with the last Champion, I see. You have her aspect within you. You know what will become of your life.¡±

    ¡°I will kill her,¡± Bora Bora growled, not quite listening. ¡°Where are they fighting?¡±

    ¡°They are fighting at the foot of Mount Murgan,¡± Grimr said. ¡°You will not arrive in time. Be prepared to lead your people in his absence.¡±

    Grimr was gone in the breeze, his voice echoing faintly through Bora Bora¡¯s mind. Be prepared to lead your people in his absence? What had The Wanderer just said? Did that mean that Bahamut was going to die? And he seemed to think that he, Bora Bora, wouldn¡¯t be able to get there in time to aid his deity. Well then, what was he going to do? He couldn¡¯t sit here, waiting for events to pan out. Even if he was late, he had to seek revenge in some way.

    A loud bell rang in the distance, its clear note jarring him out of his thoughtful silence. There was something significant about the sound, but he couldn¡¯t place it at first. Then it hit him, and he turned to face the north east, where it had come from. That was the alarm bell, which was only rung when Milagre was facing a dangerous threat. It came from the one side of Milagre that he hadn¡¯t been able to see in his approach. At once, he flared his wings out, throwing himself into the sky as he headed towards the source of the alarm.

    Even as more bells rang throughout the city, echoing that first sound of danger, Bora Bora could hear the panicked voices of citizens trying to figure out what was going on. They were almost louder than the shouts of nearby city guards, who immediately began barking orders, directing people away from the northern half of the city. Bora Bora ignored the din of growing panic, forcing his wings to carry him higher and higher, until he could see over the northern wall. It was clear at once what the threat was.Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.

    A force of soldiers, perhaps two thousand strong, was marching with obvious purpose towards the capital city. Tiny pillars of smoke were visible in their wake, where they had already destroyed some of the farming outposts. No doubt they¡¯d killed the farmers as well, Bora Bora thought with a sneer. The weak always preyed upon the innocent, yet ran when they faced a real challenge. He could see some of the survivors, those who had managed to get to a horse, fleeing ahead of the army, racing for the safety of the outer wall.

    Why weren¡¯t they lowering the gate to let the farmers in? Bora Bora switched his gaze to the guards there, and saw quite a few armed men. One figure, clearly in charge, was gesticulating at them wildly. Bora Bora could guess what he was doing. He was preventing the soldiers from letting the civilians in. Logically, it made sense. It took several long minutes to lower the drawbridge across the Durmeau River. It took four times as long to raise it once more, and the approaching force wasn¡¯t that far behind the farmers. He snorted in disgust, and swooped down.

    The sergeant didn¡¯t noticed his presence until he was already back on the ground, his scythe appearing and raised. With one mighty swipe, he cut through the stout metal chain that held the drawbridge up. As he moved for the second of four chains, the sergeant was turning to face him, his face full of shock. Then, as he cut that chain and moved towards the third, he began shouting. He drew his own weapon as Bora Bora moved to take the last out, and charged, his sword raised.

    Bora Bora caught the man in the side of his head with the butt end of his scythe, knocking the man flat, then turning to shear through the final chain. The drawbridge was now unsupported, and, with a deafening groan, fell out and away from the gate. It slammed flat open with a crash, damaging some of the metal mounting that held it together. Bora Bora only stared at it a moment longer to reassure himself that it was sturdy enough for the farmers to cross, then turned to face the men of the sergeant, who were approaching him nervously, their weapons drawn.

    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t, if I were you,¡± he said. His red eyes gave them pause, and he twirled the large scythe menacingly. ¡°I won¡¯t let you prey on the weak by leaving them to their deaths.¡±

    ¡°But the drawbridge!¡± One of the soldiers, braver or more foolish than his comrades, took one step forward, brandishing his sword towards the object as the farmers clattered across, breaking the mountings further. ¡°Now we can¡¯t raise it! The enemy can come in as they please!¡±

    ¡°That will not be an issue!¡± This shouted voice, coming from a new direction, made Bora Bora and the soldiers turn. ¡°We will destroy the bridge, and hold the position against our enemies.¡±

    It was a tall man, about Bora Bora¡¯s age, holding a long foreign war spear, and dressed in white robes. It was the Captain of Issho-Ni, they noticed. He was clearly dressed for war, a set of boiled leather armor strapped over his white uniform. There were four similarly dressed figures to his left and right, all armored as well. The wolf¡¯s head crest of Issho-Ni and their patron god was stamped on their breasts.

    ¡°Master Tokugawa!¡± One of the soldiers exclaimed, coming to stiff attention. ¡°Are you sure it¡¯s wise to destroy the bridge, sir?¡±

    Tokugawa turned to face the man, his face showing no sign of doubt or indecision. ¡°It is the safest option. We could not allow the citizens to be prevented from reaching safely. You will be brought to task for that decision, Sergeant.¡±

    The sergeant, still clutching his head and laying on the ground, looked up at Tokugawa, his eyes wide. He was clearly intimidated, not to mention afraid of the consequences that lay before him. Issho-Ni were quite well known for their influence in battle and war, even in the early stages of their growth. The King had been quite clear that, when under attack, Issho-Ni¡¯s authority was second only to his own. He pushed himself to his feet at once, swaying slightly. Bora Bora smirked. He hadn¡¯t held back with his strike, so the man was clearly dazed. Still, he had to begrudgingly admire his stubborn persistence.

    The four strangers that had arrived with Tokugawa moved at once to destroy the drawbridge. They released great blasts of white energy from their hands and weapons, then again, and again. The already damaged drawbridge stood no chance of withstanding this barrage, and snapped in half. The far side sagged into the river, and the current tugged it loose. It remained there, sticking out of the water at an odd angle. There was no chance of anyone crossing the thirty foot gap on horse. The front line of the army, which had rushed forward as they saw the bridge drop open, now slowed down, looking disappointed.

    ¡°Thank you for aiding in the citizens¡¯ escape,¡± Tokugawa said to Bora Bora, offering him a slight bow. ¡°I confess surprise. I did not think you would care much for the weak.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t,¡± Bora Bora assured him coldly. ¡°I just hate seeing weak people prey on those beneath them. A real leader guides his men, he doesn¡¯t leave them to their deaths.¡±

    They stood, a foot apart with their eyes locked, for about ten seconds. A silent message of understanding, not to mention even a vague kinship, passed between them. Bora Bora found it hard to believe that, in some distant possible future, he had killed the warrior standing before him. Tokugawa was regarding him with a sort of dry amusement. ¡°Well, thank you regardless. Will you stay and fight with us?¡±

    Bora Bora didn¡¯t particularly care for defending a city that had cast him out, but he never turned down the chance for a fight. He could see the shrewd light in Tokugawa¡¯s eyes, as if the man understood his motivations clearly, and had carefully phrased the question in a way that would ensure his cooperation. He found that he didn¡¯t like his manipulation one bit. Still, he had some energy to burn, and it would be a perfect way to vent his feelings.

    ¡°I suppose I can stay a while,¡± he said quietly. Tokugawa seemed unfazed by the hiss in his voice, but his underlings shivered slightly. People often had this reaction to his voice. To them, it was something¡­ other than human.

    ¡°Excellent,¡± Tokugawa said, hefting his spear. ¡°You can defend the bridge with us. We¡¯ll hold the position until reinforcements can come.¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Bora Bora said. His wings flared out, ready to take off once more. ¡°I¡¯ll take the fight to them, if it¡¯s all the same.¡±

    ¡°There are thousands of them,¡± one of the masters behind Tokugawa said. It was a Nihon-Jan woman with short spiky black hair. She was goggling at Bora Bora, as if he¡¯d taken leave of his senses. ¡°You can¡¯t fight them all.¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll see.¡±

    With one powerful downward push, his wings threw him airborne once more. He was out of earshot before the others could even comment, and he swerved sharply mid-air, barely clearing the top of the outer wall. The men stationed there glanced up frightfully as he soared over them, close enough to strike them if he¡¯d so desired. Then he was over the plains, racing towards the approaching force.

    His first dive allowed him to strike down three men, and then he was away before their nearest comrades could retaliate. He dove again, this time killing or wounding four. It was only after his fourth dive that the enemy managed to raise a response. Two roiling balls of flame flew up to meet him, but he laughed as he shredded them apart with his scythe, then dove down once again. He threw his scythe ahead of him as he dove lower than ever, shredding through a dozen and knocking nearly twice as much aside. They might as well have been straw figures standing still in a field, waiting for him to strike them down. Two thousand? It was nothing.

    Then, out of the blur of colors and insignias marking each soldier as belonging to a different tribe in the Mitene Union, his eyes caught the barest flash of metal. It was gone too quickly for him to recognize what it had been, but he stopped nonetheless, his eyes searching for another sign. Whatever it was, it had been incredibly familiar. There it was again! He dove forward, but the sign was gone. He turned on the spot, wondering what was giving him so much hesitation. His attention caught it once again. It was moving towards the city, whatever it was.

    As he flew a little higher to avoid a few arrows, Bora Bora turned to face the gate, where Tokugawa and his compatriots were destroying the other half of the bridge. The newly broken section drifted downriver like a raft, leaving a fifty foot gap in its place. Yet Tokugawa and his allies lept across that distance with ease, as if they were merely taking a quick step forward. Then his attention caught the strange event once more. It had changed its trajectory, now heading directly for the Captain.

    It was only as the figure broke free of the army, his fleet feet carrying him forward, that Bora Bora was able to make out the details of his appearance. At first it seemed that there was nothing special about him, apart from clearly targeting the Captain. But then he turned to glance at Bora Bora, and the insignia on his shoulder was more visible. It was the symbol of the Tyrant Queen, Tiamat. Bora Bora felt a fresh surge of rage fill him completely, and his knuckles tightened on the handle of his scythe until they turned white. He lost all care for the rest of the fight. Now was his chance to get some small revenge, and kill someone associated with that wretched wyrm. He dove.

 Chapter 25

    The assassin registered Bora Bora¡¯s hostility long before he caught up to the man. There was a certain hesitation in his stride, and he glanced up once again but didn¡¯t seem otherwise concerned. That was, at least, until Bora Bora¡¯s first sweeping strike came. The thief glanced back just in time to see it, and lunged forward, rolling smoothly. The scythe passed clean over his head without harm, and he was back on his feet as Bora Bora shot past him, still running directly for the Captain of Issho-Ni.

    Tokugawa had seen the figure approaching and noticed his intent. It was clear what his goal was in approaching them so far ahead of the army. It was also not the first time it had happened. Nefarious leaders, both foreign and domestic, had all grown uneasy at the expanding influence he commanded, and sent assassins to remove him from power, permanently. Tobi had taken on every challenge and was not afraid to add this stranger to the growing list of failed assassins.

    ¡°Keep an eye on the army,¡± he said to the three behind him. ¡°I¡¯ll take care of this.¡±

    Jakob, Aki, and Noda nodded their understanding at once and moved away to closely watch the approaching force. They had grown a lot over the past five years and were true masters. They had done many dangerous missions as a team, and their trust in his eventual victory was absolute. They too had seen how many would-be assassins had failed to kill him, and they found no reason to doubt why this event would be any different.

    Tobi flourished his spear in experimental patterns, feeling the familiar weight of the weapon in his hand. Out of all of his friends, students, and mentors, this weapon was the most trustworthy. It was upon this spear that he had depended for much of his life, and it was on this spear that he would continue to thrive. Gripping the weapon with one hand, he made an upward flicking gesture with the other, and several small metal spikes flew out of the pouch on his belt. Each one was about the size of a chopstick and had the force of his ki packed in. He brought his free hand down, sending the metal spikes directly for the man charging him down.

    Mere inches away, the man¡¯s image blurred slightly, as if something incredibly fast had rushed in front of him, temporarily obscuring him from view. Then there was a large burst of dying air behind him, and he continued, obviously unfazed. Tobi frowned at that. Had he used some short-range teleportation spell to pass through the weapons? It was possible, he thought, leveling his spear. But some small voice in his head told him that was not the case. Samuel had taught him much about magic, and he could recognize the signs of mana and ki when it was used. He hadn¡¯t seen anything when the assassin had evaded the spikes.

    He swung his spear in a flat arc as the foreign warrior came within reach, and yet again, there was a faint blurring around his image, and then he was inside Tobi¡¯s reach, a longsword appearing out of thin air. He thrust the sword with both hands and ran it through the arm holding the spear. It punched through to the hilt, and Tobi staggered back, his weapon dropping from his suddenly numb hand. Then the sword that was used to stab him vanished, leaving a gaping wound in its place.

    Conjurer, Tobi thought. That made sense. He was a mage that focused on martial ability, conjuring and dismissing his weapon at will. He was also clearly using some kind of travel magic to dodge his attacks. This was a bad combination for him, he thought, as he let out a burst of ki with his good arm. ¡°Hold!¡±

    The energy formed into the visage of a lunging, biting wolf¡¯s head before it made contact, and the massive jaws snapped down on the foreigner. Or rather, they would have, if he¡¯d still been in the same space. Now he was attacking from the left, a newly conjured weapon swinging down in an execution stroke. Tobi could tell at once, as time seemed to slow, the way it always does in moments of lethal danger, that it was aimed true, and would sever his head from his shoulders. Then there was a blinding flash of silver in front of his eyes, and sparks struck his face from metal clashing on metal.

    A scythe, spinning in a lethal blur, had flown between the weapon and its intended target, with only centimeters to spare. The foreign warrior was knocked back, cursing, as his weapon vanished once again. Tobi grinned, more from relief than genuine mirth. He¡¯d been saved from an early death by the Champion of Bahamut. He¡¯d have to repay that debt some way. His would-be assassin was too close to use the spikes, so he simply lashed out with a high kick. This connected, catching the man high in the chest. With a further burst of ki to boost the attack, he was sent flying a yard or so back, to land with a crash on the hard-packed earth of the road.

    ¡°My gratitude, Champion!¡± He shouted, even as Bora Bora soared overhead. The scythe¡¯s trajectory changed at once to match him, and he caught the spinning weapon deftly with one hand. ¡°I owe you one.¡±

    Bora Bora made no attempt to reply. He hadn¡¯t thrown his scythe to save Tokugawa¡¯s life. He had intended to cut the follower of that wretched dragon down with his throw, but in his temper, he¡¯d misjudged the man¡¯s speed. But he was knocked down now, and completely vulnerable. He turned sharply, coming around to face the opposite direction in the space of a few feet, and rocketed forward once more. His target was rising to his feet when he struck, but he missed again. He was prepared to block a counterattack, but none came.

    ¡°What the-¡± The assassin was charging towards Tobi once again, ignoring Bora Bora entirely. This further fueled his rage, and he felt something hot boiling up inside him. As he raced towards his prey once more, he opened his mouth wide, issuing a jet of flame that scorched the earth with its heat. The assassin was forced to jump to the side to avoid it, but he was on foot again within an instant, only temporarily redirected.

    Tobi met him with a dozen flying metal spikes, all crackling with electricity. A rare combination of physical and arcane magic, half the missiles flew directly at the foreigner, while the other half were aimed directly down into the earth. The ground shook with the force of their impacts, sending up a massive cloud of dust. It burst wide, swallowing Bora Bora, the assassin, and Tobi in darkness. The Captain of Issho-Ni was unfazed and waited patiently for a strike to come. He would sense his enemy by his energy and intent, and counter at the last possible second.

    No such attack came. Tobi remained tensed up, waiting, but could only sense Bora Bora flashing past him, his weapon and temper both raised as high as they could be. The Champion flew in tight circles overhead, but there was no sign of the thief. Then the answer came to Tobi, clear as day. More than a little annoyed, he channeled some ki into his uninjured hand and thrust it out. A burst of air dispelled the worst of the cloud, revealing, as he¡¯d expected, nothing but himself and the black-clad figure overhead.

    ¡°Where is he?¡± Bora Bora demanded, coming down quickly and landing beside Tobi. ¡°He was just here!¡±

    ¡°No, he wasn¡¯t,¡± Tobi corrected him, applying a quick healing spell to his right shoulder. The wound closed, leaving a raw pink line. The wound now appeared as if it had been healing for weeks. ¡°That was a projection.¡±

    ¡°A projection?¡± Bora Bora repeated the words, confusion supplanting his anger. ¡°But he struck you.¡±

    ¡°He did,¡± Tobi agreed, stooping to pick up his weapon. ¡°But the weapon was the only real part of it. He¡¯s using magic, both to project his form forward, and also to conjure his weapon. We were attacking an illusion.¡±

    As he said the words, the assassin appeared before him once again, sword thrusting forward. Tobi targeted the weapon this time, instead of the fighter, and send the piece of steel flying to the side. It flew out of the figure¡¯s hand with no resistance, as an illusion had no strength compared to him. The assassin paused, a faint smile on his face. He could tell that Tobi had figured out his trick.Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.

    ¡°Come to me yourself, coward,¡± Tobi said, pointing his spear at the illusion. ¡°I¡¯ll give you a real challenge.¡±

    The faint smile broadened into a full grin, and like mist drifting away before the sun, he vanished from view. Tobi snorted in disgust and turned to view the approaching army. They were less than two hundred feet away from the wall and would make contact in seconds. ¡°I¡¯ll wager he¡¯s somewhere in that mass, using the numbers for protection.

    ¡°That would explain why I only saw flashes of him until he broke free,¡± Bora Bora snarled. ¡°That yellow-bellied coward! Of course, her follower would be just as weak and sniveling.¡±

    Tobi raised an eyebrow in question, but Bora Bora didn¡¯t comment further. Instead, he beat his wings powerfully, taking off into the air with more inaudible grumbling. Tobi recognized that emotion. It was the disappointment of a lost fight, the denial of one¡¯s urge to test their mettle. It was a common reaction from his more dedicated apprentices, who were always disappointed to end a sparring session. Keen to continue, they had no opponent to which they could offer their conviction.

    ¡°It appears he can fly now,¡± Tobi said quietly, turning to run towards his comrades. ¡°That¡¯s new.¡±

    Bora Bora flew high over the Mitene Union army, far outside the range of any arrows or magic, with his senses focused on sight. He used his improved vision to scour the lines of soldiers, searching for his target. He could tell, by the incessant effort to kill the Captain, that the would-be assassin wasn¡¯t going to retreat after this first failure. His position was still concealed, for the time being at least, and he would have plenty of opportunities to strike again while Tokugawa was occupied with fighting.

    He could tell by the movements of troops under him that his presence was noticed. There were a few half-hearted bows raised and pointed in his direction, though no arrows were loosed. At least they weren¡¯t all complete fools, he thought. Though, in a different section, several robed figures were gathering into one space, lifting their arms to point up at him. He knew what they were up to at once, and quickly darted off to one side to avoid the artillery spell that was fired. If it took them that long and that many mages to charge an artillery spell of that nature, then they were in for a nasty surprise.

    ¡°I don¡¯t often work for free,¡± a voice behind him said, making him spin around. ¡°But for you, I¡¯ll make an exception.¡±

    The assassin was behind him, also bearing wings and glowing eyes, the unmistakable sign of an aspect. The symbol of Tiamat was even more prominent under the direct shining light of the early sun, and it glinted like a beacon, a focus for Bora Bora¡¯s rage. He hefted his scythe at once and slashed at the man. A longsword appeared to block him, but there was real resistance to the action this time. He wasn¡¯t an illusion.

    ¡°Decided to show yourself after all, eh, coward?¡± Bora Bora snarled, yanking his weapon free. He leaped back as the assassin cut at him, and threw his scythe. ¡°I applaud your desire for death!¡±

    With a vague flash of light, the assassin knocked Bora Bora¡¯s weapon away and lowered his glowing hand. ¡°My Queen will be most thrilled when I kill you, Champion. Well, it¡¯s not as if you¡¯re champion anymore, is it?¡±

    The question was so odd and unexpected that Bora Bora backed off a foot or two. He snarled. ¡°What are you talking about, you fool?¡±

    The assassin grinned widely at him. ¡°Any moment now, My Queen will put an end to your god. Then you¡¯ll be-¡±

    But whatever it was that Bora Bora would be, he never found out. Mid-sentence, Bora Bora flew forward with a snarl. He didn¡¯t even care that he was unarmed and that his foe was holding a weapon ready to strike. He threw himself forward with abandon, giving in to his rage completely. The assassin ran him through to the hilt, but it was a minor nuisance, nothing else. He gripped the man¡¯s shoulders, opened his mouth, and let a stream of fire burst out. It singed his throat and mouth, but he reveled in the pain.

    Both armies, foreign and friendly, seemed to pause in their fighting to stare upwards. Bora Bora released the now limp former servant of Tiamat. Like a leaf falling gently to the ground, the charred body fell to earth, the ragged wings catching random drifts of wind and causing the body to turn in random patterns. It was lost to sight amidst the mass of troops when it hit the earth, but Bora Bora could hear the shouts of shock, even of fear. He coughed, spitting up a lot of blood into the front of his tattered jacket. The red stood out against the black like fire, glistening wetly in the brightening light.

    Legends would be written about this day for many years to come. The Champion of Bahamut, the fallen god, truly began his path of infamy on this battlefield. But at the moment, those watching were only able to register the horror of the moment, watching the airborne specter of death wrenching the sword out of his chest, and throwing it down to impale the corpse of his fallen enemy. With a quick gesture, the scythe returned to his hand, and the sunlight behind him glinted off the weapon in a very enigmatic way. With the weapon, his gleaming red eyes, and the tattered wings beating to keep him up, he was the very image of the God of Death he would later become.

    The illusion lasted for a second or two longer, before the roar of hundreds of men broke out across the battlefield. A sudden rush of soldiers had come out of nowhere, yelling their war cries as they slammed into the rear of the invading force. It was a battalion of Milagrean Royal Guard, who had slipped, unnoticed, around a nearby tall hill. They descended on their enemy with terrifying ferocity, striking down the foreigners who had threatened the safety of their city and nation. Dozens fell in the first heart-stopping seconds. Then dozens more. Then, before the enemy commander could comprehend the sudden change in the situation, hundreds were dead.

    The enemy force was split. By a stroke of truly bad luck, the commander of the force had been in the section that was first truck. Communication had broken in an instant, and, with no orders to keep them fighting, mostly simply broke ranks and fled. Unfortunately for them, the worst was yet to come. Echoing the cries of their compatriots from the rear, a force of heavy cavalry, who was approaching from the West Gate, appeared and charged forward. The enemy quickly tried to change direction and flee to the North, but they were trampled under the oncoming horde.

    The cavalry cut through the heart of the fractured, frightened army, and cut any defensive line to pieces. In a few short minutes, any semblance of order the Mitene Union had possessed was gone. Those that could escape the killing ground scattered into the tall grass of the plains, refusing even to pause long enough to look back. They abandoned their allies and friends and disappeared.

    Bora Bora was not watching the end of the fight. He was too occupied with the sudden numbness in his limbs to care about such insignificant things. The ground rose to meet him with a tender embrace, and he landed on his knees, the scythe clattering to the ground. He¡¯d never felt the approach of certain death before. Sure, there had been moments where he¡¯d brushed with it, even put one foot over the invisible line that separated the living and the dead. But now it stood before him, solid and complete as a mantle.

    In his mind, he saw not his surroundings, but his god. Bloodied and broken, a gaping hole in his chest that matched the wound his own Champion had received. His very life essence was leaving him now. Over him, head thrown back, screaming her triumph to the heavens, was the chromatic form of Tiamat herself. Her scream was endless, rippling across the sky, an echoing call of savage exultation. Bora Bora wasn¡¯t sure if he was hearing it from his own ears or that of his god, but it hung in the air, reverberating through his skull. Strange, he thought. Death wasn¡¯t nearly as frightening as the bards made it seem. He felt only anger that it was all over.

    As Tiamat finished her victory cry, she lowered her head, breathing heavily, and dealt the finishing blow. Bahamut¡¯s body went limp at once, no more life in the massive form. Out of the hole in his chest, however, a shining, golden light began to exit. His divinity. It was beautiful to behold. In his dazed state, Bora Bora reached out to touch it. He wasn¡¯t there to claim it, but he could feel, in his core, that it was his to take. This was his legacy.

    His fingers touched the orb, and it sank into his flesh, coating his body in a powerful, nearly blinding golden light. The soldiers near him recoiled with shouts of astonishment and fear as he lit up the nearby wall of the city, shining as brightly as the sun above. They knew what this was. As a reward to his life of service and strength, he had inherited his god¡¯s divine power. His wound was sealed in bright golden light, revealing only the bare skin underneath. He was all-powerful. He was indestructible. He rose to his feet, staring at his hands in astonishment, as the people around began dropping to their knees in reverence.

    ¡°No!¡±

    As quick as it had come, the golden light vanished. Bora Bora was alone amidst the kneeling figures, his face twisted by rage. He would not accept Bahamut¡¯s divinity like this. He would not be removed from the world, to live his years in the Divine Isles. He wanted revenge. He needed revenge. The golden disk that surrounded the divinity inside him flared brightly as if resisting but then shattered. Bora Bora was left heaving, his red eyes burning, and summoned his scythe. He was determined. He would kill his god¡¯s murderer before he would allow himself to ascend.

 Chapter 26

    As Samuel stepped through the portal he¡¯d created and entered the Ethereal Plane, his first impression was of deafening noise. What sounded like a howling storm was rushing all around him, whipping his face and stinging his eyes. He raised one arm to cover his face, and immediately noticed strange, colorless energy clinging to his form. A second later, he realized that it was chaotic mana. He was surrounded by the stuff, and it was draining his mana at an alarming rate.

    He coated his body in Ki at once, and the effect was removed. He¡¯d lost a fair chunk of mana in that first second or two, but it wasn¡¯t much compared to his vast reserves. Not for the first time, he was thankful for the sheer amount of mana he¡¯d been gifted as Arcana¡¯s Champion. He could sustain such draining effects far more easily than the average mage.

    ¡°This must be what drives mages mad when they enter,¡± he muttered. His voice was too quiet to even reach his own ears, even now that the roaring sound had been lessened. Chaos still reigned around him, though it ignored him now that he wasn¡¯t a delicious feast. Samuel glanced around him quickly, ensuring that there were no threats nearby. Apart from the veritable ocean of chaotic mana, he was safe.

    In his limited research of the Ethereal Plane, he¡¯d come across several mentions of a place known as the Sea of Chaos. It was a vast space that drained the will and life of a person. Samuel supposed that this must be the same sea. He hoped that the texts claims of its endlessness weren¡¯t true. He couldn¡¯t maintain his ki shroud for much longer than a day, thanks to his training with Tobito.

    He quickly realized another problem as he tried to move. Unlike water, the space around him felt like a thick swamp, defying his efforts to propel himself in any given direction. The energy around him was swirling and surging in random, unpredictable patterns, preventing him from making progress. Anytime he tried to push forward, the sea pushed back, and he was demoted to a snail¡¯s pace.

    He couldn¡¯t get anywhere with this expedition if he couldn¡¯t move. Tentatively, he pulled a thin layer of mana over his body, preparing to teleport. His chosen destination, some spot five hundred yards ahead, flared to life with his mana. At once, the nearby chaotic mana surged over to it, devouring his magic in an instant. He cursed quietly, recognizing the foolishness of that idea a moment too late.

    Well now, he thought to himself. He couldn¡¯t use arcane magic to propel himself or move at all. He might have large reserves of mana, but even he couldn¡¯t hope to continuously fire off futile spells and expect to live. The spell he used to enter the plane was still active, providing a gentle yet constant drain on his resources. He had to keep an eye on that, he reminded himself. When he was just about out of mana, he¡¯d have to pull himself back.

    He studied the movement of the energy around him for what felt like hours, wondering at the chaotic nature of it. There was no set pattern to it at all. Energy simply clumped together swirling in any direction of its choice, only changing trajectory when it came across another clump or stream of energy. Samuel noticed that, in those cases, the larger mass of energy always won the contest, forcing the smaller to shift direction once again and move off to inevitably collide again.

    Samuel also noticed that, every once in a while, two masses of equal size and power would slam into each other, and neither would be diverted. They¡¯d simply stick to each other, in one place. It resembled some sort of struggle. Three times, one of the energy masses won the fight and continued, significantly larger. Once, however, the two masses joined together, doubling in mass and continuing on its way.

    There was something to the latter situation, Samuel thought, and he kept his eyes peeled for another sign of it happening. It was almost twenty minutes before he spotted it. Two truly massive streams of chaotic mana collided and fused, then soared past Samuel, four times wider than he was tall. It obliterated several smaller masses as it moved, then met its end as it slammed into an even bigger version of itself.

    Samuel stared at this last mass. It seemed to be the biggest of the lot and had probably existed for quite a while. It was then that Samuel noticed the most peculiar fact of his surroundings. The largest stream, winding around at its whim, was having an easier time of traveling than the others. At first, Samuel thought this was due to its sheer size, but then he saw that some bits of chaotic mana would turn sharply to avoid contact with it, leaving the path relatively clear.

    ¡°It¡¯s a basic rule of nature,¡± Samuel muttered to himself, again, inaudibly. The smaller masses, while essentially chaotic, nonliving objects, were displaying signs of self-preservation.

    Out of curiosity, he gathered a large ball of mana up in his hands and threw it away from himself. He aimed it directly for the head of the approaching massive column of chaotic mana and watched in fascination as the stream changed direction to catch it. That had been less than one-thousandth of his total mana pool, but he¡¯d successfully affected the energy around him. This gave him an idea as to how he could travel. As long as he did it carefully, he reminded himself.

    He waited for the larger mass of energy to move quite a ways from him, then conjured another, smaller ball of mana. He propelled it in the direction he¡¯d chosen, and, at once, the energy around him rushed to devour it. Samuel was so intent on moving in that direction that he felt propelled forward at once, without using any sort of mana or ki to speed his movement. One moment he¡¯d been completely still, the next, thrust forward. He had no clue how far he¡¯d traveled, but it felt like considerable progress.

    Had he just willed chaotic mana to behave the way he wanted? True, the energy that surrounded him was unlike any he¡¯d encountered before. The two Enari he¡¯d face in the material plane had been an angry sort of chaos. Here, the Sea of Chaos was in a more neutral state, simply flowing wherever it wanted, influenced by the tiniest of events around it.

    It was the first unique lesson that a mage entering the Ethereal Plane had to learn, and quickly. No sooner had Samuel discovered this newfound ability than he saw a flash of light far behind him, in the direction from which he¡¯d come. He could sense¡­ something. There was some massive creature, even larger than the largest of the streams he¡¯d observed, swirling through the sea, clearly coming in his direction.

    Killed. I will kill. I will kill!

    The whispering, hissing voice reached his mind, and he reacted instinctively, pulling himself further away. The action that had been so strange and new now felt as natural as breathing to him, and it was a good thing it did. He could feel a cold, hungry sort of anger coming closer. Whatever that creature was, it hated Samuel and was coming in for the kill. He did the only thing he could and raced off and away from it.

    He could tell that it was giving pursuit and increased the rate at which he was sacrificing mana. He had an acute sense of his reserves and limitations and knew that, by now, he¡¯d used about a quarter of his available mana. But he shouldered the risk easily, especially as the signs of mana exhaustion were lessened by some mystery effect of the sea.

    He lost the creature eventually after he¡¯d traveled what felt like several kilometers in one direction. Distance was nearly impossible to gauge in this space, just as was time. It could have been hours since he¡¯d entered the plane, or minutes. It could even have been days. He pushed on regardless, determined to continue until he either ran out of resources or found the end to this sea of chaos.

    Though the rush of chaos seemed never-ending, he found a sort of peace in the chaotic nature of it. This was dangerous, as it caused him to lose focus a few times and expose himself to the draining effect, but he¡¯d gained a new perspective on chaotic mana. What he¡¯d face previously had been warped by humanity or contact with the material plane, he realized. It hadn¡¯t been true chaos, which was impartial, uncaring, and not driven by emotion. True chaos just existed, with no rule but the rule of strength. As such, it could be influenced, if one had a strong enough will.

    It was almost human in a way, Samuel thought, as he pushed himself along. It was just a shame that he couldn¡¯t traverse for extended periods. Any spell he cast had a slightly higher cost to it due to the presence of the chaos around him. This gave him a sudden surge of doubt. How was he to learn anything from the plane if it so directly opposed his nature? Such a venture would require a dedicated teacher, and he wouldn¡¯t find one in the middle of the Sea of Chaos.This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work.

    It was perhaps an hour or so later, though again it was hard to track time in this place, that he noticed the first change in his surroundings. Ahead and slightly to the right, there was a large collection of rocks floating in the void. He could only see the bottom of the truly massive chunk of stone, as he was set to go directly under it. It was easily the size of Milagre, he noticed. Curious, he changed his direction, shooting straight up to get a higher point of view.

    When he drew level with the top, he noticed the rock was almost nearly perfect. It varied in some places, but for the most part, it was pretty level. Equally as strange, there were buildings placed on it. At first, Samuel thought his eyes might be playing tricks on him, making him see things after hours of nothingness around him. But there was no denying the obvious signs of civilization before him.

    Then he noticed the people, and immediately dropped low to avoid being spotted. From the brief glimpse he¡¯d managed, he could identify the energy of the beings that lived on the rock. They were unmistakably Enari. But they had closely resembled humans, with arms and legs. He¡¯d never expected to see so many gathered in one place, but knew at once that he had to avoid interaction.

    From the near distance, he heard laughing. Laughing? Then he heard one of the beings shout something, and another replied. The distance was too great for Samuel to make out any words, but he was still thrown by any such creatures having the ability to communicate. If they were creatures formed of chaotic mana, then how could they have enough reason to speak? To Samuel, this showed growth and intelligence that posed danger rather than relieving him. If chaotic mana were given the power of independent thought, they could cause a lot of damage.

    Still, he had come to this plane to investigate and potentially learn new magic. He couldn¡¯t turn away after he¡¯d just discovered his first sign of civilization. To be true, he couldn¡¯t risk discovery by dozens, maybe even hundreds of Enari, but he could stay hidden from them, and eavesdrop. Maybe he could spy long enough to learn something. He felt confident that, if he saw magic performed, he could eventually replicate it with Arcana¡¯s help.

    He kept himself as close to the rock as possible and inched slowly higher. The bottom of the floating island was jagged, and his progress was hampered by the chaotic movement of energy around him. He could feel the presence of the Enari now, perhaps eight or nine of them in a small group at the very edge. He paused, not sure if it was safe to continue. But they were just gathered facing the sea, not in the direction from which he¡¯d come.

    With his tensed nerves, finishing his slow ascent was nearly as exhausting as if he¡¯d climbed it manually. But he finally cleared the lip at the edge and pushed himself behind a small collection of buildings. He could hear the group of Enari now and tilted his head to listen.

    ¡°No Kani today,¡± one of them said. Their voice was strangely melodic, an obvious byproduct of magical communication. They let out a sigh. ¡°There goes my excuse for avoiding Tana.¡±

    Another of the Enari laughed. Samuel couldn¡¯t be sure, but he would have wagered that it was a female voice. ¡°Still terrified of bonding with her, Edri?¡±

    ¡°You be quiet, Inka,¡± Edri replied, a bit of anger present now. Samuel felt the emotion rippling through the air, passing past him like a cold breeze. He resisted the urge to shiver with some difficulty. ¡°At least my Chosen Bond is still in the same plane as me.¡±

    That seemed to quiet Inka for several long seconds. Finally, she said, ¡°You know that¡¯s a sore subject, Edri. How dare you mention Samuel, after all these years?¡±

    Samuel, in his hiding spot behind the building, jerked his head up at that. Had the Enari just said his name? No, he told himself. He must have misheard her. He inched closer, holding his breath as if not daring to breathe, and peeked around the very corner of the building. There, in the open space, were seven Enari, just as he¡¯d noticed. Five of them were indistinct, blurry shapes, without features.

    The other two, however, were very different. They had clearly defined features, and they were even wearing long billowing robes. The man, who Samuel assumed to be Edri, had flaming red hair, and what was visible of his face seemed very long and thin. Inka¡¯s face was more rounded, and she had long flowing black hair that rippled around her in a nonexistent breeze. She had very gentle green eyes, and Samuel felt certain that if smiling, she would have been breathtaking. But at the moment her mouth was turned down in a frown.

    ¡°He hasn¡¯t been gone that long,¡± Edri replied, turning to face Inka more directly. ¡°I know that you feel like it¡¯s been centuries, but it''s barely been five years.¡±

    Another long silence. ¡°I forgot you could tell the passage of time.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Edri replied, and he sounded smug about this skill. ¡°He taught me how, after all.¡±

    They both turned outward to face the sea once more, Edri reaching up to awkwardly scratch his chin. There was something about his posture that reminded Samuel of guilt as if he regretted his earlier comment. This was confirmed a few seconds later when he spoke. ¡°Sorry.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s okay,¡± Inka replied, again after several long seconds had passed. Then another long stretch of silence elapsed. ¡°Do you think he¡¯ll really come back?¡±

    ¡°I do. Saniel promised us he would return, as soon as he could.¡±

    Samuel heaved a sigh of relief as he heard the new name. It was similar enough to his own that he could have believed it a mistake. So he¡¯d misheard after all. There was no way that these creatures could know him. He watched as Edri and Inka turned suddenly to face something to the left.

    ¡°Finally!¡± Edri crowed, throwing his arms up in the air. ¡°I was starting to think I wouldn¡¯t see any.¡±

    He turned to face the five Enari behind himself and Inka. ¡°Any of you want it?¡±

    ¡°You know they can¡¯t speak to you,¡± Inka said sternly. ¡°Don¡¯t be an ass.¡±

    Edri stepped closer to the edge and turned to face Inka. Now Samuel could make out the features of his face. It was indeed angular, like that of an elf, and he was sporting a huge amused grin. ¡°Fine then. Do you want it?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m not a Hunter,¡± Inka replied, her voice barely audible over the sound of an approaching creature. ¡°Why must you be this way?¡±

    ¡°Just the way I made myself, I guess,¡± Edri replied with a shrug. Then he threw himself off the edge, rocketing out of sight faster than Samuel could blink. That was way faster than he¡¯d traveled himself, and Edri hadn¡¯t seemed to use any energy to accomplish it.

    Inka gave a quiet sigh as Edri vanished, and turned to the five others. ¡°Be ready to haul it when he brings it back.¡±

    They made no verbal reply but spread out in a long line. The last of the line actually came to a stop less than ten feet from where Samuel hid. He had to jump back behind the building, reducing his ki as much as he could, hoping that the Enari wouldn¡¯t notice him. He seemed safe, and stared out into the void, wondering where Edri had gone.

    He didn¡¯t have to wonder for long. A whooping voice echoed back to his ears, and Edri reappeared. Except that he wasn¡¯t alone. A massive beast, as wide as he was tall, was hot on his tail. Even as Samuel watched, the Enari turned sharply to the left, and the creature¡¯s massive jaws missed him by inches.

    ¡°Careful, Edri!¡± Inka called, hurrying to move behind the protective line that the others had formed. ¡°Don¡¯t run it into the island this time!¡±

    ¡°I know, I know!¡± Edri called back. Samuel watched in silent wonder as he came to an abrupt stop from top speed, planting his feet against a passing stream of chaotic energy as if it were solid, and turned to face the opposite direction. The change in direction was so rapid that it might as well have taken place in the space of a few inches. The beast, which had been feet from the edge of the island, veered off to chase after him.

    As Samuel watched Edri darting back and forth around the creature, which was revealed to have a body almost a hundred feet long, Samuel was watching his movements closely. His control over his speed and turns was impeccable, with no wasted momentum. Each turn chained smoothly into another burst of speed, and the larger creature simply couldn¡¯t keep up.

    But then the creature shook its head to the side without warning, slamming into Edri and knocking him back towards the island. Edri hit the stone ground hard and seemed stunned. The beast gave a victorious roar and closed in for the kill. Samuel reacted without thinking, launching himself from the rock. Maybe it was the fact that it would have struck very near where he had been hidden, or maybe it was a desire to protect the beautiful Inka. Either way, he met the beast head-on, delivering a powerful blast of Ki.

    The creature shuddered under the impact, and the lines of Samuel¡¯s spell arced away, slamming back into its hide with devastating force. It seemed to have an especially weak hide, he noticed, as his magic cut quite deeply. He created Shigeru¡¯s unique magic in each hand, and threw them wide, directing them back inward and cleaving the great beast in half, just behind the skull.

    ¡°No!¡± Edri¡¯s voice came to him, making him turn. The Enari was rushing towards him, a look of stricken disbelief on his face. ¡°You fool! It¡¯s useless to us dead!¡±

    Samuel shoved himself backward with another explosion of ki, as Edri reached out to touch him. It was an instinctual response, borne from his memory of what had happened by touching the Enari he¡¯d encountered outside of this plane. Edri seemed stunned for a second, as his head turned to face Samuel¡¯s path. Maybe he¡¯d thought he could grab the mage easily. Pity for him, Samuel thought. He wouldn''t be captured that easily. But then he came to an abrupt halt as he saw Edri¡¯s expression. It wasn¡¯t hostile, or even angry. He looked shocked and happy.

    ¡°Samuel?¡±

 Chapter 27

    Samuel struck out with an attack spell before he knew what was happening. The mere fact that the stranger had used his name indicated to him that it was able to access his mind. The idea that it could be remembering him from a past that he¡¯d forgotten didn¡¯t occur to him at all. Suspecting some creature that could read his mind and was attempting to lure him into a trap, he reacted instinctively.

    The attack took Edri by surprise, and Samuel was able to slip past him before he registered what had taken place. Even if he could process the thought, his body was stunned, with little arcs of electricity running against his skin, so he couldn¡¯t move. Samuel took advantage of this to let out a powerful blast of Ki, shoving Edri back towards Inka and the other five, silent Enari. His stunned body slammed into two of those who couldn¡¯t speak, knocking all three onto the island where they lay for a split second, and Samuel put a burst of speed behind him.

    ¡°Samuel!¡± That was Inka¡¯s voice. Samuel saw her leap off the edge of the massive island, heading straight for him. She was covering far more distance than him, and caught up in no time, moving to block his path. ¡°It¡¯s you!¡±

    ¡°Out of my way!¡± He snapped, raising his hands. She instinctively raised her arms to protect herself, and he jumped to the right. But now one of the five lesser Enari was in front of him, reaching out to seize him. Its eyes, the only identifiable feature on its blurry humanoid form, were glowing with intense light. Samuel coated his body in Ki at once and deflected the hand. But then another flew in from behind, and wrapped its arms around his torso, trapping his arms to his sides.

    ¡°Don¡¯t attack him!¡± Edri was shouting out now, which gave the Enari in front of him pause. It had gathered quite a lot of energy into its fist, prepared to strike, but hesitated, glancing back in silent question. Samuel took advantage of the hesitation to teleport several feet backward, towards Edri rather than away, and fired off two quick bursts of Ki. Edri blocked them with relative ease, surprising Samuel. He¡¯d never seen an Enari who could survive contact with physical energy before.

    Before he could consider the bizarre ability any further, Edri lunged forward and grabbed his right ankle, faster than Samuel could blink. He appeared to disappear mid-attack, becoming solid just in time to grapple the mage. He yanked hard, throwing Samuel further inland, where he bounced off the hard ground. He grimaced in pain, but recovered his poise quickly, and charged the tall Enari again. As he rushed forward, he wondered why none of his mana had been drained during their brief contact. His feet had been unprotected for a half-second, which should have allowed the Enari to devour a huge chunk of his mana, if not all.

    ¡°Will you stop?¡± Edri said, sounding more exasperated than angry. ¡°Why are you attacking your friends?¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re not my friends!¡± Samuel yelled, coating his hands and feet in Ki before unleashing a barrage of kicks and punches. ¡°I don¡¯t know you strange creatures!¡±

    A look of pained shock crossed Edri¡¯s thin face, and that hesitation allowed Samuel¡¯s first two strikes to connect. His blows, enhanced with Ki as they were, had a substantial effect, and Edri staggered under the rush. Then anger showed in his face for the first time since he¡¯d appeared, and he let out a rebellious shout. ¡°Enough!¡± A blast of energy and Samuel was sent flying several feet further inland. He landed on his feet this time, and, glancing back, could see the curious faces of at least a dozen more Enari appearing. They varied widely in appearance as most humans did, though there were a few featureless Enari mixed in as well.

    Samuel heard his name echoed in several places among the crowd of approaching Enari, and his unease increased. They, like Edri and Inka, looked happy to see him. Several even called out his name in friendly, welcoming voices, grinning broadly and rushing forward. Samuel raised his ki shroud once again, even as Edri called out to the crowd.

    ¡°Stay back!¡± he shouted. ¡°Something¡¯s wrong with Samuel! He doesn¡¯t recognize us!¡±

    The crowd halted, and Samuel looked back at Edri. This was going a bit far for a ruse to get him to lower his guard. His apprehension started to ease away, and he began to feel that he was missing something. He still kept his shroud up, but relaxed his hostile stance somewhat, and took a few steps towards the tall thin Enari. Edri appeared to recognize his hesitation and lowered his own hands.

    ¡°Do you know me?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°This isn¡¯t a trap to get me to lower my guard?¡±

    Inka and Edri both looked puzzled and shared a glance. It was Inka who replied. ¡°Do you not remember us, Samuel?¡±

    Samuel shook his head slowly, wondering what was going on here. Sure, there were nearly a hundred years he couldn¡¯t remember, so these people might have known him. But still, beings made from chaotic mana could have abilities that messed with his memory. He had to be absolutely sure. ¡°Were we friends or something?¡±

    Edri recognized the test, and replied at once, with no uncertainty in his words. ¡°Not at first. You were a foreign creature to us when we met, and it took a long while for us to trust each other.¡±

    ¡°He doesn¡¯t remember,¡± Inka said. Her sadness seemed convincing. ¡°And we attacked him when he reappeared, just like last time! I¡¯m so sorry, Samuel.¡±

    ¡°Don¡¯t be sorry,¡± Edri said firmly. ¡°He attacked first. We just defended ourselves.¡±

    You just defended yourself, Samuel thought but kept the thought to himself. Inka hadn¡¯t done anything wrong. ¡°Tell me something I can verify.¡±

    Edri thought about that for a moment or two, his face twisted into a thoughtful frown. Then it cleared. ¡°When you first came to us, you were mad with pain. We never identified what it was, but you screamed that something was burning you alive. It seemed to be your own mana fighting you as if it weren¡¯t compatible with your body. But eventually, it settled, and you came to.¡±

    Samuel took a half step back in shock. He hadn¡¯t shared the detail of that pain with anyone. Part of it had been an effort to make his representation of Arcana easier, but mainly he didn¡¯t want to publicly admit to that pain. He¡¯d spent most of his life since returning pretending that it hadn¡¯t happened. He¡¯d rather fight a hundred enemies at once than remember the sensation of his body, mind, and soul tearing apart, even if the end result was something stronger. He took a full step forward, and let his ki shroud drop.

    ¡°Did I mention the names of any other people I might know?¡± He asked. ¡°Just to be sure.¡±

    ¡°You mentioned quite a few,¡± Inka said, stepping forward. ¡°You told excellent stories during your time here. But the person you spoke of most was your mother, Elena.¡±

    That settled it for Samuel. Even if they were able to see into his mind, the accuracy of their information, and the obvious sincerity of their words, of their expressions, convinced him they were telling the truth. Now he felt guilt rush through him for attacking Edri and the others. Heat was rushing to his face, and he lowered it a bit. ¡°Sorry.¡±

    Edri finally abandoned his fighting stance, looking highly relieved. ¡°It¡¯s okay, Samuel. We owe you a great debt anyway. This is nothing by comparison.¡±

    ¡°A debt?¡± Samuel¡¯s head snapped up, his embarrassment forgotten. ¡°What did I do?¡±

    Edri opened his mouth to reply, but another voice rang out before he could speak, and Samuel whirled around to view its source. ¡°It is better if we show you, friend Samuel. Please, come with me.¡±

    The speaker was an old woman. Even though her back was hunched, she radiated a great deal of power. If Samuel was at his full potential, their fields of mana would be nearly equal, he thought. But her wrinkled face was a kind one, and the smile was inviting. He knew he was safe in her presence, and stepped forward willingly. She glided away down the path and around the outcrop of buildings he¡¯d used as cover, beckoning him along.You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.

    The city he¡¯d noticed before became more evident now, as did the people. If it weren¡¯t for the potent chaotic mana radiating from every one of them, he could have mistaken them for humans, elves, and dwarves. There was even one, a small child hiding behind her mother, who had the appearance of a Draul. It was as if a more diverse Milagre were before him, where a member of every race lived in harmony. They even had fine clothing. Samuel stared at them in wonder as he followed the old woman. How could chaotic mana form beings so complex and evolved as this?

    The woman led him along the main road of the city, a straight path that led to the core. Samuel quickly began to realize that this city actually was Milagre, but a copy. Did the Ethereal Plane mimic the material plane from which he¡¯d come? If so, how had he traveled so far in such a short time? Not that he could accurately mark the passage of time, he told himself. He could have been in here for months without realizing it.

    Despite the sheer size of the city, they seemed to reach the center in no time at all. There was no gravity weighing them down, so they glided easily along, their feet a few inches above the surface of the street. Samuel had a distinct impression that the woman, as well as Inka and Edri, were restraining their pace to avoid letting him fall behind. He was both grateful and ashamed. I¡¯ll have to figure out how to move more quickly in this space.

    At the very center of the city, instead of the Royal Palace, there was one large building. It was equally as large as the palace but had the design of a church or cathedral. Tall stained-glass windows adorned the white stone walls, and unless he was very much mistaken, there were large etchings on the face of the stone, depicting a large creature and an army of Enari swarming it, trying to kill it.

    ¡°Is this the history of your people?¡± Samuel asked. When they seemed confused, he gestured at the largest of the etchings. ¡°You seem to have fought some terrifying beast. I assume you won, or you wouldn¡¯t be here.¡±

    They still seemed confused, and Inka spoke up. ¡°We didn¡¯t kill the Leviathan.¡±

    ¡°The only way for you to learn is to look closer,¡± Edri said. ¡°Follow me, Samuel.¡±

    He rose higher into the air, making the movement look effortless. Samuel noticed that he didn¡¯t use any mana to achieve it. Maybe that was the difference, he thought, as he propelled himself forward in Edri¡¯s wake. The Enari led him to the top of the first floor of the building, where the windows began. The paintings themselves were part of the story, he noticed. It showed a great snake-like creature, nearly large enough to wrap around the island they were on. Such a behemoth would have no issue destroying this city and all who lived in it.

    ¡°It¡¯s name was Menikos,¡± Edri said. ¡°It existed since the time our people were born and was responsible for the destruction of many of our homes.¡±

    Samuel inched forward to touch the carving. Even in this colorless depiction, he could imagine the terror of the beast. ¡°It¡¯s name was Menikos? It died?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Edri said. ¡°Follow the path.¡±

    Samuel slid to the right at once, watching the story unfold before his very eyes. Menikos flew throughout the Ethereal Plane, destroying and devouring Enari cities. It killed thousands and was the unchallenged ruler of the Sea of Chaos. Wherever it appeared, it devoured an entire civilization, thousands of Enari, and shattered the island that they called home. Many efforts were launched to kill the leviathan, though all failed. Unable to kill it, the Enari were forced into hiding.

    The Elders of the Enari used their power to push their islands to the very edges of the Sea of Chaos, weaving great nets of magic that made them invisible to the beast¡¯s eye. Many times it passed them, unable to notice their presence. At last, the Enari people had achieved peace. A barrier was erected, and a law was passed to prevent the people from leaving the island, lest the beast find them once more.

    Then, one fateful day, a stranger appeared in the city. He was depicted appearing in a flash of light, his face twisted by pain. Samuel recognized himself at once and marveled at the history of his interactions with the citizens of this island. He was depicted in slumber for quite a while after the pain ended and then awoke. He interacted with the Enari people, had some minor fights, and then became their close friend.

    Finally, at the third tier of the building, just below the central tower, Menikos appeared once more, drawn by the disturbance that Samuel¡¯s appearance had caused. It came directly for the city, whose camouflage had been lost by his teleportation spell. In its first attack, many Enari perished, trying to defend themselves. Even Edri was depicted here, rushing to defend his home alongside several other strong friends. But they were no match for the beast, and after a brief encounter, Edri was rescued, as the others were devoured.

    Now Samuel saw himself reappear in the scene, rushing out to confront Menikos. He was depicted to have a massive glowing field of mana around him, the same kind of mana that had surrounded Edri. Had he mastered how to make his mana chaotic at some point? He met the beast head-on and drove it away from the city. Samuel¡¯s eyes were wide as he traced the story around the edge of the building, and up onto the tower. It showed both him and the beast rising high, high above the city. And then it ended.

    ¡°What?¡± He spluttered the sharp pang of disappointment stabbing into him. ¡°Where¡¯s the rest of the story? I have to know how it ends!¡±

    ¡°Allow me to share the memory with you,¡± Edri said. ¡°I saw it all myself. It was my memory that was used to make the monument.¡±

    Samuel felt his mind touch him, but unlike when Knarlick made contact, it was a firm but gentle presence. Reluctantly, he allowed the connection, fully aware of how vulnerable he was at that very moment. If he wanted, Edri could have taken his life in that instant. All he¡¯d need to do was clamp down, and he could have snuffed Samuel out at once. But instead, a flow of images came to him, filling his mind. In response, memories that he knew to be his own flared to life.

    He had to get the beast away from the city. His best friend Edri and his beloved Inka were at risk. He wove around and around Menikos¡¯ head, challenging the beast with bursts of energy as it chased him, trying to snap its jaws on the tiny speck that was evading it. It let out a roar of fury, and he knew that he had it properly hooked. With all his might, he rocketed upwards. Menikos let out another roar and followed him.

    Samuel met him head-to-head several thousand feet higher, flipping around and shooting straight back down. The memory shifted to Edri¡¯s perspective as he flitted to the right, just barely avoiding the maw as it snapped down. He drew his blade then, which erupted with bright white energy, and struck at the beast¡¯s head. He carved three great wounds in its flesh, releasing bright blue blood that dissolved outside its body.  He dove again, flying in a tight spiral around the leviathan¡¯s body, his sword carving deeply into its flesh as he went down its body.

    When the thick white line wrapped around the long body of Menikos in its entirety, Samuel came to an abrupt halt, less than a hundred feet from the highest point of the island city. Menikos let out a roar that was equal parts fury and pain now, and whipped around, charging for him. Samuel did not attempt to dodge or deflect. He simply rose his free hand, pointing one finger at the beast as it descended. He could see his lips move, but not hear the words. A thin, nearly invisible white line shot from his finger, straight into Menikos¡¯ throat. A second later, it appeared behind it, piercing through the beast perfectly.

    The explosion of white light that followed blinded nearly all, but Enari¡¯s eyes just managed to catch the leviathan¡¯s body disintegrating into fine dust inches from Samuel¡¯s body. The fine dust scattered over the city and seemed to be absorbed by the city¡¯s residents, making them healthier and stronger. No sooner than the beast was gone, Samuel dropped from the sky, falling with alarming speed towards the city center. Edri tried to rush over to catch him, but he hit the ground too hard, shattering both it and his body with the impact.

    Edri and Inka found him there, bloody and beaten, laughing at his victory. Edri ran over to kneel at his side, as did Inka. ¡°Samuel! You killed him. I can¡¯t believe you actually did it.¡±

    ¡°Neither can I,¡± Samuel said wryly, grinning even as his eyes were milky with pain. ¡°But I¡¯m afraid that¡¯s the last thing I¡¯ll do. There¡¯s no healing from this.¡±

    ¡°Please don¡¯t go,¡± Inka cried, her voice sobbing, even if her eyes could not produce the tears. ¡°Please don¡¯t go. I love you. You have to stay!¡±

    Samuel looked away from Edri to stare into Inka¡¯s pained face. She was almost whimpering with grief. ¡°Why did you have to do this? We could have fled.¡±

    ¡°There was nowhere to go, Inka,¡± he replied, raising one hand to cup her face. ¡°You know that. If this island fell, your people would have been wiped from existence.¡±

    She gave no reply to that, only lowering her head to his own, whispering something in his ear. His lips moved in return, though Edri couldn¡¯t hear the words.  ¡°I cannot survive this,¡± he said. ¡°I know this now.¡±

    A faint blue light began to encapsulate his body then, and he looked at it in faint surprise. He smiled widely. ¡°Of course he knows where I am.¡±

    ¡°Who?¡± Edri asked. ¡°Who is doing this?¡±

    ¡°Isip,¡± Samuel said. He didn¡¯t seem to be as pained as before. ¡°He let me stay here as long as I could. But now it is time for me to return.¡±

    ¡°Will you come back?¡± Inka asked, her fear replaced with a little hope. ¡°Will you return to me?¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± he said, his purple eyes locked onto her face, memorizing every detail. ¡°I will come back for you. I love you.¡±

    Samuel blinked, back in his mind once again, facing Edri beside the top of the cathedral¡¯s tower. ¡°I was quite powerful.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Edri said. He could recognize Samuel¡¯s acceptance of the memory as real, and a broad grin stretched across his face. ¡°You can learn it all again. Are you ready to train?¡±

 Chapter 28

    ¡°The first and most important skill you need to relearn is surfing,¡± Edri explained. He was holding a length of rope in his hands, and grinned at Samuel¡¯s obvious curiosity when he glanced at it. ¡°This is to prevent you from using your traditional magic to move. It¡¯s the same method we had to use when Elder Narda taught you last time.¡±

    Samuel frowned suspiciously. ¡°Why should binding my hands prevent me from using magic?¡±

    Edri considered that in silence for a moment, then shrugged. ¡°When you last came to us, you used your hands to cast. Is that no longer the case?¡±

    Samuel blinked slowly, then, without moving his hands, he let loose a blast of ki from his feet, propelling himself several feet upwards. Of course, without the guidance of his hands for casting or balance, he began to spin through the air. Perhaps there was something to that, he thought. He made a quick gesture with his left hand to stop his spin and drifted back down to the rocky ground.

    ¡°Right,¡± Edri said. ¡°So here we are.¡±

    He tied Samuel¡¯s hands behind him with a few deft movements, securing them tightly without causing discomfort. Almost at once, despite the lack of any forces to pull him down, he felt off-balance. And as if the thought summoned it into being, he felt himself tipping forward slightly. Edri put one hand on his shoulder to steady him, grinning widely. He seemed to be enjoying watching the struggle he put into basic movements. The sarcastic humor reminded Samuel forcefully of Grimr. Not a good reminder, given the situation, he thought.

    ¡°I can manage,¡± he said shortly. With a supreme effort, he righted himself. ¡°So how does this work? Also, why do you call it surfing? Aren¡¯t you using some magic to fly through the air?¡±

    ¡°We got the name of the skill from you,¡± Inka replied, drifting around the corner into view. She was holding a large clay pot in her hands. ¡°You said it was like surfing on the top of a wave, and not like swimming.¡±

    Of course, he¡¯d come up with such a simple term for such a strange method, Samuel thought with a barely suppressed snort. But Inka¡¯s comment brought to mind a memory of the birds that had always flocked to the coast where he¡¯d grown up. They sat atop the water¡¯s surface, keeping them safe from air or land predators. That image certainly helped him understand the difference between how he and Edri were moving, but it didn¡¯t do much for him to learn how to move faster.

    Samuel started slow, willing the mana around his body to push him back. At once, he started to spin again, and he couldn¡¯t do anything to stop it. Edri drifted casually beside him, watching his efforts in silence. Inka was a few yards away, trying to look busy with some menial task, but her eyes kept flicking over to them. Samuel caught her eye once before he ended up completely flipped, with his head pointing towards the ground. He let out a grunt of frustration.

    ¡°What am I doing wrong?¡± He asked Edri, who had rotated himself just as Samuel was. Mocking him, perhaps? ¡°You don¡¯t use mana to do this, do you?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t use mana for anything, Edri replied casually. ¡°Enari do not have mana. You¡¯re using something that doesn¡¯t exist in this place.¡±

    ¡°But chaotic mana is everywhere here,¡± Samuel pointed out. He unconsciously strained his arms, as if trying to grab at the solid air to control his movement. ¡°I can see it plain as day.¡±

    ¡°You are mistaken,¡± Edri corrected him. ¡°It is not mana that surrounds us, but chaos.¡±

    ¡°Well then,¡± Samuel burst out, his frustration mounting quickly. ¡°Chaos doesn¡¯t follow order, so how in the hell-¡±

    Without warning, Samuel was jerked several feet backward and crashed into a nearby building. He grunted in pain, not quite loud enough to drown out Edri¡¯s laugh. The Enari finally seemed to take pity on him and drifted over. He righted Samuel with a quick gesture, swirling the chaos around him to move his body. It was strange to be so helpless, Samuel thought. He couldn¡¯t exert any control over the energy around him, yet Edri did so as easily as breathing.

    ¡°It may be a foreign thing to you,¡± Inka said sympathetically. She had finally dropped her act of disinterest and came over. ¡°But to Enari, it is as simple as walking. You can control chaos, but only if you master it. Think of the currents. When a larger current moves, the rest match it.¡±

    Which was fine to say for someone who was created and lived in this plane, Samuel thought. But he couldn¡¯t simply force an unknown element to move just because he wanted it to. But still, he gave it a try. Focusing on the tall and thin form of Edri, he tried to force the currents to push him that way. And, to his surprise, he felt his body move. There was almost no control to it, and he moved far more quickly than he¡¯d intended, his body slamming into that of Edri¡¯s, knocking them both off-balance. Edri let out another laugh as he righted himself, leaving Samuel to spin aimlessly, drifting in a random direction.

    ¡°Well, you have the idea down,¡± the tall Enari said with another chuckle. ¡°But you¡¯ll need more control than that.¡±

    ¡°Fine,¡± Samuel replied, the single word muffled by his gritted teeth. ¡°I¡¯ll just give myself more room to move around.¡±

    He waited until he rotated to face the edge of the island, and pushed himself forward once again. With no obstacles to run into, he shot forward through space, just barely able to register his speed. He went from his prone position to sitting upright, racing along the direction he¡¯d chosen. If it weren¡¯t for Edri¡¯s quick reflexes, he might have been lost, but his old friend was there in a flash, even faster than him, moving to block his path.

    ¡°Not bad,¡± he said. ¡°But try not to get lost, will you?¡±

    Samuel ignored him, too focused on his task. There had been a moment there, almost too brief for recognition, where he¡¯d had a semblance of control over his movement. It hadn¡¯t been much, but the chaos around him had responded to his will. He tried turning himself in place and spun so quickly that he felt a wave of nausea come over him. A little at a time, he told himself. He tried again, willing himself to move slowly. Gradually, with exceptional care, he turned to face the island once again. It was much further away than he¡¯d counted on.

    ¡°Let¡¯s try this again,¡± he muttered and pushed himself forward. Instead of willing himself to return to the island, he merely thought to go forward. And to his relief, he did exactly that. Drifting quickly, he found himself moving back towards the island. To make the moment even better, he knew that, despite his speed, he could stop at a moment¡¯s notice, when he wanted.

    Edri had moved with him again, presumably to catch him if he went out of control. He rushed forward to position himself in Samuel¡¯s path, but the mage pushed himself off to the side, avoiding contact with the Enari. He heard a quiet sound of excitement and encouragement from Inka and grinned. He pushed away from the island once again, but put more force into the movement, and tried moving in a gentle arc. It was perhaps sharper than he¡¯d intended, and he spun a few times as if he¡¯d hit a solid wall, but he¡¯d moved in the way he¡¯d chosen.

    ¡°You certainly picked that up fast,¡± Edri said. ¡°But don¡¯t waste your energy trying to turn over a large area. Try to drift through the movement, and make the turn sharper.¡±

    Samuel did exactly that, propelling himself forward. As he came close to Edri, he changed his direction again but kept applying force even as he moved. As if anchored to the lanky Enari by an invisible rope, Samuel moved in a tight half-circle, and shot out straight, heading back to where he began. His gut wrenched with the sudden and unexpected movement, but he was grinning hugely nonetheless. He was moving, in a space that defied the very order of his magic, without expending any effort.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.

    ¡°Not bad,¡± Edri said again. ¡°Now you just need to learn to do it instinctively. Best way to do that-¡±

    ¡°A race,¡± Samuel interjected, filled to the brim with confidence. ¡°Through the city, yes?¡±

    ¡°Yep,¡± Edri agreed. ¡°Let¡¯s get your hands untied, first.¡±

    Samuel flicked his hands free in an instant, forcing the rope free with a quick burst of air. He laughed at the shock on Edri¡¯s face as he tossed the rope back. ¡°I still have some tricks up my sleeve, I¡¯ll have you know.¡±

    Edri threw the rope to Inka, who was smiling quietly, though at Samuel or Edri they couldn¡¯t be sure. Samuel wondered if this was the dynamic of their friendship when he¡¯d last been in the plane, or if some forgotten factor had changed something. It was odd, he thought, working to recapture old relationships that he could no longer remember. What if something about them had changed so drastically that he couldn¡¯t come to like them? What if he¡¯d changed enough that friendship wasn¡¯t possible? That would make learning more here a challenge.

    ¡°Let¡¯s get to it, then,¡± he said, giving no sign of the doubt inside him. ¡°How should we do this?¡±

    ¡°From here, to the other side of the island,¡± Edri replied at once. ¡°Choose whatever path you want. Whoever comes back to Inka first is the winner.¡±

    Samuel nodded his understanding and took a deep breath to calm his nerves. The race had the air of a telling challenge to it, not to mention a test of himself. Already word seemed to be spreading to the other townsfolk, who were hurrying over to spectate. Edri drifted, almost lazy in his grace, to stand beside Samuel. He drifted from side to side, no more than an inch or two in either direction, while Samuel stayed stock-still. The Ancient ignored his opponent, keeping his focus on the first point he wanted to reach in the race. He knew that he could use explosive speed to get there in a flash, but after that, he¡¯d have to rely on reflexes and quick thinking.

    ¡°The terms are already set,¡± a strange Enari Samuel didn¡¯t know was speaking. ¡°No point in waiting. On your marks, get set, go!¡±

    The start was unexpected for both Edri and Samuel, but Samuel was conditioned to instant action from his months of training with Issho-Ni and the small handfuls of battles he¡¯d survived. He forced himself forward with abandon and found himself at the point of his choosing faster than he could blink. He shoved against the chaos there to redirect himself to the left, still pushing forward and making a smooth right turn into a side alley. He heard the excited whoop of a nearby Enari, but ignored it as well, pushing himself through another sharp turn.

    There was no sign of Edri anywhere near him, Samuel noticed, breaking free of the first major cluster of buildings and rocketing across the open space before him. He glanced around quickly but saw nothing. Was Edri so fast that he was already ahead? Or had Samuel, by some lucky strike, managed to get ahead of him? There was no way to verify either claim, so he contented himself with maintaining the speed he had, zipping around another set of buildings rather than attempting to weave through the tiny space. It was only when he cleared this obstacle that he registered Edri¡¯s presence, appearing out of that very tight space he¡¯d avoided.

    The Enari was moving with casual grace and executed several tight turns in quick succession. At the end of each of these maneuvers, Samuel noticed that he seemed to be a bit faster. Sure enough, after half a dozen quick changes in direction, there was a burst of energy, and Edri was catapulted forward, moving so fast that he left a slight shockwave in his wake. It buffeted Samuel as he was passed, and he was knocked off-course slightly, only barely avoiding running into a nearby wall. Gritting his teeth, he forced himself to continue.

    Edri had slowed down again, allowing Samuel to reel in the distance. Was he playing at the race? Samuel thought he might be, though there was a definite sign of exertion from Edri as if his last set of maneuvers had taken a bit of a toll on him. Maybe it was the sheer momentum of the action, Samuel reasoned. Similar to when Samuel cast a heavy spell, regardless of his overall mana reserves, there was a definite shock of exhaustion that followed, and it slowed one down for a bit.

    Well, he thought, that would be Edri¡¯s mistake, and he was determined to capitalize on it. Samuel flashed a grin at his friend as he caught up and pulled ahead, noting the quick flash of annoyance in the tall Enari¡¯s eyes as he was overtaken. Not content with staying behind, he put on a sudden, extra burst of speed, and had drawn level with Samuel in an instant. They raced, neck and neck, for the far side of the city¡¯s island, which wasn¡¯t so far away now. Of course, Edri was much more experienced in this, so by the time they reached the edge of the landmass, he had a comfortable lead of about a hundred yards on Samuel, and returned his earlier grin as they passed each other.

    As Samuel turned sharply to race back to the starting point, he experienced a surge of doubt as he saw the lead that Edri had established. Well, that was only to be expected. He pushed himself forward again, aiming a little higher than before to avoid the obstacle of a group of buildings entirely, soaring over it. He was now treated to a view of this side of the city and saw Edri¡¯s robes billowing out like a kit as he slipped through a cluster of buildings with ease. Making each of the sharp turns came to him as easily as breathing, Samuel thought admiringly. He was a natural at this and knew that he was superior in this contest.

    But, as Samuel had noticed before in battle, being a natural wasn¡¯t enough. If you didn¡¯t keep a keen eye and mind on your situation, the tiniest change in circumstance could spell sudden disaster. Just as he¡¯d managed to defeat several ¡°natural¡± warriors and mages in his time through sheer determination and lucky timing, Samuel was quickly seeing a way that he could turn the tables in this contest. If Edri had been able to achieve such a dramatic burst of speed by changing directions rapidly, he could too.

    Samuel had no idea what the effect of his experiment would be when he began. It could have resulted in nothing, after all, or even injury if he hadn¡¯t done it right. When it came to manipulating the chaos around them for movement, the Enari had learned one valuable lesson. Don¡¯t manipulate too much at once, or you will hurt yourself badly. Even Enari children, the unspeaking ones, knew that gradually increasing the amount they manipulated at once was safest, and never to exceed their boundaries. This, of course, was because the Enari constitution was frail, and too much force could shred them into infinite motes of energy, returning them to chaos.

    Samuel, a mortal being with a toughened frame, had no such limitations. So when he dove straight down, gathering a massive amount of chaos before him, and forcing it to burst just as he reached it, his body could handle the impact far better, and he was shot forward with devastating force. So much force that he knew he would be unable to turn or brake to avoid anything he hit in his straight rush. He processed this information, along with his vastly increased speed, with just enough time to react.

    Mere centimeters before he struck the outside of the building he¡¯d inadvertently chosen to be his first obstacle, he brought his mana to life. Or rather, he tried to. Instead, the very chaos around him responded to his call, pulling him forward safely, through the solid wall. Before he could process what had happened, he was on the other side of the cluster of buildings, and Edri was only fifty yards ahead of him. Then thirty. Then ten. Samuel shot past Edri faster than either of them could have expected, eliciting a shocked yell from the Enari as he vanished from view.

    Samuel pulled himself forward through chaos once more as he reached another cluster of houses, but was less successful on his second attempt. He grazed one of the rock surfaces and was knocked slightly off-course by the impact, not to mention half of his sleeve being ripped to shreds. He cursed loudly and tried to resume his previous speed, but Edri, who jolted into a sudden burst of speed himself, caught up to him in no time. He spared half a glance at Samuel as he passed, clearly unnerved by what had happened, and reached Inka just under a second before Samuel did. He was breathing heavily by the time Samuel caught up and shook his head slowly.

    ¡°You just-¡± he gasped, his chest heaving. ¡°How did you-¡±

    Inka was smiling from ear to ear as she brushed past Edri. She spread her arms wide and embraced Samuel, who, to his surprise, returned the gesture eagerly. Inka was surprisingly warm to touch as if she¡¯d just spent hours under the brightest sun. She smelled of some unknown fragrance, and a wave of relaxation came over Samuel at the scent. His mind, still racing over the events of the race, seemed stuck in place as he drank in the smell of her. Then she pulled away, and the moment was gone. Samuel floated where he was, slightly dazed.

    Samuel¡¯s stomach grumbled, and he rubbed it without thinking, wondering how long he¡¯d been in the plane now. He¡¯d eaten some basic rations just before starting his trials to reach the Sanctuary, but that felt like days ago now. Logic told him he couldn¡¯t have been here more than eight or nine hours, however. Inka noticed the movement, and, despite being a creature that did not need such sustenance, seemed to grasp what was going on at once. She waved Edri away and put one hand on Samuel¡¯s shoulders.

    ¡°You must be getting hungry,¡± she said sympathetically. ¡°You should go back for some food before you continue training.¡±

 Chapter 29

    As Samuel expected, the scene he¡¯d left in the Sanctuary was exactly the same upon his return. Returning was also just as easy as Raveonic had described. All along, the feeling of something connecting him to Ahya by the navel had persisted, and he merely willed the rope to pull taught. He blinked and found himself standing, rather uneasily, at the same spot from which he¡¯d vanished. Raveonic and Reito were staring directly at him, looking a little shocked at his sudden return.

    ¡°You¡¯re back,¡± Raveonic said simply, his surprise quickly fading away. ¡°Did you learn much?¡±

    ¡°Not a lot,¡± Samuel said. It felt strange to have his feet firmly on the ground, after hours of drifting weightlessly. ¡°I met a few Enari.¡±

    Reito looked stricken at once. ¡°Did they attack you? Are they following you here now?¡±

    The younger monk lifted his hands as if in preparation for a fight, but Samuel lifted one hand to calm him. ¡°We had a short fight, but I started it. They¡¯re not a danger to me. It seems that, during my last visit, I spent some time among them. I¡¯ve just spent a few hours learning from them, but I was stopped by a lack of food.¡±

    ¡°A lack of-¡± Reito muttered, gripping his chest with one hand and sitting down hard.

    ¡°Interesting,¡± Raveonic put in. ¡°You still require sustenance while in the Ethereal Plane?¡±

    Samuel nodded in confirmation and emptied the small satchel he carried at his waist. The rations that he¡¯d carried there were dust and mold now. ¡°This is what happened to the food I brought with me. In just a few hours, it aged several years.¡±

    ¡°Marvelous,¡± Raveonic commented, picking up what once had been a block of cheese. It crumbled under his light tough, and he dusted his hands off. ¡°Well then. We should get you some food. Reito, please summon Minerva. She should be returning from the fields soon enough.¡±

    Still staring at Samuel with wide eyes, Reito took a moment to realize that he was being addressed. Then he nodded in understanding, and offered his master a fleeting bow, then departed. As soon as the door had closed behind him, Raveonic sat gently in the center of the circle again. He gestured Samuel to the place he¡¯d occupied once before and rubbed his chin thoughtfully. It was eerily quiet here too, Samuel noticed, after the dull roar of the Sea of Chaos.

    ¡°So,¡± the old monk said, his voice ponderously slow. ¡°What have you managed to learn from the Enari thus far?¡±

    ¡°Nothing extreme,¡± Samuel said. ¡°Most of my time was taken up by just reaching the city, and then I was told what happened during my last visit. As I said, I must have spent most of that time among the Enari. Apparently, I killed some beast by the name of Menikos.¡±

    To his faint surprise, Raveonic¡¯s head jerked up at the sound of the name. ¡°The leviathan?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Samuel confirmed, his brow furrowed. ¡°How do you know of him if you¡¯ve never been to the Ethereal Plane?¡±

    ¡°Because he was not born on the Ethereal Plane,¡± Raveonic said slowly. ¡°He is, or rather was, one of the seven great beasts of Ahya. Once a guardian, he was thought lost to the ages. I assumed he was at the very edge of the world, avoiding contact with other races.¡±

    ¡°I did wonder why he had a physical form,¡± Samuel commented delicately. ¡°Everything else on that plane is made of chaos, but given order and form.¡±

    ¡°Like the Enari.¡±

    ¡°Exactly. They¡¯re a strange race, but surprisingly ordinary. Not at all like those who crossed over to this plane. They have a sense of reason, and particularly of empathy.¡±

    ¡°Marvelous,¡± Raveonic said, his voice quiet. ¡°You have learned a great many things in your time away from us. Yet to us, it has been but a moment.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m just glad that I can remember what happened this time,¡± Samuel admitted quietly, ignoring another rumble from his stomach. ¡°I only know what happened last time because they have the ability to link minds and share memories.¡±

    ¡°I can only assume that Isip created a new body for you when you returned to Ahya, and your memories did not cross with you. That is a powerful ability, to touch another¡¯s mind. Devastating if used for the wrong purpose.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t have to tell me that,¡± Samuel said darkly, remembering Stephen Knarlick. So that was where he¡¯d learned the ability, Samuel thought. He couldn¡¯t believe that the Enari would teach someone so cruel. But maybe they didn¡¯t know what kind of person he would become. Knarlick could have charmed his way into learning something, then used the knowledge for his gain when he¡¯d returned.

    ¡°You are the first,¡± Raveonic said. When Samuel glanced at him with raised eyebrows, he elaborated. ¡°You are the first to visit the Ethereal Plane and not be attacked. Every account of others who cross over remark how the inhabitants of that plane attack them and devour their mana, leaving them either crippled or mad.¡±

    ¡°They showed no sign of hostility to me,¡± Samuel frowned. ¡°They remembered me as a friend. I wonder what was different for me. Could it be my connection to Arcana?¡±

    Raveonic lifted his shoulders in an expression that was almost a shrug, but not quite. ¡°We may never know. It could be your friendly aura. It could also be that your form, like theirs, is constructed of mana, and not the natural way of flesh and bone.¡±

    A small twisted smirk touched Samuel¡¯s face at that. Not the natural way. Well, he¡¯d more or less come to terms with that aspect of his creation. To tell the truth, it mattered very little to him. The stamina and power he¡¯d received from it were well worth any potential side-effects that may come of his rather strange creation. Even Grimr had shared this view, on the few times that he¡¯d commented on how Samuel had come to be. He was unique as far as Ancients were concerned, as he had not been created directly by the mother. Perhaps that was why he¡¯d never seen, heard, or felt her presence.

    ¡°What is the Mother like?¡± He asked suddenly. ¡°Grimr speaks very highly of her, of course, and the people of the world worship her. Have you met her?¡±

    ¡°I have glimpsed the mother but twice in my life,¡± Raveonic commented. His brown eyes stared deeply at Samuel, seeming to guess what had prompted the question. ¡°I do not have a permanent connection to her. I enjoy that honor only because of what I have mastered.¡±

    ¡°What have you mastered?¡± Samuel pressed, wondering if he¡¯d get an answer this time. Raveonic had taught the two strongest people he knew. What knowledge could he possess, beyond what he had shared with his pupils?

    ¡°A great many things,¡± Raveonic said evasively. He smiled calmly in reply to Samuel¡¯s sigh of frustration. ¡°You will learn all that I know in time, young Samuel. Better yet, you will learn more. But all in good time. Never forget that a house built in haste will surely crumble.¡±

    More platitudes, Samuel thought, and fewer answers. He hated riddles. Fortunately, a distraction arrived in the form of Reito, who came through the door backward, holding a large wooden platter in his hands. It was piled with food, and Samuel¡¯s mouth watered as the scent crossed the threshold. Roasted meats, warm soft bread, and thinly sliced vegetables were arranged in a simple spread. Reito placed the food before Samuel, who jumped at the opportunity at once. He was so eager to eat that he didn¡¯t notice the second person who had followed Reito at first.

    It was only when she moved to stand at Samuel¡¯s side that he took notice of her. She was a middle-aged woman, with pale skin and flaming red hair that rolled down her shoulders in gentle waves. She had a kind, motherly air about her. Very unlike the war-like figures Samuel had grown accustomed to interacting with during his brief time here. The only strange part of her appearance, which he saw as he glanced up at her, was the thin strip of red paint on her forehead. She radiated a very old sense of power, the likes of which he¡¯d only seen in Divine beings.

    ¡°Ah, Minerva,¡± Raveonic said gently. ¡°A pleasure to see you as always.¡±

    ¡°Thank you, master,¡± Minerva said, her voice hoarse. It was the voice of a seasoned warrior, accustomed to shouting across the din of a battlefield. ¡°Young Reito told me that the mind¡¯s disciple was here, and he needed aid in recovering.¡±

    ¡°If you would,¡± Raveonic said with a smile. ¡°But perhaps an explanation is in order. Samuel,-¡±

    ¡°I am Minerva Moran,¡± Minerva said, turning to face Samuel, lowering herself gracefully to her knees. ¡°It is an honor to meet you, young Paragon.¡±

    Samuel nearly choked on the piece of bread he¡¯d bitten into. It was the greatest shock of all, hearing her name. Coughing as his airways cleared themselves, he stared up at her in awe. ¡°I know your name. I know who you are.¡±This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.

    ¡°Yes,¡± Minerva said, with a coy smile. ¡°I expected you to know me, even as many have forgotten my name and face. I am the Goddess of Rest and the first Divine.¡±

    ¡°Hold still,¡± Samuel said suddenly, leaning away from the woman. To his faint surprise, she complied at once with the command, and held her position, staring at him with a faint smile. ¡°You seem familiar. I know I¡¯ve never met you before, yet I can¡¯t help feeling that you''re an old friend.¡±

    ¡°Well, that is interesting,¡± Minerva said. She seemed unfazed by Samuel¡¯s direct questioning. If anything, it only amused her further. ¡°But I can assure you, I have an excellent memory, and this is the first time that I¡¯ve met you. I live here at the Sanctuary, and you have never set foot here before, have you?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Samuel admitted slowly. Something told him that it wasn¡¯t wise to push the issue just yet. ¡°I suppose I haven¡¯t. I apologize for the confusion. Perhaps you just remind me of someone I¡¯ve met on my many travels.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ve done a lot of traveling, so I hear,¡± Minerva said, accepting his apology at once. ¡°It¡¯s only natural that you should meet another woman as interesting as I.¡±

    She glanced over at Raveonic, who had been watching the short exchange with a patient smile. He caught her eye and gave a small, almost imperceptible nod. ¡°Minerva specializes in restorative magic, Samuel. She can help you recover the mana you have spent thus far so that you do not need to sleep.¡±

    Samuel frowned in confusion at that. Had he used that much mana while he had been in the Ethereal Plane? Most definitely, but his reserves were greater than most, and he¡¯d estimated that he still had about three-quarters of it left. But as he glanced within himself, he was surprised to see that, on top of still having the shroud of ki going, and not having used mana for nearly two hours, he was at less than a quarter of his total fuel. What on earth could have sapped so much of his energy without him noticing?

    ¡°I can recover your Ki as well,¡± Minerva explained further. ¡°I unfortunately, cannot create more spiritual power out of thin air, but it seems that you have hardly used yours, so that won¡¯t be an issue, will it?¡±

    Samuel shook his head slightly, only half-listening. He was still running his mind through every spell he¡¯d cast in the last few hours. He was normally keenly aware of this, as he strived always to be more efficient in his casting. Was there some hidden effect of the Ethereal Plane that made arcane magicks more expensive than in the mundane realm of Ahya? It could be possible, he thought to himself. He added it to the growing list of things he would consult with Grimr, whenever they met next.

    ¡°If you don¡¯t mind,¡± he said, doing his best to sound courteous and grateful. She nodded her understanding and moved directly behind him. He continued eating, waiting patiently. It started as a simple warmth, the feel of her hands on his back. He could feel the heat of her hands even through his thick robe, and he shifted his shoulders slightly. Then he felt a rush of energy run through him. Curiously, it didn¡¯t originate from her hands, but from within himself, at his very core. That was his Ki, he noted. It was lower than he¡¯d expected too, but that was less surprising, given the amount of physical magic he¡¯d used. If he factored in the unknown extra cost of the Ethereal Plane, it made sense.

    ¡°Hmm,¡± she said taking her hands off his back. ¡°That¡¯s curious.¡±

    Samuel forced down the piece of meat he¡¯d bitten off, and half-turned to regard her out of the corner of his eye. ¡°What¡¯s curious?¡±

    ¡°I cannot reach your mana,¡± she said. ¡°This is a new experience for me.¡±

    ¡°What is blocking you?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°I can lower my shroud if that helps.¡±

    ¡°We can try,¡± she agreed. He did so, in addition to disabling the usual enchantments he had on his robe. There were no longer any active effects placed upon him or his possessions, but after just a second of touching him, she pulled away again. ¡°No, still nothing. I can¡¯t reach your mana. I can see it there, slowly regenerating, but I can¡¯t touch it.¡±

    Curious, Samuel lifted one of his hands and collected some mana there. It was just as easy as always, with no new effects. No sense of extra power, cost, or exhaustion came. He offered a slight shrug. ¡°It must have something to do with the fact that I¡¯ve just spent hours in the Ethereal Plane. Maybe the drain on my mana temporarily altered its state.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ve restored people who have visited the Ethereal Plane before,¡± Mandra replied at once. ¡°I encountered no issues then, so I don¡¯t think that can be it.¡±

    Samuel offered another shrug. ¡°I don¡¯t know what it is, then. I can ask the Enari when I return.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re going back in?¡± Reito asked, his head snapping up from the quiet meditation he¡¯d assumed. Samuel raised an eyebrow at him in question, and he elaborated. ¡°Surely you want to return to Milagre soon?¡±

    ¡°I have time,¡± Samuel said calmly. ¡°Unless you know something about my home that you haven¡¯t shared?¡±

    There was a subtle but unmistakable challenge to the monk¡¯s basic honesty inherent in the question, reinforced by the level stare that he now directed at Reito. Reito was a little shaken by the sudden turn in Samuel¡¯s unflustered, casual mood, and quickly lifted his hands in a gesture of innocence. He definitely didn¡¯t have his younger brother¡¯s unshakable confidence, Samuel thought with a hidden smirk. He redirected his interrogative gaze to Raveonic instead, who reacted with a much cooler expression.

    ¡°There is no need for interrogation, young Samuel,¡± Raveonic said benignly. ¡°Your country remains in a state of war, with a third wave of attackers coming from the southwest.¡±

    Samuel quickly thought of the mental map he had of the country. ¡°That¡¯s the area of Mount Murgan. Tiamat¡¯s home, if I remember correctly. The followers of Bahamut were setting out to take the mountain a few weeks ago.¡±

    ¡°Indeed,¡± Raveonic agreed. ¡°Though they lost that fight, which you might not have known.¡±

    That did come as a surprise to Samuel. Sure, Tiamat was one of the few remaining ancient dragons, but the elite warriors who served under Bahamut were renowned for their strength and ferocity, not to mention their endurance. Bahamut¡¯s champion in particular showed a fierce power that was unmatched, save for a few exceptional warriors in the kingdom. There were a few who compared Bora Bora to himself and Tobi, though Samuel had yet to meet the Champion, so he couldn¡¯t be certain. Rumor was the man had a strong bloodthirst. Plenty of reason to steer clear, he thought.

    ¡°What of Tiamat?¡± He asked, piecing ideas together in his mind. He could imagine the effect that a failed assassination attempt could have on the Tyrant Queen. If she wasn¡¯t too badly injured, or if she avoided the fight altogether, then she¡¯d likely be bent on revenge. She¡¯d fly to Bahamut¡¯s central temple, and wreak havoc. Suddenly, the pieces fell into place in his mind, and he got to his feet at once.

    ¡°She intends to challenge Bahamut,¡± he said. ¡°She wants to take his divinity.¡±

    It was the most common method in which divinity was earned, though divinity was a rare enough occasion. It was odd enough that Samuel had known one god to ascend in his life, let alone two. They had ascended in what was regarded to be the natural way, but it was also possible to challenge a god for their place in the Divine Isles. If you proved victorious, their divine enchantment would be yours to take, allowing a quick ascension and a new deity overseeing that domain.

    ¡°The challenge has already taken place,¡± Reito said. His voice was measured as if he were unsure of how Samuel might react to the news. ¡°Tiamat killed her younger brother.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s eyes widened. The Tyrant Queen, victorious? Was she to be the new God of Dragons, then? Samuel could picture the damage that would do to Milagre and Gorteau in his mind. Tiamat was not known as a kind ruler. Hundreds, maybe even thousands would die with this shift in power. But Bahamut was supposed to be one of the strongest of the gods. How could he have been defeated by a mortal creature? Were the legends of his strength false?

    ¡°I know what you are thinking,¡± Raveonic said, his level voice interrupting Samuel¡¯s thoughts. ¡°Bahamut had weakened himself purposefully. He granted the majority of his power to this Champion.¡±

    As surprising as this new piece of information was, Samuel understood the meaning at once. ¡°He expected this to happen.¡±

    ¡°Yes. It is my opinion, and many agree, that Bahamut was tired of living unchallenged, forever immortal. So he made Bora Bora his aspect, slowly transferring his power so that when Tiamat came, he could be defeated.¡±

    ¡°But that means that Tiamat was denied,¡± Samuel said. Panic was starting to set in now. ¡°I have to return to Milagre, in case she attacks.¡±

    He was halfway through casting the spell, faintly surprised that Raveonic had made no move to stop him when the old monk spoke. ¡°That would not be wise.¡±

    Samuel halted in his casting and felt his mana fall away. ¡°What makes you say that? If she descends upon the capital, thousands will die.¡±

    ¡°She will not go to the capital,¡± Raveonic said firmly. ¡°The fight with Bahamut was taxing, and she needs time to rest. She will return to her nest, to await Bora Bora. He is coming for her.¡±

    ¡°Then it is the army marching near the mountain that will be in danger,¡± Samuel protested. ¡°Either way, I must do something.¡±

    ¡°You can do what you have already decided upon,¡± Raveonic retorted. He rose to his feet to emphasize the importance of his point, seeming to fill the entirety of the room with his will. ¡°Return to the Ethereal Plane. Learn what you can, and come back. Then use your knowledge to aid your country.¡±

    ¡°What difference does it make when I make another excursion?¡± Samuel said, growing impatient. ¡°I can visit whenever I want. My country needs me.¡±

    ¡°It is your purpose to gather knowledge!¡± Raveonic said, his voice rising suddenly. Samuel recoiled half a pace at the force in the words, his mana instinctively moving to defense. ¡°You must fulfill your purpose above all else!¡±

    A tense silence followed these words, in which none of them spoke. Then Reito broke the silence, sounding a little unnerved at his Master¡¯s vehement insistence. ¡°Remember, Samuel. You can return at a moment¡¯s notice, regardless of how long you are away.¡±

    Samuel switched his glare from Raveonic to Reito, then back again, quickly thinking it through. A worm of doubt had entered his mind now, spurred on by the fact that Raveonic had made no move to stop his hasty exit. So he had the choice to leave, if he wanted. Why was this a choice now? Was it because he¡¯d already learned the spell to cross over, and Raveonic knew that his curiosity would never let it lie? But it was the truth, he told himself. He wanted to go back again, just as badly as he wanted to rush to Milagre and aid in the defense of his country.

    ¡°Fine,¡± he finally said. ¡°But I need a favor.¡±

    ¡°We will do what we can,¡± Raveonic said at once.

    ¡°If you can get a message to Shigeru¡¯s son, I want Ryllae Inaro removed from the capital if she¡¯s still there. If she¡¯s not, but within the country, I want her safe travel to Sheran and out of the country guaranteed.¡±

    ¡°I will see to it at once,¡± Raveonic agreed. ¡°But it is a moot point, as you will be back in seconds.¡±

    ¡°I can never be too cautious when it comes to my loved ones,¡± Samuel said coldly. ¡°Especially as there are so few of them.¡±

    He made a quick downward gesture with his left hand, opening another portal. He could see Reito¡¯s mouth moving, about to make another comment, but he stepped through before the words could reach him, surrounding himself once more with the sound of chaos. He was nowhere near the island that Edri and Inka lived on, but he had a connection to them now and could sense its position. He propelled himself in that direction at once, wondering how long it would take him to relearn all the skill she¡¯d once possessed.

 Chapter 30

    Samuel landed lightly on the island a mere five minutes later, though he couldn¡¯t be sure of exactly how much time had passed. He was noticed by the inhabitants a minute or two before his arrival, of course, and a small crowd had gathered to witness his return. Edri and Inka were foremost among them, their welcoming smiles more evident than any other. Samuel returned their greetings with a very distracted air, though they didn¡¯t seem to notice.

    ¡°Welcome back!¡± Inka said, drawing him into a hug. He put his arms around her in return, relishing the warm moment as he breathed her in. But the situation ended quickly as Edri appeared, and they broke apart. Samuel quickly embraced the tall and thin Enari, grinning in reply to his friend¡¯s quiet laugh of relief.

    ¡°You all seem surprised that I returned,¡± he commented. Even the Enari whose names he couldn¡¯t recall seemed overjoyed to see him again. Maybe their perception of his absence was longer than his. For him, it had been a mere hour. Who was to say it hadn¡¯t been weeks for them, or even longer? ¡°How long was I away?¡±

    ¡°Most Enari don¡¯t have the ability to understand the passage of time,¡± Edri explained. ¡°To them and Inka, it was like you were gone years.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s eyes widened slightly at the thought. It was a marked difference in their perceptions, and also an iron-clad explanation of why he¡¯d been gone so long from Ahya on his first visit. Without a spell to anchor his position in Ahya, he would have existed only in this plane, subject to entirely different laws. He filed this information away for future investigation, curious to know exactly what differences would have an impact on future visits. In the meantime, there were more pressing questions he needed answered.

    ¡°Edri,¡± he said quietly, tapping his friend on the shoulder. Something about his tone seemed to register with the Enari, who arched an eyebrow, curious. ¡°How many other visitors from Ahya have you met? I mean, am I the only person you¡¯ve known to cross over into this plane?¡±

    Edri¡¯s face immediately took on a mask-like quality, as if he was keen to hide something. ¡°There have been others. None as noteworthy as you, of course, and none who have taken to the plane as well.¡±

    ¡°What happened to the others?¡± Samuel pressed, staring the taller figure directly in the eyes. ¡°Did they interact with this island?¡±

    ¡°Sometimes,¡± Edri said slowly. ¡°Most of the time, we encounter what¡¯s left of them floating out there.¡±

    He pointed out into the Sea of Chaos, vaguely indicating the no-man¡¯s land that lay outside the safety of the island. ¡°They were either drained completely by the chaos or else fell prey to one of the many creatures that roam freely in it.¡±

    ¡°What of those who made it to the island?¡±

    ¡°Very few of them lived long for us to learn anything about them,¡± Edri said. He stated it plainly, with no attempt to cushion the blow of the words. ¡°They either collapsed shortly after arrival due to the drain of the chaos around them, or they attacked us, forcing us to kill them in defense.¡±

    There was an almost petulant, stubborn tone to the reply as if he thought Samuel might judge him for the fact or else seek some kind of revenge for the other visitors. Samuel shook his head slightly. It was the natural way of things. If you were attacked by a stranger, you had every right to defend yourself. If it became violent, you couldn¡¯t be blamed for the consequences. He waved his hand dismissively, pursuing the original topic.

    ¡°Have there been any who managed to interact peacefully, at least at first? I¡¯m mainly curious about one person in particular. He would have been recent, perhaps within the last twenty or thirty years.¡±

    He could tell at once that Edri knew who he was talking about, and, judging by the expression that came over his face, it was not a pleasant memory. ¡°His name was Narwick, right? Or something like that.¡±

    ¡°Knarlick,¡± Samuel corrected, feeling his pulse quicken at the confirmation. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s him. What did he do? I can tell you¡¯re not a fan.¡±

    ¡°Well, he was fine when he first arrived,¡± Edri said, his voice cold as he recalled the memory. ¡°He found us on his own, just as you did, and he¡¯d already somewhat mastered the act of moving through Chaos. We accepted him because he reminded us of you in a way. He had the same thirst for knowledge, so we trusted him.¡±

    ¡°What did he do?¡± Samuel asked again, registering the fact that Inka had drifted closer, listening to their conversation intently.

    ¡°He took what he learned from us, and tried to kill one of our number,¡± Edri snarled. ¡°He took what was a sacred, gentle art, and perverted it, using it for force.¡±

    ¡°His mental attack,¡± Samuel muttered quietly. ¡°The ability to reach out and touch another¡¯s mind.¡±

    ¡°We had no idea of what he was,¡± Inka put in. ¡°But when he attacked the Elders and tried to kill them, we caught on quickly.¡±

    ¡°I nearly had him,¡± Edri spat out. ¡°But he managed to escape somehow.¡±

    ¡°Can you share the memory of how he did that?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°He¡¯s leading an army against my nation right now, in our plane. I need to know all that I can about his time here.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Edri said at once. He seemed keen on the idea of helping Samuel prepare for an inevitable second confrontation against Knarlick. Samuel was grateful for his quick acceptance, though privately he thought that avoiding Knarlick was probably the best course of action for him to take. He reached out with his mind to touch Samuel, and the brief memory of Knarlick¡¯s retreat played out in Samuel¡¯s head as if he were watching a long-lost memory that had been lurking in the back of his mind.

    Edri charged Knarlick, who sent several attack spells against his opponent. Edri drifted sharply around them, then dove forward, reaching out with one hand to seize the attacker. In the split second before he could make contact, however, an invisible force seemed to slam into Edri¡¯s mind, stunning him. Then a burst of fire sent him flying back. By the time Edri had righted himself and looked back towards Knarlick¡¯s position, the man was making a flat cutting motion in the air. A thin line of white energy appeared, and a portal opened, sucking him in at once. He disappeared from view.

    ¡°That¡¯s very similar in appearance to the spell I used to travel here,¡± Samuel said, once the memory had faded away and Edri withdrew his mind. ¡°And that mental attack he used against you is all too familiar. He did something similar to me when we first met.¡±

    ¡°He attacked you as well?¡± Inka said, her voice full of concern. Edri let out another angry growl. ¡°How were you able to defend yourself if you had forgotten the art?¡±

    ¡°I didn¡¯t,¡± Samuel admitted begrudgingly. Then, when Inka appeared confused still, he elaborated. ¡°Defend myself, I mean. I teleported away once I realized I couldn¡¯t throw his influence off.¡±

    ¡°I bet he wasn¡¯t pleased by that,¡± Edri said. ¡°He has a real hunter¡¯s mind, Samuel. He likely won¡¯t stop pursuing you until you have a real fight. He spoke often of his fascination with challenging someone in Ahya, and he was determined to beat them.¡±

    ¡°Who was he determined to fight?¡± Samuel asked. ¡°Did you catch a name?¡±

    ¡°No. He only referred to his prey as ¡®Champion of the Mind¡¯. No idea what that means.¡±The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.

    Samuel felt as if an ice chip had slipped into his stomach. There was only one person to whom Knarlick could have been referring. Was that why he¡¯d been so quick to identify Samuel when he¡¯d gone to investigate the enemy capital? If he¡¯d done his research, he could have identified Samuel at once and tried to kill him then. Samuel had enjoyed having a few rivals during his time training in magic, of course, but apart from Rainhall, nobody had ever had such a vested interest in harming him. This was beyond even his rift with Rainhall, Samuel thought. Knarlick wanted to kill him so that he could take everything he had. His connection to Arcana, his mastery over magic, all of it.

    ¡°Can you teach me to defend against his mental attack?¡± Samuel asked. He wasn¡¯t exactly sure why, but he didn¡¯t feel like sharing that he was the person Knarlick was after. Not just yet, anyway. ¡°I can understand if you don¡¯t want to teach it to another outsider after what he did, but it¡¯s the only way I can stand against him if we meet again.¡±

    ¡°You are not an outsider,¡± Edri said firmly. ¡°You are one of us, Samuel. Your connection to Chaos is just as strong as any of ours.¡±

    ¡°I can barely move it when I want, but thanks,¡± Samuel replied, chuckling quietly. ¡°That does remind me, though. When I left to recover and find food, someone attempted to recover my mana. She says that she couldn¡¯t touch it because something about it had changed. Do you have any idea what that might be?¡±

    ¡°You haven¡¯t noticed?¡± Inka asked. When Samuel frowned at her, not understanding, she pointed at his chest. ¡°Look closer at your mana, Samuel. Then you¡¯ll see.¡±

    Though he¡¯d already done it when in Ahya, Samuel complied with her instruction, lifting one hand and shifting the mana there to it. His hand began to glow with a bright white light, but just at the edges of his mana, there was a strange blue flash of energy. Then another. Some kind of blue electricity was flitting across and throughout his mana, a new component of it he¡¯d never seen before. But he knew at once what it was, as there was only one new element that he¡¯d encountered recently.

    ¡°That¡¯s Chaos,¡± Samuel muttered in surprise. ¡°How is it mixed in with my mana, but not devouring it?¡±

    ¡°The same way that Chaos does not attempt to devour us,¡± Inka said with a smile. ¡°We live in harmony with it. We use it to move, hunt, and even live. In return, it fills us, and gives us its strength.¡±

    By way of demonstration, she lifted her hand and expanded her mana a bit. Unlike Samuel¡¯s, it was comprised entirely of chaotic mana, a sparking field of faintly red energy. Quite apart from being curious about how he could have bonded with Chaos without realizing it, Samuel reached out to touch her hand. They linked fingers, and their respective manas immediately moved to meld. The energy around Samuel¡¯s hand grew a little darker with Chaos, while Inka¡¯s mana brightened considerably as the white took effect there.

    ¡°Is this a magic of Chaos?¡± He asked, studying the effect with a slightly tilted head. ¡°Or is it something new?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s proof that you remember how to link yourself to another,¡± Edri cut in. ¡°Somewhere inside your mind, the memory persists, even if you cannot recall it. You simply have to reach it.¡±

    Well, Samuel thought, that was the first time that an easy challenge had been presented to him. He spent a great deal of time in his mind, after all, and so was keenly aware of the memories there. There was a wealth of information inside him pertaining to Ancient magic, an entire language of power and its various uses. He found what he was looking for in seconds. Something about linking. Joining his body, mind, and soul to that of another, to share thoughts and energy instantly. He¡¯d done it once before, with Inka. The memory, surging back to him now, made him flush slightly in embarrassment.

    Might as well try it out now, he thought. With a supreme effort, he expanded his mind. It was a clumsy attempt, reaching out in a specific direction. His mind felt as if it were being stretched, but he put up with the discomfort, forcing his mind to stretch out and touch Edri¡¯s. He knew it worked when he could feel a faint sense of pride and amusement coming from his friend. He pulled away at once, marveling silently at how easy that had felt, compared to the difficulty of mastering simple movement.

    ¡°See?¡± Edri said brightly. ¡°You already knew how. Your bond with Chaos is strong, Samuel. Just train your mind, and you¡¯ll be able to withstand any attack that Knarlick will throw at you.¡±

    ¡°More training,¡± Samuel said dryly. ¡°Great.¡±

    Edri and Inka laughed at that, and Inka pulled lightly on the hand that was still entwined with hers. ¡°No training today, I¡¯m afraid.¡±

    ¡°Why¡¯s that?¡± Samuel asked. There was a light of mischief in Inka¡¯s eyes that, while he couldn¡¯t remember seeing before, felt oddly familiar. It told him that she had a secret plan for him, and any attempt at refusal would be firmly ignored.

    ¡°Tonight, we celebrate,¡± She said, a note of triumph in his voice. ¡°We didn¡¯t get the chance when you left before, and I¡¯m not missing the opportunity now.¡±

    ¡°You can¡¯t be serious, Inka,¡± Edri said with a groan. ¡°The Elders won¡¯t allow it. Not after what happened last time.¡±

    ¡°What happened last time?¡± Samuel asked at once. Inka and Edri both ignored the question, continuing in their small argument.

    ¡°Katha already agreed,¡± Inka said smugly, jutting her chin out. ¡°So you¡¯re overruled.¡±

    ¡°Katha doesn¡¯t count,¡± Edri shot back. ¡°He wasn¡¯t an Elder the last time, so he doesn¡¯t understand.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s not the only one,¡± Inka replied, her voice a little sing-songy. She seemed quite pleased with herself. ¡°Even Irdi agrees with Katha. It¡¯s only right.¡±

    Starting to feel more and more left out, and not enjoying it one bit, Samuel shook Inka¡¯s hand to remind him that he was there. ¡°What are you two on about?¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ll see soon enough,¡± she replied, smiling cryptically at him. ¡°Come on. You¡¯ll love it.¡±

    She rose higher off the ground, heading towards the center of the city. Samuel resisted at first but quickly complied with the movement. Inka outpaced him considerably in the first few meters until he grasped his control over Chaos, and soon they were moving side-by-side, a resigned and slightly indignant Edri drifting along in their wake. Samuel glanced over his shoulder at him, a silent question obvious in his expression. Edri grimaced and shook his head, silently refusing to give in to Samuel¡¯s plea. Fine then, Samuel thought. He put on an extra burst of speed, pulling Inka with him. Let¡¯s find out what it is, and get it over with.

    It didn¡¯t take him long to figure out exactly what it was. In the center of the city, spread across the large open area that surrounded the giant cathedral, there were several hundred Enari gathered. They were laughing and dancing with each other. Some kind of festival, Samuel thought, his embarrassment mounting when he realized that several of them had changed their appearance slightly, matching his robes exactly. Some had even gone so far as to copy his physical form. Samuel understood what the celebration was for.

    ¡°You didn¡¯t get the chance,¡± he said quietly, repeating Inka¡¯s words from before. ¡°Because I was forced to leave. So now you want to make up for the lost time.¡±

    Before she could reply, a loud chorus of cheers rippled through the air towards them. The citizens had noticed Samuel¡¯s appearance en masse, and they were loudly welcoming him with a roar of celebration and admiration. Whistles rang out from random points in the crowd, and several drifted higher, laughing at the expression of shock on his face. Bewildered, Samuel looked back at Inka, then to Edri.

    ¡°Does it have to be so¡­ noisy?¡± He asked, wincing at the continuous sound of approval. ¡°I¡¯m not too fond of loud noises.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s rich, coming from you,¡± Edri said at once. He too seemed uncomfortable with the loud proceedings taking place below them. ¡°A mage who specializes in countering magic and creating explosions is complaining about a little cheering. Get over yourself already.¡±

    Despite himself, Samuel grinned at his friend. ¡°Alright. It¡¯s not the first time this has happened to me, so I suppose I can put up with it for a bit.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s right, you can,¡± Inka said firmly. She released her grip on his hands and moved behind him, putting her hands gently on his back, shoving him down to the other Enari, several of which were moving up to greet him in person. ¡°Get a move on. You deserve this.¡±

    Samuel begrudgingly let himself drop into the crowd of Enari. Hands reached out to touch him from all directions, to shake his hand, to clap him on the shoulders, or simply to embrace him. There were words of thanks, shouts of praise, and calls for him to dance with them. Despite his discomfort, Samuel grinned shyly, letting himself be pulled into the crowd. Soon, he was drifting in elaborate patterns with the rest, swirling and drifting through the chaos in a complicated pattern.

    Samuel danced with the others for what felt like an entire day until he was tired and breathing heavily. It didn¡¯t take any of his natural resources, but moving through Chaos still took fierce concentration for him. There would come a day, he was sure, that he would be able to manage it as easily as breathing, but that day was not today. He was rescued from his grueling duty of dancing by Inka, who plucked him from the crowd as easily as if she¡¯d cast a line out for him.

    ¡°Time for your real celebration,¡± she said coyly, leading him to one of the buildings on the far edge of the central area. ¡°We can make up for lost time now, and you can get some rest.

    He obeyed the pressure of her hand without thinking, slipping through the door of the building to see a comfortable bed. Before he could ask any questions or register his shock and doubt about her intentions, he felt her mind touch his own. He allowed the contact, and the connection broadened and deepened until he could barely distinguish where her mind ended and his began. They spent the night in this fashion, joined in body, mind, and soul until the exhaustion finally claimed him completely, and he fell asleep.

 Chapter 31

    ¡°Excellent work, Samuel. Let¡¯s take a break for now.¡±

    Samuel reluctantly let his guard drop, and relaxed, watching Edri drift away through a haze. Learning to defend himself against mental attacks was exhausting. Each time Edri locked onto his mind, his vision was blurred, and there was an incredible, debilitating pressure as if his head was going to implode. Of course, Edri was taking it easy on him, not using lethal force so as to help him learn. That didn¡¯t make it any less painful, he thought.

    At once, he felt another presence touch his mind. Inka. After each bout of mental combat, she connected to Samuel to heal the damage that Edri had done, and give him a little boost of mental clarity. The haze that dominated his vision cleared, as did his mind, and he gave her a quiet word of gratitude. She smiled warmly up at him, then drifted away as well. Samuel lowered himself until he was on the ground, and summoned his notebook. He¡¯d been recording all the details of his training into it so that he could reference the book if his memory was affected again.

    Knarlick¡¯s attack would be much worse than this, he reminded himself, scratching a few new lines into his notebook. He would use his full force right away, in an attempt to crush Samuel¡¯s mind and render him incapable of defending himself. All so that he could gain Arcana¡¯s favor. Perhaps the most troubling aspect for Samuel was the uncertainty of it all. Would Arcana accept Knarlick as his champion if he were to kill Samuel? Would Arcana even be strong enough to bestow his power onto another person? The god had several followers now, of course, but the bulk of his essence was still carried by his current champion. If that faded, he might die.

    Irritated by the sudden dangerous turn that his life had taken, Samuel closed his notebook with a snap and banished it. Edri and Inka were having a quiet discussion with some other Enari a fair distance away. He briefly considered going over and joining them but decided against it. Instead, he let himself be consumed by his thoughts, to think through each new problem he faced. It was an activity he hadn¡¯t done in quite a while, mostly because his life had become so hectic. Perhaps he should put a little more emphasis on meditation in the near future, he thought.

    Strangely, the thought occurred to him that he could use some advice from Grimr. In the early years of his life, he¡¯d hung on the Ancient¡¯s every word, of course. Grimr was wise after his thousands of years in the world. The survivor of countless battles, shaper of so much of the world, and now a God to boot, he had a lot of sage advice for Samuel when he was troubled. Of course, that advice was always layered under confusing riddles and platitudes, he thought with a snort. But this was all moot, as he had no way of contacting Grimr while in the Ethereal Plane. Or did he?

    Samuel shot to his feet, his face twisting into a thoughtful frown. A few yards away, Inka noticed his sudden movement and glanced over curiously, though he didn¡¯t notice. It had only just occurred to him, but Ancients had their unique way of contacting each other via projection. Samuel had used this to his benefit on a handful of other occasions, of course, when he¡¯d faced a difficult decision. Could the same effect be possible if he were here? Edri had said that this plane was part of the same world. It was worth a try, he thought.

    ¡°Grimr,¡± he said, his voice soft and tentative. ¡°Grimr, can you hear me?¡±

    At once, and to his great relief, the scene around him faded away, replaced with a new one. He was on the crest of a large hill, overlooking a stretch of shoreline. There were many soldiers camped there, perhaps a thousand strong. Grimr flinched at his sudden appearance and whirled around to stare at him with wide eyes. His hand formed a fist, and the bone dagger he used to fight appeared clutched in it.

    ¡°Samuel!¡± He exclaimed, his voice a quiet hiss. ¡°By the Mother, you frightened me.¡±

    Now that he recognized his surprise visitor, he relinquished the grip on his weapon, which vanished. Samuel raised an eyebrow at him. ¡°I¡¯ve never known you to be so jumpy, Grimr. Getting lax in your old age, are you?¡±

    ¡°I¡¯ll show you lax,¡± the Ancient growled at once. Then he frowned. ¡°What is wrong with you? You seem different.¡±

    ¡°Do I?¡± Samuel asked, looking down at his projected form. He couldn¡¯t spot any differences. ¡°I should be more or less the same as I was in our last meeting.¡±

    ¡°Your image is blurry,¡± Grimr said bluntly. ¡°And your essence has changed. You¡¯re¡­ less physical now.¡±

    Samuel couldn¡¯t begin to comprehend what that meant. Deciding it best not to delve into the subject, he offered his quick explanation. ¡°I¡¯m in the Ethereal Plane.¡±

    That got Grimr¡¯s interest at once. His eyes narrowed. ¡°Did you arrive by accident again?¡±

    Samuel shook his head, which didn¡¯t seem to surprise his friend. Grimr smirked. ¡°Of course, you¡¯d be the first to discover how to get there on purpose.¡±

    ¡°I didn¡¯t,¡± Samuel corrected him. ¡°Raveonic taught me the spell. He said I was the best to learn the mysteries of the plane.¡±

    ¡°Ah, yes,¡± Grimr said, his smirk broadening into a full grin that showed his sharp teeth. ¡°I¡¯d heard that the old man had summoned you. Tell me, what do you think of him?¡±

    Samuel twisted his face, trying to think of the words. ¡°He¡¯s both exactly what I believed him to be, and not at all what I expected.¡±

    Grimr let out a laugh, then cut the sound off at once with a nervous glance at the camped men. They were less than three hundred yards away, and he wanted to stay quiet. ¡°Yes, he has that effect. But we¡¯re getting away from ourselves. Why have you contacted me?¡±

    ¡°I need advice,¡± Samuel said predictably. He jerked his head towards the body of troops. ¡°I need to know more about Stephen Knarlick. I take it those are his men?¡±

    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m doing Shigeru a favor and keeping an eye on them. They¡¯ll be ready to march tomorrow. Rainhall plans to intercept them at Murgan¡¯s feet.¡±

    Samuel turned in place to look inland. The massive mountain was visible even from here, perhaps four days¡¯ march away. ¡°Are you sure that¡¯s wise? What if Tiamat returns to her nest?¡±

    ¡°You¡¯ve heard of that, have you? Well, I¡¯m afraid that¡¯s exactly what will happen.¡±

    ¡°So then,¡± Samuel began, but Grimr cut him off with a meaningful look. ¡°The decision wasn¡¯t yours, and you¡¯re not allowed to intervene.¡±

    Grimr nodded, not saying anything just yet. He stared out at the ocean, which dominated the horizon, stretching beyond what they could see. So much of the world existed beyond that body of water, but only the sturdiest of vessels could strike out at foreign lands. The small Ancient let out a morose sigh, shook his head, then turned away from the army camped below him.

    ¡°You will have to take part in this fight, Samuel.¡± He said quietly. ¡°Since I cannot interfere, you¡¯re my best option. You may be the only Ancient who is not bound to a purpose that takes you away from the interest of the country.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m surprised you¡¯re so invested. As long as they don¡¯t harm the wilds, you shouldn¡¯t have an issue, right?¡±This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work.

    ¡°I may be getting soft,¡± Grimr said with a grimace. ¡°But Shigeru¡¯s love of the mortal people has rubbed off on me a bit. Or perhaps I just care because I owe him.¡±

    Samuel regarded Grimr in silence, seemingly without his realizing it. He wondered if the Ancient ever grew weary with the weight of his responsibility, not to mention the restrictions that it put on him. If it weren¡¯t for his purpose, he could move freely and do as he pleased. He could probably destroy the army below them without issue and put an end to the war forevermore. But their enemy was cunning and would make every effort not to provoke the wilds.

    ¡°I¡¯m learning how to defend myself against him,¡± Samuel assured his friend. ¡°He learned a great deal from the Enari. They¡¯re the people of this Plane. I have to learn what I can if I¡¯m to stand a chance against him. But worry not, I¡¯ll be here for this battle.¡±

    ¡°I know you will,¡± Grimr said. His voice was unusually soft. ¡°You¡¯re a great warrior, Samuel. Your hand is swift, and your mind keen. There could be no better Champion for Isip¡¯s will.¡±

    Samuel flushed slightly at the praise, not to mention the sincerity of the words. He could tell that Grimr knew of Knarlick¡¯s intentions, or rather his goal in hunting Samuel. His next words confirmed this. ¡°I cannot allow another to take your place. If he kills you, I will end him.¡±

    ¡°That won¡¯t be in contradiction to your purpose?¡±

    ¡°It will be in service to it,¡± Grimr said. ¡°Knarlick possessing Isip¡¯s power, stolen from you by force, will be a threat to the balance. I¡¯d have no choice but to hunt him, and there is no place in the world in which he could hide from me.¡±

    ¡°He could enter the Ethereal Plane,¡± Samuel said. Grimr nodded his agreement of that. ¡°Let me teach you the basics of what I know. It may be useful information.¡±

    ¡°You don¡¯t have enough time to teach me that as you are now.¡±

    ¡°True,¡± Samuel agreed. ¡°But I¡¯ve learned a new kind of magic. Just trust me.¡±

    He reached out with his mind to touch Grimr¡¯s. Strangely, despite the apparent distance between them, he reached Grimr almost instantly. Perhaps distance didn¡¯t matter when it came to linking minds between Ancients, he thought. Grimr¡¯s mind was like an iron wall when he first made contact, then he was allowed access. As quickly as he could, he shared all the memories he¡¯d gained while training, from arriving on the island to the moment right before he made contact.

    Grimr¡¯s eyes widened at the strange sensation, and he looked as though he was doing some very quick thinking. Samuel knew that expression well and knew that Grimr had grasped everything he¡¯d shared quickly. The Ancient smirked. ¡°Interesting. To think that I could enter all along if only I¡¯d used the right words.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s the problem I keep coming across,¡± Samuel agreed with a short laugh. ¡°Anyway, I should get back. I¡¯m in the middle of training to strengthen my mind.¡±

    Grimr nodded his acceptance of the farewell but had one thing to add. ¡°A fair trade, before you leave.¡±

    ¡°I think you¡¯ve helped me far more than I have you,¡± Samuel said. ¡°But sure. What is it?¡±

    ¡°For your mental training. Don¡¯t tackle it head-on. That¡¯s not your style.¡±

    The connection dissolved before Samuel could say anything or ask what Grimr meant, but for once, he didn¡¯t need to. He opened his eyes slowly, blinking away the strange sense of disorientation that always followed his projections. To his surprise, both Edri and Inka were sitting before him. Inka looked concerned, Edri impatient and annoyed. They both gave a little start as Samuel suddenly opened his eyes and looked at them. Edri shot to his feet.

    ¡°What were you doing?¡± He asked, his tone exasperated. ¡°Inka has been worried sick. You¡¯ve been sitting there for hours!¡±

    ¡°Hours?¡± Samuel asked, blinking in confusion. ¡°But that only took me a few minutes. I was just contacting one of my friends.¡±

    ¡°You can speak to people outside the plane?¡± Edri asked, completely distracted from his annoyance. ¡°I didn¡¯t think that was possible.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m sure it¡¯s not normally possible.¡± Samuel rose to his feet, noticing with faint surprise that his knees were indeed stiff as if he¡¯d been sitting still for many hours. ¡°But Grimr and I are both Ancient. We have our way of communicating.¡±

    ¡°Can you teach it?¡¯ Inka asked, also getting to her feet. ¡°To Edri and I, I mean.¡±

    Samuel shook his head slowly. ¡°Sorry. It¡¯s part of the magic that you can¡¯t learn. Only Ancients can use it, and we¡¯re born with the ability. Well, most of us.¡±

    He didn¡¯t add that he¡¯d been remade as an Ancient, which made him unique. It didn¡¯t seem like a pertinent detail just then. But Edri¡¯s face cleared as he made a connection. ¡°Like your Laban spell.¡±

    It was odd to hear his unique trait referred to by the word he used, Samuel thought. ¡°Yes.¡±

    Edri shrugged it off, moving to another train of thought faster than Samuel expected. ¡°Oh well. Your explanation makes sense. I thought you were having a dream about meeting a human child. Did you learn anything else about Knarlick?¡±

    ¡°Not really,¡± Samuel said. Again, he didn¡¯t mention that he was Knarlick¡¯s ultimate target, nor the reason for why he was on the hunt. ¡°It seems you¡¯re my best bet in preparing for my fight with him. Shall we continue?¡±

    His apparent eagerness seemed to take Edri by surprise. The tall thin Enari looked at him with slightly narrowed eyes. ¡°Are you sure? We can do it later after you¡¯ve had some time to rest.¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Samuel said firmly. ¡°And this time, don¡¯t take it easy on me. I need the full effect, or I won¡¯t grow.¡±

    ¡°Fine. But I won¡¯t attempt to harm you. I¡¯ll force you to kneel, and no further.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s fine,¡± Samuel said, adjusting the tie on his robe slightly. ¡°Let¡¯s get to it.¡±

    At once, Samuel felt Edri¡¯s mind slam into his own. It was a deliberate force, and his influence clamped down like a crushing vice. Samuel tried to push back with all his might, but he couldn¡¯t budge Edri¡¯s grip. He could feel his resistance breaking down. Then, in less than ten seconds, Samuel was on his knees, and Edri¡¯s mind was retreating.

    ¡°I thought you might have learned a new trick,¡± the Enari said. He sounded like he regretted his action. ¡°But that was nothing new.¡±

    ¡°I do have a new trick,¡± Samuel gasped, drooping forward to put one hand on the ground to steady himself. ¡°I can handle this. Do it again.¡±

    ¡°We can give it a-¡±

    ¡°Again!¡± Samuel barked, using the tone that he always used on his students when one of them wasn¡¯t getting to business as quickly as he liked. It was also the tone he used on trainees under him to whip them into action. It had the desired effect he wanted, as he saw Edri¡¯s eyes narrow, and felt his mind encroaching once more. ¡°Good.¡±

    Samuel pushed himself to his feet as Edri began his attack once more, and resisted the urge to kneel once more. Grimr¡¯s words came to him again as he felt the clamp of Edri¡¯s powerful mind. That''s not your style. He was right, of course. Samuel avoided using brute force whenever possible, relying instead on his quick wits and ability to redirect. In this case, the answer was simple, he thought. He pushed back with his mind again, just enough to stall Edri, then willed himself to slip away and to the side. Edri¡¯s grip slackened, and he seemed to glance off of Samuel¡¯s sudden defense. In the fraction of time, before he could latch on, Samuel reached out with his mind, clamping down on Edri where he stood.

    Edri¡¯s eyes widened in surprise at the sudden attack, then they narrowed in concentration. He threw Samuel off easily. But Samuel wasn¡¯t done. He came to the attack again, this time from a different angle. He didn¡¯t try to force Edri into submission. Instead, he continued to change his direction of attack, slamming into Edri¡¯s mind with as much force as he could muster. His friend reacted almost exactly as he¡¯d expected, giving up on attacking completely to defend himself. With a little flick of his hand, Samuel directed what focus he could towards a spell. The chaos behind Edri surged forward at once, knocking the Enari¡¯s legs out from underneath him.

    Samuel was across the gap between them in a flash, pinning Edri down with Ki, one hand extended. He didn¡¯t know when it had appeared, but he was grinning from ear to ear. ¡°I think that does the trick.¡±

    Edri had frozen at the sudden attack, his instinct telling him that he was doomed. But as his reason caught up to him, he blinked and pushed Samuel off of him. Samuel waited patiently for him to rise to his feet once more and collect himself, still grinning. Edri looked down at his feet as if wondering what had caused him to trip. It was bound to be a new experience for him, being so skilled in moving around Chaos. Finally, he glanced back up to survey Samuel with his head tilted.

    ¡°You didn¡¯t win the mental fight,¡± he pointed out. ¡°If given enough time, I could have worn you out, and you would be defeated.¡±

    ¡°True,¡± Samuel agreed. ¡°But my goal isn¡¯t to beat you or Knarlick. I just need to survive long enough to use magic.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re confident that you can defeat him in a magic duel?¡± Inka asked. She ignored her brother¡¯s state of mild shock and touched Samuel¡¯s shoulder, forcing him to look down into her warm eyes. ¡°He was a very powerful mage.¡±

    ¡°He might be powerful,¡± Samuel admitted. ¡°He might be the strongest mortal mage ever to exist. But I¡¯m not a mortal mage, and I know I can win if it comes to magic.¡±

 Chapter 32

    -Bora Bora-

    The wind was a deafening presence in Bora Bora¡¯s ears as he flashed over the countryside. His powerful wings barely seemed to beat as he hurtled across the sky, moving at such incredible speeds that he was forced to slit his eyes against the wind. The sun above him was high and bright, but its warmth failed to reach him against the cold clutch of the wind that whipped him. The plains below him were wind-swept as well, a bright green field that he failed to notice. He was on a direct path, and he was driven to reach his goal. Such trivial matters as the weather and the land were of no importance to him.

    At the very back of his mind, a voice spoke to him. Would the action he was about to take place him back on the path that would lead him to the Wanderer? There was just enough of his reason that remained to tell him that it was a definite possibility. And so, despite his unwavering determination to smite down the dragon who had killed his god, he felt a flicker of doubt. Khanmara had made her intentions clear. She wanted him to stay off that path. She wanted him to fight not for himself, but his family.

    In a way, he thought, he was fighting for both causes with this attack. He was avenging his late deity, but he was also ensuring that Tiamat couldn¡¯t be a threat to anyone else. Once she was rested, she would be sure to set out to hunt him down. So if he killed her at her home, then he would forever prevent her from harming him or any of those under him. So perhaps this was the right path to take after all. He had to believe that because he knew that his rage, which continued to course through his heart like the mightiest of rivers, would never allow him to abandon this task.

    He could feel the divine strength rippling through his body with every passing second. Once, shortly after he¡¯d joined Bahamut¡¯s followers, he¡¯d asked the High Priest what the cost of divinity was. He knew even at that young age that everything had a cost to it. The High Priest had said that the enchantment provided great protection to the one who carried it, but it also chipped away at the body and mind, corroding both slowly. The only way to stop this degradation was to retire to the Divine Isles for a time. The Isles was a place where the enchantment¡¯s damage was prevented, and a god could heal all damage they had sustained, no matter how debilitating.

    Bora Bora thought he could sense the damage happening even now, but perhaps he was being a bit fanciful. He was pragmatic enough to recognize his power, and recognize that even with the strain of the enchantment, he could sustain a mortal life for some time. The real mystery came from the fact that he¡¯d resisted his ascension. He couldn¡¯t remember hearing of any mortal who could achieve that. Not even Wanderer, when he¡¯d ascended, had been able to fight it. Perhaps that was the trick of it, he thought. He had chosen not to ascend. Had his rage been powerful enough to postpone it, or had it been so easy as deciding to take care of this last bit of unfinished business? Perhaps there was some sage or wise man in the world who knew. It was immaterial to him.

    The mountain appeared long before he reached it, its massive bulk breaking out of the horizon, stretching up to loom above him like a barrier. He shook off this fanciful notion. It was not a barrier to his path, but a stepping stone for his legacy. He would kill its master, the Tyrant Queen who lived in its heart. After that, it would be an insignificant landmark. Massive, to be sure, but not worthy of his attention. He flared his wings out a bit more to slow himself down, taking a moment to regard the mountain. His sharpened eyes scoured the slope, quickly identifying the location of the recent battle. He could see the remains of his comrades that had passed, but there was no sign of Tiamat.

    ¡°Kill them all!¡±

    The wind had shifted for just a moment, bringing the sound of battle to his ears. He came to a complete stop in the air, turning to identify the source. There, sparkling on the plains a fair distance from the foot of the mountain, two armies were charging towards each other. He couldn¡¯t see the heraldries on the flags from this distance, but he could guess at their identities. As the flash of magic sprang into being at dozens of points in the battle, Bora Bora let his gaze sweep further east. There, high in the sky, and visible only as a speck, was his target.

    Tiamat was wounded after the fight with her brother, but not critically. A single long gash ran down her flank, a wound that sent large droplets of blood falling to the earth below. Bora Bora took off at once, taking a direct path to intercept her. Her eyes, still full of the triumph of defeating her lifelong enemy, picked him out at once, small as he was. He heard her voice come again and knew that it had been her shout that had roused his attention. Behind her was her greatest servant, the tarrasque Mathadiel. His red eyes burned with hatred as he saw Bora Bora, and he rushed forward to protect his queen, but she snapped at him.

    ¡°Forget the Champion!¡± She snarled. ¡°Kill the intruders to my home. I¡¯ll deal with him!¡±

    Deal with him? Bora Bora¡¯s lips pulled back to reveal his teeth, and he let out his rage at last, roaring in an unmistakable challenge. In an instant, the scythe was in his hand, and he dove for his prey. But Mathadiel, hesitating only a second, dove towards the ground to obey his queen. This simple action made Bora Bora hesitate. It was only a second of pause, but it was more than enough for him to understand. The path he had to take was laid out for him now, clear as day.

    Tiamat opened her massive jaws to release a jet of flame as she drew close to Bora Bora, but he dropped from the air, slipping under the torrent of flame with ease. The sudden change in direction took her by surprise, and she turned on a dime to face him. Then hesitated as she realized that, to her surprise, Bora Bora was flying away from her. She let out a raucous laugh, assuming him to be fleeing, but he paid her no mind. He didn¡¯t know what had made him change his mind, but his legacy was somehow tied to this nation, and his instinct had told him to hunt a different target. He could kill the wyrm later.

    Mathadiel crashed down onto the ground with devastating force, too fast for any of the soldiers below to react to his presence. He landed directly between the two armies, crushing dozens of men under his feet. Both armies came to a dead halt as the gargantuan beast appeared, and their hesitation cost them dearly. With a roar like the worst storm, Mathadiel let loose a massive torrent of flame. It spread for hundreds of feet in every direction, incinerating men and scorching the land. Even from this distance, Bora Bora could hear the screams of the men. The lucky survivors turned to flee at once, forgetting their military formations and scattering in every direction.

    Friend and foe alike ran for their lives before the beast, which swept its long tail and slammed its feet down, creating massive clouds of dust in its rampage. It killed hundreds of the soldiers before they could run clear of the killing ground, then leaped forward to continue its massacre. Perhaps fortunately for Milagre, it chose to leap towards the invaders, creating instant devastation while the other army fled. Spells and arrows rained on its flanks, all but the luckiest of shots reflected by its tough scales.

    Bora Bora plummeted towards Mathadiel, dropping faster than a rock through water. He was at the beast¡¯s flank before it knew he was even there, throwing his scythe. He could feel the connection to his weapon stronger than ever as it flew through the air, the whirling disc of steel describing a gentle arc. It slammed into Mathadiel¡¯s hide and stuck. The strength of his scales was too great, however, and the blade could only penetrate an inch or two. With a powerful tug, Bora Bora called it back to him, just as Mathadiel began to turn.

    The tarrasque¡¯s red eyes found him at once. It had been a feint, Bora Bora realized. The beast had waited for him to get into its reach before striking. Well, he thought, dropping low to avoid the cloud of flame that surged toward him, it was a level of intelligence he had expected, at the very least. Mathadiel couldn¡¯t have become Tiamat¡¯s highest servant if he was stupid. Now he had a real problem, as he was under Mathadiel, in range of claws, jaw, and tail. He could strike at Mathadiel¡¯s underbelly, where there were fewer scales, but he knew that would be a trap as well.

    -Tobito-

    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.

    ¡°Fall back!¡±

    The shout, or more accurately the scream, came from several points along the Gorteauan army, from those sergeants who had been lucky enough to survive Mathadiel¡¯s first attack. They streamed away from the tarrasque in an unorganized stream of bodies, the terror painted all too clearly on their faces. They ran without care of guard or balance, fleeing for their lives. They had lost many men already, though the number wouldn¡¯t be known until the end of the battle. For now, they could not mourn their lost comrades. They could only escape.

    At the top of a nearby hill, the very same one that Grimr had taken watch from, a small cluster of people stood in intense discussion. They were sheltered from potential rain by a quickly-constructed tent, large enough to fit a dozen men and a large war table. There were eight of their number, ringed around this very table, discussing this latest event in terse voices.

    ¡°We should be safe for now,¡± one of them, the portly General Rainhall, was saying. ¡°The Royal Mages have cloaked us. The beast will not be able to see us here.¡±

    Tobi, clad in his traditional Captain¡¯s robes, shook his head. He¡¯d been silent for most of the early conversation but felt the time was right for him to weigh in. ¡°The men are not hidden. We have to do something about this.¡±

    ¡°The traitor is distracting him for now,¡± Rainhall countered. ¡°After he falls, the beast can take out the invaders. He¡¯ll do our work for us.¡±

    Two of the men, lackeys under Rainhall¡¯s command, let out a loud chuckle. Tobi glared at them but decided they weren¡¯t worth the time. He stabbed the butt of his spear into the packed earth to emphasize his point. ¡°And what if Mathadiel turns on us instead of the Union?¡±

    ¡°Mathadiel?¡± All eyes turned to stare at the speaker this time. It was none other than Aren Gorteau, the King¡¯s brother and Prime Magus of the College. ¡°How do you know the monster¡¯s name, Captain Tokugawa?¡±

    ¡°He is an old beast,¡± Tobi said at once. ¡°There are many records on him if you know where to look.¡±

    There was the briefest flash of irritation on Gorteau¡¯s face, the indignation of a nobleman insulted. But it was gone just as fast, his sense of reason taking control. He recognized that Tobi had not insulted his research capabilities, and had not intended any scorn with his words. He met the Captain¡¯s eyes, holding his stare for a brief moment, and nodded his acceptance of the word.

    ¡°What else have these records told you about Mathadiel?¡± He asked, leaning across the table. His attention and interest were obvious. The tarrasque represented a very real, very dangerous threat to the safety of his brother¡¯s kingdom, after all. ¡°Does he have any weaknesses? What does it take to kill something of this nature?¡±

    ¡°Only the greatest of powers, I am afraid,¡± Tobi said. His voice was quieter than the others, but it carried no less weight. ¡°There has never been a tarrasque killed by the hands of a mortal man, in all of our histories. Worse still, this one ranks above the rest. He is an ancient beast.¡±

    ¡°He is an Ancient?¡± Gorteau asked, his eyes widening in shock. He knew of the Ancients, mostly from his discussions with Samuel. The Archmage was an Ancient himself, the only one that a mortal man was likely to come in contact with.

    Despite himself, Tobi gave a wry grin. It changed, however, to a grimace as he thought of what he¡¯d read. ¡°He is not an Ancient, Prime Magus. He is ancient. As far as I can tell, he has existed since the beginning of our history. If I¡¯m not mistaken, he is older than the oldest of kingdoms.¡±

    The group let out a restless sort of mutter at that. It was a well-known fact among learned men that the human race, while having existed for several thousands of years, was far from old. Many creatures predated them, both known and unknown. As a general rule, the ancient creatures could not be killed by mortal hands. There were a few exceptions, of course, several legendary figures who had claimed such deeds to their names. They were vaulted as heroes, their names recorded in fables to be remembered long after they passed.

    ¡°It¡¯s a pity we don¡¯t have an Ancient on our side,¡± Aren said, once again thinking of Samuel, though he didn¡¯t know how his friend could fare any better than Bora Bora. ¡°Do you think that the Champion stands a chance?¡±

    ¡°You mean the traitor!¡± Rainhall barked. Gorteau turned his head quickly to regard the general coolly, who went pale as he realized that he¡¯d just shouted at a member of the Royal Family. He hastily blurted out an apology. ¡°Please forgive me, your Grace.¡±

    Aren stared the man down in silence for several seconds but otherwise chose not to respond. Finally, he turned to face Tobi once more. ¡°Does he stand a chance?¡±

    Tobi frowned thoughtfully. ¡°He is a Divine now.¡±

    ¡°Not fully.¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Tobi agreed. ¡°But he has the strength of the divine enchantment with him, and it is fresh. There is a great deal of power to be had in that.¡±

    ¡°There is something more to it,¡± Gorteau said. He¡¯d caught onto the undertone of tense unease in Tobi¡¯s words. ¡°What are you aware of that you are not sharing?¡±

    Tobi did not reply at first. He looked to Rainhall, who was leaning forward slightly, very eager to hear this source of information. His lackeys were the same, their eyes fixed unwaveringly on the Nihon-Jan¡¯s face. The information he was keeping hidden was very powerful. On the one hand, sharing it would help their efforts greatly. They could prepare action that would aid Bora Bora in his fight. They could even make the fight a great deal easier. But it would give powerful information to wicked men such as Rainhall and his underlings.

    ¡°He is weakened by his enchantment.¡±

    The voice, so deep that it could have come from the bowels of the earth, rang out from the entrance of the tent. It was unknown to all but one of them, and they reacted as though an enemy had appeared. Rainhall and his cohorts drew their weapons, spinning in place to confront the stranger. Tobi did not raise his weapon, but he was on his guard at once, his Ki flaring to life, coating his body in the blink of an eye, his free hand reaching for the spikes that would be much more useful in this confined space. Only Aren Gorteau, after a brief second of shock, showed a different emotion when he recognized the newcomer. He relaxed visibly as if a great weight had been lifted from his shoulders.

    ¡°Master Longfang,¡± he said, almost sighing in relief but managing to remain composed. ¡°It is a pleasure to see you at last.¡±

    Tobi squinted to see better. It was very bright outside, and the sunlight was casting his face in shadow, creating nothing more than an imposing backdrop. The figure was small, the size of a child, but he radiated such casual power and authority that belied his small stature. The amount of Ki he possessed was greater than any Tobi had ever encountered. He knew at once that he stood no chance against this person. Then Gorteau¡¯s words registered with him, and he dropped his spear in shock. Longfang? As in Grimr Longfang, the God of Nature?

    ¡°Gorteau,¡± Grimr said, his voice deep and gravelly for such a small body. ¡°You¡¯ve grown a fair bit older since our last meeting.¡±

    ¡°As it so happens with mortality,¡± Aren replied smoothly. ¡°Though the benefits far outweigh the losses, I think.¡±

    ¡°So it would seem,¡± Grimr said, studying him with a nod. But it was a cursory glance before he turned his gaze to focus on Tobi. At once, it felt both like a spotlight and an incredible pressure that locked him in place. ¡°Tell these men nothing. That information does not deserve the light of day. Gorteau, maybe. But not the others.¡±

    Rainhall looked torn between indignation and fear. He might not be magically inclined, but he understood the implications that came with the presence of a Divine. He also knew that it was unwise to insult them. As much as he wanted to know the secret that Tobi held, he didn¡¯t dare to object in front of Grimr. The Ancient paid the man no attention, his eyes locked onto Tobi¡¯s, making sure that he understood the command. Tobi, who felt as though something was closing rather tightly around his chest, nodded without speaking. A slight smirk formed on Grimr¡¯s face at the reaction.

    ¡°Good man,¡± he said, his voice a touch gentler. ¡°I knew your father well. He would be proud of what you¡¯ve become.¡±

    Tobi nodded again but decided that a simple movement wasn¡¯t adequate. ¡°Thank you, lord Grimr.¡±

    Grimr waved one of his small hands casually in dismissal of the formality. ¡°Just Grimr, if you please. I despise the stiff customs of mortals. I am here at the behest of a mutual friend.¡±

    Tobi knew at once who he was talking about, though he said nothing. Grimr recognized his understanding and nodded in confirmation. ¡°Yes. Samuel will be here soon, and he will aid the former Champion of Bahamut. Then he will take part in the battle, and face his purpose. It would be wise to wait for him.¡±

    ¡°Will you take part in the fight as well?¡± Tobi asked. With Grimr at their side, their enemy stood no chance, he thought hopefully. ¡°Will you help us drive our foes back?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Grimr said firmly. ¡°As of yet, they have not infringed upon my domain, so I cannot touch them. As an Ancient, I am forbidden from interfering in the worlds, save for when it is required by my purpose. That purpose requires that I stay here, though I know not why. Samuel will be here very soon, and he will be all the help you will need.¡±

    The thought gave Tobi a great boost of confidence, which was almost immediately lowered as Grimr continued. ¡°You¡¯ll find that your great test comes today, young Tobito. I have complete faith that you shall pass your test.¡±

 Chapter 33

    -Samuel-

    Samuel reappeared in Ahya, as he¡¯d done the last time he¡¯d returned, at the exact moment and place that he¡¯d left. Reito and Raveonic showed no surprise this time, expecting him back at once. Minerva was gone, however, and Samuel wondered at that. She¡¯d been within the room when he¡¯d left. But it was yet another on a long list of growing questions that he pushed to the back of his mind, resolving to study that mystery when he could afford to. For now, he was needed elsewhere.

    ¡°I¡¯m ready,¡± he said, looking directly at Raveonic. ¡°I must leave.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Raveonic said calmly. ¡°But before you go, please humor me with one final request.¡±

    Samuel did not comment but stood expectantly. The old monk smiled at how quickly the young Ancient had adapted and stood himself. ¡°Please demonstrate your unique trait for me.¡±

    Samuel lifted one hand at once, palm outward. ¡°Laban.¡±

    The air reverberated with the force of his spell. Though there was no energy or attack to deflect, the very space around his hand quivered with the power. Samuel glanced at his hand as he cast the Ahyan magic, and frowned in slight surprise. Something was different about it this time, he thought. Perhaps that it had been so long since he¡¯d used it in this plane, but the very nature of it seemed¡­ twisted. Then he realized. It was different because it had less structure. Just as he¡¯d been touched with chaos, so too had his magic.

    ¡°I see,¡± he said quietly. ¡°That is interesting. And useful, I¡¯d dare say.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m glad to see that my prediction was accurate,¡± Raveonic said with a slight bow. ¡°If I¡¯m not mistaken, I believe you now can control any energy near you, even if it is not targeting you.¡±

    ¡°Really?¡± Samuel¡¯s face showed his eagerness at the countless options that were available to him with the spell¡¯s new version. ¡°Please, let me try.¡±

    Reito stepped forward at once, and cast a spell. He targeted Raveonic, but at once, Samuel put up a hand. The aura used in the ability turned sharply away from his target, moving to attach itself to Samuel instead. He felt a brief surge of power flash through his body and grinned broadly. The spell ended shortly, but he¡¯d stolen it right from Reito. That was powerful, he thought, not to mention the fact that it dramatically increased his effectiveness against other mages.

    ¡°That will be useful against Knarlick,¡± Samuel said, thinking out loud. ¡°But it seems that the time between uses has increased slightly as a result. I wonder if that¡¯s the chaos, or just balance for the extra strength I¡¯ve gained.¡±

    ¡°Only time will tell,¡± Reito replied. Raveonic nodded his agreement, stepping forward with a wrapped parcel. It was long and thin and had the unmistakable shape of a curved sword, the traditional weapon of Nihon-Ja. He offered it to Samuel, who accepted it hesitantly.

    ¡°This is a gift for my son,¡± Raveonic said, forestalling Samuel¡¯s need to ask. ¡°It is the best weapon for him. Will you deliver it to him?¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Samuel said. ¡°But I thought he had Longfang at his side. Surely that is as powerful as any weapon could be.¡±

    ¡°Longfang¡¯s nature has changed,¡± Raveonic said. ¡°You know this already. His power, not to mention his ability to act as a weapon for his master, is not what it was. It is no longer focused on a single point, but spread throughout Shigeru¡¯s bloodline, to be strengthened by those who come after.¡±

    Samuel nodded, though he wasn¡¯t quite sure he understood. Much that he heard, saw, and learned from the ancient people of the world often felt his way. Their words and actions were a mystery, one that could only be unraveled with the passage of time. Somehow, Raveonic knew that Shigeru and he would meet soon, and sooner than his student could return to his home. Samuel put the weapon in his magical storage, then offered Raveonic a deep bow.

    ¡°I know our time was short, but I thank you for leading me to knowledge.¡±

    Raveonic returned the bow, just as deep. ¡°I am honored to meet you, Samuel Bragg. I have glimpsed your life, and know you are destined for greatness. I am happy to have helped you on your path.¡±

    Samuel smiled weakly at that. He was slowly becoming accustomed to the weight of the legend that was growing on his shoulder, but it was still a bit discomforting. ¡°I¡¯ll do my best.¡±

    He made a quick gesture in the air before him and felt Ahya¡¯s energy surge up to surround him. His last fleeting glimpse was of Reito and Raveonic sharing a slightly nervous glance, perhaps thinking that he couldn¡¯t notice. Well, he thought, as the earth swallowed him and carried him away, even masters such as them were bound to be uneasy with the current goings-on of the world. He wondered how Raveonic viewed his circumstances, the holder of great power but stuck where he was, unable to do anything outside of his purpose.

    Samuel reached his goal in seconds and reappeared at the top of the hill where he¡¯d spoken with Grimr. To his surprise, he was standing outside a large tent that had been constructed recently. Grimr was just exiting it and hesitated slightly as he spotted Samuel. His usual smirk appeared, and he gave a slight nod in greeting, then sank into the earth, using his magic to travel away. Samuel, who had opened his mouth to greet his friend, paused, thrown off by the sudden sighting and departure. Shaking his head, he studied the tent closely. The flag in front bore the heraldry of Gorteau, marking it as a friendly tent.

    With his mana, he could easily identify three of the people in the tent. There was the deep, powerful pool of Ki that belonged to his former apprentice and teacher Tobito. Aren Gorteau was there as well, he noticed, not surprised. The man was more active in the kingdom¡¯s interest than his elder brother. Then there was Rainhall, he thought, resisting the urge to sigh with some difficulty. He took a step forward to enter the tent but was stopped as he heard something. Some loud roar, obviously from a massive beast, had ripped through the air. Even the conversation inside the tent came to a brief halt.

    Samuel dashed around the large tent to view the plains leading to the coast and let out a gasp. There, amid a scorched and trampled scene, was the massive form of Mathadiel. Samuel recognized the beast from drawings in tomes that he¡¯d read, but nothing in those books could have prepared Samuel for the sheer size of the tarrasque. It could fill the village of Harlest with ease, and its massive talon-clad paws could crush a castle with a single swipe. That was nothing compared to the flames it was releasing, practically without pause. Giant clouds of flame erupted constantly from its mouth as it turned on the spot, setting the land ablaze. Giant pillars of smoke were everywhere.

    Samuel couldn¡¯t see what it was fighting, but he thought he knew. Even from this distance, he could sense the strength of the divine enchantment around Bora Bora. It was fractured, as he¡¯d expected, the result of Bora Bora¡¯s delayed ascension. It was a vast amount of power, far greater than what he¡¯d held when he¡¯d left Milagre at the head of his god¡¯s marching army. But even then, it was barely comparable to the vast ocean of Ki that filled the tarrasque. Samuel knew there could only be one end to that fight, unless he did something.Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

    ¡°Tobi!¡± He spoke clearly and loudly, his voice carrying easily to the nearby area. The conversation inside the tent came to a halt again, and he heard the sound of hurried footsteps. A second later, Tobi came running around the tent, holding his naginata in a tight grip. He grinned in relief as he saw Samuel, and moved forward to stand at his side, his eyes regarding the fight between Mathadiel and Bora Bora.

    ¡°Have you thought of anything to do with this?¡± Samuel asked him.

    ¡°No,¡± Tobi replied at once. ¡°There isn¡¯t anything we can do on our own, and I¡¯m not letting them send the men into that hell.¡±

    ¡°A wise choice,¡± Samuel agreed. He bit his lip thoughtfully. ¡°He could hold Mathadiel off for at least ten minutes with how it stands.¡±

    ¡°That long?¡± Tobi asked, his face showing surprise. He knew that Bora Bora was powerful, but he was only a mortal. The fight had already been going for half an hour, while he and the other leaders had discussed their options. ¡°Is there anything you can do to assist him?¡±

    Samuel nodded. ¡°That¡¯s my plan. Keep the men back, and send out patrols to scout the countryside to either side.¡±

    Tobi looked confused for a moment, then his face cleared as he understood. ¡°The Union may attempt to sneak around.¡±

    ¡°Exactly.¡± Samuel summoned his sword, and the crystalline blade appeared in his closed fist. With a single flick, he threw the sheath to the side. ¡°I¡¯ll rejoin you shortly.¡±

    Tobi watched his old master take to the air, a cold hand of fear clutching at his heart. He knew Samuel¡¯s strength better than perhaps any others, but even that seemed unlikely to do the job. With Bora Bora, they barely matched Mathadiel¡¯s raw power. But they still had to contend with the beast¡¯s natural strength, not to mention the toughness of its scales. But he knew that, if anyone stood a chance, it was the Ancient and the Divine. He turned on his heel at once, shooting past the tent entrance. Now he had a clear plan in front of him, and he could finally act. He called Jakob and Aki to him as he moved away, ordering them to organize and lead patrols. He ran to where the men were camped, to pull them back further.

    -Bora Bora-

    The constant stream of flame was quickly proving to be Bora Bora¡¯s greatest challenge as he ducked and dodged, flitting around Mathadiel¡¯s massive form with his wings. The heat alone was a danger, but the choking cloud of smoke that rose from the burning planes was even worse. It filled his lungs, setting him to choking and retching. He was unable to launch a counter-attack more often than not, too dizzy to think clearly or perceive his target through the black smoke.

    His first reprieve came as a powerful gust of wind cut through the cloud of smoke, shredding it to nothing around him. He dragged a deep grateful breath at once, flying further backward as Mathadiel lunged for him. Then another torrent of wind blew around him, and he looked around for its source, knowing it was too strong to be natural. There, hundreds of yards away, a new figure had joined the fray. He was at the very edge of the fires, conjuring powerful blasts of air to clear the way of smoke. Even from this distance, he had an inkling as to who it could be. Few mages could muster that much power and control over the elements.

    He was forced to take his attention away from Samuel for a minute as Mathadiel unleashed another flurry of swipes and bites, darting out of the way just in time. He was still too dizzy to do much, and the final swipe struck him. Only the power of his Divine enchantment protected him from death. He was still swatted hundreds of feet, slamming into the ground below. Letting out a roar of fury and triumph, Mathadiel pounced again. His massive foot slammed into Bora Bora again, creating a huge crater in the ground and burying him further.

    The third strike never came, however, as another torrent of flame, from a new direction, slammed into the beast¡¯s head, snapping it to the side and causing him to stagger to the side. A roar, just as loud and infuriated as his own, rippled through the air. There, with feathers of every color and golden scales, was a dragon just as large as Tiamat and Bahamut. It was Khanmara, charging forward to protect the father of her coming children. Her teeth found Mathadiel¡¯s throat with one quick lunge, and the speed of her attack knocked the tarrasque off his feet, sending him crashing to the earth.

    Khanmara continued to clamp down on his throat, but she wasn¡¯t strong enough to keep the monster pinned down. Easily more than ten times her size, Mathadiel rolled back to his feet, slamming his attacker into the burning earth of the plains. The fire did nothing to her body, of course, but the impact against the ground was nearly enough to break her grip. She let out a shriek of pain, and raked her hind claws against his chest, tearing through his scales and opening light wounds there.

    Having cleared the worst of the smoke, Samuel surged forward to assist Bora Bora and the unknown dragon. He only had a moment to wonder at the dragon¡¯s identity apart from being a temporary ally, and then he was just above Bora Bora. He channeled a large chunk of mana into the man¡¯s broken body, healing the damage he¡¯d taken in that last slamming attack. His bones mended, and his eyes shot open. Seeing the two tyrants fighting above him, he called his scythe back to his hand and shot up away from the ground. Samuel sent more magic after him to increase his strength, then took off himself.

    -Samuel-

    Leaving Bora Bora, the strange dragon, and Mathadiel to continue fighting for the moment, Samuel rushed towards the ocean. As he flew as fast as he could, he closed his eyes, uttering a quick prayer. ¡°Guardian of the Wilds, lend me your blessing, so that I may command the elements to lend me their power.¡±

    Somewhere far away, Samuel felt Grimr¡¯s amusement at the call and felt a small surge of power in response to his words. He released his flying spell at once, just in time to drop into the ocean. The icy water soaked his robes at once, and quickly rendered his fingers and face numb. On the verge of winter, the ocean was as cold as it could be, which suited his purposes just fine. He let out a blast of air, then another, rocketing back to the surface. He drew in a large breath as his head broke the surface, and he fixed his attention on the coast.

    ¡°Tumaas!¡± He shouted, pulling as much water with him as he could, flying up into the air. A massive wave of water leaped up with him, many thousands of gallons under his control. With an immense effort, he pointed both hands forward. ¡°Kalabog!¡±

    With a roar to equal that of Mathadiel and the dragon, the wave surged forward, trampling across the plains with frightening speed and power. It surged for a long while, eventually coming to crash down on the scorched earth on which the three were fighting. The water cascaded over the fire, killing it instantly, even striking the tarrasque with enough force to knock its legs out from under it. Mathadiel hit the ground once again, sending up a cloud of water this time instead of dust, and was momentarily lost to sight in the spray of water.

    Samuel charged forward with his sword raised at once, while Mathadiel was unbalanced and stunned by the impact of the wave. The dragon had also been thrown by his attack, but Bora Bora and he were positioned perfectly to strike. They both shot down and struck at the beast¡¯s weaker underbelly. Bora Bora¡¯s scythe couldn¡¯t carve as deeply as Samuel¡¯s blade, but they both opened long gashes in Mathadiel¡¯s hide. They relished the roar of pain that the tarrasque let out, and flew away as he lumbered back to his feet.

    Samuel retreated a bit more, building mana in the air between his hands. It took nearly twenty seconds, time in which Bora Bora had to evade several more leaping attacks from their target, but he managed to condense a great amount of air. He turned It towards Mathadiel and released it, sending a long javelin of solid, spinning air directly for the creature¡¯s head. It slammed into the scales with brutal force. There wasn¡¯t enough force to crack the scales or wound it, but his head was slammed to the side, and he shifted his feet unevenly. In that small window of time, Bora Bora slipped under him, throwing his scythe for another strike. The weapon cut along the gash Samuel had already made, disappearing from view for a second as it deepened the wound, then returned to its master¡¯s hand, coated in steaming red blood.

    Samuel peppered the beast with a few powerful spells, but they came to nothing, not that he¡¯d expected much. Tarrasques, especially Mathadiel, were known to be particularly resistant to magic. He could probably do more damage if he could gain access to the underbelly again. But Mathadiel was being wary now, not risking his balance to lunge or pounce. Samuel turned to see where Bora Bora was. To his surprise, Bora Bora was charging directly at the tarrasque, his scythe raised. The weapon was glowing with a faintly silver light now, he noticed. It seemed that Bora Bora had decided to tap directly into his Divine strength. He just hoped that it was enough.

    Mathadiel waited patiently for Bora Bora to come within his reach and snapped with his jaw. Bora Bora skirted to the side at the last possible second, darting around to Mathadiel¡¯s neck, then struck. The scythe sheared through the scales much easier than before, and the energy it was coated in deepened the wound as he rushed forward. When he finally pulled away, the cut was deep enough that they could see bone. Samuel almost shouted aloud in amazement at the strength of that last strike. If Bora Bora could do that even once more, they might just have a chance of finishing this.

 Chapter 34

    -Tobito-

    Minutes before Mathadiel fell, Tobi was running amongst the devastated remnants of the Gorteauan army, chivying the men, shouting, and sometimes even cracking the staff of his spear on their armor, urging them to fall further back. He pushed them to the left and back, so that the entire force could take shelter behind the hill. They lost much of their strict formation with the move, but he didn¡¯t care. He only wanted them back and out of harms way. All along the lines, men were glancing over their shoulders, their smoke and dust-stained faces stricken. It wasn¡¯t hard to see what had terrified them so.

    After the move, most of them could no longer see the battle against the tarrasque. Some men were able to sneak peeks and share what they saw when the officers weren¡¯t looking. But it was nearly as bad, with the constant roars and screaming that came audibly over the hill. They had to be just over a mile away now, but the distance wasn¡¯t enough to muffle it all. Tobi cursed softly to himself, wishing there was something more he could do to help restore their confidence. Shaken men could fight, but they would be doomed to lose. With the Mitene Union hidden in the area, something had to be done.

    ¡°Master Tokugawa!¡± A voice boomed out from atop the hill. Lifting one hand to shade his eyes against the sun, Tobi glanced up and saw a tall lanky figure. He could just make out the red robe from this distance, and waved his arm to indicate that he¡¯d heard. The figure gave an unmistakable beckoning gesture, then returned to the tent. Tobi frowned at that. Aren Gorteau would know that he was busy moving the men, and couldn¡¯t be expected to break away for minor matters. That meant that whatever the summon was for, it wasn¡¯t minor.

    He crouched low, then, reinforcing his legs with Ki, pushed off the packed earth as hard as he could. Once he was free of the press of fighting men and women, he could use mana to keep himself afloat, and he shot to the top of the hill quickly. His spell wasn¡¯t nearly as efficient or long-lasting as Samuel¡¯s, but it did the job moderately well, and he had the prestige of being one of the few mages who could accomplish it. He landed at a light jog, slowing down just enough to duck under the canvas flaps that blocked out most of the sunlight.

    ¡°What is it?¡± He asked, noting that Rainhall and his lackeys were no longer in the tent. They must be down with the men, he thought. Only Aren Gorteau was there, leaning against the war map with a very troubled air. ¡°Has something happened with Samuel and the Champion?¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Aren looked up, clearly distracted by this thoughts. He gave a quick reassuring wave. ¡°No, our scouts still say that they¡¯re in top form. They even seem to have Mathadiel on the ropes. I¡¯m getting updates every minute or so.¡±

    He tapped the side of his head to indicate a mental message, and Tobi took a deep breath of relief. Then he raised his eyebrows, making it clear that he was still waiting on an answer. Aren was nodding to himself slightly as he mulled something over. ¡°We do have an issue, however. Our scouts have lost track of Knarlick.¡±

    That was a major concern, Tobi thought. Still, it wasn¡¯t the worst news. ¡°Perhaps he¡¯s pulled his army out of our range.¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Aren retorted, sounding exasperated. ¡°I mean we can¡¯t find him anywhere. Even with God¡¯s Eye, he seems to have vanished.¡±

    Tobi frowned again. ¡°But is that possible? I thought it was impossible to avoid God¡¯s Eye.¡±

    God¡¯s Eye was, of course, the high-level Divination spell taught to the Royal Mages of Milagre. By loading an object with mana, they could search all across the known world for an individual. Aren rolled his shoulders in an expression that was almost a shrug. ¡°There is only one well-known way to defeat it, and that¡¯s lining a space with lead. But one mage has managed it in the past. We checked for him several times a year, but to no avail.¡±

    ¡°That must be one hell of a mage,¡± Tobi replied.

    ¡°That¡¯s an understatement,¡± Aren said with a short laugh. ¡°It was Samuel. He was untrackable for nearly a hundred years.¡±

    Tobi grimaced at the thought. Samuel had been lost to the world for a century, and nobody, not even himself, could account for that lost time. Which, of course, meant that if it had something in common with why Knarlick had suddenly vanished, they couldn¡¯t glean any useful information from it. Tobi noticed that Aren was staring at him expectantly, and raised an eyebrow. ¡°What do I have to do with this?¡±

    ¡°Well, do you know what happened to Samuel while he was absent from the world?¡± Aren asked it quickly, as if he were keen to get the question over with. ¡°With the exception of the God of Nature, you¡¯re the closest friend that Samuel has among the living. I can hardly pray to Shigeru as a stranger and ask him.¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know where he was in that time,¡± Tobi said. Then, as Aren looked skeptical, he added more firmly, ¡°I mean it. I¡¯m not hiding secrets from you, Gorteau. Even Samuel himself doesn¡¯t know where he was. To him, he was only gone a moment.¡±

    ¡°Damn!¡± Aren exclaimed. ¡°Something in me is telling me that the two cases are linked. But without knowing anything about Samuel¡¯s disappearance, I can¡¯t find a way to discover where Knarlick is hiding. What is his goal? If I can learn that, I can make preparations to thwart him.¡±

    -Samuel-

    Mathadiel lunged at Samuel, catching the mage by surprise, who had expected the beast to attack Bora Bora once more. But it made sense, he supposed. The tarrasque could sense that, without Samuel, his first enemy could have tired by now, and would be an easy target. Samuel himself was still relatively fresh, and would prove to be much more challenging prey. But if Samuel was kept busy, then Bora Bora would be unsupported, and could make a lethal mistake.

    Except that Samuel had no intention of playing along with Mathadiel¡¯s plan. He teleported thirty feet back in an instant, avoiding the jaws that closed around where he¡¯d been a second before. Then, as Mathadiel opened his jaws again and released a jet of flame, Samuel pushed one hand out, countering the natural ability. The fire curved back on its originator, doing no damage, but still flooding the beast¡¯s field of vision with the flames. Before they cleared, he was gone.

    Samuel had intended to teleport, but something collided with him in the middle of his path, knocking him aside, spinning out of control. ¡°What the?!¡±

    Appearing out of thin air to his right was a man. A strikingly familiar man. Stephan Knarlick had just emerged from a portal, his body covered in chaos and his teeth bared. He¡¯d exited from the Ethereal Plane, Samuel thought. He cursed himself for his lack of awareness. Of course Knarlick would have figured out a way to use the Plane for temporary travel, roping chaos to his side for quick travel. Samuel himself could have worked the spell out quickly too, had he not been distracted with the prospect of the war brewing.

    Samuel just barely had enough time to send a quick silent message to Bora Bora, warning him that he would be out of the fight due to an unexpected enemy, when Knarlick charged him again. He disappeared from view for just a moment in his dash, dodging Samuel¡¯s spell completely, then reappearing just in time to strike. His fist, which had been coated with mana, slammed into Samuel¡¯s chest, and the force sent him flying back into the ground. Samuel felt one or two of his ribs crack at the impact, and cried out in pain. There was no time to deal with the injury, however, as Knarlick was already plummeting down to attack again.

    Samuel vanished in the last few inches, and Knarlicks¡¯ fist struck the earth itself. The force of his launch created a small crater, perhaps six feet wide. Samuel appeared at the very edge of it, letting a wide cone of fire out from his hands to coat the entire bowl. He could tell at once that his enemy had conjured a barrier to block them, and was charging directly at him once more. He sidestepped the headlong rush, and called the crystalline blade to his hand once more. He leapt forward, cutting twice, but neither blow managed to pierce Knarlick¡¯s quickly conjured barrier.

    Once again, Knarlick vanished from sight. Samuel held his ground, his senses strained to their highest limit, waiting for him to reappear. At first, it didn¡¯t seem that he would. But then, from just behind him, he felt a distinct ripple, and the brief presence of Chaos, and whirled around. His free hand conjured a strong barrier just in time to block the sword that Knarlick thrust at him. Cursing, the foreign ruler jumped back, vanishing from sight once more. For good measure, Samuel flicked his hand up, raising a wall of stone all around him.A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

    Thirty seconds or so passed before his final attack. Samuel kept his mana screen up, perfectly aware of any presences within fifty feet of him, but could sense nothing of his enemy. He was even on the watch for chaos appearing, to spot if Knarlick used the Ethereal Plane for quick travel. Then, out of nowhere, he felt something slam into his mind. The force was nothing like Edri¡¯s, and he was very nearly captured. He twisted out of the iron grip, and flew straight into the air, putting some distance between the two of them. He still had no clue where Knarlick was, but he assumed that his mental attack required some semblance of close range to be effective. Let him come up to fight me again, Samuel thought.

    The briefest flash of light, and Samuel countered the bolt of lightning that flew at him. It bent back at once, racing back to the point from which it had come. Knarlick obviously knew of his ability, so he was sure to have moved away to avoid the reflected attack. His suspicion was proven right a second later when another lightning bolt appeared, from the opposite direction. Samuel seized a hold of the mana that made the spell and threw it to the side. His pulse was up, but he forced his body to stay relaxed, taking slow, deep breaths. This was just a test of his reflexes. No point in getting so worked up on trivial matters.

    A massive burst of wind was next, so dense that it was almost a spear. Samuel countered that as well, dispersing it harmlessly mere inches from his skin. Knarlick¡¯s spells were by far the fastest he¡¯d encountered. If his guard slipped for even an instant, his life would be in serious danger. He swatted aside a large fireball as it came, then dropped a few feet to avoid another bolt of lightning. Knarlick¡¯s accuracy left much to be desired, he thought. Perhaps he wasn¡¯t used to fighting targets that moved as swiftly as he did.

    After about a dozen attacks, Samuel was able to pick out a pattern. After launching each spell, Knarlick would move to appear behind Samuel. So, accordingly, Samuel took control of the next spell, a fireball, and waited patiently. After two or three seconds, he thought he could spot movement on the plain below. That was Knarlick preparing to cast another spell. He condensed the fireball further to increase its explosive power, and sent it at his enemy.

    The explosion was powerful enough to push even Samuel back a hundred feet up. There was a flicker of movement at its edge, obviously Knarlick. Before his enemy could vanish or attack again, Samuel teleported back down to the ground. He reappeared, already swinging his sword, and Knarlick parried his blade with a grunt of exertion. Samuel followed with a wide swing into a thrust, but neither blow landed. Knarlick seemed just as confident with the blade in his hand as he was with magic, Samuel thought. For lack of a better description, it felt as though he were fighting a clone of himself, save for the hatred burning in the others¡¯ eyes.

    ¡°You will not earn Arcana¡¯s favor by killing me,¡± Samuel said. He kept his voice as cool and unflustered as possible as he stepped out of range. ¡°You cannot become his Champion just by growing your strength.¡±

    ¡°I¡¯m plenty strong for him,¡± Knarlick snarled. His lilting voice, in direct contrast, was dripping with venom. ¡°The world does not need you anymore, pretender.¡±

    He lunged forward, the point of his sword stabbing out in a classic lunge. Samuel smacked the blade to the side, and released a powerful burst of Ki that knocked Knarlick back. He hadn¡¯t expected to be able to reason with the man, he thought with a sigh. There really was only one course of action left to him. He jumped forward, pressing his advantage and hammering a storm of blows down on his foe. The Mitene Union King parried and sidestepped his blows with an ever-growing scowl, then tried to jump to the side and back in, catching Samuel unprepared. Unfortunately for him, Samuel moved his free hand under his sword arm, and let out another blast of Ki. He heard a definite cracki as it impacted, and was sure something had broken with that attack.

    A stream of fire erupted from Knarlick¡¯s hand, and Samuel vanished. He didn¡¯t dare try to attempt to travel through the Ethereal Plane without the proper knowledge, so he settled for traditional teleportation. But he possessed unique abilities as well, skills that Knarlick couldn¡¯t possibly know, given his short time among the Enari. As he reappeared behind Knarlick and struck with his sword, he channeled Ki into the blade. The bone-chilling shriek of metal on metal was quickly followed by a loud boom as the Ki exploded. Samuel, prepared and braced for the explosion, was able to remain on his feet. Knarlick, however, was blasted off of his, and sent flying several dozen feet back.

    Samuel had angled his attack so that the blast would drive his opponent skyward, knowing that he could be ready for the next strike by the time he landed. Sure enough, as the foreigner reached the end of his arc, Samuel was there, sword raised to pierce through his foe. There was a great deal of force behind Knarlick¡¯s movement, and Samuel¡¯s blade was charged with more Ki. His enemy tried to block his thrust, but Samuel¡¯s blade sheared through the plain steel easily, and struck home.

    By the time Knarlick hit the ground, a spray of blood was issuing from where his right arm had previously been located on his body. It splattered onto the ground in an endless flow, and Knarlick¡¯s face was pale. He coughed, producing more blood, and tried to push himself up on one arm. Samuel stopped him with the point of his sword between his shoulder blade. He put as much force as he could into his words, to convey that he was not against ending the man here and now.

    ¡°Surrender,¡± he said coldly. ¡°And I will tend to your wounds. Or you may die, here and now.¡±

    There was a pregnant pause as Knarlick continued to grunt. His mind reached out to batter against Samuel¡¯s once more, but Samuel knocked the feeble attempt to the side. He pressed a little more firmly with his blade, slicing ever so slightly into the flesh. Knarlick let out a howl of pain as he felt the cold metal touch his spin, and finally went limp. Samuel kept his sword where it was, just above the heart, alert for any tricks.

    ¡°I surrender,¡± Knarlick said thickly, coughing up more blood. ¡°I surrender.¡±

    At once, Samuel conjured thick ropes to bind his good arm to his chest. They fastened tight, with the rope facing behind him where it couldn¡¯t be reached. Then, still holding the blade ready to strike, Samuel raised his free hand. ¡°Tagpi.¡±

    At his command, the wound in Knarlick¡¯s back sealed instantly. The defeated man let out a howl of pain as bone began to grow from his shoulder, stretching and thickening as muscle grew around it. Then the skin returned, fresh and new against his dirt-stained clothes. Samuel bound the new limb at once, then kicked Knarlick over onto his back. He stared directly into dazed eyes, and finally concluded that he would no longer pose a threat. Samuel hadn¡¯t replenished the blood he¡¯d lost, so he was bound to be very weak.

    ¡°Stay here,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I have to finish the fight against Mathadiel. I will take you to Milagre when I return.¡±

    He summoned several stout wooden spikes to pin him down, then took to the air once more. The fight against Mathadiel was almost exactly as he¡¯d left it, with one key difference. The rainbow-scaled dragon was laying on the ground, her flank a bloody mess. Bora Bora hovered above her, fighting more directly to prevent Mathadiel from killing her. That was unusual, Samuel thought. He¡¯d never known the former Champion of Bahamut to care for another beside himself. All the same, he raced back to the combat as fast as he could, and caught up with them in no time.

    The wound in Mathadiel¡¯s neck was deeper now, and great rivers of blood were falling to the plain below. The beast¡¯s movements were less powerful now, and he was taking great care to protect the wound. He was weakened, and quite possibly close to death, but he refused to abandon the fight. He¡¯d been tasked to protect his Queen, and he would do so until his dying death. He would devour this new puny god, and quietly die where he stood, having kept his oath.

    A searing pain ripped through his body, and he let out a roar of pain. Samuel, approaching from behind, had peppered his neck with several powerful spells, opening the wound only further. There was a note of fear in his bellows as he turned and issued a flood of flames at the mage, but Samuel diverted the stream easily. Then his sword was in his hand, and through it, he shot a stream of raw Ki. It pierced through the wound to the other side, a bright beam of white light. Mathadiel staggered, stunned by the stab of pain.

    ¡°Now!¡± Samuel screamed, hoping beyond hope that Bora Bora could hear him. ¡°Strike now!¡±

    He sent a silent prayer to the Mother that Bora Bora understood his plan at once, and flew upward as fast as he could. Samuel put as much mana behind his attack as he could, bolstering the strength in Bora Bora¡¯s body. Mathadiel whipped around at the last possible second, ending up face to face with his would-be killer. The maw was already open, and Samuel could see the jet of flame coming before anyone could react. Then Bora Bora was lost to sight completely.

    ¡°No!¡± Samuel screamed, so forcefully that his voice broke, and he felt blood coat the back of this throat. He surged forward at once. If Bora Bora was down, he¡¯d have to be the one to finish it. He only made it a few feet, however, when he stopped, his eyes wide and disbelieving.

    There, standing in the exact spot he¡¯d occupied before, was Bora Bora. He was unscorched by the fire, which seemed to be sinking into his skin. There was a terrifying look upon his face, a look that only Mathadiel and, on the ground where she lay, Khanmara could see. The downed dragon saw Bora Bora¡¯s lips move in some silent message to the beast, who recoiled slightly. What had previously been an ancient, powerful beast, was now a terrified animal, facing his conqueror. He could barely move, however, before Bora Bora threw the scythe one final time.

    The spinning disk of steel seemed almost to expand, Samuel thought, collecting power as it flew, reaching almost twenty feet across. Then it sank into Mathadiel¡¯s neck, vanishing from view. The beast let out a howl of agony at the weapon¡¯s touch, but the sound was cut short. Then, with a powerful jerk, Bora Bora pulled the weapon back. It returned to his hand coated in the tarrasque¡¯s blood. It glowed slightly with his power, which was now radiating off of his body like a physical cloak.

    It seemed to take Mathadiel¡¯s body an eternity to fall to the ground. It crashed, lifeless and limp, to the plains, sending great clouds of dust flying into the air, obscuring both it and its killer. Hours later, or so it seemed to the watchers, the dust dissipated. Bora Bora was on the ground beside his queen, his hand on her flank, staring at her eyes. She blinked slowly at him, then reverted to her human form, looking up at him with something close to adoration.

    ¡°You are ready now, my King,¡± she said, her melodic voice soft as the touch of a feather. She stood shakily, and put her hands to his face, drawing him in. She placed on benevolent kiss on his head, then stepped away, tears in her eyes. ¡°Go now. Claim your legacy.¡±

 Chapter 35

    -Samuel-

    Despite Mathadiel¡¯s death, the soldiers of Gorteau only enjoyed half an hour of peace. Samuel flew back to where they took shelter behind the hill, leaving Bora Bora to his next task. He had no doubt that the new god would succeed, given his own strength and having absorbed Mathadiel¡¯s essence. He would contend with the weakened Tyrant Queen just fine, he thought to himself. His job now was to return to the army, and take part in the upcoming battle.

    As he crested the hill and the bulk of the Gorteauan force came into proper view, he could see them shaking their weapons and cheering, a deafening wordless roar of approval. They were celebrating the death of the monster, he knew, just as much as they were honoring him for taking part. He gave them a brief wave, then landed lightly on the top of the landmark, approaching the command tent with a purposeful stride. The guards positioned at the entrance sprang aside at once, saluting him as he pushed past them.

    ¡°Samuel!¡± Tobi rushed forward to embrace him, his face striken. He looked a little worn-out, as if he¡¯d been running a great distance, but nonetheless relieved to see his friend alive. ¡°Are you badly harmed? Our scouts said that you were attacked by someone else.¡±

    Samuel cast his mind back to the image of Knarlick¡¯s limp body, still bound tightly in place. There had been a deep wound in his chest, the evidence of some knife. He knew had done it at once, of course, as he¡¯d sensed a presence fleeing the area. After his defeat, someone had snuck over in Samuel¡¯s absensce and struck him down. Presumably a loyal assassin, he thought with a grimace.

    ¡°It was Stephan Knarlick,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I had him bound before I helped finish Mathadiel off, but when I returned, someone had killed him.¡±

    ¡°They killed a defenseless man?¡± Tobi asked, the disgust obvious in his face. Samuel understood his reaction, given that he and his father firmly followed the belief that innocents and defenseless people were not to be harmed. ¡°Do you have any clue as to their identity?¡±

    ¡°No,¡± Samuel sighed. He fished a water skin out of his magical storage, and took a long draft from it. The cool water felt blissful after the dust and exertion of the fight. He drank until it was empty, letting out a gasp of relief. ¡°I can only assume that it was someone under his command. It is their way, after all.¡±

    High-ranking officials in the Mitene Union all lived by the same creed. If they were defeated in battle, they were to take their own lives, rather than give up their nation¡¯s secrets. If they were unable to strike themselves down, then one of their underlings would do it for them. Tobi scrunched up his face and spat on the ground. ¡°Cowards.¡±

    ¡°I imagine they don¡¯t see it that way,¡± Samuel said dismissively. ¡°But enough of him. He¡¯s gone, and their command structure is weaker for it. What do we know of the enemy forces?¡±

    ¡°They are moving forward as we speak,¡± Aren Gorteau cut in. He had one hand to his head, obviously listening to a message from one of his scouts. ¡°They will be upon us in twenty minutes.¡±

    Samuel nodded his acceptance of the words. ¡°Then shall we reposition the men? Let¡¯s drive the invaders back. They¡¯re weak, and we can strike the finishing blow.¡±

    ¡°They¡¯re not so close to defeat as you might think,¡± Tobi said. When Samuel looked at him with eyebrows raised, he shook his head slightly. ¡°Knarlick had two officers under him. He trusts them completely, and they will have no problem urging their men on.¡±

    ¡°Even after their heavy losses?¡± Samuel asked, askance. ¡°Mathadiel must have killed more of them then us.¡±

    ¡°Even so,¡± This came from Rainhall, and Samuel turned to him begrudgingly. ¡°They outnumber us two to one. It will still be a bitter fight.¡±

    ¡°Fine,¡± Samuel said, rather than continue discussing the matter with Rainhall. He turned to Gorteau. ¡°What do you require of me, your Grace?¡±

    Aren Gorteau bit his lip, clearly thinking quickly. ¡°We do not have a secure position at which to put our backs, nor a point to hold. The land is mostly flat here, and they¡¯ll have a straight shot to the capital.¡±

    Samuel nodded in agreement. ¡°So we need to pay great attention to the flanks. I can manage that easily.¡±

    Tobi seemed to agree with this plan by his expression, and had just opened his mouth to comment further when one of the guards at the entrance spoke briskly, interrupting them.

    ¡°Thomas Moran is here, my lords. He requests to see his Master.¡±

    Samuel spun around at once, bewildered. His mind ran through dozens of questions at once, but the first was the loudest. What in the hell was he doing here? But before he could think to vocalize it, Gorteau, clearly recognizing the name, called for the boy to enter. After a short pause, Thomas appeared, stooping under the canvas flap. His eyes flicked from side to side, noticing all of the important people in attendance, and offered a salute.

    ¡°Good afternoon, Your Grace, my lords,¡± he said crisply. ¡°Greetings, Master Bragg. I have come to assist in the defense of our homeland.¡±

    Aren nodded in solemn respect of the youth¡¯s obvious loyalty, and gave a quick gesture in Samuel¡¯s direction. ¡°Might as well take him with you, Samuel. It would be an understatement to say that we are relying heavily on you. May the Mother guide you until our next meeting.¡±

    Samuel refrained from scowling his displeasure, but only just barely. He knew that Gorteau would know he disapproved of Thomas¡¯ participation in the fight. That was why he¡¯d closed the matter so quickly. To reinforce this point, the Prime Magus was rolling up the map they¡¯d used to track the enemy force, and gave a quick nod to Rainhall. The two men left the tent at once, already conversing rapidly about tactics and troop deployment. In a matter of seconds, Samuel and Thomas were alone in the tent, with the exception of Tobi, who looked as though he wanted nothing more than to leave as well. Seemingly unable to think of an excuse, he offered a quick bow to Thomas.

    ¡°It is a pleasure to see you again, Thomas,¡± he said. ¡°I hope your magic studies have been fruitful.¡±

    ¡°Very fruitful,¡± Thomas said. He grinned easily, the only one who seemed untroubled by the unusual circumstances. ¡°I only wish that my physical training could go quite as well.¡±

    ¡°Well, you¡¯ll pick that up easily enough,¡± Tobi replied with a laugh. ¡°You¡¯re already quite advanced for your age.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Samuel turned to stare at Tobi now, his eyes narrowed. ¡°He¡¯s training with you?¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Tobi said. He showed no sign of apology or hesitation on his face. ¡°Just as you trained with my father and I. He¡¯s a capable student, and it was only fair to offer him another opportunity to sharpen his skills.¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s supposed to be safe!¡± Samuel snapped. ¡°Why are you-¡±

    ¡°He¡¯s perfectly safe within my dojo,¡± Tobi said firmly, lifting his chin slightly. ¡°Or are you claiming otherwise?¡±

    ¡°No, of course not,¡± Samuel backtracked, waving one hand dismissively. ¡°But I promised his mother that I would keep him safe.¡±

    ¡°And the more he knows, the better he will be able to defend himself,¡± Tobi countered at once. It was a strange sensation to be arguing with the friend he¡¯d held in high esteem for years, but he wasn¡¯t going to back down on the issue. ¡°What if the Union breaks through here, and attacks the capital? Would you prefer him to hide in the keep, uncertain of his chances of survival, or confident in his abilities, able to make a difference?¡±This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.

    Thomas cleared his throat quite clearly, and both men snapped around to stare at them. Despite the fact that he held both figures to be masters worthy of the greatest respect, there was a definite note of steel in his voice. ¡°I would greatly appreciate it if you stopped speaking as if I wasn¡¯t right in front of you.¡±

    A short stunned silence followed this statement. Before it could be broken, Thomas continued, looking directly at Samuel. ¡°You promised my mother that you would keep me from the front lines, yes. But you will not be taking part in the brunt of the fighting. You¡¯ll stay mobile, and I can keep up.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s eyebrows shot up at the confident statement. He knew Thomas well enough to know that the youth was never a braggart. He didn¡¯t believe in wasting time with claims that he couldn¡¯t back up. He spoke plainly, and he clearly believed what he was saying. There was a line of confidence and commitment to Thomas that he hadn¡¯t seen before. Taken away from his home and thrown into an unknown school and way of life, he¡¯d always been a quiet reserved boy. Now he was a man in his own right, Samuel realized. Still, he did have his promise to Sera.

    ¡°Have you mastered the flying spell I set you?¡± He asked. Then, before Thomas could reply, he added, ¡°What about your mana screen? You need to be absolutely sure before I agree to take you. If you cannot convince me, I will bind you to keep you safe.¡±

    Thomas¡¯ chin rose an inch or two as he met the violet eyes of his friend and mentor. The cold certainty in Samuel¡¯s voice chilled him, but he wasn¡¯t afraid of the challenge. This was a test, he thought to himself. The ultimate test. If he failed, he wouldn¡¯t advance. He had to advance. Without saying a word, he brought both of his hands up, conjuring his mana. Samuel tensed slightly as if in anticipation of an attack, but Thomas simply turned in place. Samuel¡¯s jaw dropped open in surprise, he was pleased to see.

    A nearly invisible shell of mana protected Thomas, covering him from every angle. It was paper thin, but was also incredibly hard. At once, Samuel rose his hand and fired two spells at it. They weren¡¯t just stopped in their tracks, they were shredded. The remnants of mana that remained were taken in by the shield, which seemed to grow just a bit stronger. He was impressed in spite of himself. With a small smile, he summoned his crystalline blade. A flicker of doubt crossed Thomas¡¯ face, but then he scowled in determination. The sphere flashed a bit brighter, and he stood, ready.

    With incredible speed, Samuel jumped forward, swinging the blade in a wide strike. The sword merely glanced off the shell soundlessly. Even Tobi let out a whistle, his face awed. He knew just what Samuel¡¯s weapon was, and the power that was behind it. Samuel struck again, this time a jab. The runes along the blade flared to life as he thrust the weapon, ramming it right into the protective bubble. Tobi was sure it would pierce through. But to his astonishment, it held firm.

    ¡°You can¡¯t reach me,¡± Thomas said. His confidence had returned, in full force. There was even a light of challenge in his own eyes now as he smiled at his teacher. ¡°I am safe from all attacks.¡±

    Samuel clicked the fingers of his free hand, and the shell evaporated. Thomas actually gave a jump of fright at how quickly it vanished. ¡°How did you do that?¡±

    ¡°I countered it,¡± Samuel said. When both Tobi and Thomas looked at him with wide eyes, he chuckled. ¡°I don¡¯t have to speak the Ancient tongue anymore. To tell the truth, I never did. It¡¯s a ruse.¡±

    Thomas¡¯ shoulders slumped, and he gave a sigh of relief. ¡°So it is safe from all but Ancient magic.¡±

    ¡°That,¡± Samuel said firmly, banishing his sword and adjusting the sleeve of his robe, ¡°remains to be seen. But it is adequate. In fact, it will save me from having to avoid my full power, if you can be protected.¡±

    The tall youth frowned in confusion for several seconds, then his face brightened. ¡°Does this mean I can come with you?¡±

    ¡°Might as well,¡± Samuel said reluctantly. ¡°You¡¯re just as likely to get shot down if I send you flying back to Milagre.¡±

    He turned to Tobi. ¡°Not much time now, friend. I¡¯ll see you after the battle.¡±

    Tobi nodded solemnly, and the two grasped hands. ¡°May the Mother guide you, Samuel.¡±

    -Bora Bora-

    As the two armies moved closer together, Bora Bora continued his ascent of the mountain¡¯s face. With Mathadiel dead, he had just one task left to finish. He could almost imagine the Tyrant Queen now, hiding in her den at the top of the volcano. She had been injured during her fight with Bahamut. Though his god had failed to kill the upstart wyrm, Bora Bora thought, he was certain to finish the job. He would avenge his old guide, and cement the end of Tiamat¡¯s reign. Then, and only then, he could begin building his legacy.

    He crested the volcano without warning. One second, his vision had been dominated by the grey, lifeless slopes of Mount Murgan. The next, he saw before him a massive pool of molten rock, glowing brightly even with the sun overhead. At the very center of the lake was a rock of obsidian, nearly lost amid the constant flow of gases and smoke. There she was, curled in the center, her head to swiveling to lock him in her gaze. His eyes narrowed, and he refused to look away as he landed at the edge of the pool.

    ¡°Tell me,¡± he said, his soft and sibilant voice reaching easily across the magma. ¡°How does it feel to have come so close to claiming your brother¡¯s power, only to have it return and strike you down?¡±

    Tiamat hissed, rising slightly onto her feet, her body tensed to leap. ¡°The triumph I shall feel when I devour you will be beyond words, weakling.¡±

    ¡°Will it?¡± Bora Bora asked. Though he was in no mood for humor, a thin smile formed on his face. His eyes gleaming in the light of the magma, he raised the scythe. ¡°Death in silence. I do believe that fits you.¡±

    With a roar to shake the mountain itself, Tiamat spat a fireball at him. It was made of every color, like Khanmara¡¯s, he thought. He slashed it apart with one quick flick of his scythe. He clicked his tongue, much like the way a parent scolds a fractious child. ¡°You can do better than that. Show me your power, little Queen.¡±

    She hissed again, infuriated by his taunt. On her island, she was protected. She could react to any attack he made. He had to draw her out, he thought. The only way to do that was to challenge her. He called out again, taunting her. ¡°What poor Mathadiel would think, nobly laying down his life while his Queen sheltered. Too afraid to leave the nest, and confront the weak human.¡±

    She leapt for him at once, her powerful legs driving her forward, her maw open to swallow him whole. Only problem, he was no longer there. She slid to a stop, spinning in place, her nostrils flaring, trying to catch some scent of her. He was on her island, standing beside the hoard of coins and treasure that was her throne. Looking as though he had no concerns in the world, he picked up a gold piece. It was deformed from the heat of the volcano, and he held it up, studying it closely.

    ¡°Quite a fortune you¡¯ve amassed,¡± he said sarcastically. ¡°It will be a shame to leave it, I¡¯m sure.¡±

    Taunted beyond restraint, Tiamat reared onto her hind legs. In her fury, she blotted out the sun, towering over Bora Bora. Still he showed no sign of fear. As her wings flared open to their full length, she filled the entirety of the volcano¡¯s peak. Bora Bora simply smiled up at her. Quick as a flash, he threw the scythe forward. It sliced into the talon-clad arm that reached forward to swipe at him. Blood sprayed in all directions, hissing as it hit the lava. Tiamat reared back in pain, letting out yet another roar. Before the sound was complete, he¡¯d thrown the weapon again, severing the other arm.

    She spat another ball of fire at him, and he jumped to the side, wings flaring to life gracefully, keeping him just above the surface of the magma. Black and tattered, the were a marked contrast to her own bright wings. Tiamat, one of the most ancient dragons in the world, was faced with her first mortal challenger in all her life. She responded the only way she could. She took to the air, her wings beating furiously as they carried her away from him.

    Bora Bora let out a long sigh. The sound was equal parts exasperation and satisfaction. With a quiet whisper, he lifted the scythe once more. ¡°This prey I take for you, my lord Bahamut. May your life be remembered always, as I take hers.¡±

    The silver disk of whirring steel couldn¡¯t be heard. It could barely even be seen against the bright light of the sun. But for some reason, it drew all eyes to the west. The people on the plains below had some sense, some deep instinct inside of them that forced them to turn. They could see the massive dragon taking flight, racing away from the mountain. What was it fleeing from? But then they heard the screech of pain and fear as the scythe sheared through her left wing, ripping the sensitive membrane to shreds in the blink of an eye.

    Unsupported, Tiamat let out a howl of primal fear as she plummeted to the earth. She was the ruler of the skies, she thought indignantly. She reigned from above! She was greater than those who lived upon the ground, weak in their soft fleshy bodies! She roared her frustration and helpless fury, a single note that echoed through the skies, a fleeting testament to her swift end.

    The body hit the foot of the mountain with an earth-shaking crash, and rolled several dozen feet before it finally came to a halt. The eyes were open, but lifeless, staring unseeingly at the Gorteauan army less than a hundred meters from her. A hush fell over the men as they gazed at the tyrant, as large as any fortress they¡¯d seen. The jaws were large enough to swallow half a dozen horses whole. But then they saw the speck that was Bora Bora above the volcano, staring down at the shell of his defeated foe.

    Before they could think to cheer, or to raise their voices in a battlecry that honored her killer, a devastating sound ripped across the land, stinging those who heard it. It was the sound of fury. It was the sound of rage. It was the sound of triumph. Bora Bora, with his head thrown back, was letting loose with the first roar of his ascension. It was his rage turned into a physical presence, and it whipped at them, burning all who could hear it. They fled before it, turning their backs on the blindingly bright light he gave off. They ran in fear of the scorching sound.

 Chapter 36

    The land was burning before Samuel as he looked on in wonder and horror. The fields of grass were scorched, and withering, turning black as the life left them. The men below him were fleeing in animal terror, their instinct spurring them on to leave as fast as they could. He wondered how one figure could cause so much devastation, affect so much with just their presence. Then the sound hit him, and he thought no more.

    The wrath consumed him, blinding him, burning him. He fought against its smothering influence, pushing back with all his might. But it was all he could see, all he could hear, all he could sense. Before his eyes, he saw his enemies. Peran, the arrogant mage who had tried to kill him. Knarlick, bloody and sneering. Menikos the leviathan, its eyes burning with hunger. Neratas, dripping with corruption, bearing down on him with his sheer size. He felt the rage pour itself into his very soul, devouring all that stood in its way. He reveled in the fury, the power, and the triumph.

    Then, out of nowhere, he felt it all wash away. His mind cleared, and his eyes flickered open. He wasn¡¯t above the army anymore. He was above a pond, serene in its smoothness. He felt at peace, surrounded by a faceless warmth. It coated him, embraced him, and filled him. It was the warmth of his mother, the love he felt whenever she held him to her, whenever her soft voice read stories to him before bed.

    ¡°Well done,¡± a voice said. He turned at once, and found himself facing¡­

    ¡°Who are you?¡± He asked, his voice shaky.

    ¡°I am you,¡± the specter said. ¡°Well, a part of you. The best part of you.¡±

    It did indeed look just like him, Samuel thought. But then again, did it? As he watched, the image shifted. It shrank, the face becoming more round. The hair lightened even as it grew longer, shifting from the black to a muted red. The eyes, a gentle and warm green, smiled up at him. He felt himself dropping to his knees, though he neither fell through the surface of the pond nor disturbed it. He felt his eyes filling as he looked up into the face of his mother for the first time in over a century.

    ¡°My sweet boy,¡± she said, her own eyes crying. She smiled down at him as she put her hands to the sides of his face. ¡°You¡¯ve grown so much.¡±

    ¡°Mother,¡± he said, his voice so soft that it was nearly inaudible. ¡°How can this be?¡±

    ¡°I told you when you were young, didn¡¯t I?¡± She said, one hand now stroking his hair, the way she did when he was a child. ¡°I¡¯ll be with you always.¡±

    He blinked, and they were back in their old house. He was on his old rickety bed again, and she was sitting on the edge, one hand gently stroking his hair away from his forehead. He looked up at her in silence, drinking in the sight of her. The simple fact of her presence filled him like nothing else had ever done. He felt all of his worries, all of his fears, and all of his pains drift away. He was whole again. He was home.

    ¡°I told you, didn¡¯t I?¡± This was another voice. In an instant, he was back at the dining table. His mother was toying with the edge of her glass of water, staring across the table, smiling. Samuel turned, already knowing who he¡¯d see. Sure enough, there he was, seven years old, mouth full to bursting with roast chicken. ¡°It helps to mark your place when you leave.¡±

    ¡°That way, you don¡¯t get lost,¡± Samuel said, finishing the statement he¡¯d heard almost seven years ago. He blinked slowly, suddenly understanding. ¡°That¡¯s what you meant. I have to remember where I left off.¡±

    The boy finished chewing his mouthful, swallowing before he replied. His blue eyes shined as they met the violet of his older self. ¡°Yes.¡±

    ¡°So if you¡¯re my mind,¡± Samuel said slowly, turning back to his mother. ¡°That means that you¡¯re-.¡±

    He couldn¡¯t say it, but he knew the truth. She was his soul. She was the core of him, she was everything that was good in him. She smiled warmly at him, and ever so slowly, nodded. ¡°You see now, don¡¯t you? We¡¯re a part of you, just as you¡¯re a part of us. You have everything you need.¡±

    They were at the pond once again, with no trace of his younger self. Slowly, Samuel stood. He towered over his mother now, whose head barely came over to his shoulder. But she felt larger than life as she looked up at him, her green eyes shining with pride. He smiled at her, the first true smile free of pressure in quite some time. ¡°I understand now.¡±

    ¡°Good,¡± she replied, patting his cheek. ¡°Then you should go. There are people that need you.¡±

    ¡°What?¡± He asked, suddenly alarmed. ¡°But I don¡¯t want to leave you. I want to spend more time-.¡±

    ¡°You can come back whenever you want,¡± she said, cutting him off. ¡°I will always be here, my love. But for now, you have a responsibility.¡±

    ¡°I have to protect them,¡± Samuel whispered, suddenly remembering what had happened. ¡°They¡¯ll die without me.¡±

    ¡°Of course.¡±

    Samuel took a long, deep breath, and let it out in an equally long sigh. It had never been harder to return to the reality of his life as it as now. He looked deep into his mother¡¯s eyes. ¡°Are you sure you¡¯ll be here when I return?¡±

    ¡°Where else am I going to go?¡± She said, her smile widening. ¡°Return soon, my love. There is much I must show you.¡±

    Ignoring that last tantalizing comment, Samuel nodded his understanding. Might as well get it over with, he thought. He took another deep breath, then swiped his hand through the air. The scene before him vanished, and he was once more in the air above the army. The scorching power of Bora Bora¡¯s roar still burned him, but its intensity seemed to have faded slightly. This was not true for the men below him, who were cringing away from it, their skin blistering.

    ¡°Guide me, Mind of the Mother,¡± he said, raising both of his arms. ¡°Bring me to our Mother¡¯s warmth, so that we may be soothed.¡±

    The prayer, simple as it was, was received. At once, his body flooded with the ancient power that resided deep within himself and the world. With a gentle sweep, he spread the power as far and wide as he could. It scraped away the pain and fury of the roar, and cascaded gently over the fleeing men. They slowed to a stop, looking up in wonder as their fear was taken away. The blisters faded from their skin, and they were soothed. Then, without warning, the sound stopped. Bora Bora was gone, finally ascended to the Divine Isles.

    The silence that followed his absence, though fleeting, was palpable. Even time itself seemed frozen as the armies turned, as one, to survey the figure floating above them. Then, with an echoing roar born of many throats, the Mitene Union charged forward. The sound of their thundering steps cut through the shock of the Gorteauan force, even as it echoed out across the plains. Heartily tired of it all, Samuel dove for the ground. He hit the scorched plains with more force than intended, stumbling slightly as he ran to a stop. Then he raised both hands, and, with a yell of his own to match the charging soldiers, shoved his hands outward.

    The blast of mana that erupted from him sent soldiers flying in all directions, soaring over the lines of their allies, only to come crashing back down, knocking over several of their comrades. Samuel turned sharply to the left and right, emitting more similar blasts, clearing the wave of soldiers that had turned to charge him down. In seconds, he¡¯d won himself a large empty space. He¡¯d also made sure that all the attention was on him. Putting as much force into his voice as he could, he shouted at them.This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.

    ¡°Enough!¡± The single word cracked over the heads of the men. Reinforced with Ki, his voice was louder than even that of their most vehement battlecries. It had the desired effect. The men halted, confused and unnerved. ¡°That is enough killing today!¡±

    Silence greeted his proclamation as the soldiers nearest him visibly lost their will to attack him. They turned their heads towards their sergeants, who in turn looked to the Captains. The uncertainty was palpable. Samuel shouted again, his voice just as loud. ¡°Whoever your commanding officer is, come here! Let us grant the men some rest. We¡¯ve experienced great horrors today.¡±

    There was a lengthy pause as he waited for a reply. For a moment, it seemed there would be none. Samuel conjured a large flame in his hands, letting the flame flare up to a height of eight feet. The threat was effective. A subtle shift occurred in the ranks of men before him, then they stepped apart. Two figures were visible now, pacing towards him with all the haughty pride of a royal individual. Their chins were cocked back with disdain, and they showed no sign of fear or misgiving as they approached. The older of the two, a man in a light grey robe, stepped forward while the other hung back, watching Samuel closely.

    ¡°I am Elder Nezca,¡± the man said. His voice was high and reedy, not to mention his pompous tone. ¡°Speaker for the Council, and acting Regent of the Mitene Union.¡±

    Samuel couldn¡¯t help but notice a flash of irritation in the eyes of the second person at the words. A bit of contention for his colleague, Samuel thought. He could use that to his advantage if his plan failed. He directed his next words at the one who had hung back. ¡°What is your name?¡±

    ¡°That is not important,¡± He said. His accent was slightly different from Nezca¡¯s. He also had more confidence in his deep tone, which spoke of experience with leading men into battle. ¡°You are here to speak with Elder Nezca.¡±

    ¡°Elder Nezca is here to speak to me, actually,¡± Samuel said, a faint smile touching his lips. Now the flash of irritation came from Nezca¡¯s eyes. It was a petty point, but it was one that he had won. ¡°I¡¯m requesting an armistice.¡±

    The figure in the back perked up a bit at that, tilting his head slightly to the side. Samuel knew the man couldn¡¯t detect any deceit in his words, as there was none. He turned to Nezca. ¡°Let us end the fighting for today. Tend to your wounded, and send those unfit for battle back on your ships.¡±

    ¡°Why would we agree to that?¡± Nezca asked, stubborn once again. ¡°You are nearly crushed. We could choose just to end this today.¡±

    ¡°Could you?¡± Samuel asked, arching an eyebrow. The sudden shift from friendly to hostile seemed to take Nezca by surprise. You don¡¯t know as much about me as you should, Samuel thought. ¡°I believe that would be unwise.¡±

    Nezca sneered. ¡°You¡¯re weak after fighting that beast, and after facing Stephan. Err, that is to say, the late King Knarlick.¡±

    That interested Samuel greatly. The man before him didn¡¯t seem to show any sign of grief at his ruler¡¯s death. He could have been more attached to Knarlick¡¯s father, of course, he reasoned. But his time with the Rainhalls had taught him how to spot greed in a man¡¯s eyes, and he saw such a thing in the man facing him. He didn¡¯t want to back off now, because he feared it would show weakness. He needed the respect of his forces if he was to finalize his claim for power.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that,¡± Samuel said casually, still with a deadly tone. ¡°I expect I have enough mana to finish tending to this upstart invasion. Even if I should fall, you¡¯ll still lose hundreds.¡±

    The casual threat didn¡¯t seem to faze Nezca. The Elder opened his mouth to retort at once, but the person behind him cleared his throat. Nezca stopped before he could form one word, and looked back in some irritation. The second man came closer, and whispered something into Nezca¡¯s ear. Nezca took a moment to think something over, then, after deliberating, slowly nodded.

    ¡°Very well, Archmage,¡± he said, his voice still full of disdain. ¡°I agree to this armistice. After you?¡±

    Samuel hesitated a second or two longer, his eyes flicking between the two men. Then he took a deep breath. ¡°Of course.¡±

    He raised his right hand and made a flicking motion. At once, the soldiers who could see him began to fall back. They kept their weapons raised and ready for the first couple dozen meters or so, eyes still trained on their enemy. Then those around and behind them copied their actions, assuming that the order had come from someone of high rank. Which it technically had, if King Gorteau hadn¡¯t rescinded his rights of authority. Samuel raised his eyebrows expectantly at Elder Nezca. ¡°Your turn.¡±

    It was the second man, however, that gave the order. He turned on his heel, bellowing in a voice that was clearly trained to echo across a battle. ¡°Back! Fall back to the ships!¡±

    Nezca and Samuel remained face to face as their respective allies backed, weapons ready for any tricks. After the gap reached about five hundred meters, the longest range they knew for an arrow or spell, they turned abruptly and picked up their pace, pushing even further away. Still Samuel and Nezca remained locked in a staring contest. Samuel was sure they were wondering the same thing. If I turn away now, will the other attack while my back is showing? But Nezca finally took a few steps back, staying that way until he drew level with his companion, and then they both turned and walked away. Samuel let out a long breath then, relieved that he¡¯d managed to forestall events. With a quick gesture of his hands, he conjured a powerful wind and flew away.

    ¡°Who in the fresh hell do you think you are?¡±

    Samuel stood patiently, letting Rainhall shout his anger out without interrupting. The furious general was loud and abrasive as usual, but he took care not to get too close. He wasn¡¯t enough of a fool to physically touch Samuel, for he knew that wouldn¡¯t end well. But still, his voice did become a bit wearing after the first few bellowed words. Even Aren Rainhall, where he stood at his brother¡¯s right-hand side, was visibly losing patience.

    ¡°You do not have the authority to command the army!¡± Rainhall snapped, his red face darkening even further. ¡°I am the General, not you! You are nothing but a common brat, playing at things that are above you!¡±

    Samuel resisted the effort to sigh in exasperation, but only barely. All of Rainhall¡¯s insults and issues with him boiled down to a single issue. He was a new noble, and therefore didn¡¯t deserve the respect of the head of an old noble family like him. He knew nothing of Samuel¡¯s father, of course, as most everyone had forgotten the old house of Bragg. Samuel had never felt it necessary to enlighten him of this information, however. He¡¯d probably say it was a false claim, and drone on further.

    ¡°The King himself granted me authority,¡± Samuel said, doing his best to keep his voice level. ¡°Surely that should be enough for you. Also, I¡¯ve ensured that we have time to tend to our injured. Does that outcome not satisfy you?¡±

    ¡°You are nothing but a vagabond and a criminal!¡± Rainhall shot back. ¡°First you besmirch the good name of my house with those peasants, and then-¡±

    ¡°Enough!¡± This shout was surprising, both in volume and its source. Both Samuel and Rainhall turned abruptly to where King Gorteau sat. His brows had contracted until they nearly formed a single line. He was glaring, not at Samuel, but Rainhall. ¡°I¡¯ve nearly lost my patience with you, Rainhall. First the rebellion, then the fiasco over your decrepit keep, and now this! If you know what¡¯s good for you, you¡¯ll shut your mouth, and listen for a change!¡±

    His brother Aren, who looked mildly impressed for a change, cleared his throat. ¡°We need to discuss our next plans. Lord Bragg, Lord Rainhall, if you please.¡±

    He gestured to the table bearing a map of this part of the country. Samuel nodded his agreement. ¡°Of course. Forgive my outburst, Prime Magus.¡±

    Aren waved his apology aside as the two came closer to the map. Gorteau settled for throwing one more angry look in Rainhall¡¯s direction, who seemed unable to meet his eyes, then directed his attention to the map as well. He stabbed one thick forefinger at their position behind the hill. ¡°How secure are we right now?¡±

    It was normally a question for Rainhall, but he looked to his brother. Aren Gorteau cleared his throat again. ¡°As secure as we can be. There are no natural fortifications for miles, so we can¡¯t entrench ourselves, but the hill offers us protection from artillery, and we have a regiment of archers and mages stationed at the top of the hill, to spot and counter any attempted sneak attacks.¡±

    ¡°I should post my tent at the crown of the hill,¡± Samuel put in. When the two brothers looked at him in some confusion, he elaborated. ¡°They¡¯re covering the army, but nobody is covering them. I can maintain my screen while I sleep, and react to any attack launched at them.¡±

    Aren nodded slowly. ¡°There¡¯s good sense in that. Are you sure you can take that risk? We need you rested for tomorrow.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s no issue,¡± Samuel assured him. ¡°And our scouts at the flanks are exceptional at spotting incoming threats. With how we are now, we can have one night of peace.¡±

    ¡°Well, if you¡¯re sure,¡± Aren said slowly. He looked down at his brother. ¡°Your Majesty?¡±

    ¡°Very well,¡± King Gorteau said decisively. ¡°Lord Bragg, we¡¯re counting on you. This meeting is over.¡±

 Chapter 37

    The explosion was what woke Samuel. Not because of the nearness of it or because of the sound, though that would have certainly been enough. No, It was the fact that the explosion began mere feet away from him, in his flimsy cloth tent. It evaporated the tent and all furniture inside it, and send all the occupants of the hill flying into the air. Only Samuel, whose body was considerably hardier than most, survived. Even so, he was thrown from the hill to land, with a sickening crunch, amidst the army below him.

    Samuel was first aware of his new position, as his brain struggled to understand what had happened. He instinctively tried to jump to his feet, ready to fight but found that half of his body didn¡¯t respond to him. That was strange, he thought. He raised his head with some difficulty and looked down at his legs. They didn¡¯t seem to be there. Alarm ripped through him then, waking him instantly. Just in time for the second explosion.

    It formed in midair, with no sign of any spell launched from a specific direction. It simply sprang into being in front of his eyes, a little sparkle of mana that burst apart instantly. Only his reflexes saved him from injury that time. The instant the explosion cleared, he dropped his barrier and pushed himself off of the ground with his arms. He¡¯d lost a lot of blood in the few seconds he¡¯d been on the ground, and knew at once that he was nearing death. Fortunately, he was saved by the runes that he¡¯d been given in Zaban. He could feel them taking effect already, slowly mending the damage to his body. In several seconds, his limbs would regrow.

    For now, he had to keep moving, he thought. An enemy had sight of him and was launching spells. The fact that he couldn¡¯t see the spell¡¯s source was especially troubling, but not so much as the damage that could be done to the army if he stayed where he was. Whoever was attacking was locked on to him, as he was just barely able to avoid three more explosions as he propelled himself through the air. Controlling his direction was proving especially difficult without his full body. For the next half-minute, he was undoubtedly in a great deal of danger. He focused only on pushing himself in random directions, forcing himself higher and higher, drawing the focus of the unseen mage.

    With a wrenching pain, his path suddenly corrected itself, and he was flying truly. He¡¯d regained his legs. With a single gesture, the crystalline blade was in his hand, and his other was raised, ready to counter an attack he could see. Yet another flash of mana appeared behind him, and he spun in place, pointing a hand at it.

    ¡°Laban!¡± He thundered, directing his intent towards the spell. It immediately reverted in on itself, of course, but with no source, it simply vanished. He cursed, then teleported several feet away as yet another attack appeared. ¡°Where the hell are these coming from?¡±

    He flew as fast as he could, scanning in every direction for some sign of an enemy mage. Some mages, he knew, could attack from incredibly long mages. Their spells were classified as artillery spells, and they could be up to a kilometer away in some cases. But even then, he should be able to see the attack coming. The fact that he couldn¡¯t indicate an exceptionally gifted mage, who had created a new type of spell. Very few were capable of that, he thought. The creation of a new type of magic was rare. He ducked under another explosion, his eyes still straining.

    He couldn¡¯t spend all night combing for the countryside while dodging or countering the attacks, he thought. He had to find the mage quickly, and use his sword to get in close. Unfortunately for him, there was any number of places one could be hiding in the countryside, with its gently rolling hills and its countless trees. Every five feet there was a place that could be used for cover. And he couldn¡¯t level it all, even if he¡¯d wanted to. He didn¡¯t have that kind of power.

    ¡°Grimr!¡± He shouted, countering an explosion. His voice rippled over the countryside, echoing against the hills. He hoped that his friend could hear it. ¡°If you¡¯re nearby, I need help!¡±

    No reply came, and he cursed again, weaving randomly through the air. If Grimr, who had stated he would be nearby, wasn¡¯t here, who else could he call on? It took him a few seconds to find the answer, but he finally figured it out. Shigeru. It was the first time he¡¯d tried to call on a god to aid him in battle, he thought. Could he do it right? What if he couldn¡¯t make the connection due to how long Shigeru had been gone? It wasn¡¯t as if he¡¯d behaved like a diligent follower, praying at the temple every day.

    But as another explosion formed in the air beside his head, nearly knocking him out of the air, he realized he had no choice in the matter. Dropping his flight spell and plummeting down towards the ground to give him a second to think, he closed his eyes. Automatically, his lips moved in prayer, though he hadn¡¯t been able to think of one until that precise second.

    ¡°Guide me, God of War,¡± he said, his soft voice lost to the thunder of wind slamming against his ears. ¡°Grant me wisdom to survive this battle and protect my comrades.¡±

    He opened his eyes a few hundred feet from the ground, and swooped low over the army, rising once more. He blinked, and in the instant when his eyes were closed, he saw the smiling face of Shigeru, as he¡¯d remembered him when they¡¯d first met. Strong in appearance, with lean muscles and a knowing look in his eyes. He nodded ever so slightly at Samuel, who knew that, somehow, his request had been granted. Take your time, Samuel. Even the stealthiest enemy has a presence. Search for it.

    Samuel rocketed straight upwards again, ignoring the explosions that formed in the air below him. As he rose, he expanded his mana screen. He threw every ounce of his effort into the action, throwing it for hundreds of feet in every direction. It lost much of its strength as it stretched, but he could still sense the mana of powerful figures. Then it reached for several thousand feet, and he caught a flash of light in his mind¡¯s eye. It was nearly impossible to make out any details about it, but its position alone was suspicious. It was enough of a confirmation for Samuel. He opened his eyes just in time to avoid a final explosion, then leaned back.

    His vision cleared a half-second later in an entirely new scene. Just in front of him, crouched beside a tree, was a figure wearing dark clothing. His hands were moving in distinct patterns, weaving magic. He paused, however, in the middle of this most recent spell, as he sensed Samuel¡¯s presence so close to him. Unlike Samuel, he didn¡¯t hesitate, and immediately launched a new attack spell, throwing a dense bolt of lightning. Samuel reacted at once, now sure that he¡¯d found his target.

    ¡°Laban!¡± The bolt turned on itself and flew back at the man. Samuel was sure that, with the limited space, the man had made a grave mistake, and would be either killed or incapacitated by his spell. To Samuel¡¯s surprise, however, the man-made a simple swiping gesture. ¡°Laban.¡±

    The reflected spell shattered apart at once. Wide-eyed, Samuel was slow to react to the next attack, a shard of ice that formed as it flew, striking him in the shoulder. Then the man leaped forward, a knife in his hand, tackling Samuel to the ground. He struck again and again, letting out a constant, inhuman growl. Samuel conjured a barrier to block the knife with each attack, and, after a few seconds of struggling, managed to kick the man off of him. His body was light and feeble due to his exceedingly thin frame, and he hit the ground with a grunt of pain.

    Samuel rolled back to his feet, crystalline blade in hand, and struck down. He was even more surprised by the fact that the small dagger, easily one-quarter as long as his blade, held against the stroke easily, with no sign of wobbling or weakness. Samuel disengaged, and released a blast of Ki that sent the man flying back. He took advantage of the short respite to heal the wound in his shoulder from the ice, then turned his attention back to his opponent.

    ¡°You¡¯re Ancient,¡± he said. His voice, in the tense silence following their first exchange, seemed louder than normal. ¡°Why are you breaking away from your purpose to attack me?¡±

    ¡°I have a purpose,¡± the cloaked figure hissed. ¡°To kill you.¡±

    ¡°To kill me?¡± Samuel asked, taken aback. ¡°I haven¡¯t done anything to upset any balances, though. And if I had, Grimr would have come for me, surely.¡±

    Almost as if his words had summoned the figure, there was a disturbance in the ground between them both. Grimr rose out of the ground at that spot, almost as if he were a tree growing in rapid time. He opened his eyes to look questioningly at Samuel, then to the right. He took a step back, immediately hostile. Then he jumped back, out of the range of the knife, and drew his own.Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°Rajlen!¡± His voice was a low, guttural hiss. ¡°What are you doing here?¡±

    ¡°Rajlen?¡± Samuel repeated, shocked. ¡°As in the Rajlen Clan?¡±

    ¡°Betrayer,¡± Rajlen replied casually, his voice equally filled with venom. ¡°You have no part in this. Begone now, and keep tending to your brother¡¯s playground.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re meant to be sealed,¡± Grimr growled, ignoring this last comment. ¡°How were you released?¡±

    ¡°You can¡¯t keep me contained, no more than you can contain Chaos.¡±

    Samuel finally understood what had been so off about Rajlen now. From the moment his eyes had met the others¡¯, he¡¯d had the sense that he was¡­ wrong. His very energy was twisted, shaped into something that was not natural. It wasn¡¯t quite Corruption, like the force that had taken over Neratas. No, it was Chaos, the very element that Samuel had spent the last days of his life interacting with.

    ¡°I slipped out of the Ethereal Plane thanks to a careless mage who didn¡¯t close the door,¡± Rajlen continued. ¡°I must thank you for that, young Ancient.¡±

    ¡°This is Menikos, Samuel,¡± Grimr said, backing away once more. ¡°Rajlen Menikos.¡±

    ¡°What? But he¡¯s not a leviathan.¡±

    ¡°Not anymore,¡± Menikos said, relishing the fear he felt from the other two. ¡°I discarded that form once I recognized what you were, where you were from. I followed your trail, and found my way back home.¡±

    ¡°He is broken, Samuel,¡± Grimr said. ¡°He was possessed by Chaos in our wars to shape the world, and we sealed him away.¡±

    ¡°You!¡± Menikos suddenly spat. ¡°You sealed me away! You and that ungroomed brat of an older brother! You broke me, and then cast me away! You took me from Mother¡¯s safety!¡±

    He sounded like a heartbroken child, Samuel thought, despite the fury radiating through every word. ¡°Why didn¡¯t you kill him instead of sealing him away? Surely that would have been kinder.¡±

    ¡°Oh, they tried!¡± Menikos screamed, on the very edge of attacking once more. ¡°They tried to cut the Chaos out of me! But you should know, little Ancient!¡±

    Samuel tilted his head and raised the sword in his hand a little higher. ¡°What should I know?¡±

    Suddenly, Menikos¡¯ eyes shifted. They flashed a bright violet, the telltale sign of an Ancient tapping into their powers. His voice deepened, and he lifted the dagger and pointed it at his enemies.  ¡°You can¡¯t take Chaos out of a man.¡±

    A thin golden light burst from the ground at Menikos¡¯ feet, shooting into the air for a few dozen feet, and branching off. Innumerable strands broke away from the main, arcing out to form a dome of the golden web. Both Samuel and Grimr immediately ran in the opposite direction to avoid it, but it was too fast. In the blink of an eye, they were caged in. The light web formed a complete blockade, trapping them in with Menikos.

    ¡°Damn!¡± Grimr spat, turning back to face Menikos once more. ¡°It¡¯s been so long, I forgot he could do that.¡±

    ¡°Do what?¡± Samuel asked, then grunted in surprise. His sword had suddenly become intensely heavy and dropped from his hands. It thudded, point-first, into the ground at his feet. The runes had gone dead. Samuel knew at once, from that and the way he felt the runes on his clothing stop working, what Grimr meant. ¡°Did he just-.¡±

    ¡°Nullify all of our magic?¡± Grimr said, with a wry snort. ¡°Yes. That¡¯s exactly what he did.¡±

    Now Samuel was aware of fear unlike any he¡¯d ever faced, and he took a step back, running into the web. If he couldn¡¯t use magic, his greatest strength, what could he do against Menikos? He turned, eyes wide, to Grimr. ¡°How are we meant to fight him?¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t know!¡± Grimr shouted back, looking just as panicked as he did. ¡°He can stop all magic in this space, including magic from the Mother!¡±

    Menikos began to walk forward now, moving so casually that he might have been taking a stroll along a country path. A cruel, hungry smile was spreading across his face, and Samuel could have sworn that he licked his teeth. The memory of Menikos the leviathan came back to him, and the look in his eyes was identical. He cared for only one thing, had only one need. Hunger. To Samuel, unarmed and helpless, he was the face of certain, unavoidable death.

    With a roar, Grimr pounced. He threw himself at Menokos with abandon, swiping his dagger in a blur of strikes. Menikos parried each one confidently, then pushed one hand out, releasing a shockwave. Grimr was thrown back several feet, rolling to his feet. He coughed, and blood appeared, splattering on the ground. Samuel rushed to his side.

    ¡°I thought he canceled all magic?¡± Samuel asked panicked, pulling Grimr to his feet. ¡°How can he use spells to attack?¡±

    ¡°His unique trait is the dome,¡± Grimr wheezed, pushing off of Samuel. ¡°He locks his prey in a cage and devours them. Only Chaos got to him, and poisoned his mind.¡±

    ¡°His trait,¡± Samuel said, a sudden idea striking him. ¡°Grimr, do we keep our traits in this dome?¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Grimr exclaimed, between more coughs. ¡°Not that it does us any good. You can only counter if you have the energy to do so, and he¡¯s not breaking balance, so I can¡¯t harm him.¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s not all I can do,¡± Samuel replied in a low whisper. A tiny light of hope seemed to flare in his chest, pushing back a little of the fear that had taken him over. ¡°I can do more now.¡±

    Grimr looked up at him, blood dripping down his chin, clearly confused. Samuel didn¡¯t expound upon his idea, however, and rose to his full height, stepping out to meet Menikos. The chaotic Ancient let out a high laugh. ¡°You¡¯re a brave one, little Ancient! It¡¯s rare that my prey fights back!¡±

    Samuel broke into a sprint in the last few meters, charging directly for his enemy, giving silent thanks to Tobito for teaching him how to fight without a weapon. He was far from a Master, but he was capable enough and could contend with a small knife. He struck Menikos in the face with a closed fist, sending the Ancient reeling back in shock, then quickly followed the strike with a low, sweeping kick that knocked his legs out from under him. He was on top of Menikos the instant he touched the ground, sacrificing form for power as he continued to rain close-fisted blows down on the man¡¯s head and chest.

    Either he was unprepared for the headlong rush, or had next to no skill in hand-to-hand combat, but Neratas was stunned for several seconds, unable to react. But then he blocked Samuel¡¯s next blow with his arm and poured a wave of fire over Samuel. Samuel seemed unfazed by the spell, but in reality, he¡¯d siphoned the mana from it, and it did no damage to him. He continued to beat away at Menikos until the latter finally threw him off. They both rolled to their feet, breathing heavily.

    ¡°How are you doing that?¡± Menikos screamed, his face torn between confusion and fury. ¡°You cannot use magic in my domain!¡±

    ¡°Wrong,¡± Samuel said, raising his fists once more. ¡°I am magic.¡±

    They dove for each other at the same time. Out of the corner of his eye, Samuel saw Grimr staring down at his bone dagger, comprehension appearing to dawn on his face. But before he could figure out what the Ancient was up to, he and Menikos crashed into each other, both punching and kicking for what they were worth. Samuel now found that he had the advantage. When it came to a contest of magic, of course, he was at a hopeless disadvantage. But in martial combat, using techniques that were created after the other lost his mind, Samuel had the edge.

    He shoved Menikos away from him, then leaped forward, driving his fist into the bewildered Ancient¡¯s face. The head snapped back, and he was dazed. Samuel flowed from the punch into a series of jabs and crosses, knocking his opponent around with ease. Any second now. Menikos ducked out to the side, and Samuel caught him across the chest with a well-placed kick. Any second now. He spun on the spot, stomping out high. He caught Menikos directly in the throat and heard a rather nasty crunch.

    ¡°Samuel!¡± Grimr¡¯s voice cracked out, and Samuel turned to see what he wanted. Grimr was holding something in his hand and threw it. Samuel reached out with one hand as if to catch it but quickly realized that it wasn¡¯t an object. It was magic, tightly condensed and fading as it flew. It was Grimr¡¯s divine enchantment, he realized. In the small space of time, before it could touch him, he saw Grimr fall, his bone dagger sticking out of his side, beginning to drop to his knees.

    Samuel caught the divine enchantment, and it dissolved into raw mana upon contact with his skin. As it traveled across his chest, it changed to Ki. Then it exploded out from his palm as he struck Menikos in the chest. The considerable power of the divine enchantment struck with near-lethal force as it blasted the Ancient into his dome. Then, just like that, the dome vanished, and Menikos took to the air. Samuel felt his mana flare back to life and knew that he¡¯d regained his magic.

    He hesitated only a second longer, glancing back to where Grimr was on hands and knees. ¡°You can heal yourself, right?¡±

    Grimr waved briefly in acknowledgment, and Samuel took to the air, charging after Menikos. He reeled the Ancient in easily by slipping in and out of the Ethereal Plane at intervals, clearing huge distances with each transition. In seconds, he was before Meniko, conjuring one barrier to stop him in his tracks. The chaotic Ancient slammed into the barrier, and let out a howl of rage. Samuel bared his teeth, confidence, and power fully restored.

    ¡°My turn,¡± he snarled

    ¡°It takes a great deal of power to kill an Ancient,¡± Menikos said, cackling. ¡°You sure you can do it, fledgling?¡±

    ¡°We¡¯ll see about that,¡± Samuel replied. He conjured a spear of mana and thrust it into Menikos¡¯ chest. The man screeched as he felt the touch of magic, and Samuel bared his teeth again in a feral grin. ¡°I like my chances.¡±

 Chapter 38

    The Gorteauan Army, already wide awake after being roused by the explosions Menikos created, were running back and forth between the tents, working to put out the fires that had sprung up there. There were even more injured to tend to now, and several dozen dead. Thankfully, the casualties were far lower than they could have been. Samuel¡¯s quick action had saved a lot of lives, dragging the fight away from the men and to a more secluded location.

    Nobody knew where the Archmage had gone, but that was far from the top of their priorities. The scouts of the army, which had remained at their posts while the others recovered from the brief attack, sounded an alarm. Nearly every soldier, from private to Captain, froze in terror. The Mitene Union was approaching their position. They broke the pact made with Samuel and were marching to attack. Worse still, the general army was out of formation and completely vulnerable.

    Sergeants began screaming for their men to form up, drawing their weapons and directing the men to form one mass. They had to protect the core of the army, the commander¡¯s tent where the King rested. If the Mitene Union broke though, it was all over. Their country would fall without the central lead group. In clumps of two or three, men flocked to the safety of the rapidly growing battle line, while some rushed to the defense of the scouts. The temporary barriers they¡¯d constructed there wouldn¡¯t last long, they knew, but it could serve the purpose of stalling the union.

    Someone in the ranks shouted a warning, pointing up at the hill. Dozens of soldiers looked up just in time to see the light of magic. Several mages were standing at the very crest of the hill, seconds away from firing attack spells down at the men. They released their magicks, and the men at the core flinched, expecting the impact of over a dozen spells, and the pain of mana scorching them. But the pain didn¡¯t come. One solider, braver than the rest, glanced up from behind his shield.

    A thin wall of mana was hovering in the air above them, presumably summoned to stop the attack spells. The soldier looked back to see Aren Gorteau, brother of the King and Prime Magus of the College, hovering above the heads of the army. His face was twisted in concentration, and he let out a grunt of exertion as another round of spells slammed into his barrier, but it held. The royal had saved them from a crippling hit. Further behind his position, a regiment of archers had formed and began loosing arrows at the mages, cutting them down quickly.

    A roar of gratitude and approval rose from the throats of the fighting men, a roar in honor of the man who had saved him. He didn¡¯t seem to notice, but rose a little higher, fire coating his hands. Just then, one of the fortifications fell, letting a swarm of enemies through. Gorteau didn¡¯t even hesitate but began raining destruction down. He roared for the others to follow his lead, shouting, ¡°For Gorteau!¡±

    ¡°For Gorteau!¡± The answering cry came from nearly three hundred throats, and the men charged forward. The Mitene Union, expecting to find a broken and disheartened force, instead froze as the defenders rushed at them with reckless abandon. The foremost of them tried to turn and run, but they were too late. The wall of charging soldiers swallowed them whole, knocking them down, trampling them, passing over them to the bulk of the enemy fighting men. Their last impressions were that of noise as the pack flowed over and around them.

    The Gorteauan army flowed through the gap of the now ruined sheltering wall, swarming past the injured scouts and slamming into the Union¡¯s ranks. The sound of metal screeching against metal rang through the night, counterpointed by small explosions as spells rained down from both sides. Healer mages were already pulling the scouts back on both sides, picking up those who still lived and retreating quickly. They came under heavy fire at once, of course, but were mostly protected by their support mages, who showered a barrage of magic at any enemy foolish enough to target them.

    -Samuel-

    The roars of the clashing armies reached Samuel¡¯s ears faintly, and he felt a surge of gratitude throughout his body. The men and women of Gorteau were a tough breed alright, he thought to himself. Even the surprise attack and explosions weren¡¯t enough to break his spirit. There was still a vicious fight ahead of them, of course, but he had the utmost confidence in their survival. With Issho-Ni as backup, they could survive. It was as much a plea as a belief, but the thought gave him hope.

    Menikos was laying before him, conjured mana spears holding him down. He seemed lifeless, but Samuel could detect the faint sign of mana in his body, slowly rebuilding. Much longer, and he¡¯d be able to heal from the damage Samuel had caused. Not that he¡¯d won the fight unscathed, of course. He was fully drained of both mana and Ki himself, and he had several wounds, ranging from mild to moderate, all along his body. Menikos hadn¡¯t gone down easily.

    A gentle green light broke through his concentration, and he turned to see Grimr rising out of the ground. He looked to be in a great deal of pain, though the wound in his side was healed. He shook himself a bit as he appeared, then walked over to Samuel. Again, he grimaced, as if fighting back a wave of pain. It took a second, but Samuel understood.

    ¡°You destroyed your Divine Enchantment,¡± he guessed, sure that he was right. Grimr nodded his confirmation. ¡°So now the Corruption is starting to take hold again.¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Grimr said, his voice almost a growl. ¡°But it was worth the risk. If I hadn¡¯t done that, he could have maintained that dome forever, and eventually overpower you.¡±

    ¡°Thanks for that,¡± Samuel said quietly. ¡°It was just what I needed to get him to lower it prematurely. Why did you have to stab yourself to do it, though?¡±

    ¡°I had to give the corruption a chance to infest the wound,¡± Grimr explained. He dropped to his haunches beside Menikos¡¯ head. ¡°Then I could turn that energy into natural, and use it to break the Divine Enchantment, which quickly turned corrupted. Then I threw it at you. Minus the corruption, of course.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Samuel said smoothly as if it were a normal thing to do. Grimr let out a low chuckle at that, then hissed as his face screwed up again. ¡°Well, in any event, I just have to wait for a bit of my mana to come back before I can finish him off.¡±

    Grimr glanced up, scanning Samuel¡¯s body. ¡°Yes, I can imagine. The last time I saw you empty was after the fight with Neratas.¡±

    ¡°Isip¡¯s gift keeps on giving,¡± Samuel retorted, lifting one arm and twisting it. ¡°He nearly got me in one, Grimr. If it hadn¡¯t been for the runes the wild mages had given me, I would have died.¡±

    Grimr didn¡¯t reply to that statement, but judging by the darkened expression on his face, he understood all too well. As if to give him a reason to change the subject, he gestured at the wounds in Menikos¡¯ body. ¡°This all you?¡±

    Samuel nodded in confirmation. ¡°I may have gone a little overboard. Having half my body destroyed wasn¡¯t pleasant. I wanted to, err, return the favor.¡±

    Grimr let out a dark chuckle. ¡°Well, I¡¯m glad someone was finally able to put him down. I¡¯ve been frustrated at my limitations for centuries about him. He¡¯s been careful to not provoke me, or I could have dealt with him long ago. No, I had to wait for the mortal mages to seal him away. But I was sure he¡¯d be back eventually.¡±

    ¡°Yeah, that never seems to work in the fables,¡± Samuel said with a laugh of his own. He turned to face the direction in which he knew the men were still fighting. ¡°I wish I could return to the fight.¡±

    ¡°In your state?¡± Grimr asked, incredulous. ¡°You¡¯ve got no magic left!¡±

    ¡°I don¡¯t need magic,¡± Samuel said. ¡°I¡¯m a competent swordsman, I¡¯ll have you know.¡±

    ¡°Ah, right,¡± Grimr said, looking a little uneasy. ¡°Sorry, forgot you picked up a few extra skills. What are you going to do about this one? Destroying his body won¡¯t be enough, you know.¡±The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.

    ¡°What?¡± Samuel whipped back around to stare at the small Ancient. ¡°It¡¯s not? But when I was nearly killed, I could tell that it was enough.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re different,¡± Grimr explained, poking at one of Menikos¡¯ wounds. ¡°Your body was constructed using energy. For Ancients like us, the soul must be destroyed too. Otherwise, they¡¯ll recover. It may take years, but he¡¯ll return.¡±

    Samuel cursed aloud and began pacing. ¡°But I¡¯m not a maser of spiritual magic. Hell, I¡¯m not even competent. How can I damage him if I¡¯m so weak?¡±

    ¡°By using the mother¡¯s tongue, I imagine.¡±

    Right, Samuel thought. It was astonishing how little that answer seemed obvious to him. He crouched down himself, chewing the nail of his thumb as he picked through the words that he would need. There were many to choose from, of course, but he already had an inkling of which ones could work. The tricky part was that he couldn¡¯t afford to experiment. Each individual word in the ancient tongue carried a great deal of power with it, and misspeaking could provide nothing but disastrous results.

    ¡°What about mabulok?¡± He asked, more for something to say than any other reason. ¡°Or maybe pagkabulok.¡±

    Grimr made an expression of distaste. ¡°And return him to the earth? I said his soul had to be destroyed as well. You can¡¯t rot a soul.¡±

    ¡°You could with corruption,¡± Samuel mused quietly. Grimr glared at him but didn¡¯t comment otherwise. He knew that it wasn¡¯t a serious suggestion. Corrupting Menikos would just make the problem worse. Samuel hummed to himself, eyes occasionally flicking over to Menikos to make sure he was still not moving. ¡°Oh, I know. What about kumupas?¡±

    ¡°Fade?¡± Grimr translated, his eyebrows raised. He appeared to think about it for a second. ¡°Could work. But the Chaos will surely try to protect him from that.¡±

    ¡°Maybe,¡± Samuel replied slowly, thinking quickly. ¡°But I¡¯ve spent a fair bit of time with Chaos. It doesn¡¯t act in one¡¯s interest, one way or the other.¡±

    ¡°But you can make it do what you want, can¡¯t you?¡±

    Samuel shook his head. ¡°You can bully it out of the way if it¡¯s not restricted. But in a person, you¡¯d have to go along with any random inclination that touches it.¡±

    ¡°But how would you know what the Chaos inside him wanted?¡± Grimr asked. He stared directly at Samuel, and understanding seemed to set in. ¡°No. You can¡¯t be serious.¡±

    ¡°I am,¡± Samuel assured him. He rose to his feet. ¡°But just to be sure, can you do anything to act in my defense?¡±

    Grimr seemed to take an age to think that one through. ¡°Well, if you were to die, that would negatively affect Isip. That¡¯s enough of a power upset that I could justify acting. What do you want me to do?¡±

    ¡°Destroy his body,¡± Samuel explained at once. ¡°I¡¯ll pull him out. The second I¡¯m clear, don¡¯t give him any chance to get back. Rot his body, and I¡¯ll deal with the rest.¡±

    He knew Grimr was less than fond of the idea, but the smaller Ancient didn¡¯t voice any complaints. After a short pause, Samuel moved to crouch over Menikos¡¯ body, one hand on his forehead. ¡°You¡¯ll have to be fast.¡±

    ¡°I know that,¡± Grimr snapped. ¡°I¡¯ve been doing this much longer than you.¡±

    Samuel smiled at that, then shoved his mind at Menikos¡¯. Though unconscious, his enemy¡¯s mind replied at once, raising a wall to keep him out. He ducked around the wall and dove in without hesitation. It was breaking the first rule in contesting minds. The stupidest thing you could do was refuse to leave an anchor behind you because you risked being swallowed and crushed by your foe. But, as Samuel had noticed in the past, sometimes you had to break the rules to make progress.

    The instant he dove into Menikos¡¯ mind, he felt the connection to his body fade. A solid, endless wall of Chaos sprung around him, surrounding him. Well, he thought, it wasn¡¯t an entirely unfamiliar sensation. The chaos was denser in this case, however, as if more Chaos was contained in Menikos¡¯ mind than the entire Ethereal Plane. It must be an effect of devouring so many Enari. He propelled himself through the chaos, only hesitating long enough to check that his magic still function. A bit late to consider that, perhaps, but he needed to act quick, or he¡¯d have to incapacitate Menikos all over again.

    It didn¡¯t take him long to find what he was looking for. In the center of the sea of Chaos through which he glided, was a figure. He wasn¡¯t immediately recognizable as Menikos, because the energy that made up his body was purer. Here, at his core, he wasn¡¯t affected by Chaos. It merely surrounded him, suffocating him while it controlled his actions. Samuel changed his angle slightly, heading straight for the figure. Menikos, who was curled into a ball, lifted his head as he felt Samuel¡¯s approach, and immediately went on the attack. He hurled a ball of fire at Samuel, who ducked hastily out of the way.

    ¡°Get away from me!¡± Menikos shouted, sounding slightly hysterical. ¡°I already told you I¡¯m not giving in to you!¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Samuel asked, thrown off completely. ¡°I¡¯m not here to attack you. I¡¯m here to take out the Chaos that¡¯s inside your mind.¡±

    ¡°Sure,¡± Menikos hissed back, conjuring another ball of flame and throwing it. Samuel dodged this easily. ¡°I can smell the Chaos inside you, poisoned Ancient. You can¡¯t fool me.¡±

    Samuel bit his lip, thinking quickly. He hadn¡¯t anticipated this. But of course, given the purpose of expelling any chaos he met, Menikos would be able to sniff out the Chaos Samuel had absorbed. But surely it wasn¡¯t enough that it could constitute a threat, right? He frowned slightly as Menikos attacked once more. His lack of reaction seemed to unsettle Menikos, who finally stopped attacking long enough to peer at him.

    ¡°I don¡¯t know you,¡± he said slowly. ¡°You¡¯re not one of the Ancients from Gitna, are you? Were you recently born?¡±

    ¡°I wasn¡¯t born,¡± Samuel said at once. Now that Menikos was talking, he was keen to keep him calm. If he attacked too much, Samuel would waste what little mana he¡¯d brought with him. ¡°I was created by Isip.¡±

    ¡°That weakling?¡± Menikos scoffed, obviously not convinced. ¡°You expect me to believe that someone as weedy as Isip could create you? Your mana is incredibly dense. There¡¯s no way-¡±

    His voice trailed off, and his eyes widened. ¡°Wait. You¡¯re carrying his mana. That¡¯s Isip¡¯s essence wrapped around you.¡±

    Samuel didn¡¯t say anything, but he did nod slowly. It was marvelous, he thought, how Menikos could remember something obscure like that from so far away. He wondered how the man could keep information like that in line. His line of thought was cut short, however, as he realized that Menikos was glaring at him suspiciously. Samuel blinked, wondering what had caused that.

    ¡°I can hear your thoughts,¡± Menikos said, his voice a little calmer but still very much aggravated. ¡°I remember Isip¡¯s mana quite plainly because I was one of his guards. How do you have his mana wrapped so tightly around you?¡±

    Instead of waiting for an answer, Menikos seemed to pull it directly from his mind. His eyes widened. ¡°I¡¯ve been gone that long? Isip is dead?¡±

    ¡°Not dead!¡± Samuel exclaimed, worried the thought would send Menikos over the edge. He was teetering close to it as it was. ¡°He¡¯s ascended to the Divine Isles. I¡¯m his Champion, and I took on his essence so that he could survive.¡±

    ¡°The Divine?¡± Menikos asked, perplexed. Then he scowled. ¡°Oh, for fuck¡¯s sake.¡±

    He extended a hand, and Samuel¡¯s mind suddenly clouded over. Images, hundreds of images, were flashing past his mind¡¯s eye. Under Menikos¡¯ guidance, he was forced to relive every moment of his life in the space of a single heartbeat. From the first time, he opened his eyes, to his mother¡¯s death, to meeting Grimr and killing Neratas, to the Ethereal Plane, until this very moment. His vision cleared, and he could see Menikos properly. He looked aghast, his face horrified.

    ¡°I¡¯ve been locked in my mind so long,¡± he whispered, looking down at his hands. ¡°I¡¯ve failed in my purpose. Why has Grimr not struck me down?¡±

    ¡°He can¡¯t,¡± Samuel gasped, almost reeling with the sensation he¡¯d just experienced. ¡°Chaos is being very careful, and not breaking the balance. The best Grimr can do is destroy your body, and that¡¯s only in defense of me.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Menikos whispered again. He looked up at Samuel, finally understanding. ¡°You have to live. And by throwing yourself into my mind, you¡¯ve risked your life. Grimr must aid you if you are to survive. If you fall, the Mind falls. Mother falls.¡±

    The very thought seemed to infuriate Menikos. ¡°You don¡¯t understand what you¡¯ve gambled by coming here.¡±

    ¡°I understand perfectly well,¡± Samuel retorted, his temper flaring. ¡°I know perfectly well what my purpose is. And I can handle the Chaos.¡±

    Menikos shook his head slowly. ¡°You put too much faith in the Ancient tongue, young one.¡±

    Samuel¡¯s heart skipped a beat. ¡°What could you possibly mean by that?¡±

    Before his very eyes, Menikos was weeping. The knowledge of what had transpired in the world, the knowledge of what he saw in Samuel¡¯s immediate future, and the knowledge of what he had done all came crashing down in the same instant. He made no sound, but his eyes wept. He lifted one hand slowly, gesturing to the Chaos that surrounded them. ¡°This is not Chaos, Samuel. It is not one enemy of the Mother. It is two.¡±

    Samuel gasped, glancing around himself. He didn¡¯t know why he hadn¡¯t noticed it before. Chaos wasn¡¯t dense. It didn¡¯t follow order. It flowed when and where it pleased. This was Chaos, yes. But it was also something more. He heard Menikos sigh.

    ¡°I will gladly sacrifice myself for you,¡± he said. ¡°I recognize it is your only chance now. You can manage the Chaos, I can see that now. But how will you manage Corruption?¡±

 Chapter 39

    Samuel stared at Menikos silently, his mind whirling as he finally understood the challenge that faced him. Menikos was right. This was suicide. The two powers around him, combined with the power of an Ancient, were the most powerful combination imaginable. He could contend with the Chaos. He¡¯d even be capable of fighting the Ancient. But Corruption had claimed both, and as soon as Menikos was gone, it would be a single united force.

    ¡°What are my options?¡± He asked wildly. ¡°You¡¯ve fought Chaos and Corruption before. What do I do?¡±

    ¡°Pray that you can reach Grimr,¡± Menikos said. ¡°He is the only one who can save you now.¡±

    Without another word, Menikos broke. A crack formed in his torso as if he¡¯d suddenly turned to stone. The crack spread rapidly throughout his body until he finally shattered into millions of tiny pieces. Each turned itself into pure white light and slowly drifted to Samuel. It surrounded him, filled him, and healed him. His mana was restored to its fullest capacity, and he was whole. A voice lingered in the back of his mind as Menikos faded completely. This is my gift to you. I hope that you live to use it.

    The wall of black that surrounded him snapped closed in an instant, now that there was no barrier to restrain it. It swallowed Samuel faster than he could blink, and he was lost. As he was nearly six years ago, after his first fight against an Enari, he was nothing. Just a single mind, drifting through infinite darkness. A voice, the same voice that had reached him before, was calling out. He could not reach it. And after a moment, it faded. He was nothing. He was nothing.

    His eyes snapped open, and he flailed his body. He was blind, and he was drowning! He clamped his mouth shut, but it could not stop the Corruption. It flooded his mind and soul through his eyes, through his ears, through his very skin. He could not escape it. The best he could do was push it back. The specter of an image appeared before him. It was a person, he thought weakly. A short, bald man wearing blue robes. Master Astori! The ghost of his oldest and best teacher looked down upon him sternly, his face set in disapproving lines.

    ¡°You¡¯re supposed to be a better student than this,¡± Astori said. His voice was dry and nasally, just like it had been back then. ¡°I thought I taught you how to use magic.¡±

    I cannot fight this, Samuel thought, staring pleadingly up at his old master. It is too strong for me. I don¡¯t have the energy.

    ¡°If you do not have the energy,¡± Astori retorted, ¡°Then borrow it. Did I teach you nothing in your time with me? There is power all around you, fool. Use it!¡±

    The last two words echoed throughout his mind. Suddenly, the darkness around him seemed a little less potent. The Corruption continued to flow around him and inside him, but he found he could breathe. With a supreme effort, he pushed back against Corruption. It nearly broke him to do so, but slowly, the power was retreating. It roared its fury, struggling all the harder, but he held firm. What are you doing?

    He blinked, and he was at the top of a pool. Just in front of him, on the surface of the water, stood two beings. A wolf, nearly a hundred feet long and eighty feet tall, bared its fangs at an equally large, shadowy figure. It was the wolf¡¯s head in his mind, he realized. He was furious at the shadowy figure, who he¡¯d never seen, but felt sure that he recognized.

    ¡°What are you doing?¡± Corruption snarled. ¡°He is one of hers! He must die!¡±

    ¡°Yes,¡± Chaos said, his voice a bored drone. ¡°But I quite like him. He adapts to me quite well, you know.¡±

    ¡°But we are her sworn enemies!¡± the wolf screamed. ¡°We agreed to set ourselves against her!¡±

    ¡°You agreed that,¡± Chaos replied, ¡°Not me. I do whatever I please, as you very well know.¡±

    Chaos lifted his head in a rebellious expression, and the wolf roared. It lunged, aiming for Corruption¡¯s throat. But it clamped on nothing, as Chaos was behind it. Chaos let out a snicker. ¡°Always had quite the temper, didn¡¯t you?¡±

    The wolf snarled a challenge, which Chaos promptly ignored. He sniffed. ¡°Not worth my time.¡±

    ¡°Fine!¡± Corruption screamed. ¡°Then stand back while I kill it.¡±

    Chaos gave a lazy wave of his hand. ¡°Do as you please. I don¡¯t care, one way or the other.¡±

    Samuel looked on in silent horror as the wolf turned to face him. It was dead from inside to outside, with rotting hide and cracked fangs. Its eyes, like those of Neratas, were a pale yellow. The end of all life. True Corruption. He bore down on Samuel, taking one leisurely step at a time. Samuel wanted to cry out, to scream his terror, but his mouth would not move. He looked just past the wolf to where Chaos stood, watching the scene with idle interest. After all, he was a creature of self-interest. Chaos always moved on its own and didn¡¯t do things just because you wanted it to. Unless you forced it, Samuel thought suddenly.

    With the wolf a mere yard away from him, Samuel reached out with his mind to touch the Chaos. Help me! He pulled as hard as he could, willing Chaos to surround and infuse him, to displace the Corruption around him. Chaos looked at him with a tilted head, and Samuel almost swore he could see a curious smile show through the flickering silhouette of shadows. A faint voice laughed in his head. Why not? Sounds like fun.

    Mere feet away from Samuel, the wolf stopped. A low growl emanated from the depths of his throat, and he turned to glare at Corruption. ¡°I thought you agreed not to get in my way.¡±

    ¡°I did,¡± Chaos said with glee. ¡°If he wants to pull me, I cannot do anything to stop it.¡±

    ¡°Liar!¡± The wolf roared. ¡°I should devour you now, so you can irritate me no-¡±

    The wolf got no further. Suddenly finding his body free of the bindings, Samuel leaped with as much force as he could muster. A shower of chaotic energy flowed with him, feeding on his mana but giving him power in return. He struck barehanded at the wolf¡¯s head, packing just enough power to snap its head to the side. You will not devour me! The wolf staggered away, not harmed in the slightest, but he was now snarling in rage. He lunged forward, jaws snapping, but Samuel vanished. Chaos, having switched places with Samuel at the last instant, looked down at the wolf biting his arm.

    ¡°Tsk, tsk,¡± he said, in mock-stern tones. ¡°I think you¡¯re biting the wrong enemy here, friend.¡±

    But Samuel hadn¡¯t escaped unscathed. Even now, there was a nasty, festering wound on his forearm. It stung like mad despite the lack of a body to infect, and the black ichor was quickly taking hold, spreading further up his arm. He¡¯d been infected, he realized with a surge of panic. He glanced over at Chaos, who made a shooing motion. Go along, then. You wanted out, so leave.

    Samuel didn¡¯t waste a second to ponder the instruction. It seemed as though Chaos was just interested in him enough to be his ally for the moment, and he wasn¡¯t going to waste the opportunity. Covering himself from head to toe in the chaotic energy, he dove headfirst into the black pool. It tried to smother him, but he was free of its crushing presence and could move freely. He struck out blindly, feeling his way further down, to where he could just barely sense an escape. He could feel the Corruption chasing him, determined to catch him.Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author.

    With a gasp, his eyes snapped open. He was able to see again, back in his own body. Grimr was beside him, holding his body somewhat upright, his face pale and sweaty. The instant Samuel¡¯s eyes flicked open, he raised the bone knife to his throat, ready to strike if need be. But he seemed to recognize his friend and lowered it again. Then Samuel turned to the side, dropped to his hands and knees, and vomited. Though it was normal, he could feel the Corruption spreading from his mind into his body. It continued to grow, and he looked up at Grimr with pleading eyes, too nauseous to say anything.

    ¡°Damn!¡± Grimr exclaimed. He pushed Samuel down onto his back and raised the knife again. ¡°Of course, he was Corrupted too! I don¡¯t know if I can get it all, but I¡¯ll try. This is going to hurt.¡±

    That was the last thing he remembered, as the pain and sickness overwhelmed him, throwing him deep into a restless state of unconsciousness. His mind continued to conjure twisted images, shadowy figures that attacked him again and again, carving great chunks away. That which they didn¡¯t take grew putrid and rotten, falling away from his body in chunks as he continued to writhe. The Corruption continued to claim him until, finally, everything faded to black.

    -Tobito-

    Tobi felt a shiver run down his spine, seconds after cutting down a lucky soldier who had slipped through the front line. The man hit the ground on his hands and knees, coughing up blood. Tobi immediately took several steps back, glancing in all directions. What had caused him to feel as though something was going wrong? Despite the chaos of the battle, he couldn¡¯t spot any impending sign of disaster. The Gorteau Army, with its back to the hill, was holding its position fairly well. The hill? He glanced back and up, squinting his eyes against the glare of the sun that was just now peeking over the horizon.

    With a heart-stopping surge of terror, he saw the armed figures appearing at that exact moment, relocated by magic. They popped out of thin air, already running forward with their weapons ready. They didn¡¯t yell, for their attack was a surprise, but there were more than enough of them to do some serious damage to the army¡¯s back lines. Maybe enough to even crush the army from opposite directions, he thought.

    ¡°Jakob!¡± He shouted. He had an excellent battle sense and knew who was close to him and could be spared. ¡°Aki! Noda! To me!¡±

    His spear whirled in a circle to catch an arrow, then back around in a flat swipe at the first man to approach him, opening a massive wound in the man¡¯s stomach. Jakob, Aki, and Noda were at his side in a flash, their reactions sharp as ever. The four of them moved in coordination, moving and striking around each other with perfect balance, leaving no openings for the enemy to exploit. They were a whirlwind of steel and blood, cutting down any unfortunate enemy who stepped within reach.

    More of the army behind them were becoming aware of the situation. Just as more soldiers appeared through teleportation, a captain ordered his entire battalion to turn and face the threat. It was a wise choice, Samuel thought, noting that the chosen battalion¡¯s absence wouldn¡¯t create any weakness in the rest of the line. They consisted primarily of mages and archers and could be a great help. He thrust his spear to split an enemy¡¯s shield, then directed his comrades to back off.

    ¡°Back!¡± He shouted, brandishing his naginata to give them time to disengage. ¡°Back to the line!¡±

    ¡°But then they¡¯ll breach!¡± Jakob shouted back, his voice barely audible over the din of battle, even from six feet away. ¡°We cannot abandon our position!¡±

    Tobi opened his mouth to reinforce the order, then quickly realized that Jakob was right. Not only that, but the enemies approaching were no longer targeting just the four of them. In such a wide-open space, it wasn¡¯t necessary to take out the four warriors to gain access to the rest of the army. They simply streamed past in a wide flood of fighting men, rushing for the back of the army. Only the battalion of mages and archers stood in their way, and they wouldn¡¯t provide much in the way of protection.

    As if looking on from above, Tobi could see their position. The entire Gorteauan force was pushed up against the hill. They couldn¡¯t be flanked to be sure, but they were extra weak to any attacks that might come from the rear, as this one had. Tobi knew that, once the spare battalion fell, the army would be split, and they would lose. Could he do anything with his power to stop that from happening? Well, yes, he thought. He could.

    ¡°I¡¯m breaking off!¡± He called. In one smooth leap, he¡¯d done it. The others didn¡¯t look too pleased with this decision, but they closed ranks in an instant, covering the momentary gap that he¡¯d left. He ran to the left, where the bulk of the charging soldiers was, taking care to stay low to avoid friendly arrows and magic. In less than a minute, he was down the slope, ready to intercept. The battalion covered one-half of the line, he would cover the rest. It wasn¡¯t feasible that he could hold the position on his own with just the spear, of course, but he had another weapon at his disposal.

    With one upward flick of his hand, the spikes he¡¯d been gifted flew up and out of the pouch at his side. After six years of constant study and practice under Samuel, moving these new weapons was second-nature to him. They obeyed his thoughts nearly as fast as he could form them. He threw his hand forward, sending the spikes, now loaded with his mana, out. Twelve different streaks of light caught the attention of the approaching men. Some of them hesitated in their movement, wondering what the light had been. For quite a few of them, it was the last thought they had, as the spikes struck.

    All along the enemy, each spike hit with the force of an artillery spell, sending men and earth flying. Before they could quite recover from the surprising devastation, he¡¯d pulled the spikes back, and stepped forward to meet who was left. His spear moving in a lethal blur, he jabbed, cut, ducked, and spun for all he was worth. It was only in battles like this, where the odds were stacked so heavily against him, that he could truly feel his father¡¯s presence. He offered his silent prayer as he moved, picking up his face even more.

    Guide me in battle, God of War. Guide my weapon so that I may strike true. Guide my body so that I may defend my home. There was no wash of power to be felt, of course, because he was his father¡¯s Champion, and that power was in him at all times. He shot a blast of Ki from his hand, knocking back four or five men, then turned forty-five degrees and repeated the spell, to cause more mayhem for another half dozen men. He was a snake, slipping between their blows, unable to be pinned down. He was a panther, striking through their defenses, establishing his territory on the field.

    His first break in focus came when he heard Aki cry out. There were more than a dozen yards between them, so he didn¡¯t know how he¡¯d been able to hear it. It was as if they were linked, and he felt the arrow strike her as if it had struck his own body. He staggered back, the simple movement saving him from an enemy¡¯s pike thrust out at him. Swinging from side to side to give himself some space, he spared half a second to glance over to where his friends were.

    He was just in time to see Aki dropping to her knees, her knives falling from her fingers to hit the ground. There it was. An arrow, sunk so deep into her heart that it was almost buried. As if sensing his gaze by some divine connection, she looked up to him, her eyes wide with surprise and shock, and, he fancied, just a bit of disappointment. He knew that, in her final moment, she believed that she¡¯d failed him. Then an enemy struck her in the back, and she pitched forward, unmoving.

    ¡°No!¡± The shout that came from Tobi¡¯s throat cracked across the battlefield, stilling the men for a heartbeat. With fury and fear in his heart, he dove back to where Jakob and Noda were fending off the wave of enemies. Before he¡¯d taken three steps, a spell struck Noda, catching him high on his thigh, and tearing through the limb as if it were butter. Noda fell to the ground, dispatched in the next instant by another sword strike. Tobi called the spikes to move with him but knew in his heart that he wouldn¡¯t make it in time.

    ¡°Kill him!¡± A captain in the enemy force was calling out now, brandishing his sword high above his enemy, and pointing it at Jakob. ¡°Kill him now!¡±

    Surrounded on all sides, Jakob put up one hell of a fight. His sword moved in a deadly blur of light, cutting his foes down on all sides. The master couldn¡¯t be taken so easily. In less time than Tobi could blink, three of the enemy staggered back, clutching wounds and crying out. The fourth fell without a sound, his head hitting the earth half a second later. An arrow slipped past Jakob¡¯s shield, striking him in the shoulder. He staggered under the impact but continued to fight on, his face set in grim, determined lines. He struck down two more, then three, then one, hammering his sword down with all his might.

    An enemy sword swung down on Jakob, catching his shield and tearing it in half, leaving him with two half-circles of wood only loosely connected by the arm straps. Undaunted, Jakob struck the same enemy with that arm, stunning him. Then he flicked his sword around, catching the man high in the chest, a killing blow. At the same instant, a pike cut the back of his knee, dropping him to one leg. Jakob gripped his sword with two hands and cleaved that enemy from shoulder to hip. Only a moment later, a sword slipped past his and stabbed into the chest.

 Chapter 40

    Tobi¡¯s spear struck the man who had dealt the lethal blow to Jakob. The tempered iron head of the stout weapons pierced through the man¡¯s chest completely, running him through, the leather armor offering no more resistance than wet paper. He hit the ground before Jakob did, followed quickly by two of his comrades, then a third, and another two. In the pause as the last of their perceived enemies fell to their weapons, the Mitene Union soldiers had hesitated. And it was this hesitation that led to their demise, as Tobi cut down the last two dozen men in less than a minute.

    He dropped to his knees beside Jakob, whose eyes were still moving faintly, rotating to view his Master and oldest friend. There was no sign of fear on his face. He¡¯d fought a warrior¡¯s fight, and now he would die a warrior¡¯s death. No, the fear was in Tobi¡¯s face. It was in his heart and soul, consuming him. He gently lifted Jakob¡¯s head, propping it up on his own folded knee as the tears began to fall.

    ¡°Jakob!¡± He cried out. He shook his friend roughly. ¡°Stay with me! You¡¯re going to survive this. Just stay awake!¡±

    He knew in his heart that the words were a lie, but he couldn¡¯t stop himself from saying them. Jakob shook his head with what little energy he had left in him and even managed a weak chuckle. ¡°You can¡¯t fool me, Tobi. Not since my first year as an apprentice.¡±

    Despite himself, Tobi let out a laugh that was more sob. He took a deep breath to steady himself, not wanting his friend to see his Captain weakened. It took more effort than he could have ever imagined, but he looked back down at Jakob with what he hoped resembled a mask of calm. But the mask shattered, as he saw the life had already left his friend¡¯s eyes. They were a pale, blank brown now, reflecting the light of the early morning.

    He could have stayed there kneeling beside the body of his best friend for the rest of the year if it weren¡¯t for the sound of fighting that broke into his mind. On a whim, he turned to glance behind him, only to freeze as another wave of horror washed over him. Men had broken through the center of the army, where the survivors of his defense had hit the rear lines. They¡¯d torn through the battalion of mages and archers, scattering them to the sides. Combined with the power of the main force, they¡¯d split the Gorteauan army in half.

    Tobi was on his feet and racing back before he could quite process what had happened. Then he realized that considering the cause was a futile effort. He needed to attack the men who had broken through and were now flanking the two sides of the army. If he didn¡¯t the men of Gorteau would fall, and it would all be over. Letting out a war cry, he summoned the spikes back to him and threw them at the enemy with as much strength as he could muster.

    The explosion of dirt blinded the invaders for several seconds, blinding them to his approach, leaving them ignorant. He didn¡¯t need to see, for he knew that everybody within ten feet of him was an enemy. His ki flared to life, coating his body and weapon in bright white light. He cut through three of his enemies in as many seconds, his weapon almost bending with the force of his strikes and sweeps. He skewered one man completely, ramming the spear through him and into the ground, then vaulting high over him. The force of his jump tore his weapon free, and he landed with a powerful burst of Ki, sending more men flying.

    He refused to pause, even for a second, even as the occasional enemy broke through his guard and wounded him. In just the first thirty seconds, he bore three long gouges on his arms, but he refused to stop. He was a whirl of silver steel and white energy. He struck high, he struck low. He thrust and cut, discarding any balance or defense for sheer power. He was at a disadvantage with the close-quarters, but it was his only chance to push the enemies back before they could cement their foothold.

    Above the battling enemies, the skies darkened, and the clouds broke apart with a clap of thunder. Rain began cascading down on them all, dousing fires and drenching the men. They continued to fight, seemingly ignorant of the veritable flood of water falling on them. Flashes of light still burst between the forces, as the men sought desperately towards their separate goals. The Mitene Union strived to widen the hole they¡¯d made, while the Gorteauans moved with the Captain of Issho-Ni, crushing the invaders on both sides, in an attempt to repel them.

    The brightest source of light by far was the Captain, his white robes and weapon shining even through the dim light of the rainstorm. He was a whirling white cloud of movement, almost too fast for others to perceive him. His robes were drenched by blood as well as rain now, both his own and that of his enemies. He had no way of knowing it, but he¡¯d already cleared the gap himself, pushing the enemy back as he continued to cut them down. The Gorteauan force, now reformed and reinvigorated, let out a roar of approval and stomped after him.

    With formation and courage back, they slammed into the Mitene Union, trying their best to keep up with the man who saved him. Their swords and pikes lashed out, taking a heavy toll. Lightning cracked down near Tobi, killing half a dozen men. Then another strike two meters to the left, killing a mage who had just aimed at the Captain with a spell. The men looked about for the source, but could not see any mage responsible. They thought of the Archmage of the College, knowing that he was capable of such great power. But there was no sign of him, as he was unconscious, kilometers away.

    Another bolt of lightning struck, and this time they could see that it came from the sky. Those who weren¡¯t killed by it let out yells of terror, retreating. It was as if the heavens had opened themselves to lend Tobi their power. Lightning struck again and again, smiting down the worst of Tobi¡¯s enemies. Only Tobi himself knew the cause. He could feel his father in the air around him. It gave him pause for just a moment, then he resumed his attack with renewed vigor. He could feel it. His father was coming. Or perhaps he was going to his father. Either way, he knew he was on the right path.

    Another fork of lightning struck the earth. This time, both armies saw the flash of an outline in the clouds above them. It was gone as fast as the lightning itself, but they would have sworn to witness a wolf¡¯s head imprinted there, shining down from the heavens. It was the crest of the Tokugawa clan, of course. It was the heralding cry of Shigeru¡¯s might, the visage of the monstrous wolf that protected the family and lent them its power.

    Tobi continued his onslaught, now bearing twice as many injuries, each more severe than the last. He could feel himself growing weaker with the loss of blood, but still, he did not falter. The light of his Ki was flickering, and, thinking that he was beginning the fall, the Mitene Union pushed back. They might have succeeded in taking him then and there if it weren¡¯t for the bombard of spells that rained down upon them. The spells killed over three dozen in the first seconds, and those who didn¡¯t fall to the magic were struck down by weapons.

    ¡°Issho-Ni!¡±

    A new storm of steel rained down upon the enemies as, swinging ferociously, a new squadron of some fifteen figures had broken through to their Captain¡¯s position. They surrounded Tobi protectively, their weapons lashing out and cutting down any of their enemies foolish enough to continue attacking. Each man and woman wore the white robes of an Issho-Ni master, and their bodies were alight with ki and mana, fueled on by their Captain and their god. They struck with righteous fury, driving their enemies away from the man who had led them so faithfully the past half-decade.

    Finally, the attack on their position eased, and they began to retreat, dragging their Captain with them. His body had gone limp, and his face, just barely distinguishable under a coating of blood, was pale. At once, two of the party broke away from the wall to tend to him. A gentle green light shined upon the red of blood, and some life seemed to stir within his glazed eyes. He struggled feebly against the grip of his comrades. He had to return. His father was watching, waiting. He could not disappoint him.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.

    ¡°My father!¡± He cried out feverishly, his eyes fixed on the heavens above. The healers paid his words no mind, hushing him, bidding him to rest. But still, he struggled, lifting one weakened arm to point skyward. ¡°My father!¡±

    Hesitantly, they looked up. They were just in time to see the golden light pierce through the clouds. It wasn¡¯t another lightning bolt, they saw. It was¡­ denser. It burned brightly through the darkness, descending from the very sky, bathing their faces in a blinding light. A pillar broke away, shooting straight for the ground, and they turned away. Only a few turned their faces to follow its progress. Where it struck was deep in the heart of the Mitene Union¡¯s army, and when it faded, they could see nothing. But it was only a second before they heard the screams, and it became clear.

    Just visible over the heads of the invading army, a white shape moved in a blur. Men were sent flying in all directions, and then the beast leaped into the air, to come crashing down and killing yet more men. It was a giant wolf, easily eight feet at the shoulder and nearly twelve feet long. Its eyes, a bright violet, flashed brightly amidst the battle as it cut through men like paper. And there, moving at its side, almost dancing in tandem with it, was¡­

    ¡°Issho-Ni!¡±

    Now the cry came from a single voice, though it was not long in its solitude. A dozen voices rose to echo it. ¡°Issho-Ni!¡± Then a dozen more. ¡°Issho-Ni!¡± Then the men of the army took up the cry, lending hundreds of voices to the acclamation ¡°Issho-Ni!¡± The men were wild with hope and inspiration, having finally recognized the man who had appeared in their time of need. Shigeru Tokugawa, God of War, struck out at the enemies of his son¡¯s home, beating them back, killing them. Those that escaped his wrath weren¡¯t the lucky ones, as they met the fangs and claws of the wolf.

    Now outnumbered, decimated, and defeated, the invaders lost their will to fight. All along the lines, the men threw down their weapons and screamed for mercy. Shigeru and the wolf stopped their rampage at once, standing alone in the middle of a field of fallen men. Longfang stood behind him, its jaw and chest coated with blood, eyes surveying the enemies around it with undeniable hostility. After a shocked minute of silence, the Gorteauans let out a ragged cheer. The fighting was over.

    -Aren Gorteau-

    ¡°Your Majesty!¡±

    The shout roused Aren from his deep thoughts as he watched the last few seconds of the battle. He turned to see just what all the commotion was. There were perhaps half a dozen people gathered around the entrance of the command tent, he noticed. Doubtless there to offer his elder brother their congratulations on defeating the wave of invaders who had nearly claimed victory. Johnathan hadn¡¯t done anything, of course, but this was the way of things. The King claimed the highest honors of all and rewarded whoever he saw fit, according to his royal privilege.

    It was the way their father had ruled, he remembered, back before he¡¯d died of an illness. He had been taught that way by his father, who had been taught by his father, and so on. Right back to the very beginning of their royal line, when the first of their people settled Milagre. Of course, Aren knew the truth of the matter. They¡¯d found Milagre to be an accidental sanctuary in the Era of Chaos, in those days when chaotic and corrupted beasts roamed the world freely. They had found the city by accident, and its walls housed the first mortal Kingdom and the first Royal Line.

    ¡°Your Majesty!¡±

    Aren frowned. The voices of those gathered around the King¡¯s tent weren¡¯t voices of joy, he realized. They sounded panicked and fearful. What could give them the reason to speak in such a way around his brother? Maybe there were some in their numbers who despised the King for his lack of action. If that were the case, his brother could use someone for a little support. Johnathan wasn¡¯t known for his quick thinking. With a quick burst of air, Aren flew up the face of the hill, landing gracefully at the back of the crowd.

    ¡°Clear the way!¡± He barked, his sharp voice making the men in front of him jump. ¡°Give the King a little respect!¡±

    They were all too quick to obey him, scurrying to the sides and letting him pass. He could see inside the tent properly now, to where his brother sat. General Rainhall was with him, his voice raised. That belligerent fool, Aren thought angrily. He was too full of himself, to think he could shout in the face of his King. He strolled forward angrily, his mouth opening to deliver a rebuke. But before he could speak a word, Rainhall turned and saw him. Aren was surprised to see his face pale, with a look of horror fixed upon his face.

    ¡°Your Grace!¡± he cried, falling to his knees. ¡°I found him like this! I know not what has happened to him!¡±

    ¡°What?¡± Aren looked between Rainhall and his brother, who was staring directly ahead. There was a look of faint surprise frozen on his face as if he hadn¡¯t expected to see his younger brother returning so quickly. ¡°Johnathan, what is wrong with you?¡±

    The King did not respond. Aren¡¯s eyebrows formed together in a line of disapproval. ¡°Brother, talk to-¡±

    His voice faded in an instant, as he fully comprehended the scene. His brother wasn¡¯t responding because he couldn¡¯t or didn¡¯t want to. With two quick steps, he was at the man¡¯s side, hands quickly exploring the King¡¯s body, looking for what he feared. He found it at once. A small dart, sharp enough to puncture light armor, sticking out of the back of his brother''s thick jacket. When he pulled it out, it smelled sharply of poison

    ¡°The King!¡± Someone from outside the tent gasped. Then he shouted. ¡°The King is dead!¡±

    The words were echoed by the others at the tent¡¯s entrance. They shouted it to those behind them, and the message passed along the army like wildfire. There was no response from the army but shocked silence, of course. They had been savoring the knowledge that the battle had been won. It was a narrow victory, to be, but they had won. Now, to learn that their monarch was dead, they were struck by a sudden frisson of fear. There could only be one culprit, they all knew.

    -Samuel-

    The bed was warm, its thick covers wrapped protectively around him. There was a light breeze on his face, which was what had probably woken him. He stirred slightly, wondering what had happened. He vaguely recalled the sight of Grimr crouched over him, holding his knife. He couldn¡¯t remember the pain of the weapon. Maybe Grimr had succeeded in draining the corruption from his system. Or maybe not, he thought. Maybe he was dead.

    His eyes opened to reveal a simple grey ceiling. His bed, tucked into the corner of the room, was low to the ground. Was he in a nearby tavern? He¡¯d been miles from any nearby city, he thought. Perhaps he¡¯d been unconscious for weeks. But then, as his sense of reason caught up with his eyes, he realized that he recognized the room. It took him a minute, or several, to place it, but he recognized the room that he¡¯d grown up in. So he was back home then. That could only mean a meeting with the other parts of him.

    With a sigh, he kicked the covers free of his body and swung his legs over the side of the bed. They were just long enough to allow his feet to touch the cold boards of the floor. Looking at himself, he was wearing a simple dark blue nightgown. The same he wore when sleeping as a child. And he was such a child. Not his older, more powerful body, but made of flesh. Mortal. An odd way to begin the vision, he thought. He pushed off his bed and hurried across the room to the doors.

    His mother was in the kitchen when he exited the short hallway. She had her back to him, humming some forgotten song as she made breakfast. The smell of bacon filled the air. He wondered how he hadn¡¯t noticed the scent before, as his stomach grumbled. His mother, who could cook better than almost anyone else he knew. She turned as she heard him pulling a chair back at the table, and smiled at him.

    ¡°Good morning, my sweet child,¡± She spoke as if it were real as if he¡¯d gone back to his childhood and not just visited for some kind of vision or guidance. ¡°You had a tough day. I hope you rested enough.¡±

    Rest, Samuel thought. Often used as a metaphor for death. ¡°Did I die then? Is this the afterlife that Isip promised me?¡±

    Her smile widened. She set the plate of food before him and reached out to stroke his messy hair free from his forehead. ¡°No, child. You did not die. You are weak, but you will continue to live. Your time has not yet come.¡±

 Chapter 41

    ¡°Careful now! Up a little higher!¡±

    The Temple District of Milagre was even busier than usual on Temple Day. There were the usual crowds of people gathered here, moving throughout the streets on the way to and from their respective temples. There were those high followers, priests, and High Priests calling out to the crowd, offering advice, summons, and blessings. As it was the first Temple Day since the war had been declared over and the King reported dead, there were many offerings to be made, many prayers of thanks to be given.

    But to add to the chaos, a new temple was being created. The centerpiece, a large stone statue that served as an altar, had already been transported to the site and placed atop a magnificently carved wooden dais. The statue depicted a man wearing long tattered robes, raising a scythe high. At his feet was the skull of a dragon, to celebrate his crowning achievement. It was a statue, of course, to Bora Bora Ciayol, newly ascended God of Dragons.

    There were already a fair few followers to support the god¡¯s cause, picked from the survivors of Bahamut¡¯s followers. As their Champion in life, Bora Bora had commanded their respect, and they were all too willing to worship him as they had once worshiped the platinum dragon. Then there was the trickle of new followers, mainly the soldiers who had seen him in action. They had witnessed him killing Mathadiel and Tiamat and remembered the awe and terror of his ascension.

    The construction had no shortage of volunteers, and so was nearly complete, only a week after the war¡¯s end. The army had flocked back to the capital with exultation, carrying the first stories and songs of the new god¡¯s prowess. They had offered their services to his High Priest, and work was started. Now all that remained was the roof, which was in itself to be a memorial of the old dragon. A smaller statue was set aside, ready to mount. For now, it was the support beam.

    ¡°You did good work on that.¡±

    Samuel, who stood across the street surveying the construction efforts, looked around. He saw his friend Tobi and smiled faintly. The warrior was in a pitiable state, hobbling along on crutches and with many thick bandages over the body. He¡¯d been too weak after his headlong rush into the Mitene Union¡¯s ranks, so healing spells were considered too dangerous. Tobi had chosen to allow time to heal his wounds, or to put it in his terms, the natural way. He returned Samuel¡¯s smile, only the faintest sign of pain showing on his face.

    ¡°Thanks,¡± Samuel said. They stood in companionable silence for several minutes, staring at the beam. Even in the bright sunlight of midday, the shimmer of magic was visible on the beam of the building. In fact, it was present in the entire structure. Samuel had been a part of the entire construction process, laying powerful enchantments on the building from the ground up. ¡°I wanted to make sure it couldn¡¯t be torn down again.¡±

    ¡°An admirable sentiment,¡± Tobi observed. He shifted his weight a bit awkwardly, drawing in a sharp breath as pain racked his body. ¡°A mark of respect as well, I presume?¡±

    Samuel nodded in confirmation. ¡°Not every day a mortal man kills two elder monsters in a single day. Without him, the army might have perished that day.¡±

    ¡°There are still many lost.¡±

    ¡°Yes.¡± Samuel let out a long sigh. ¡°But it¡¯s over, and now we can rebuild.¡±

    He turned his head slightly to survey Tobi out of the corner of his eyes. The man, he couldn¡¯t think of him as a youth anymore, seemed to have a heavy burden lifted off his shoulders. Despite the crutches, he stood a little straighter. Samuel knew why, of course. With the return of his father, he had more support. In addition, his efforts in the battle had earned both himself and Issho-Ni a considerable amount of prestige. They were given more authority after the fight, and their reach had expanded.

    ¡°Where is Shigeru now?¡± Samuel asked as the question occurred to him. ¡°I¡¯m guessing he¡¯s with your men now, whipping them into shape?¡±

    Tobi let out a laugh at that, and only slightly seemed to regret it. ¡°Not much left to do on that front, I¡¯m afraid. But he¡¯s acting Captain while my injuries heal.¡±

    ¡°Not much left to do?¡± Samuel asked, his eyebrows raised. ¡°Where did all that confidence come from?¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s always been there. You just haven¡¯t looked properly.¡±

    Samuel let out a snort of laughter and turned to face the temple once more. After a few more minutes of silence, he spoke again. ¡°The ritual for Jakob is done?¡±

    The brief shadow of pain and grief crossed over his friends, though Samuel didn¡¯t see it. ¡°Yes. Aki and Noda¡¯s families are on their way as well. I hope I can offer them some peace.¡±

    ¡°You already have,¡± Samuel assured him. ¡°You and your father took them in, and you trained them for a noble purpose. They died with honor, and won¡¯t be forgotten.¡±

    ¡°Not if I have anything to say about it,¡± Tobi growled. ¡°They were excellent fighters.¡±

    ¡°Yet another thing you can be proud of.¡±

    More silence followed. The large beam had been settled properly now, and men were already swarming up the face of the building, laying down the stone tiles that would offer some protection. These shingles also shimmered faintly in the direct sunlight, each piece bearing a single rune of Samuel¡¯s creation. Nobody but an Ancient could harm that building now, Samuel thought. He couldn¡¯t help but feel a bit of pride in his work, considering how much effort he¡¯d put into the building. The temple would be finished by day¡¯s end, he realized. It was customary for the followers of other gods to offer their help, and this made the work smoother.

    ¡°How is His Majesty handling his new job?¡± Tobi asked. ¡°I imagine he¡¯s drowning in paperwork.¡±

    ¡°Paperwork and well wishes for his reign,¡± Samuel replied with a laugh. Aren Gorteau had already confessed his quickly draining patience to Samuel on several occasions. Samuel felt for him, knowing how the man preferred his tomes and studies to making royal decisions and decrees. ¡°But he¡¯s our only option, at least until his son comes of age.¡±

    ¡°True,¡± Tobi agreed. He took a deep breath, then let it out in his long sigh. ¡°What of the Prime Magus duties? Surely he cannot do both jobs.¡±

    ¡°Ah,¡± Samuel said. Suddenly, his voice was quiet, as if he didn¡¯t want to discuss this subject. ¡°Well, he certainly tried to. But with the final examinations coming, he doesn¡¯t have the time.¡±

    ¡°You¡¯re doing that now, I assume.¡±

    It was a reasonable assumption, and Samuel nodded confirmation without speaking on it. Strictly speaking, the post was traditionally held by a member of the Royal Family, or else a sufficiently skilled mage that reported directly to them. Aren had been quick to abolish this tradition, however. He¡¯d said that he trusted nobody else with the responsibility, right before handing it off. Samuel rather thought Aren had been waiting for an excuse to appoint him to the position, and accepted with a weary sort of resignation.

    ¡°It¡¯s strange,¡± he reflected aloud. ¡°On the one hand, I feel as if I¡¯ve lived a thousand years already, and on the other, it feels like mere months ago Arcana spoke to me in a dream, telling me to come and find him.¡±

    ¡°It¡¯s been a short time for you,¡± Tobi interjected. ¡°But to the rest of us, you¡¯re an old man already.¡±

    That made them both burst out laughing, and it was a few minutes before they could recover themselves enough to continue. Wiping his eyes with one hand, Samuel shook his head ruefully. ¡°My dream was always to wander the world in search of mysteries and legends. I¡¯d write a book of my travels, and pass away at a ripe old age, a successful author.¡±Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

    ¡°Well, you¡¯ve definitely achieved that. How else will you spend the rest of your years, I wonder?¡±

    A wry grin touched Samuel¡¯s face at the thought.¡±I¡¯m far from done. There are still many mysteries for me to explore in the world. After I sort out the final examinations, I¡¯m setting off again. This time I¡¯ll head for Knireth.¡±

    ¡°Knireth?¡± Tobi asked, shock showing plainly on his face. ¡°What on earth could you find there?¡±

    ¡°That¡¯s just the point,¡± Samuel said with a slight shrug. ¡°I don¡¯t know. There could be any number of interesting mysteries to occupy my time there.¡±

    ¡°Well, I imagine you¡¯ll enjoy that,¡± Tobi said after a pause. He sighed again. ¡°I¡¯m not sure how I feel about these times, Samuel.¡±

    ¡°Well, Aren is strong,¡± Samuel said. ¡°He¡¯s got a level head on his shoulder. Much less prone to exploding than his older brother.¡±

    Tobi opened his mouth to comment further, but a commotion behind them made him stop. Both turned, seeing what the raised voices could be. The crowd was hurriedly moving to the sides, letting two figures pass without trouble. It was a man and a woman, both powerfully built. They wore heavy armor and had the look of toughness about them. Their skin was slightly greyed, though not to the degree of unhealthy, and had an almost¡­ scale-like appearance. They were quite young, Samuel noticed, though they carried themselves with a quiet sort of confidence. He got the sense at once that these two strangers would grow to be quite extraordinary.

    The sister, who looked to be a tad older, perhaps nearing her twentieth year, stopped just in front of Samuel and Tobi. She clamped one fist to her chest in salute and nodded her head in welcome. ¡°It is an honor to meet you, Lord Bragg. And you as well, Master Tokugawa.¡±

    Samuel of course was used to people knowing who he was, but he didn¡¯t recognize the pair. Still, manners were manners. He returned the young woman¡¯s greeting. ¡°The pleasure is mine. Pardon my brusqueness, but who are you?¡±

    ¡°My name is Piana Ciayol,¡± The woman said. The family name registered as a shock through the watching crowd. Just today, it was a famous name. She waved a lazy hand to indicate her companion. ¡°This is my younger brother, Atlas.¡±

    ¡°Are you related to the late lord Ciayol?¡± Tobi asked, his eyes narrowed. ¡°A cousin, perhaps? I was not aware that he¡¯d sired any children.¡±

    ¡°We are his only children,¡± Piana said solemnly. ¡°We have come to take command of his living followers, to ensure his legacy.¡±

    ¡°Who is your mother?¡± Samuel asked. He kept his voice cool and friendly, but he felt a spark of tension in the air. The followers around them, those who had been in the service of Bahamut, were visibly troubled by her claim.

    ¡°The Ancient dragon Khanmara,¡± Piana said smoothly. ¡°Shortly before the Tyrant Queen laid waste to Bahamut¡¯s temple, our father lay with her, and we are born of that union.¡±

    ¡°You seem quite, err, older than one would expect,¡± Samuel replied, one eyebrow raised. ¡°You¡¯d be barely a week or two old.¡±

    ¡°That is true,¡± Atlas said, speaking for the first time. His voice had a slight sibilance to it. It wasn¡¯t as pronounced as Bora Bora¡¯s had been, but it was a marked similarity. ¡°Perhaps there is something we can do to prove our claim.¡±

    Samuel hesitated, glancing around him to the angry faces of Bora Bora¡¯s current followers. These strange siblings, while they may have the look of Bora Bora about them, were making a very adamant claim. Their faces were stubborn as they stared down the muttering people. Samuel knew that this situation could turn nasty quickly. If they weren¡¯t who they claimed to be, then they might be drawn into a fight that resulted in dozens of dead followers. Worse, if their claims were true, but they didn¡¯t prove true, then they could end up marking the start of Bora Bora¡¯s reign with bad blood.

    He met Atlas¡¯ eyes and nodded once. The young man rolled his shoulders back as if stretching and a pair of tattered black wings flared out from his back. They were nearly twelve feet in length and were unmistakably draconic in appearance. Half a second behind him, Piana copied his actions, exposing a slightly smaller pair of wings, though made of golden feathers and rainbow scales. Atlas¡¯ wings were clearly identical to those that Bora Bora had earned towards the end of his life.

    ¡°Khanmara,¡± Samuel said softly. The name was faintly familiar to him, though he couldn¡¯t be sure where he¡¯d heard it. ¡°It has a ring of familiarity to it.¡±

    ¡°You met her in the fight against Mathadiel, Lord Bragg,¡± Piana said. ¡°She rushed to defend our father.¡±

    ¡°Of course,¡± Samuel thought. He remembered the dragon clearly, and looking at Piana¡¯s wings once more, he realized that they were identical. ¡°I imagine your mother is quite proud of how you turned out.¡±

    ¡°But how have you grown so fast?¡± Tobi asked. ¡°And what is this power I sense coming off of you? It feels like Divine Magic, but also something that I¡¯ve never encountered.¡±

    ¡°We do not know this answer, Master Tokguawa,¡± Atlas replied. ¡°We only know that we are born of the union between a Divine and the oldest of the dragons.¡±

    ¡°Well, the evidence is certainly overwhelming,¡± Samuel said. He glanced around to see that the other followers of the various temples looked faintly surprised. They turned to him as he moved as if waiting for him to make the final decision. ¡°I believe their claim is legitimate.¡±

    The short war was over now, Grimr thought. Settling himself down in the hollow that was his home, he let out a long sigh. That fight to save Samuel and draw out the corruption that was consuming him was possibly the most exhausting task he¡¯d ever taken on. He offered a silent prayer of thanks to the Mother for bringing the young Ancient into the world. Little Isip might have created every part of him, but it was through the Mother¡¯s grace that this was made possible.

    You know you cannot survive this much corruption.

    I know, he thought, wishing the voice inside would silence itself. It had the voice of Neratas, his late older brother, but he knew it was Corruption speaking. His body and soul were nearly half corruption now, a level that no other Ancient had survived. Neratas and even Menikos had succumbed to the corruption. Grimr caught himself wondering how Samuel could have survived his ordeal since he now carried nearly as much Chaos as he did Corruption. The ancient enemies of Ahya may be a distant memory, but the smallest of their seeds could grow to destroy his home if left unchecked.

    ¡°Are you unwell, Lord Grimr?¡±

    A face appeared, blocking the stream of sunlight that had shined, uninterrupted, down onto his face. Here in the Elder¡¯s Grove, it was the only place to catch a hint of sun. Everywhere else in the depths of the forest was dark, faint light coming from magical lights that floated freely. Grimr glanced up, noting the tanned face and shining green eyes.

    ¡°I¡¯m just a little tired, Arwinn,¡± he said. ¡°It has been a very long day.¡±

    ¡°Several days, my lord,¡± Arwinn corrected him. The once corrupted Druid had been healed when Grimr defeated his older brother. Instead of killing him, Grimr had granted him a second chance at life. After a century, even his pale skin had receded, leaving the naturally dark skin of those elves who lived under the sun. He wondered idly how the man had known that he was unwell. As if sensing the silent question, Arwinn smiled.

    ¡°You look the same,¡± he said. When Grimr arched one eyebrow, wanting him to elaborate, he obliged. ¡°When the Corruption began to take him, my lord. He was exhausted, and his skin began to pale. You have the same marks, as well.¡±

    Grimr glanced down at his arm. Sure enough, his veins were blackened, a clear sign that the Corruption was spreading through his body. He¡¯d taken so much from Samuel that he couldn¡¯t hold it back on his own anymore. He let out a sound that was half sigh, half growl, and pushed to his feet. Arwinn moved back to give him a respectable amount of space, only offering a bow before turning to leave. Grimr¡¯s voice stopped him a few feet away, however.

    ¡°Arwinn Feine,¡± he said, his voice clear. ¡°I appoint you as Guardian of the Wilds until my return.¡±

    Arwinn didn¡¯t seem the least bit surprised. He offered another bow, deeper this time. ¡°It shall be my honor to tend to your home while you are away, my lord.¡±

    With that, he was gone, and Grimr went to work. The mortals may have invented Divine magic themselves, but he¡¯d studied it for centuries and knew its workings well. With one simple gesture, he created the outer ring of the enchantment. A few spoken words and the inner rings of runes appeared around him. Taking on Divinity was a bore, he thought, as it came with all sorts of rules and restrictions. You were forbidden to meddle in mortal affairs, or your enchantment would fade. You could only reach out to those who pledged themselves to you, and through them, you could act. But the tradeoff was worth it, as Divine Magic stopped the Corruption in his body, beginning the slow process of reversing the damage.

    His mind returned to Samuel Bragg as the Divine Enchantment took effect. He could feel it beginning to crush the Corruption in his body and let out a quiet sigh of relief. The boy. The man, he corrected himself, had a lot to learn. But it was trivial, as his strength was undeniable. Grimr remembered the sense of destiny he¡¯d seen about the boy when they¡¯d first met, in that tiny village on the coast. After helping his companion fight the hardest fight of his life, and preparing for his own, he hadn¡¯t expected to meet such an interesting person as Samuel Bragg. He recalled the joy and excitement Samuel had displayed when presented with new information. He recalled his pride in his work and the pride in his ultimate dream.

    ¡°What was that thing he always said?¡± Grimr muttered to himself, chuckling quietly as he imagined the inexperienced mage that was overshadowed by who Samuel was now. ¡°Ah, yes. Every great story needs an author.¡±